public safety facility · d. testing agency qualifications: an independent testing agency,...

PROJECT MANUAL

Facility Construction – Volume II

PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY

New Castle, Lawrence County, Pennsylvania Eckles Project No. 14005.000

LAWRENCE COUNTY DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC SAFETY

NEW CASTLE, PA

General Construction (GC) Contract 14005.000-01 Plumbing/Fire Suppression Construction (PC) Contract 14005.000-02 HVAC Construction (HC) Contract 14005.000-03 Electrical Construction (EC) Contract 14005.000-04

11 September 2014

LAWRENCE COUNTY TABLE OF CONTENTS PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY TOC - 1 ©2014 Eckles Architecture and Engineering, Inc.

PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY LAWRENCE COUNTY, PENNSYLVANIA

EAE PROJECT No. 14005.000

TABLE OF CONTENTS

VOLUME 1 – General Requirements

BIDDING REQUIREMENTS Document 00 1113 ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS

00 2113 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS ‐ AIA Document A701, 1997 Electronic Edition

00 3100 AVAILABLE PROJECT INFORMATION

00 4116 BID FORMS .01 General Construction .02 Plumbing Construction .03 HVAC Construction .04 Electrical Construction

00 4300 SUPPLEMENTAL FORMS AND DOCUMENTS Bid Security Form (AIA Document A310, 1970) Pre-Bid Request for Information EAE Pre-Bid Substitution Request Prevailing Wages Project Rates 14-05076 Personal Information Needed for Clearances Pennsylvania Child Abuse History Clearance and Directions Pennsylvania State Police Request for Criminal Record Check Arrest/Conviction Report and Certification Form and Instructions

00 4500 – REPRESENTATIONS AND CERTIFICATIONS AIA Document A305-1986 Contractor’s Qualifications Statement (sample)

00 4519 NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT

CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS Document 00 5216 AGREEMENT FORM

AIA Document A132, 2009 00 6100 BOND FORMS

AIA Document A312, December 1984 00 6113 PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND FORMS

00 6200 CERTIFICATES AND OTHER FORMS Acord 25-S (sample) Sales Tax Statement and Certification Eckles Authorization, Release and CADPack Order Form

00 7216 CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT AIA Document A232-2009 Electronic Edition

DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS- SECTION 01 1000 SUMMARY OF WORK 01 1200 MULTIPLE CONTRACT SUMMARY 01 2200 UNIT PRICES 01 2300 ALTERNATES 01 2600 MODIFICATION AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES

TABLE OF CONTENTS LAWRENCE COUNTY TOC - 2 PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY

01 3100 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 3200 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 3300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 4000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 4200 REFERENCES 01 5000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 6000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 7300 EXECUTION 01 7700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 7823 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 7839 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 7900 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

VOLUME 2 – Facility Construction

DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE SECTION 03 3000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

DIVISION 04 – MASONRY SECTION 04 2000 UNIT MASONRY

DIVISION 05 – METALS SECTION 05 1200 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

05 2100 STEEL JOIST FRAMING 05 3100 STEEL DECKING 05 4000 STRUCTURAL COLD-ROLLED METAL FRAMING 05 5000 METAL FABRICATIONS 05 5100 METAL STAIRS 05 5213 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS

DIVISION 06 – WOOD AND PLASTICS SECTION 06 1053 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY

06 4000 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK/ FINISH CARPENTRY

DIVISION 07 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION SECTION 07 1300 SHEET WATERPROOFING 07 2100 THERMAL INSULATION

07 2726 AIR BARRIERS 07 4113 METAL ROOFING 07 4214 FORMED METAL WALL PANELS 07 4641 FIBER CEMEMT SIDING 07 7125 METAL ROOF-EDGE SPECIALTIES 07 8413 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 07 9200 JOINT SEALANTS

LAWRENCE COUNTY TABLE OF CONTENTS PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY TOC - 3

DIVISION 08 – OPENINGS SECTION 08 1113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

08 1416 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 3113 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 08 3323 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08 4113 ALUMINUM FRAMED ENTRANCES 08 7100 DOOR HARDWARE 08 8000 GLAZING 08 8300 MIRRORS

DIVISION 09 – FINISHES SECTION 09 2116 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

09 3000 TILING 09 5113 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09 6513 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09 6516 LINOLEUM 09 6800 CARPETING 09 6900 ACCESS FLOORING IN STATIC DISSIPATIVE CARPETED AREAS 09 6901 ACCESS FLOORING IN STATIC DISSIPATIVE LAMINATE AREAS .......... 09 7215 WALL COVERINGS 09 7523 STONE STOOL 09 8400 ACOUSTIC ROOM COMPONENTS 09 9100 PAINTING

DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES SECTION 10 1100 VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES

10 1400 SIGNAGE 10 2113 TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10 2600 IMPACT-RESISTANT WALL PROTECTION 10 2813 TOILET ACCESSORIES 10 4400 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10 5113 LOCKERS 10 7500 FLAGPOLES

DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT SECTION 11 3112 APPLIANCES

DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS SECTION 12 2413 HORIZONTAL MANUAL & MOTORIZED ROLLER SHADES 12 3200 MANUFACTURED WOOD CASEWORK

DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION SECTION 13 1250 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS

DIVISION 14 – CONVEYING EQUIPMENT none


VOLUME 3 – Facility Services

HVAC / PLUMBING / ELECTRICAL

DIVISION 20 – GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS SECTION 20 0000 GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS

PART 1 GENERAL PART II PRODUCTS PART III EXECUTION

DIVISION 21 – FIRE PROTECTION SECTION 21 0000 FIRE PROTECTION GENERAL PROVISIONS

21 1000 FIRE PROTECTION EXTERIOR WORK 21 2000 FIRE PROTECTION INTERIOR PIPING 21 3000 FIRE PROTECTION EQUIPMENT 21 4000 FIRE PROTECTION BIDS

DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING SECTION 22 0000 PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS

22 2000 PLUMBING INTERIOR SYSTEMS 22 3000 PLUMBING INSULATION 22 4000 PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 5000 PLUMBING SYSTEM EQUIPMENT 22 7000 PLUMBING BIDS

DIVISION 23 – HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SECTION 23 0000 GENERAL PROVISIONS 23 1000 HVAC PIPING AND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS 23 2000 AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM AND APPURTENANCES

23 3000 CENTRAL EQUIPMENT 23 4000 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT 23 5000 INSULATION 23 6000 CONTROLS 23 7000 TESTING AND BALANCING 23 8000 MISCELLANEOUS 23 9000 BIDS

DIVISION 24 – COMMISSIONING SECTION 24 0000 MECHANICAL COMMISSIONING

DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL SECTION 26 0100 BASIC REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK 26 0510 EQUIPMENT WIRING SYSTEMS

26 0519 WIRE AND CABLE 26 0526 GROUNDING 26 0529 SUPPORTING DEVICES 26 0533 CONDUIT 26 0534 SURFACE RACEWAYS

LAWRENCE COUNTY TABLE OF CONTENTS PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY TOC - 5

26 0535 BOXES 26 0536 CABLE TRAYS FOR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS 26 0553 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 26 0570 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDIANATION STUDY 26 0924 OCCUPANCY SENSORS 26 2200 DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS 26 2416 PANELBOARDS 26 2726 WIRING DEVICES 26 2800 DISCONNECT SWITCHES 26 3213 PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR SYSTEMS 26 3353 STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY 26 4113 LIGHTNING PROTECTION FOR STRUCTURES 26 4313 TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION 26 5100 LIGHTING FIXTURES 26 6000 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 26 9999 ELECTRICAL ALTERNATE BIDS

DIVISION 27 – TECHNOLOGY SECTION 27 0500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS 27 0523 CONTROL VOLTAGE COMMUNICATION CABLING 27 0526 GROUNDING 27 0529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS

27 0534 BOXES AND FITTINGS 27 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS 27 0800 COMMISSIONING OF COMMUNICATIONS 27 1100 COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS AND GROUNDING 27 1300 COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING 27 1500 COPPER CABLING SYSTEMS 27 1510 STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEM COMPONENTS

VOLUME 4 – Site and Infrastructure

DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK SECTION 31 1100 CLEARING AND GRUBBING 31 2000 EARTH MOVING 31 2319 DEWATERING 31 2500 EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL 31 3219 GEOSYNTHETIC SOIL STABILIZATION AND LAYER SEPARATION 31 4000 SHORING

DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

SECTION 32 0523 CEMENT AND CONCRETE FOR EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 32 1216 ASPHALT PAVEMENT 32 1220 AGGREGATE PAVING

32 3101 FENCES, GATES AND SECURITY ENTRANCE 32 3113 HIGH SECURITY CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES


32 9000 PLANTING

DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES SECTION 33 4000 STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES 33 4100 SANITARY SEWER AND WATERLINE UTILITIES

END OF DOCUMENT

LAWRENCE COUNTY CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 03 3000 - 1 © 2014 Eckles Architecture and Engineering

SECTION 03 3000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies building cast-in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement,

concrete materials, mix design, placement procedures, and finishes for the following. 1. Footings 2. Slabs-on-grade 3. Slabs-on-deck

B. Related Sections of work specified elsewhere include the following:

1. Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for drainage fill under slabs-on-grade. 2. Division 31 Section "Cement and Concrete for Exterior Improvements" for concrete

pavement and walks. 3. Division 7 Section “Thermal Insulation” for insulation under slabs on grade.

C. Coordination: Unless other satisfactory agreements are specifically entered into by contractors concerned, all miscellaneous iron and steel, sleeves, anchors, etc., required by work of other contractors, will be furnished and installed by such other contractors with the cooperation of this contractor.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of blended

hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated blast-furnace slag, and silica fume.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of manufactured material and product indicated. B. Design Mixes: For each concrete mix. Include alternate mix designs when characteristics of

materials, project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments. 1. Indicate amounts of mix water to be withheld for later addition at Project site.

C. Laboratory test reports for concrete mix design with the following data: 1. Method used to determine the proposed mix design (per ACI 301, Article 4.2.3).

2. Gradation and quantity of fine and coarse aggregates. 3. Proportions of all ingredients including all admixtures added either at the time of batch-

ing or at the job site. 4. Water/cement ratio and water/cementitious ratio. 5. Slump - ASTM C143.

6. Certification and test results of the total water-soluble chloride ion content of the design

mix - FHWA RD-77 or AASHTO T 260-84.

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE LAWRENCE COUNTY 03 3000 - 2 PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY

7. Air content of freshly mixed concrete by the pressure method, ASTM C231, or the volu-metric method, ASTM C173.

8. Unit weight of concrete - ASTM C138. 9. Strength at 7 and 28 days - ASTM C39, and 3-day strength for post-tensioned concrete.

Document strength on basis of previous field experience or trial mixtures per ACI 301 Article 4.2.3. Submit strength test records, mix design materials, conditions, and propor-tions for concrete used for record of tests, standard calculation, and determination of re-quired average compressive strength.

D. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Details of fabrication, bending, and placement, prepared

according to ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement." Include material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing, and supports of concrete reinforcement. Include special reinforcement required for openings through concrete structures.

E. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel. F. Material Test Reports or Certificates: Submit material test reports from a qualified testing

agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance of the following with requirements indicated, based on comprehensive testing of current materials, or submit material certificates signed by manufacturers certifying that each of the following items complies with requirements: 1. Aggregates. 2. Cementitious materials and aggregates. 3. Form materials and form-release agents. 4. Steel reinforcement and reinforcement accessories. 5. Admixtures. 6. Waterstops. 7. Curing materials. 8. Floor and slab treatments. 9. Bonding agents. 10. Adhesives. 11. Vapor retarders. 12. Epoxy joint filler. 13. Joint-filler strips. 14. Repair materials.

H. Minutes of preinstallation conference.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed concrete Work similar in

material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to

practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for formwork and shoring and reshoring installations that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.

LAWRENCE COUNTY CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 03 3000 - 3

C. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products complying with ASTM C 94 requirements for production facilities and equipment. 1. Manufacturer must be certified according to the National Ready Mixed Concrete

Association's Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities.

D. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. 1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing

Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-1 or an equivalent certification program. 2. Personnel performing laboratory tests shall be ACI-certified Concrete Strength Testing

Technician and Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician – Grade I. Testing agency laboratory supervisor shall be an ACI-certified Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician – Grade II.

3. For additional definitions and requirements, refer to Quality Control – “Special Structural Testing and Inspection” section of these Specifications.

E. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from

the same manufacturer's plant, each aggregate from one source, and each admixture from a single manufacturer.

F. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.4, "Structural Welding

Code--Reinforcing Steel." G. ACI Publications: Comply with the following, unless more stringent provisions are indicated:

1. ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete" Sections 1 through 5. 2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials."

H. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures.

I. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." 1. Before submitting design mixtures, review concrete design mixture and examine

procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials. Require representatives of each entity directly concerned with cast-in-place concrete to attend, including the following: a. Contractor's superintendent. b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures. c. Ready-mix concrete manufacturer. d. Concrete subcontractor. e. Agency responsible for field quality control. f. Primary admixture manufacturers.

2. Review special structural testing and inspection and inspecting agency procedures for field quality control, concrete finishes and finishing, cold- and hot-weather concreting procedures, curing procedures, construction contraction and isolation joints, and joint-filler strips, semi-rigid joint fillers, forms and form removal limitations, shoring and reshoring procedures, vapor-retarder installation, anchor rod and anchorage device installation tolerances, steel reinforcement installation, floor and slab flatness and levelness measurement, concrete repair procedures, and concrete protection.


1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage. Avoid damaging coatings on steel reinforcement.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products

specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

manufacturers specified.

2.2 FORM-FACING MATERIALS

A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints.

1. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials.

B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.

C. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch, minimum.

D. Rustication Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, kerfed for ease of form removal.

E. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.

1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials.

F. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off metal or glass-fiber-reinforced plastic form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal.

1. Furnish units that will leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch to the plane of exposed concrete surface.

2. Furnish ties that, when removed, will leave holes no larger than 1 inch in diameter in concrete surface.

3. Furnish ties with integral water-barrier plates to walls indicated to receive dampproofing or waterproofing.


2.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed.

B. Galvanized Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed bars, Class I zinc coated after fabrication and bending.

C. Steel Bar Mats: ASTM A 184, fabricated from ASTM A 615, Grade 60 deformed bars, assembled with clips.

D. Plain-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, galvanized.

E. Deformed-Steel Wire: ASTM A 496.

F. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, plain, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets.

G. Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 497, flat sheet.

H. Galvanized-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, plain, fabricated from galvanized steel wire into flat sheets.

2.4 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES

A. Zinc Repair Material: ASTM A 780, zinc-based solder, paint containing zinc dust, or sprayed zinc.

B. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater compressive strength than concrete and as follows:

1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports.

2. For zinc-coated reinforcement, use galvanized wire or dielectric-polymer-coated wire bar supports.

3. For slabs on grade, use supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base material will not support chair legs.

2.5 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source, throughout Project:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I gray. Supplement with the following:

a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or F with no exception to 6% maximum loss on ignition.

b. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 120.


B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 4S coarse aggregate or better, graded. Provide aggregates from a single source with documented service record data of at least 10 years' satisfactory service in similar applications and service conditions using similar aggregates and cementitious materials.

1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 1-1/2 inches nominal for foundations. 2. Maximum Course-Aggregate Size: 3/4" for all other concrete. 3. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.

C. Water: ASTM C 94 and potable.

2.6 ADMIXTURES

A. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.

B. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride.

1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A. 2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type B. 3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D. 4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type F. 5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type G. 6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017, Type II. 7. Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C494, Type E. 8. Accelerating Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494, Types C and E.

2.7 WATERSTOPS

A. Self-Expanding Butyl Strip Waterstops: Manufactured rectangular or trapezoidal strip, butyl rubber with sodium bentonite or other hydrophilic polymers, for adhesive bonding to concrete, 3/4 by 1 inch. 1. Products:

a. Colloid Environmental Technologies Company; Volclay Waterstop-RX. b. Concrete Sealants, Inc.; Conseal CS-231. c. Greenstreak; Swellstop. d. Henry Company, Sealants Division; Hydro-Flex. e. JP Specialties, Inc.; Earthshield Type 20. f. Progress Unlimited, Inc.; Superstop. g. TCMiraDRI; Mirastop.


2.8 VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Plastic Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class A. Include manufacturer's recommended adhesive or pressure-sensitive tape. 1. Products (Typical Under-slab Application):

a. Raven Industries Inc.; VaporBlock 15. b. Stego Industries, LLC; Stego Wrap, 15 mils. c. W. R. Meadows, Inc.; Perminator 15 mils. d. FortiFiber Corporation; Moistop Ultra 15. e. Insulation Solutions, Inc.; Viper II 15 mils. f. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing, Inc.; Blackline 400.

B. Fine-Graded Granular Material: Clean mixture of crushed stone, crushed gravel, and manufactured or natural sand; ASTM D 448, Size 10, with 100 percent passing a 3/8-inch sieve, 10 to 30 percent passing a No. 100 sieve, and at least 5 percent passing No. 200 sieve; complying with deleterious substance limits of ASTM C 33 for fine aggregates.

2.9 FLOOR AND SLAB TREATMENTS

A. Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment: Clear, chemically reactive, waterborne solution of inorganic silicate or siliconate materials and proprietary components; odorless; colorless; that penetrates, hardens, and densifies concrete surfaces. 1. Products:

a. Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment for all interior exposed concrete including garage and mechanical areas: 1) Evonik Industries; Protectosil Chem-Trete 40 2) LymTal International, Inc.; Iso-Flex 618 3) BASF; MasterProtect H 400 (formerly Enviroseal 40)

2.10 CURING MATERIALS

A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete. 1. Products:

a. ChemMasters; Spray-Film. b. Dayton Superior Corporation; Sure Film. c. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Eucobar. d. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Sealtight Evapre.

B. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.

C. Water: Potable.

D. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, dissipating. 1. Products:

a. ChemMasters; Safe-Cure Clear. b. Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co., Inc., a Dayton Superior Company;

W.B. Resin Cure. c. Dayton Superior Corporation; Day Chem Rez Cure (J-11-W). d. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Kurez DR VOX.


e. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; 1100 Clear. f. Symons Corporation, a Dayton Superior Company; Resi-Chem Clear Cure.

2.11 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber or ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding cork.

B. Semi-rigid Joint Filler: Two-component, semi-rigid, 100 percent solids, aromatic polyurea with a Type A shore durometer hardness range of 90 to 95 per ASTM D 2240.

C. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene.

D. Reglets: Fabricate reglets of not less than 0.0217-inch- thick, galvanized steel sheet. Temporarily fill or cover face opening of reglet to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris.

E. Dovetail Anchor Slots: Hot-dip galvanized steel sheet, not less than 0.0336 inch thick, with bent tab anchors. Temporarily fill or cover face opening of slots to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris.

2.12 REPAIR MATERIALS

A. Repair Underlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, Portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic

cement as defined in ASTM C 219. 2. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions,

and application. 3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as recommended

by underlayment manufacturer. 4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4100 psi at 28 days when tested according to

ASTM C 109/C 109M.

B. Repair Overlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations.

1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, Portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219.

2. Primer: Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application.

3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as recommended by topping manufacturer.

4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 5000 psi at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109.


2.13 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL

A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301.

1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture designs based on laboratory trial mixtures. Trial batch and field experience tests shall have been performed within 12 months of submittal date.

2. Do not use the same testing agency for field quality control testing.

B. Submit written reports to Architect of each proposed mix for each class of concrete at least 15 days prior to start of work. All mix designs shall be submitted on the Mix Design Submittal Form included at the end of this specification. Do not begin concrete production until proposed mix designs have been reviewed by Architect. The approved mix designs shall be used throughout this project unless changes are approved by Architect/Engineer prior to use.

C. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement in concrete as follows:

1. Fly Ash: 25 percent. 2. Combined Fly Ash and Pozzolan: 25 percent. 3. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: 50 percent. 4. Combined Fly Ash or Pozzolan and Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: 50 percent

portland cement minimum, with fly ash or pozzolan not exceeding 25 percent.

D. Air Content of Indoor Concrete: Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having an air content of 2 to 4 percent, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Air Content of Concrete Exposed to Freezing and/or De-icing Chemicals: Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having an air content as follows within a tolerance of plus 1 or minus 1.5 percent, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Air Content: 5.5 percent for 1-1/2" nominal maximum aggregate size. 2. Air Content: 6 percent for 1" nominal maximum aggregate size. 3. Air Content: 6 percent for 3/4" nominal maximum aggregate size.

F. Do not air entrain concrete to trowel-finished interior floors and suspended slabs. Do not allow entrapped air content to exceed 3 percent.

G. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.15 percent by weight of cement.

H. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Use water-reducing or high-range water-reducing admixture in concrete, as required, for

placement and workability. 2. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low

humidity, or other adverse placement conditions. 3. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy-use industrial

slabs and parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a water-cementitious materials ratio below 0.50.


4. Use accelerating admixture in concrete slabs placed at ambient temperatures below 50 deg. F.

2.14 CONCRETE MIXTURES FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS

A. Footings: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 3000 psi at 28 days, non-air-entrained. 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.50. 3. Slump Limit: 4 inches plus or minus 1 inch.

B. Exterior and other concrete exposed to weather: Proportion normal-weight concrete mix as follows:

1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 5000 psi air-entrained. 2. Maximum Slump: 4 inches. 3. Maximum Slump for Concrete Containing High-Range Water-Reducing Admixture: 8

inches (200 mm) after admixture is added to concrete with 2- to 4-inch (50- to 100-mm) slump.

4. Minimum cementitious material content: 610 lb./cu. yd. 5. Maximum water-cementitious material ratio: 0.42.

C. Interior Slabs-on-Grade, Slabs-on-Deck, Piers, and Curbs: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi at 28 days, non-air-entrained. 2. Minimum Cementitious Materials Content: 540 lb/cu. yd. 3. Slump Limit: 4 inches (100 mm) plus or minus 1 inch . 4. Maximum Slump for Concrete Containing High-Range Water-Reducing Admixture: 8

inches after admixture is added to concrete with 2- to 4-inch slump. 5. Maximum water-cementitious material ratio: 0.42.

2.15 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT

A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."

2.16 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94, and furnish batch ticket information.

1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FORMWORK

A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such loads.

B. Earth cuts may be used as forms for footing vertical surfaces, if sides are sharp and true, and not exposed in finished structure.

C. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.

D. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347R as abrupt or gradual, as follows:

1. Class A, 1/8 inch for smooth-concrete exposed to view. 2. Class C, 1/2 inch for other concrete surfaces.

E. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar.

F. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical.

1. Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal. 2. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.

G. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.

H. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations.

I. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete.

J. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items.

K. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete.

L. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment.

M. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written instructions, before placing reinforcement.

1. Coat steel forms with a non-staining, rust-preventative material. Rust-stained steel formwork is not acceptable.


N. Do not allow excess form-coating material to accumulate in forms or come into contact with in-place concrete surfaces against which fresh concrete will be placed.

3.2 EMBEDDED ITEMS

A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

1. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."

2. No aluminum conduit shall be installed in concrete. 3. No sleeves, holes, or inserts shall be placed within 2'-0" of columns without approval of

the structural engineer.

3.3 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS

A. General: Formwork for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work that does not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) for 24 hours after placing concrete, if concrete is hard enough to not be damaged by form-removal operations and curing and protection operations are maintained.

1. Leave formwork for beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements that supports weight of concrete in place until concrete has achieved 75 percent of its 28-day design compressive strength. At cantilevers, 100% of its 28-day design compressive strength must be achieved.

2. Remove forms only if shores have been arranged to permit removal of forms without loosening or disturbing shores.

B. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form-release agent.

C. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless approved by Architect.

3.4 VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Granular Course: Place slab on grade on 4"-thick fine-graded granular material, moisten, and compact with mechanical equipment to elevation tolerances of plus 0 inch (0 mm) or minus 3/4 inch.

B. Plastic Vapor Retarders: Cover 4" granular material with plastic vapor retarder, protect, and repair vapor retarders according to ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Lap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape.



A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement.

1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete.

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that would reduce bond to concrete.

C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars.

D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.

E. Install welded wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with wire.

F. Zinc-Coated Reinforcement: Repair cut and damaged zinc coatings with zinc repair material according to ASTM A 780. Use galvanized steel wire ties to fasten zinc-coated steel reinforcement.

3.6 JOINTS

A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.

B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect. 1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across

construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements of floors and slabs.

2. Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches into concrete. 3. Locate joints for beams, slabs, joists, and girders in the middle third of spans. Offset

joints in girders a minimum distance of twice the beam width from a beam-girder intersection.

4. Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors, slabs, beams, and girders and at the top of footings or floor slabs.

5. Space vertical joints in walls at 30'-0". Locate joints beside piers integral with walls, near corners, and in concealed locations where possible.

6. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces.

C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. If joint pattern is not shown, provide joints at a maximum spacing in feet of 3 times the slab thickness in inches in each direction and located to conform to bay spacing wherever possible (at column centerlines, half bays, third bays). Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of concrete thickness as follows: 1. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof

abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch-wide joints into concrete when cutting


action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks.

D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated. 1. Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished

concrete surface, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is

required, lace or clip sections together.

3.7 WATERSTOPS

A. Self-Expanding Strip Waterstops: Install in construction joints and at other locations indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions, adhesive bonding, mechanically fastening, and firmly pressing into place. Install in longest lengths practicable.

3.8 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed.

B. No concrete shall be placed except when Architect's representative (or independent testing laboratory) is present unless this requirement is specifically waived by the Architect. Give adequate notice to the Architect, the testing laboratory, and all contractors affected before placing concrete.

C. General: Comply with ACI 304, "Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete," and as specified. Concrete delivery tickets shall show: 1. Batch number 2. Mix by number with cement content in pounds and maximum size aggregate 3. Admixtures 4. Air content 5. Slump 6. Time of loading.

D. Discharge concrete within 1-1/2 hours after water has been added to the cement, unless a longer time has been authorized by the Architect/Engineer. During hot weather or other conditions contributing to a quick stiffening of the concrete, the Architect/Engineer may require discharge in less than 1-1/2 hours. If loss of slump occurs, HRWR may be redosed at the site as long as a "flash set" has not occurred. Redosage procedures must be discussed and approved by the Engineer and the manufacturer at the Pre-Concrete Conference.

E. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to limitations of ACI 301.

1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to mixture.


F. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.

1. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth to not exceed formwork design pressures and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints.

2. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301. 3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators

vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate.

G. Place interior slabs on grade that will later receive floor coverings only after floor level or roof above has been placed. Also, protect the slab from any moisture infiltration until building is complete.

H. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete.

1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.

2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement. 3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations. 4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. 5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured

surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations.

I. Pumping Concrete: Grout used to prime a pump shall not be placed in the forms in any concrete exposed to view in the final structure.

J. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. 1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F for three

successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature range required by ACI 301.

2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.

3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs.

K. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows:

1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.

2. Cover steel reinforcement with water-soaked burlap so steel temperature will not exceed ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete.


3. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.

3.9 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES

A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities.

1. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view.

B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities.

1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view, to receive a rubbed finish, to be covered with a coating or covering material applied directly to concrete.

C. Rubbed Finish: Apply the following to smooth-formed finished as-cast concrete where indicated:

1. Smooth-Rubbed Finish: Not later than one day after form removal, moisten concrete surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive until producing a uniform color and texture. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing process.

2. Grout-Cleaned Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply grout of a consistency of thick paint to coat surfaces and fill small holes. Mix one part Portland cement to one and one-half parts fine sand with a 1:1 mixture of bonding admixture and water. Add white Portland cement in amounts determined by trial patches so color of dry grout will match adjacent surfaces. Scrub grout into voids and remove excess grout. When grout whitens, rub surface with clean burlap and keep surface damp by fog spray for at least 36 hours.

3. Cork-Floated Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply a stiff grout. Mix one part Portland cement and one part fine sand with a 1:1 mixture of bonding agent and water. Add white Portland cement in amounts determined by trial patches so color of dry grout will match adjacent surfaces. Compress grout into voids by grinding surface. In a swirling motion, finish surface with a cork float.

D. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.

3.10 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS

A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.

B. Scratch Finish: While still plastic, texture concrete surface that has been screeded and bull-floated or darbied. Use stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes to produce a profile amplitude of 1/4 inch (6 mm) in 1 direction.


1. Apply scratch finish to surfaces indicated and to surfaces to receive concrete floor topping or mortar setting beds for ceramic or quarry tile, Portland cement terrazzo, and other bonded cementitious floor finishes.

C. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture.

1. Apply float finish to surfaces indicated, to surfaces to receive trowel finish, and to floor and slab surfaces to be covered with fluid-applied or sheet waterproofing, built-up or membrane roofing, or sand-bed terrazzo.

D. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings.

1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces indicated and to floor and slab surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic, or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin film-finish coating system.

2. Finish surfaces to the following tolerances, according to ASTM E 1155 for a randomly trafficked floor surface:

a. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 25; and levelness, F(L) 20; with minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 17; and levelness, F(L) 15 for carpeted slabs..

b. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 35; and of levelness, F(L) 25; with minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 24; and of levelness, F(L) 17; for slabs-on-grade.

c. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 30; and of levelness, F(L) 20; with minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 24; and of levelness, F(L) 15; for suspended slabs.

3. Finish and measure surfaces of slabs placed on unshored form surfaces and/or shored form surfaces after the removal of shores, so gap at any point between concrete surface and an unleveled free-standing 10' long straightedge, resting on two high spots and placed anywhere on the surface, does not exceed 1/4" (6.4 mm). FL levelness tolerances shall not apply to cambered or inclined surfaces.

E. Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a first trowel finish to surfaces indicated where ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed by either thickset or thin-set method. While concrete is still plastic, slightly scarify surface with a fine broom.

1. Comply with flatness and levelness tolerances for trowel finished floor surfaces.

F. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and ramps, and elsewhere as indicated.

1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application.


3.11 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS

A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures, unless otherwise indicated, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete the Work.

B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and terminations slightly rounded.

C. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations as shown on Drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment at correct elevations, complying with diagrams or templates from manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment.

D. Steel Pan Stairs: Provide concrete fill for steel pan stair treads, landings, and associated items. Cast-in inserts and accessories as shown on Drawings. Screed, tamp, and trowel-finish concrete surfaces.

3.12 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for hot-weather protection during curing.

B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h (1 kg/sq. m x h) before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.

C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for the remainder of the curing period.

D. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces.

E. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods:

1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials:

a. Water. b. Continuous water-fog spray. c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete

surfaces and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers.

2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape.


3. Moist cure interior and exterior concrete to be exposed to de-icing salts.

4. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

a. After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound manufacturer unless manufacturer certifies curing compound will not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project.

3.13 LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS

A. Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment: Prepare, apply, and finish penetrating liquid floor treatment according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Remove curing compounds, sealers, oil, dirt, laitance, and other contaminants and complete surface repairs.

2. Do not apply to concrete that is less than 28 days old. 3. Apply liquid until surface is saturated, scrubbing into surface until a gel forms; rewet;

and repeat brooming or scrubbing. Rinse with water; remove excess material until surface is dry. Apply a second coat in a similar manner if surface is rough or porous.

3.14 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS

A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval.

B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to two and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing.

C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning.

1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than 1/2 inch in any dimension in solid concrete, but not less than 1 inch in depth. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent.

2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white Portland cement and standard Portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface.

3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and structural performance as determined by Architect.


D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template.

1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.016 inch wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of width, and other objectionable conditions.

2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding. 3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing

operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete.

4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment. Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations.

5. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch to match adjacent floor elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface.

6. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4-inch clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original concrete except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.

7. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter with patching mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours.

E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive and patching mortar.

F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's approval.

3.15 QUALITY CONTROL – SPECIAL STRUCTURAL TESTING AND INSPECTION

A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Definitions: 1. Special Inspector – Technical:

a. Technical I: ACI-Certified Grade I Inspector: Inspector shall be employed by a testing laboratory, under the direct supervision of a Technical III.

b. Technical II: ACI-Certified Grade II Inspector: Inspector shall be employed by a testing laboratory, under the direct supervision of a Technical III.


c. Technical III: A civil/structural engineer regularly engaged in this type of work, with a minimum of 4 years experience and licensed in the state in which the project is located and is an employee of a qualified and approved testing laboratory. The licensed engineer shall review and approve all reports.

d. Testing laboratory shall have C.C.R.L. certification at the National Bureau of Standards.

2. Special Inspector – Structural: a. Structural I: Graduate civil/structural engineer, or other personnel acceptable to

the SER, with experience in the design of structural systems of this type. Inspections shall be performed under the direct supervision of a Structural II.

b. Structural II: Civil/structural engineer regularly engaged in the design of structural systems of this type, licensed in the state in which the project is located. The licensed engineer shall review and approve all inspection reports.

c. Special Inspector: Structural may be an employee of the SER.

C. Structural Testing and Special Inspection Requirements:

Item and Frequency Qualifications 1. Verify and inspect reinforcement in all cast-in-place concrete work:

a. Verify reinforcing bar grade. b. Verify reinforcing bars are free of dirt, excessive rust, and damage. c. Verify reinforcing bars are adequately tied, chaired, and supported to prevent

displacement during concrete placement. d. Verify proper clear distances between bars and to surfaces of concrete. e. Verify reinforcing bar size and placement. f. Verify bar laps for proper length and stagger. Structural I

2. Perform concrete mix verification: a. Verify mixer truck trip ticket conforms to approved mix design. b. Verify that total water added to mix on site does not exceed that allowed by

concrete mix design. c. Verify that concrete quality is indicative of adequate mixing time, consistency, and

relevant time limits. Technical I

3. Inspect preparation and placement of all concrete: a. Verify the following:

1) Verify acceptable general condition of concrete base prior to placement. 2) Verify use of required design mixtures. 3) Verify concrete placement, including conveyance and depositing avoids

segregation and contamination. 4) Verify that concrete is properly consolidated. 5) Verify reinforcement remains at proper location. 6) Unless noted, inspections shall be continuous. Inspections shall be

performed on a periodic basis for the following types of work: None. Structural I

4. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements: a. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each

concrete mixture exceeding 5 cu. yd. (4 cu. m), but less than 25 cu. yd. (19 cu. m), plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd. (38 cu. m) or fraction thereof.


1) When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.

b. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change.

c. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture.

d. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) and below and when 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one test for each composite sample.

e. Microwave Test: The water content of freshly mixed concrete will be tested on a random basis during placement using Microwave Drying Oven, in accordance with AASHTO TP23, "Proposed Standard Method of Test for Water Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete Using Microwave Oven Drying." This test will be performed only on concrete exposed to weather.

f. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M. 1) Cast and laboratory cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for

each composite sample. g. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one set of two laboratory-

cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days. 1) Test one set of two field-cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two

specimens at 28 days. 2) A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from

a set of two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated.

h. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi (3.4 MPa).

i. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests.

j. Non-Compliant Test Reports: All test reports indicating non-compliance should be faxed immediately to all parties on the test report distribution list. Copies shall be on different colored paper.

k. Non-destructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete.

l. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42/C 42M or by other methods as directed by Architect.

m. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.


n. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents.

Structural I

5. Observe protection and curing methods and maintenance of curing temperature for all concrete: a. Verify the following:

1) Verify that specified curing procedures are followed. 2) Verify that specified hot and cold weather procedures are followed. Structural I

6. Verify concrete strength before removal of shores and forms from beams and slabs. 7. Inspect all bolts, headed bolts, and headed studs installed in concrete.

a. Verify specified size, type, spacing, configuration, embedment, and quantity. b. Verify proper concrete placement and means have been taken to achieve

consolidation around all bolts. Structural I

D. Conventional testing and inspection requirement. 1. Measure floor and slab flatness and levelness according to ASTM E 1155 within 24

hours of finishing.

END OF SECTION 03 3000

LAWRENCE COUNTY CONCRETE MIX DESIGN SUBMITTAL FORM PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY page 1

CONCRETE MIX DESIGN SUBMITTAL FORM

Part 1 CONCRETE SUPPLIER INFORMATION Form Submitted by: Initials of person submitting:_________ Phone Number:____________________ Company Name:_______________________________________________ Address:______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ Main Plant Location:____________________________________________________ Miles from Project:______________________________________________________ Secondary Plant Location:________________________________________________ Miles from Project:______________________________________________________ Date:_______________ PROJECT INFORMATION Project:________________________________________________________ City:__________________________________________________________ General Contractor:______________________________________________ Concrete Strength (Class):_________________________________________ Air Content:____________________________________________________ Density:_______________________________________________________ Use (describe): _________________________________________________ This form shall be completed for each concrete strength (Class) and is based upon ACI 301-05.


Part 2 Determine Required Average Compressive Strength ______ (Check which method to be used) If a group of at least 15 consecutive compressive strength tests meeting the requirements of ACI 4.2.3.1 are available, calculate the standard deviation and required average compressive strength from (ACI EQ. 4-1 and tables 4.2.3.3.b and 4.2.3.3.a) No. of Tests:________ Standard Deviation: k-factor: f'cr: If no field compressive strength tests are available, select required average compressive strength from (Table 4.2.3.3.c) Data: f'cr: _________ Part 3 Determine Actual Concrete Compressive Strength Two methods of determining compressive strength are acceptable. Field Test Data Method and Trial Mix Method, select one method and provide the data required as described.

Recorded Field Test Data Test Date f'c

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30


Field Test Data Method: Provide design Materials, Types, Specific Gravity, Weight and Volume for the concrete being tested. Uti-lize the following table. Mix #2 is not required if more than 10 consecutive strength tests for one mixture are available. See ACI 4.2.3.4.a for additional information and requirements.

Water/Cementitious Ratio (lbs. water/lbs. cementitious material) = ________________

Admixtures Manufacturer Dosage (oz./cwt.)

Mix - #1 #2 Water Reducer

Air-Entraining Agent High-Range Water Reducer Non-Corrosive Accelerator

Other Provide compressive test results from above mixture/s. -If one mix is used: Average compressive strength (f'c): Required compressive strength (f'cr): (See Part 2) -If two mixes are used, plot the relationship between the water-cement ratio and the average compressive strength for each mix, and interpolate the plot to determine the correct water to cement ratio required to meet the compressive strength determined in Part 2. Attach plot with notation showing the proper water cement ratio * Mix #2 not required if 10 consecutive compressive tests are provided for Mix#1 Required Compressive Strength (f'cr): (See Part 2) Water-cementitious ratio: (From interpolation)

Materials Type/Source Specific

Gravity Weight (lbs.)

Absolute Volume (Cu. Ft.)

Mix #1 #2 #1 #2 #1 #2 #1 #2 Cement Flyash

Microsilica Coarse Aggregate Fine Aggregate

Water Air

Other TOTAL 27.0 cu. ft.

Field Test Data Mix #1 Date f'c Mix #2* Date f'c

1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9

10 10 Average - Average -


Establish the mixture proportions for f'cr based upon the required water cementitious ratio. Use the table below to show the actual mixture used on the project.

(If one trail mix was used the mixture will match Mix #1) Trial Mixture Method: Provide 3 design mixtures including: Materials, Types, Specific Gravity, Weight and Volume for the con-crete being tested. The following table has been provided to store this data. If the submitted data does not encompass all the required information the submittal will be rejected. See ACI 4.2.3.4.b for additional information and requirements.

Materials Type/Source Specific Gravity

Weight (lbs.)


Trial Mixture #1 #2 #3 #1 #2 #3 #1 #2 #3 #1 #2 #3 Cement Flyash


Water Air

Other Total 27.0 cu. ft.

Water/cementitious material Ratio = #1_______ #2_______ #3_______ (lbs. water/lbs. cementitious material)

Admixtures Manufacturer Dosage oz./cwt.

Trial Mixture - #1 #2 #2 Water Reducer

Air-Entraining Agent High-Range Water Reducer Non-Corrosive Accelerator

Other




Cement Flyash


Water Air



Provide compressive test results from above mixtures.

Plot the average compressive strength versus the corresponding water cement ratio and read the curve to determine the proper water-cementitious material ratio to meet the required compressive strength from Part 2. Attach plot and notation indicating the proper ratio to meet the required compressive strength. Required Compressive Strength (f'cr): (See Part 1.) Water/cementitous material Ratio: (From interpolation) Establish the mixture proportions for f'cr based upon the required water cementitious ratio. Use the table below to show the actual mixture used on the project

Additional Requirements/Information Please provide the following attachments: (Initial if attached) Coarse Aggregate Gradation Report ________ Fine Aggregate Gradation Report ________ Concrete Compressive Strength Data or Trial Mixture Test Data ________ Admixture Compatibility Certification Letter ________ Plots required to determine w/c ratio________

Trial Mix Test Data Mix #1 Date f'c Mix #2 Date f'c Mix #3 Date f'c

1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 3

Average - Average - Average -




Cement Flyash


Water Air


LAWRENCE COUNTY UNIT MASONRY PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 04 2000 - 1 © 2014 Eckles Architecture and Engineering

SECTION 04 2000 - UNIT MASONRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes unit masonry assemblies consisting of the following: 1. Concrete masonry units (CMUs). 2. Decorative split-faced concrete masonry veneer 3. Cast stone trim 4. Mortar and grout 5. Reinforcing steel. 6. Masonry joint reinforcement. 7. Ties and anchors. 8. Embedded flashing. 9. Miscellaneous masonry accessories. 10. Cavity-wall insulation installed as part of multi-wythe masonry cavity wall construction. 11. Expansion joint elastomeric expansion gasket and seal.

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 03 Section “Cast-In-Place Concrete” for foundation support of masonry units. 2. Division 05 Section “Structural Metal Stud (Cold-Rolled) Framing" for steel-framed

masonry backup assemblies and wall sheathing. 3. Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation" for cavity wall insulation installed as part of

studwall backup assemblies. 4. Division 07 Section "Air Barriers" for continuity of air barrier system. 5. Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealing control and expansion joints in unit

masonry.

C. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following: 1. Anchor sections of adjustable masonry anchors for connecting to structural frame, installed

under Division 05 Section "Structural Steel."

D. Products installed, but not furnished, under this Section include the following: 1. Steel lintels and shelf angles for unit masonry, furnished under Division 05 Section "Metal

Fabrications." 2. Cavity wall insulation, furnished under Division 07 Section “Thermal Insulation” 3. Manufactured reglets in masonry joints for metal flashing, furnished under Division 07

Section "Roof Specialties"

1.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. See Masonry Construction Notes on Structural Drawings performance requirements, including determination of compressive strength, for concrete masonry.

B. Net-Area Compressive Strength: 1. Provide structural unit masonry that develops indicated net-area compressive strengths (f'm)

at 28 days.

2. Determine net-area compressive strength (f'm) of masonry from average net-area compressive strengths of masonry units and mortar types (unit-strength method) according to Tables 1 and 2 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

UNIT MASONRY LAWRENCE COUNTY 04 2000 - 2 PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY

C. Thermal Movements: Provide assemblies that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing displacement of units, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

D. Shrinkage and Creep: Allow for progressive vertical shortening of building frame equal to 1/8 inch in 10 feet.

E. Structural Performance: Glass-block grid systems shall withstand the effects of gravity and wind loads and stresses within limits and under conditions required by prevailing building code. Provide documentation of comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer.

F. Cast Stone: 1. Design stone anchors and backup structure to withstand loads indicated without exceeding

allowable working stresses.

2. Provisions for Fabrication and Erection Tolerances: Allow for fabrication and erection tolerances.

3. Control of Corrosion and Staining: Prevent galvanic and other forms of corrosion as well as staining by isolating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials. Use materials that do not stain exposed surfaces of stone and joint materials.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For manufacturer, where required.

B. Product Data 1. Cast Stone: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual

components and profiles, and finishes.

C. Shop Drawings: For the following: 1. Reinforcing Steel: Detail bending and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars. Comply

with ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement." a. Include wall elevations for all conditions.

2. Wall Joints: For all masonry construction, provide wall elevations showing masonry control joints. Coordinate location and frequency of control joints with the typical structural and architectural details and all wall openings and penetrations required by all Prime Contracts.

3. Fabricated and Site-Formed Flashing: Detail corner units, end-dam units, and other special applications.

4. Cast Stone: a. Stone sizes and shapes b. Fabrication and installation details. c. Anchor and insert types. d. Setting sequence e. Dimensions, details of reinforcement and anchorages if any f. Indication of finished faces. g. Building elevations showing layout of units and locations of joints and anchors.

5. Stone Inscription: Show in large-scale elevation, and include detailing of carving profiles and dimensions.

LAWRENCE COUNTY UNIT MASONRY PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 04 2000 - 3

D. Samples for Verification: For each type, texture and color of the following: 1. Special shapes. 2. Weeps/vents. 3. Cast Stone 4. Accessories embedded in masonry. 5. Glass Panels consisting of four full-size glass-block units with glass-block grid and sealant

joints.

E. List of Materials Used in Constructing Mockups Panels: List generic product names together with manufacturers, manufacturers' product names, model numbers, lot numbers, batch numbers, source of supply, and other information as required to identify materials used. Include mix proportions for mortar and grout and source of aggregates. 1. Submittal is for information only. Neither receipt of list nor approval of mockup constitutes

approval of deviations from the Contract Documents unless such deviations are specifically brought to the attention of Architect and approved in writing.

F. Material Certificates: Include statements of material properties indicating compliance with requirements including compliance with standards and type designations within standards. Provide for each type and size of the following:

1. Masonry units: For masonry units used in structural masonry, include data and calculations establishing average net-area compressive strength of units.

2. Cementitious materials. Include brand, type, and name of manufacturer.

3. Preblended, dry mortar mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients.

4. Grout mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients.

5. Reinforcing bars.

6. Joint reinforcement.

7. Anchors, ties, and metal accessories.

G. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients.

H. Statement of Compressive Strength of Masonry: For each combination of masonry unit type and mortar type, provide statement of average net-area compressive strength of masonry units, mortar type, and resulting net-area compressive strength of masonry determined according to Tables 1 and 2 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

I. Cold-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and equipment to be used to comply with cold-weather requirements.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Cast Stone Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer of units similar to those indicated for this Project for a minimum of 5 years, with sufficient production capacity to manufacture required units. 1. Source Quality Control: Employ an independent testing agency to sample and test cast stone

units according to ASTM C 1364. Include one test for resistance to freezing and thawing, unless field performance of similar units is accepted for establishing freeze-thaw resistance..

B. Source Limitations for Cast Stone: Obtain units through one source from a single manufacturer.


C. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, through one source from a single manufacturer for each product required.

D. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from a single manufacturer for each cementitious component and from one source or producer for each aggregate.

E. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel." 2. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."

F. Coordination: 1. Coordinate installation of inserts that are to be embedded in masonry, flashing reglets, and

similar items to be used by masonry installer for anchoring, supporting, and flashing of assemblies. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing such items and deliver to Project site in time for preinstallation conference.

2. Time delivery and installation of components to avoid extended on-site storage and to coordinate with adjacent work.

G. Preconstruction Testing Service: 1. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to

ASTM C 1093 or ASTM E 329 for testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.

2. Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform preconstruction testing indicated below. Retesting of materials that fail to meet specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense. a. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit required, per ASTM C 140. b. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix required, per ASTM C 780. c. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix required, per ASTM C 1019.

H. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies with fire-resistance ratings determined per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency, by equivalent concrete masonry thickness, or by other means, as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

I. Sample Panels: Build sample panels to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects. Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements" for mockups. 1. Build representative sample panels for each typical exterior wall and interior decorative unit

wall condition in sizes approximately 60 inches long by 48 inches high by full thickness, laid out in z-configuration to show inside and outside corner construction. a. Submit mockup designs for approval prior to construction. b. Sample panels shall contain masonry veneer and other cladding of all colors and

shapes specified, with each type of specified backup. c. Include inside corner, outside corner, typical penetration and typical window/door

opening. d. Include through-wall and penetration flashing. Allow openings to show cavity

flashing dams, transitions and termination.

2. Clean one-half of exposed faces of panels with masonry cleaner indicated.

3. Protect approved sample panels from the elements with weather-resistant membrane.


4. Approval of sample panels is for color, texture, and blending of masonry units; relationship of mortar and sealant colors to masonry unit colors; tooling of joints; aesthetic qualities of workmanship, craftsmanship; and other material and construction qualities specifically approved by Architect in writing. a. Approval of sample panels does not constitute approval of deviations from the

Contract Documents contained in sample panels unless such deviations are specifically approved by Architect in writing.

J. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site specifically to review the construction requirements and aesthetics of the Work. Conduct conference to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." 1. Minimum Attendance: General Contractor, Mason subcontractor, Decorative Masonry

supplier, Steel erector, Structural metal stud installer, Panelized backup panel manufacturer and installer, Air Barrier installer, Stone carving subcontractor, others at General Contractor's and Construction Manager's discretion whose work requires coordination with the Work performed under this Section, Architect, Construction Manager. a. Owner's representative and Owner's Special Inspector will attend at Owner's

discretion.


A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If units become wet, do not install until they are dry.

B. Pack, handle, and ship cast stone units in suitable packs or pallets. 1. Lift with wide-belt slings; do not use wire rope or ropes that might cause staining. Move

cast stone units, if required, using dollies with wood supports.

2. Store cast stone units on wood skids or pallets with nonstaining, waterproof covers. Arrange to distribute weight evenly and to prevent damage to units. Ventilate under covers to prevent condensation.

3. Coordinate delivery of cast stone with unit masonry work to minimize the need for on-site storage and to avoid delaying the Work.

C. Mark stone units, on surface that will be concealed after installation, with designations used on Shop Drawings to identify individual stone units. Orient markings on vertical panels so that they are right side up when units are installed.

D. Store cementitious and cast materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp.

E. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided.

F. Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers designed for lifting and emptying into dispensing silo. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location or in a metal dispensing silo with weatherproof cover.

G. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil.


H. Store units, assemblies, materials and accessories on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied.

1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress. 1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides and hold cover securely in place.

2. Where one wythe of multiwythe masonry walls is completed in advance of other wythes, secure cover a minimum of 24 inches down face next to unconstructed wythe and hold cover in place.

B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least 3 days after building masonry walls or columns.

C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry. 1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by spreading

coverings on ground and over wall surface.

2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings.

3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and integral finishes, from mortar droppings.

4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry.

D. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with the cold-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 and as follows.

E. Cold-Weather Construction: When ambient temperature is within limits indicated, use the following procedures: 1. 40 to 32 deg F: Heat mixing water or sand to produce mortar temperatures between 40 and

120 deg F.

2. 32 to 25 deg F: Heat mixing water and sand to produce mortar temperatures between 40 and 120 deg F. Heat grout materials to produce grout temperatures between 40 and 120 deg F. Maintain mortar and grout above freezing until used in masonry.

3. 25 to 20 deg F: Heat mixing water and sand to produce mortar temperatures between 40 and 120 deg F. Heat grout materials to produce grout temperatures between 40 and 120 deg F. Maintain mortar and grout above freezing until used in masonry. Heat masonry units to 40 deg F if grouting. Use heat on both sides of walls under construction.

4. 20 deg F and Below: Heat mixing water and sand to produce mortar temperatures between 40 and 120 deg F. Heat grout materials to produce grout temperatures between 40 and 120 deg F. Maintain mortar and grout above freezing until used in masonry. Heat masonry units to 40 deg F. Provide enclosures and use heat on both sides of walls under construction to maintain temperatures above 32 deg F within the enclosures.


F. Cold-Weather Protection: When the mean daily temperature is with the limits indicated, provide the following protection: 1. 40 to 25 deg F: Cover masonry with a weather-resistant membrane for 48 hours after

construction.

2. 25 to 20 deg F: Cover masonry with insulating blankets or provide enclosure and heat for 48 hours after construction to prevent freezing. Install wind breaks when wind velocity exceeds 15 mi./h.

3. 20 deg F and Below: Provide enclosure and heat to maintain temperatures above 32 deg F within the enclosure for 48 hours after construction.

G. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F and above and will remain so until masonry has dried out, but not less than 7 days after completion of cleaning.

H. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.Protect unit masonry work when temperature and humidity conditions produce excessive evaporation of water from mortar and grout. Provide artificial shade and wind breaks and use cooled materials as required. 1. When ambient temperature exceeds 100 deg F, or 90 deg F with a wind velocity greater than

8 mph, do not spread mortar beds more than 48 inches ahead of masonry. Set masonry units within one minute of spreading mortar.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL

A. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to exceed tolerances and to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard. Do not uses units where such defects, including dimensions that vary from specified dimensions by more than stated tolerances, will be exposed in the completed Work or will impair the quality of completed masonry.

2.02 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS (CMUs)

A. Shapes: Provide shapes as indicated on the drawings and as follows: 1. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints, headers,

bonding, and other special conditions.

2. Provide C.M.U. bullnose units for exposed outside corners, jambs and sills, unless otherwise indicated. a. Where CMU construction is concealed behind interior finishes (gypsum, ceramic tile,

applied stool or casing, etc.), do not use bullnose corners.

B. Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 90 and as follows: 1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive

strength of 1900 psi. 2. Weight Classification: normal weight. 3. Size: Manufactured to dimensions 3/8 inch less than nominal dimensions. 4. Exposed Faces: Manufacturer's standard color and texture, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Decorative CMUs: ASTM C 90 Type 1 moisture controlled Split-Face Concrete Masonry Units.


1. Provide units with minimum face shell thickness of 2 inches, and minimum average net-area compressive strength of matching standard gray units

2. Density Classification: Normal weight, minimum density 110 lbs per cu ft.

3. Manufacture units with Dry Block water-repellant admixture in proportion recommend by manufacturer.

4. Size: As indicated in Drawings. a. Provide special shapes as detailed or otherwise required for conditions shown.

Include the following: 1) Window Sills 2) Corner, end and jamb units 3) Other shapes as recommended by Manufacturer and approved by Architect.

5. Color: Provide units made with integrally colored concrete matrix and special aggregate matching approved sample.

D. Concrete Building Brick: ASTM C 55 and as follows: 1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive

strength of 3500 psi.

2. Weight Classification: normal weight.

3. Size: Manufactured to dimensions 3/8 inch less than nominal dimensions.

4. Exposed Faces: Manufacturer's standard color and texture, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Approval of masonry veneer products: Sample Panels in conformance with Section 01 6000 and as follows: 1. Prior to Bidding: Prior to 8 working days prior to date scheduled for opening of bids, bidder

to meet at site with Architect and Construction Manager, by prior appointment, to present samples showing blends, textures and range available, including proposed range of proposed mortar blends, demonstrating capability of product to satisfy the design intent. a. Submit formal request to schedule site meeting no later than 3 calendar days prior to

requested meeting time. b. Include formal request for product approval, with appropriate documentation required

by Section 01 6600. c. Acceptance of products will be by Addendum to Bidding Documents.

2. After award of Contract: Requests for substitution will be decided subject to Architect's review of additional representative mock-up incorporating proposed substitute products, constructed in accordance to requirements for Sample Panels in Article 1.05 above. a. Comply with requirements of Combined Contractors' Construction Schedule, allowing

time for Architect's action on substitution request, and lead time for suppliers' production and delivery. No extension of time will be granted.

b. Required sample panels shall include range with mortar to match the scheduled finish. Sample panels shall be constructed at the site for comparison and evaluation.

c. Upon approval by Architect and Construction Manager, for cold-weather construction, sample panels may be constructed off-site and delivered to Project site for review.

d. Owner reserves the right to require, or to waive, a Change Order reducing the Contract Sum, or Contract Time, or both, in conformance with Section 01 6000.

2.03 BRICK

A. General: Provide shapes as indicated on the Drawings and as follows:


1. For ends of sills and caps and for similar applications that would otherwise expose unfinished brick surfaces, provide units without cores or frogs and with exposed surfaces finished.

2. Provide special shapes for applications where stretcher units cannot accommodate special conditions, including those at corners, movement joints, bond beams, sashes, relief/ shelf angles, and lintels.

3. Provide special shapes for applications requiring brick of size, form, color, and texture on exposed surfaces that cannot be produced by sawing.

4. Provide special shapes for applications where shapes produced by sawing would result in sawed surfaces being exposed to view.

B. Face Brick: ASTM C 216, Grade MW or SW, Type FBS. 1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive

strength of 4400 psi.

2. Initial Rate of Absorption: Less than 30 g/30 sq. in. per minute when tested per ASTM C 67.

3. Efflorescence: Provide brick that has been tested according to ASTM C 67 and is rated "not effloresced."

4. Surface Coating: Brick with colors or textures produced by application of coatings shall withstand 50 cycles of freezing and thawing per ASTM C 67 with no observable difference in the applied finish when viewed from 10 feet.

5. Application: Use where brick is exposed, unless otherwise indicated.

6. Face Brick Basis of Design manufacturer, size, texture and color indicated on Drawings.

7. Substitution: in conformance with Section 01 6000 and as follows: a. Prior to Bidding: Proposals for substitution will be subject to Architect's approval of

submitted samples showing blends and range available, demonstrating capability of product to satisfy the design intent. 1) Submit formal request, with required samples, no later than 14 calendar days

prior to time and date scheduled for opening of Bids

2) Sample panels shall include brick blends and range with mortar to match the Basis of Design. Sample panels shall be delivered to the Architect for comparison.

3) Include formal request for substitution, with appropriate documentation required by Section 01 6600.

4) Acceptance of products will be by Addendum to Bidding Documents.

b. After award of Contract: Requests for substitution will be decided subject to Architect's review of additional representative mock-up incorporating proposed substitute products, constructed in accordance to requirements for Sample Panels in Article 1.05 above. 1) Comply with Combined Contractors' Construction Schedule, allowing time for

Architect's action on substitution request, and lead time for brick suppliers' production and delivery. No extension of time will be granted.

2) Sample panels shall include brick blends and range with mortar to match the Basis of Design. Sample panels shall be delivered to the site for comparison.

3) Upon approval by Architect and Construction Manager, for cold-weather construction, sample panels may be constructed off-site and delivered to Project site for review.


4) Owner reserves the right to require, or to waive, a Change Order reducing the Contract Sum, or Contract Time, or both, in conformance with Section 01 6000.

2.04 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather construction.

B. Mortar Colors (if used):

1. New construction: Provide colors for each veneer masonry type as selected by Architect from approved Manufacturer’s full range of at least 30 colors.

C. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.

D. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III, and hydrated lime complying with ASTM C 207, Type S.

E. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144. 1. For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural sand or

crushed stone. 2. For joints less than 1/4 inch thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16

sieve.

F. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.

G. Water: Potable.

H. Cold-Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying with ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C, and recommended by manufacturer for use in masonry mortar of composition indicated. 1. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Accelguard 80. 2. Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Morset. 3. Sonneborn, Div. of ChemRex; Trimix-NCA.

I. Water-Repellent Admixture: Liquid water-repellent mortar admixture intended for use with face block or for exterior concrete form masonry units, containing integral water repellent by same manufacturer. 1. Addiment Incorporated; Mortar Tite. 2. Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Dry-Block Mortar

Admixture. 3. Master Builders, Inc.; Color Cure Mortar Admix or Rheomix Rheopel.


2.05 CAST STONE TRIM

A. Acceptable manufacturers, subject to compliance with specified requirements: 1. RockCast, Division of Reading Rock, Inc; www.rockcast.com 2. Arriscraft International; www.arriscraft.com 3. Custom Cast Stone, Inc; 888.776.9960 4. Edwards Cast Stone Company, 800-992-9323; www.edwardscaststone.com

B. Custom Cast Stone Units: Comply with ASTM C 1364 and applicable recommendations of the Cast Stone Institute Technical Manual (Current Edition). 1. Casting Method: Vibrate dry hand tamp.

2. Profiles: As indicated on Architectural Drawings and approved by Architect . If available standard shapes are not satisfactory, provide custom shape as indicated on drawings.

3. Sizes: Height, pitch, and depth as indicated in single length as required for each location indicated .

4. Texture and Color: Smooth fine-grained texture and color as selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range of standard colors. Submit available colors to Architect for final selection.

C. Materials: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or III, containing not more than 0.60 percent total

alkali when tested according to ASTM C 114.

2. Coarse Aggregates: Granite, quartz, or limestone complying with ASTM C 33; gradation as needed to produce required textures and colors as needed to produce required cast stone colors.

3. Fine Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone complying with ASTM C 33, gradation as needed to produce required textures and colors as needed to produce required cast stone colors.

4. Color Pigment: ASTM C 979, synthetic mineral-oxide pigments or colored water-reducing admixtures; color stable, free of carbon black, nonfading, and resistant to lime and other alkalis.

5. Admixtures: Do not use admixtures unless specified or approved in writing by Architect.

6. Reinforcement: Deformed steel bars complying with ASTM A 615. Use galvanized reinforcement when covered with less than 1-1/2 inches of cast stone material. a. Galvanized Coating: ASTM A 767.

7. Embedded Anchors and Other Inserts: Fabricated from stainless steel complying with ASTM A 240, ASTM A 276, or ASTM A 666, Type 304 .

D. Cast Stone Profiles: As indicated on Drawings. Observe the Cast Stone Institute Value Engineering suggestions as appropriate. 1. Follow jointing pattern where shown. 2. Fabricate units to suit in-place dimensions. Minimize field cutting.

3. Provide units with finished face on exposed surfaces. Do not expose sawn edges.

4. Sign Face: Provide custom piece sized, inscribed and located as shown.


E. Accessories: 1. Embedded Anchors and Other Inserts: Type and size indicated or recommended by

manufacturer for specific application, fabricated from stainless steel complying with ASTM A 240, ASTM A 276, or ASTM A 666, Type 304.

2. Dowels: Round stainless-steel bars complying with ASTM A 276, Type 304, and 1/2-inch diameter.

3. Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength, general-purpose cleaner designed for removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other construction stains from new masonry surfaces without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces; expressly approved for intended use by cast stone manufacturer and expressly approved by cleaner manufacturer for use on cast stone and adjacent masonry materials. a. Diedrich Technologies, Inc. b. EaCo Chem, Inc. c. ProSoCo, Inc.

F. Fabricate pre-cast units resistant to freezing and thawing as determined by laboratory testing according to ASTM C 666, Procedure A, as modified by ASTM C 1364, and are made from cast stone that has a history of successful resistance to freezing and thawing.

G. Fabricate units with sharp arris and details accurately reproduced with indicated texture on all exposed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Slope exposed horizontal surfaces 1:12 min to direct water away from face of wall or toward

roof side of parapet. 2. Provide raised fillets at backs of sills and at ends indicated to be built into jambs. 3. Provide drips on projecting elements, whether or not shown.

H. Fabrication Tolerances: 1. Variation in Cross Section: Do not vary from indicated dimensions by more than 1/8 inch. 2. Variation in Length: Do not vary from indicated dimensions by more than 1/360 of the

length of unit or 1/8 inch, whichever is greater, but in no case by more than 1/4 inch. 3. Warp, Bow, and Twist: Not to exceed 1/360 of the length of unit or 1/8 inch, whichever is

greater. 4. Location of Grooves, False Joints, Holes, Anchorages, and Similar Features: Do not vary

from indicated position by more than 1/8 inch on formed surfaces of units and 3/8 inch on unformed surfaces.

I. Acid etch units after curing to remove cement film from surfaces to be exposed to view.

2.06 STONE ACCESSORIES

A. Provide installation accessories as recommended by manufacturer for specific application.

B. Setting Shims: Strips of resilient plastic or vulcanized neoprene, Type A Shore durometer hardness of 50 to 70, nonstaining to stone, of thickness needed to prevent point loading of stone on anchors and of depths to suit anchors without intruding into required depths of pointing materials. 1. Application: Stone supported on shelf angles

C. Setting Buttons: Resilient plastic buttons, nonstaining to stone, sized to suit joint thicknesses and bed depths of stone units without intruding into required depths of pointing materials. 1. Application: Stone supported set on mortar bed, supported by masonry below.


D. Sealants for Joints in Stone Masonry: Manufacturer's standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealants of base polymer and characteristics indicated below that comply with applicable requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" and do not stain stone. 1. Single-component, nonsag, urethane sealant; Class 25, Use M (masonry).

a. Sika Corporation, Inc.; Sikaflex - 1a. b. Sonneborn, Division of ChemRex; NP 1. c. Sonneborn, Division of ChemRex; Ultra. d. Tremco, Sealant/Waterproofing Division; Vulkem 116.

2. Colors: Provide color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.07 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather construction. 1. Portland Cement For Mortar Used With Pre-Cast Stone: ASTM C 150, Type I or III,

containing not more than 0.60 percent total alkali when tested according to ASTM C 114.

B. Mortar Colors (if used): 1. Infill and patch brickwork in existing construction, using salvaged brick:

a. Provide custom blend of mortar color and aggregate to match existing mortar color and texture, subject to Architect’s approval. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortars in matching existing in-place mortar.

2. New construction: Provide colors for each face brick type as selected by Architect from approved Manufacturer’s full range of at least 30 colors.

3. Mortar color is to match that of the Sharon Middle/High School as approved by Architect.

C. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.

D. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III, and hydrated lime complying with ASTM C 207, Type S.

E. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144. 1. For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural sand or

crushed stone. 2. For joints less than 1/4 inch thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16

sieve.

F. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.

G. Water: Potable.

H. Cold-Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying with ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C, and recommended by manufacturer for use in masonry mortar of composition indicated. 1. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Accelguard 80. 2. Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Morset. 3. Sonneborn, Div. of ChemRex; Trimix-NCA.


I. Water-Repellent Admixture: Liquid water-repellent mortar admixture intended for use with face brick or for exterior concrete form masonry units, containing integral water repellent by same manufacturer. 1. Addiment Incorporated; Mortar Tite. 2. Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Dry-Block Mortar

Admixture. 3. Master Builders, Inc.; Color Cure Mortar Admix or Rheomix Rheopel.

2.08 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES

A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use water-repellant admixture as recommended by grout manufacturer.

2. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.

3. Limit cementitious materials in mortar to portland cement and lime.

4. Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be exposed to view, regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent.

B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients before delivering to Project site.

C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. Provide the following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated. 1. For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type S or M.

2. For reinforced masonry, use Type S or M.

3. For mortar parge coats, use Type S.

4. For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and non-load-bearing walls and parapet walls; for interior load-bearing walls; and for other applications where another type is not indicated, use Type S.

5. For interior non-load-bearing partitions, use Type N.

D. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476 – 2,000 psi min.. 1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will

comply with Table 1.19.1 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces and pour height.

2. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches as measured according to ASTM C 143.

3. Provide grout with compressive strength to develop specified design f'm, but not less than 1500 psi. Determine strength per ASTM C 1019.

4. High lift grouting: Conform to masonry wall construction outlined in NCMA TEK 3-2A. Grout should be 1/2 inch maximum size large aggregate conforming to ASTM C 476 and NCMA TEK 9-4A.

E. Pigmented Mortar (if used): Use colored cement product or select and proportion pigments with other ingredients to produce color required. Do not add pigments to colored cement products.

F. Colored-Aggregate Mortar (if used): Produce required mortar color by using colored aggregates and natural color or white cement as necessary to produce required mortar color.


G. Epoxy Pointing Mortar: Mix epoxy pointing mortar to comply with mortar manufacturer's written instructions.

2.09 REINFORCEMENT

A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M.

B. Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951. 1. Interior Walls: Mill-galvanized, carbon steel. 2. Exterior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel. 3. Wire Size for Side Rods and Cross Rods: W1.7 or 0.148-inch diameter. 4. Spacing of Cross Rods, Tabs, and Cross Ties: Not more than 16 inches o.c. 5. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet, with prefabricated corner and tee units.

C. Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Single-Wythe Masonry: Either ladder or truss type with single pair of side rods.

D. Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Multiwythe Masonry: Adjustable (two-piece) type, ladder design, with one side rod at each face shell of backing wythe and with separate ties that extend into facing wythe. Ties have two hooks that engage eyes or slots in reinforcement and resist movement perpendicular to wall. Ties extend at least halfway through facing wythe but with at least 5/8-inch cover on outside face.

E. Reinforcing Bar Positioners: Wire units designed to fit into mortar bed joints spanning masonry unit cells with loops for holding reinforcing bars in center of cells. Units are formed from 0.142-inch steel wire, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Units are formed from 0.142-inch steel wire. Provide units with either two loops or four loops as needed for number of bars indicated.

F. Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Veneers Anchored with Seismic Masonry-Veneer Anchors: Single 0.187-inch- diameter, hot-dip galvanized, carbon-steel continuous wire.

2.10 TIES AND ANCHORS

A. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in subsequent paragraphs that are made from materials that comply with eight subparagraphs below, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Mill-Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: For interior walls only, ASTM A 82; with

ASTM A 641, Class 1 coating.

2. Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82; with ASTM A 153, Class B-2 coating.

3. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 1008 Commercial Steel, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication to comply with ASTM A 153.

B. Wire Ties, General: Unless otherwise indicated, use round wire and size ties to extend at least halfway through veneer but with at least 5/8-inch cover on outside face. Outer ends of wires are bent 90 degrees and extend 2 inches parallel to face of veneer.


C. Adjustable Masonry Anchors for Connecting to Steel Frame: Provide two-piece assemblies that allow vertical or horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall. 1. Anchor Section: Crimped 1/4-inch-diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire anchor section

for welding to steel. Mill galvanized wire may be used at interior walls where humidity does not exceed 75 percent.

2. Tie Section: Triangular-shaped wire tie, sized to extend within 1 inch of masonry face, made from 0.1875-inch-diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire. Mill galvanized wire may be used at interior walls where humidity does not exceed 75 percent. a. For steel frame in plane of wall, use 9-in trapezoid wire web ties, similar to Heckmann

#318.

D. Adjustable Masonry-Veneer Anchors: Comply with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 1. General: Provide anchors that allow vertical adjustment but resist tension and compression

forces perpendicular to plane of wall, for attachment over sheathing to metal studs, and as follows: a. Structural Performance Characteristics: Capable of withstanding a 100-lbf load in

both tension and compression without deforming or developing play in excess of 0.05 inch.

b. Provide required embedment in mortar. Where clear span between inside face of masonry veneer and screw-attached anchor exceeds

c. Fabricate sheet metal anchor sections and other sheet metal parts from 0.097-inch- thick, steel sheet, galvanized after fabrication.

d. Wire Ties: Triangular-, rectangular-, or Trapezoid-shaped wire ties fabricated from 0.25-inch- diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire.

2. Screw-Attached, Masonry-Veneer Anchors: Units consisting of a wire tie and a metal anchor section, hot dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A 153/A Class B-2 a. Contractor's Option: Unless otherwise indicated and subject to Architect’s approval,

provide any of the following types of anchors, as applicable to conditions:

b. Plate and Pintle Anchor Section: Sheet metal plate, 12 gage with screw holes top and bottom designed to accommodate rigid cavity insulation in thickness specified, with a slot at cavity end of plate for inserting wire pintle tie. Provide Double Pintle Wire Ties in length required for specified mortar embedment 1) Dur-O-Wal "DA 213" 2) Hohmann & Barnard "HB 200" 3) Wire-Bond "HCL 711" 4) BLOK-LOK Limited; BL-407 and Wedge-Lok.

c. Barrel-Screw Anchor Section: Zinc-alloy barrel section with flanged head with eye and corrosion-resistant, self-drilling screw. Eye designed to receive wire tie and to serve as head for drilling fastener into framing. Barrel length to suit sheathing thickness, allowing screw to seat directly against framing with flanged head covering hole in sheathing and air barrier. Provide triangular wire tie. 1) Hohmann & Barnard "2-Seal Tie" 2) Heckmann Building Products; Pos-I-Tie or Wing Nut Pos-I-Tie.


3. Polymer-Coated, Steel Drill Screws for Steel Studs: ASTM C 954 except manufactured with hex washer head and neoprene washer, No. 10 diameter by length required to penetrate steel stud flange with not less than 3 exposed threads, and with organic polymer coating with salt-spray resistance to red rust of more than 800 hours per ASTM B 117.

1) ITW Buildex; Teks Maxiseal with Climaseal finish. 2) Textron Inc., Textron Fastening Systems; Elco Dril-Flex with Stalgard finish.

E. Partition Top anchors: 0.097-inch- thick metal plate with 3/8-inch- diameter metal rod 6 inches long welded to plate and with closed-end plastic tube fitted over rod that allows rod to move in and out of tube. Fabricate from steel, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.

F. Rigid Anchors: Fabricate from steel bars 1-1/2 inches wide by 1/4 inch thick by 24 inches long, with ends turned up 2 inches or with cross pins, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Corrosion Protection: Hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M.

G. Cast Stone Anchors: Fabricate dowels, clips, cramps, and other stone anchors from stainless steel.

H. Anchor Bolts: Headed steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers; hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C; of dimensions indicated.

I. Postinstalled Anchors: Provide chemical or torque-controlled expansion anchors, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in solid or grouted unit masonry and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 1. Corrosion Protection: Stainless-steel components complying with ASTM F 593 and

ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2 for bolts and nuts; ASTM A 666 or ASTM A 276, Type 304 or 316, for anchors.

2.11 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS

A. Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing, where flashing is exposed or partly exposed and where indicated, complying with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and as follows: 1. Zinc-Tin Alloy-Coated Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304, 0.016 inch

thick, dead-soft, fully annealed stainless-steel sheet of minimum uncoated thickness indicated; coated on both sides with a zinc-tin alloy (50 percent zinc, 50 percent tin), with factory-applied gray preweathering.

a. Follansbee Steel; TCS II.

2. Metal Drip Edges: Fabricate from stainless steel. Extend at least 3 inches into wall and 1/2 inch out from wall, with outer edge bent down 30 degrees and hemmed. Provide these drip edges with the use of both Flexible Flashing options listed below.

3. Metal Flashing Terminations: Fabricate from stainless steel. Extend at least 3 inches into wall and out to exterior face of wall. At exterior face of wall, bend metal back on itself for 3/4 inch and down into joint 3/8 inch to form a stop for retaining sealant backer rod.


B. Flexible Flashing: For flashing not exposed to the exterior, use one of the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Copper-Laminated Flashing: 5-oz./sq. ft. copper sheet bonded with asphalt between 2 layers

of glass-fiber cloth. a. Advanced Building Products Inc.; Copper Fabric Flashing. b. Phoenix Building Products; Type FCC-Fabric Covered Copper. c. Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc.; Copper Fabric Flashing. d. York Manufacturing, Inc.; York Copper Fabric Flashing. e. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc; C-Fab Flashing

2. Elastomeric Thermoplastic Flashing: At Contractor’s option and in compliance with specified requirements, provide preformed composite flashing product consisting of a polyester-reinforced ethylene interpolymer alloy as follows: a. Monolithic Sheet: Elastomeric thermoplastic flashing, 0.040 inch thick

b. Self-Adhesive Sheet with Drip Edge: Elastomeric thermoplastic flashing, 0.025 inch thick, with a 0.015-inch-thick coating of rubberized-asphalt adhesive. Where flashing extends to face of masonry, rubberized-asphalt coating is held back approximately 1-inch from edge.

c. Available Product: Hyload, Inc.; Hyload Cloaked Flashing System.

d. Colors: As selected from manufacturer’s full range, for each color of face block.

e. Accessories: Provide preformed corners, end dams, other special shapes, and seaming materials produced by flashing manufacturer.

3. Provide compatible installation accessories provided or approved by manufacturer.

C. Except as otherwise allowed, provide prefabricated inside and outside corner shapes, steps and elevation changes, end dams, and other special conditions required to maintain continuity in water barrier, in both metal flashing and flexible flashing. Site forming and fabrication of flashing will be acceptable only with prior written permission. 1. Submit detailed shop drawings indicating location and configuration of special flashing

condition, whether shop-fabricated or field-formed.

D. Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard products or products recommended by flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing sheets to each other and to substrates.

2.12 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES

A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1; compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from neoprene or urethane.

B. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Made from styrene-butadiene-rubber compound, complying with ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805 and designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated.

C. Thermal Break/ Bearing Pads: 1/2-inch 90-durometer continuous neoprene strips for installation between steel bearing member (girder, beam, shelf, relief angle) and masonry veneer wythe, where steel is exposed to indoor exposure and masonry wythe has outdoor exposure.

D. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt).


E. Weep/Vent Products: Use the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Cellular Plastic Weep/Vent: One-piece, flexible extrusion made from UV-resistant

polypropylene copolymer, full height and width of head joint and depth 1/8 inch less than depth of outer wythe, in color selected from manufacturer's standard. a. Advanced Building Products Inc.; Mortar Maze weep vent. b. Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; Cell Vents. c. Heckmann Building Products Inc.; No. 85 Cell Vent. d. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; Quadro-Vent. e. Wire-Bond; Cell Vent.

2. Mesh Weep/Vent: Free-draining mesh; made from polyethylene strands, full height and width of head joint and depth 1/8 inch less than depth of outer wythe; in color selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard. a. Archovations; CalClear Weep Vents. b. Mortar Net USA, Ltd.; Mortar Net Weep Vents. c. Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc.;

F. Cavity Drainage Material: Free-draining mesh, made from polymer strands that will not degrade within the wall cavity. Use manufacturer’s standard thickness, allowing no more than 3/8 inch gap between drainage material and exterior wythe. Provide one of the following configurations: 1. Strips, not less than 1-1/2 inches thick and 10 inches wide, with dimpled surface designed to

catch mortar droppings and prevent weep holes from being clogged with mortar.

2. Sheets or strips full depth of cavity and installed to full height of cavity.

3. Products: a. Advanced Building Products Inc.; Mortar Break II. b. Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; Polytite MortarStop. c. Mortar Net USA, Ltd.; Mortar Net. d. Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc.; Mortar Web.

G. Reinforcing Bar Positioners: Wire units designed to fit into mortar bed joints spanning masonry unit cells with loops for holding reinforcing bars in center of cells. Units are formed from 0.142-inch steel wire, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Provide units with either two loops or four loops as needed for number of bars indicated. 1. Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; D/A 810, D/A 812 or D/A 817. 2. Heckmann Building Products Inc.; No. 376 Rebar Positioner. 3. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; #RB or #RB-Twin Rebar Positioner. 4. Wire-Bond; O-Ring or Double O-Ring Rebar Positioner.

H. Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard, predrilled stainless-steel or aluminum bars, approximately 1 by 1/8 inch thick; with anchors.

I. Sealant Materials: Provide chemically curing, elastomeric sealant of base polymer and characteristics indicated below that comply with applicable requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." 1. Single-component, nonsag urethane sealant. 2. Colors: Provide colors of exposed sealants to match colors of work adjoining installed

sealant unless otherwise indicated.


J. Joint-Sealant Backing: 1. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface

skin) or Type B (bicellular material with a surface skin), and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.

2. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.

2.13 CAVITY-WALL INSULATION

A. Provide one of the following products, as specified in Division 07 Section “Thermal Insulation.” Coordinate all affected components of cavity-wall assemblies, as well as adjacent, abutting and penetrating construction, with selected insulation product. Include coordination and preinstallation meetings with other Prime Contractors, and review shop drawings of other affected Prime Contracts. 1. Foil-Faced Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Polyisocyanurate Foam Insulation

a. Thickness: 3-inches unless noted otherwise

2. Rigid styrene foam (XPS/EPS) cavity insulations will not be acceptable without appropriate protection at wall openings in compliance with requirements of NFPA 285 tested assemblies, and associated adjustment in door, window and other construction within openings, at no additional cost to Project.

2.14 MASONRY CLEANERS

A. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned. 1. Diedrich Technologies, Inc. 2. EaCo Chem, Inc. 3. ProSoCo, Inc.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. 1. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified. 2. Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed.

B. Before installation, examine rough-in and built-in construction for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


3.02 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to full thickness shown. Build single-wythe walls to actual widths of masonry units, using units of widths indicated.

B. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections.

C. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing equipment, complete masonry to match the construction immediately adjacent to opening.

D. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.

E. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and textures. 1. Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed.

F. Wetting of Block: Wet units before laying if initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq. in. per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb water so they are damp but not wet at time of laying.

G. Comply with construction tolerances in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 and with the following: 1. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion

and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet , 1/4 inch in 20 feet and

2. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.

3. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.

4. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch, with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch. Do not vary from bed-joint thickness of adjacent courses by more than 1/8 inch.

5. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch. Do not vary from adjacent bed-joint and head-joint thicknesses by more than 1/8 inch.

6. For faces of adjacent exposed masonry units, do not vary from flush alignment by more than 1/16 inch except due to warpage of masonry units within tolerances specified for warpage of units.

7. For exposed bed joints and head joints of stacked bond, do not vary from a straight line by more than 1/16 inch from one masonry unit to the next.

8. For masonry faces intended as substrates for thinset ceramic tile finishes, comply with dimensional tolerance requirements of finish manufacturer, ANSI A108 and the Tile Council of North America.


3.03 LAYING MASONRY WALLS

A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations.

B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in running bond and bond pattern indicated on Drawings; do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.

C. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not less than 2 inches. Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.

D. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by racking back units in each course from those in course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to receive mortar, remove loose masonry units and mortar, and wet units if required before laying fresh masonry.

E. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.

F. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar, unless otherwise indicated.

G. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath, wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core.

H. Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 24 inches under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items, unless otherwise indicated.

I. Build non-load-bearing interior partitions full height of story to underside of solid floor or roof structure above, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Install compressible filler in joint between top of partition and underside of structure above.

2. Fasten partition top anchors to structure above and build into top of partition. Grout cells of CMUs solidly around plastic tubes of anchors and push tubes down into grout to provide 1/2-inch clearance between end of anchor rod and end of tube. Space anchors 48 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.

3. At fire-rated partitions, treat joint between top of partition and underside of structure above to comply with Division 07 Section "Firestopping."

3.04 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING

A. Lay concrete masonry units as follows: 1. With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed joints.

2. With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters.

3. With webs fully bedded in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on footings.

4. With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting course on footings where cells are not grouted.


B. Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head joints.

C. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other than paint), unless otherwise indicated.

3.05 SETTING STONE

A. Set cast stone as indicated on Drawings. Set units accurately in locations indicated with edges and faces aligned according to established relationships and indicated tolerances. 1. Install anchors, supports, fasteners, and other attachments indicated or necessary to secure

units in place. 2. Shim and adjust anchors, supports, and accessories to set cast stone in locations indicated

with uniform joints.

B. Fill anchor holes with sealant. 1. Where dowel holes occur at pressure-relieving joints, provide compressible material at ends

of dowels.

C. Set cast stone supported on clip or continuous angles on resilient setting shims. Use material of thickness required to maintain uniform joint widths. Hold shims back from face of cast stone a distance at least equal to width of joint.

D. Keep joints free of mortar and other rigid materials. Remove temporary shims and spacers from joints after anchors and supports are secured in place and cast stone units are anchored. Do not begin sealant installation until temporary shims and spacers are removed. 1. Form open joint of width indicated, but not less than 3/8 inch.

E. Prepare joints and apply sealant of type and at locations indicated to comply with applicable requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." 1. Prime cast stone surfaces to receive sealant and install compressible backer rod in joints

before applying sealant, unless otherwise indicated.

3.06 POINTING WITH SEALANT:

A. Provide sealant in the following masonry joints, and as otherwise indicated on Drawings: 1. Horizontal pressure relieving joints at shelf angles 2. Under metal drip edge and metal flashing termination. 3. Vertical joints between dissimilar materials.

B. Except as otherwise specified, set units with full head joints, and rake to depth recommended by sealant manufacturer. 1. Keep raked and open joints dry and free of mortar and debris. 2. Clean and prepare joint surfaces according to Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

C. Prime joint surfaces unless sealant manufacturer recommends against priming. Do not allow primer to spill or migrate onto adjoining surfaces.


D. Fill sealant joints with specified joint sealant according to Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" and the following: 1. Install bond-breaker tape to surface beneath sealant.

a. Install cylindrical sealant backing beneath sealant where approved, in locations without solid backup to suitable depth, or at joint between dissimilar materials.

2. Install sealant using only proven installation techniques that will ensure that sealant will be deposited in a uniform, continuous ribbon, without gaps or air pockets, and with complete wetting of the joint bond surfaces equally on both sides. Fill joint flush with surrounding and matching the contour of adjoining mortar joints.

3. Install sealant as recommended by sealant manufacturer but within the following general limitations, measured at the center (thin) section of the bead: a. Fill joints to a depth equal to joint width, but not more than 1/2 inch deep or less than

1/4 inch deep.

4. Do not allow sealant to overflow or spill onto adjoining surfaces, or to migrate into the voids of adjoining surfaces, particularly rough textures. Remove excess and spillage of sealant promptly as the work progresses. Clean adjoining surfaces by the means necessary to eliminate evidence of spillage, without damage to adjoining surfaces or finishes, as demonstrated in an approved mockup.

E. Cure sealant according to Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

3.07 STONE INSCRIPTION

A. Carve and cut inscriptions as designed, according to approved Shop Drawings. Use skilled stone carvers experienced in the successful performance of work similar to that indicated.

3.08 COMPOSITE MASONRY

A. Bond wythes of composite masonry together using one of the following methods: 1. Masonry Joint Reinforcement: Installed in horizontal mortar joints.

a. Where bed joints of both wythes align, use ladder-type reinforcement extending across both wythes.

b. Where bed joints of wythes do not align, use adjustable (two-piece) type reinforcement with continuous horizontal wire in facing wythe attached to ties.

2. Header Bonding: Provide masonry unit headers extending not less than 3 inches into each wythe. Space headers not over 8 inches clear horizontally and 16 inches clear vertically.

B. Collar Joints: Solidly fill collar joints by parging face of first wythe that is laid and shoving units of other wythe into place.

C. Corners: Provide interlocking masonry unit bond in each wythe and course at corners, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Provide continuity with masonry joint reinforcement at corners by using prefabricated L-

shaped units as well as masonry bonding.

D. Intersecting and Abutting Walls: Unless vertical expansion or control joints are shown at juncture, bond walls together as follows: 1. Provide continuity with masonry joint reinforcement by using prefabricated T-shaped units.


3.09 CAVITY WALLS

A. Bond wythes of cavity walls together using one of the following methods: 1. Individual Metal Ties: Provide ties as shown installed in horizontal joints, but not less than

one metal tie for 2.67 sq. ft. of wall area spaced not to exceed 24 inches o.c. horizontally and 16 inches o.c. vertically. Stagger ties in alternate courses. Provide additional ties within 12 inches of openings and space not more than 16 inches apart around perimeter of openings. At intersecting and abutting walls, provide ties at no more than 24 inches o.c. vertically. a. Use adjustable (two-piece) type ties to allow for differential movement regardless of

whether bed joints align.

2. Masonry Joint Reinforcement: Installed in horizontal mortar joints. a. Where bed joints of both wythes align, use ladder-type reinforcement extending

across both wythes.

b. Where bed joints of wythes do not align, use adjustable (two-piece) type reinforcement with continuous horizontal wire in facing wythe attached to ties.

3. Masonry Veneer Anchors: Comply with requirements for anchoring masonry veneers.

4. Air Barrier Assembly: Install a continuous unbroken membrane, per Section 07 2726, in a manner consistent with an accepted NFPA 285 assembly, and as follows: a. Seal all penetrations including anchors, electrical boxes, and utility penetrations to

maintain continuous air barrier.

b. Maintain continuity at juncture with roof air barrier, doors and windows, adjoining existing construction, foundation and concrete wall construction.

B. Keep cavities clean of mortar droppings and other materials during construction. Bevel beds away from cavity, to minimize mortar protrusions into cavity. Do not attempt to trowel or remove mortar fins protruding into cavity.

C. Coordinate and sequence installation to comply with Division 07 Section "Air Barriers."

D. Installing Cavity-Wall Insulation: Continuous Insulation per ASHRAE 90.1. Apply continuous across all structural members without thermal bridges other than fasteners and service openings. Install in a manner consistent with an accepted NFPA 285 assembly. 1. Place small dabs of adhesive, spaced approximately 12 inches o.c. both ways, on inside face

of insulation boards, or attach with plastic fasteners designed for this purpose.

2. Install board insulation in two layers, in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations, staggering vertical joints, to achieve min. thicknesses indicated.

3. Fit courses of insulation between wall ties and other confining obstructions in cavity, with edges butted tightly both ways. Press units firmly against inside wythe of masonry or other backup construction as shown or as otherwise recommended to achieve required continuity.

4. Fill cracks and open gaps in insulation with crack sealer compatible with insulation and masonry.


A. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements of prevailing building code.

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials.

C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover of not less than 1/2 inch.


D. Place reinforcement prior to concrete fill placement.

E. Splice lap reinforcement not less than 40 bar diameters, or use approved mechanical lap accessory. Maintain not less than one reinforcement bar diameter between vertical reinforcement installations.

3.11 CONCRETE FILL PLACEMENT

A. Filling of Concrete Cavity: Use concrete fill indicated on structural drawings, or if not so indicated, as specified in Division 03, Section “Cast-In-Place Concrete.” Do not place concrete fill until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained sufficient strength to resist grout pressure. 1. Before placement of concrete fill verify that reinforcing bars are correctly positioned with

proper lap and alignment, and that the cavity is free from debris, obstructions, and excessive mortar droppings that would create voids in the concrete pour.

2. Solidly fill cavity with concrete in lifts not to exceed 5 feet in height, with not more than two lifts (10ft) placed in one operation. Stop concrete pour 1-1/2 inch below top of cavity to form key for the next concrete fill operation.

3. If necessary, consolidate concrete immediately after placement of each lift by mechanical vibration to eliminate voids in concrete mass, using a “pencil” vibrator with a diameter of 1 inch or less. Do not vibrate more than 6-feet in depth into any concrete lift.

4. Do not install piping, conduit, sleeves, or other non-structural embedments in reinforced grouted cells. Comply with requirements of MSJC Building Code Requirements and Specification for Masonry Structures.

3.12 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches. 1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches o.c.

2. Space reinforcement not more than 8 inches o.c. in foundation walls and parapet walls.

3. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches above and below wall openings and extending 12 inches beyond openings, in addition to continuous reinforcement.

B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints, unless otherwise indicated.

C. If rigid anchors are not used to bond walls at intersections, provide continuity at wall intersections and corners by using prefabricated T-shaped and L-shaped units.

D. Cut and bend reinforcing units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at corners, returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions.

3.13 ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL MEMBERS

A. Anchor masonry to structural members where masonry abuts or faces structural members to comply with the following: 1. Provide an open vertical space not less than 1/2 inch in width between masonry and

structural member above, unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of mortar and other rigid materials.

2. Anchor masonry to structural members with anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure.


3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 24 inches o.c. vertically and 36 inches o.c. horizontally.

3.14 ANCHORING MASONRY VENEERS

A. Anchor masonry veneers to wall framing with masonry-veneer anchors to comply with the following requirements: 1. Fasten screw-attached anchors through sheathing to wall framing with metal fasteners of

type indicated. Use two fasteners unless anchor design only uses one fastener.

2. Embed tie sections in masonry joints. Provide not less than 2 inches of air space between back of masonry veneer and face of sheathing.

3. Locate anchor sections to allow maximum vertical differential movement of ties up and down.

4. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 16 inches o.c. vertically and 16 inches o.c. horizontally, with not less than 1 anchor for each 2 sq. ft. of wall area. Install additional anchors within 12 inches of openings and at intervals, not exceeding 8 inches, around perimeter.

5. Panelized wall backup: Space anchors in compliance with these requirements and approved structural calculations submitted by prefabricated wall panel assembly manufacturer.

B. Coordinate and sequence installation to comply with Division 07 Section "Air Barriers."

3.15 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS

A. General: Install control and expansion joint materials in unit masonry as masonry progresses. Do not allow materials to span control and expansion joints without provision to allow for in-plane wall or partition movement.

B. Form control joints in concrete masonry using one of the following methods: 1. Fit bond-breaker strips into hollow contour in ends of concrete masonry units on one side of

control joint. Fill resultant core with grout and rake out joints in exposed faces for application of sealant.

2. Install preformed control-joint gaskets designed to fit standard sash block.

3. Install temporary foam-plastic filler in head joints and remove filler when unit masonry is complete for application of sealant.

C. Form expansion joints in face veneers as follows: 1. Provide neoprene compression seals equal to MM Systems Series VCS, model VCS-225 in

standard color to match adjacent work.

D. Provide horizontal, pressure-relieving joints by inserting a compressible filler of width required for installing sealant and backer rod specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants," but not less than 3/8 inch. 1. Locate horizontal, pressure-relieving joints beneath shelf angles supporting masonry.

3.16 LINTELS

A. Install steel lintels where indicated. Paint prior to installation. Prepare surfaces and finish as indicated in Division 09 Section "Painting". Touch up painted finish after insulation.


B. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Coordinate and incorporate flashing, control joints, cavity drainage, weeps, and accessories related to lintels.

3.17 FLASHING, WEEP HOLES, CAVITY DRAINAGE, AND VENTS

A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated. Install vents at shelf angles, ledges, and other obstructions to upward flow of air in cavities, and where indicated.

B. Install flashing as follows, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could puncture

flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through-wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing manufacturer.

2. At multiwythe masonry walls, including cavity walls, extend flashing through outer wythe, turned up a minimum of 4 inches, and through inner wythe to within 1/2 inch of the interior face of wall in exposed masonry.

a. Where interior face of wall is to receive furring or framing, carry flashing completely through inner wythe and turn flashing up approximately 2 inches on interior face.

3. At masonry-veneer walls with studwall backup construction, or panelized insulating backup system, extend flashing through veneer, across air space behind veneer, and up face of sheathing at least 8 inches; with upper edge tucked under air barrier, building paper or building wrap, lapping at least 4 inches. a. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings and mechanically anchor to substrate using

termination bars.

4. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 6 inches into masonry at each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 6 inches at ends and turn up not less than 2 inches to form end dams.

5. Metal Drip Edges: Install beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible flashing 1/2 inch back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible flashing to top of metal drip edge. a. Application: Base of wall at grade and at locations not visible from pedestrian level,

as approved by Architect.

6. Metal Flashing Terminations: Install beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible flashing 1/2 inch back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible flashing to top of metal flashing termination. Seal per Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants". a. Application: All exposed flashing where Metal Drip Edge is not used, unless

indicated otherwise.

7. Metal Reglet/ Counterflash Receiver: Install as masonry face wythe of wall is built. a. As part of flexible thru-wall flashing assembly:

1) Install tight against front face of face wythe in bed of elastomeric sealant. 2) Provide minimum 2-inch side laps or splice pieces with minimum 2-inch cover

on each side, and bed with elastomeric sealant. 3) Install flexible flashing as specified above for Metal Drip Edge and Metal

Flashing Terminations.


b. For embedment in face wythe only, separately from thru-wall flashing: 1) Install Fry Reglet MA, or equivalent approved product, true and tight in

accordance with manufacturer’s written recommendations for specific application.

2) Install fabricated corners, steps and end dams to ensure a mechanically secure, tight and uninterrupted barrier against water penetration.

3) Do not install above cavity flashing.

c. As part of metal thru-wall fabrication: 1) Install true and tight in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations for

specific application. 2) Install with a thin bed of mortar below and above. Install fabricated corners,

steps and end dams to ensure a mechanically secure, tight and uninterrupted barrier against water penetration.

C. Install reglets and nailers for flashing and other related construction where they are shown to be built into masonry.

D. Install weep holes in head joints in exterior wythes of first course of masonry immediately above embedded flashing and as follows: 1. Use specified weep/vent products to form weep holes.

2. Space weep holes formed from wicking material 16 inches o.c.

E. Place cavity drainage material in cavities to comply with configuration requirements for cavity drainage material in Part 2 "Miscellaneous Masonry Accessories" Article., and as follows: 1. Verify that airspace width is no more than 3/8 inch greater than drainage mat thickness.

Stagger end joints in adjacent rows. Butt adjacent pieces to moderate contact. Fit to perimeter construction and penetrations without voids.

F. Install vents in head joints in exterior wythes at spacing indicated. Use specified weep/vent products to form vents. 1. Close cavities off vertically and horizontally with blocking in manner indicated. Install

through-wall flashing and weep holes above horizontal blocking.

3.18 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION

A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as needed to support reinforced masonry elements during construction. 1. Construct formwork to provide shape, line, and dimensions of completed masonry as

indicated. Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace, tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry.

2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently to carry their own weight and other temporary loads that may be placed on them during construction.

B. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained enough strength to resist grout pressure. 1. Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for cleanouts and for grout

placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height.

2. Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than 60 inches.


3.19 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing and Inspection: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and special inspections as required by authority having jurisdiction and as indicated below, and to prepare test reports: 1. Coordinate work schedule with required testing and inspection operations.

2. Allow testers and inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas, as needed to perform investigations.

3. Place grout only after inspectors have verified compliance of grout spaces and grades, sizes, and locations of reinforcement.

B. Retesting of materials failing to comply with specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense.

C. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents.

D. Testing Frequency: One set of tests for each 5000 sq. ft. of wall area or portion thereof. 1. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, per ASTM C 140.

2. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix provided, per ASTM C 780. Test mortar for mortar air content and compressive strength.

3. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix provided, per ASTM C 1019.

4. Prism Test: For each type of construction provided, per ASTM C 1314 at 28 days.

5. Anchors: For type, size and location, including anchorage of masonry to structural members, frames or other construction, per ACI 530 and ASCE 5.

3.20 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING

A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units, approved samples and mockups, or otherwise in noncompliance with requirements. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. 1. Replace units in a manner that results in assembly matching approved Samples, complying

with other requirements, and showing no evidence of replacement.

B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application, where indicated.

C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.

D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: 1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or

chisels.

2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry.

3. Protect adjacent non-masonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape.

4. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2A applicable to type of stain on exposed surfaces.


3.21 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL

A. Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site.

B. Waste Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including excess or soil-contaminated sand, waste mortar, and broken masonry units, by crushing and mixing with fill material as fill is placed. 1. Crush masonry waste to less than 4 inches in each dimension.

2. Mix masonry waste with at least two parts of specified fill material for each part of masonry waste. Fill material is specified in Division 02 Section "Earth Moving."

3. Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches of finished grade.

C. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as described above, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property.


LAWRENCE COUNTY STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 05 1200 - 1 © 2014 Eckles Architecture and Engineering

SECTION 05 1200 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Structural steel, as defined in American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) “Code of Standard Practice.”

2. Grout. 3. Relieving angles, loose lintels, and steel joist bearing plates and anchors.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 5 Section "Steel Decking" for field installation of shear connectors. 2. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for miscellaneous steel fabrications and other

metal items not defined as structural steel. 3. Division 9 painting Sections for surface preparation and priming requirements.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Structural Steel: Elements of structural-steel frame, as classified by AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," that support design loads.


A. Connections: Provide details of simple shear connections required by the Contract Documents to be selected or completed by structural-steel fabricator to withstand ASD-service loads indicated and comply with other information and restrictions indicated.

1. Select and complete connections using schematic details indicated and AISC's “Steel Construction Manual.”

2. Engineering Responsibility: Fabricator's responsibilities include using a qualified professional engineer to prepare structural analysis data for structural-steel connections.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components.

1. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. 2. Include embedment drawings. 3. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds,

and show size, length, and type of each weld. 4. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts.

Identify pretensioned and slip-critical high-strength bolted connections.

STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING LAWRENCE COUNTY 05 1200 - 2 PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY

5. Unless noted otherwise on design drawings, design and provide stiffeners, doubler plates, etc., in connections where needed.

6. For structural-steel connections indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. Submittal of structural analysis data is not required for typical AISC-recommended simple shear connections and connections indicated on the design documents.

C. Welding certificates.

D. Qualification Data: For Installer, fabricator, and testing agency.

E. Mill Test Reports: Signed by manufacturers certifying that the following products comply with requirements:

1. Structural steel including chemical and physical properties. 2. Bolts, nuts, and washers including mechanical properties and chemical analysis. 3. Direct-tension indicators. 4. Tension-control, high-strength bolt-nut-washer assemblies. 5. Stud connectors. 6. Shop primers. 7. Non-shrink grout.

F. Source quality-control test reports.


A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed structural steel work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. Erector shall, if requested, submit a report of experience record to the Architect.

B. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator who participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Plant, Category STD.

C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."

D. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally authorized to practice in the jurisdiction where project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for projects with structural steel framing that are similar to that indicated for this project in material, design, and extent.

E. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents:

1. AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." 2. AISC's "Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings" and "Supplement No. 2." 3. AISC's "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings. 4. RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."

LAWRENCE COUNTY STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 05 1200 - 3

F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination."


A. Deliver structural steel to project site in such quantities and at such times to ensure continuity of installation.

B. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel members and packaged materials from erosion and deterioration.

1. Store fasteners in a protected place. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use.

2. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Furnish anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates, instructions, and directions for installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS

A. W, M, and S-Shapes: ASTM A 992or ASTM A 572, Grade 50 .

B. Channels, Angles, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36.

C. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500, Grade B, structural tubing.

D. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements.

2.2 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS

A. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563 heavy hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 hardened carbon-steel washers.

1. Finish: Plain, uncoated. 2. Galvanized Finish: Hot-dip zinc-coating, ASTM A153, Class C, or mechanically

deposited zinc-coating, ASTM B695, Class 50, for use with galvanized steel only. 3. Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F959, Type 325 compressible-washer type may be

used.


B. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 490, Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts ASTM A 563 heavy hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 hardened carbon-steel washers, plain.

1. Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, Type 490 Type 10.9, compressible-washer type, plain may be used.

C. Tension-Control, High-Strength Bolt-Nut-Washer Assemblies: ASTM F 1852, Type 1, heavy hex or round head steel structural bolts with splined ends; ASTM A 563 heavy hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 hardened carbon-steel washers.

1. Finish: Plain, uncoated. 2. Finish: Mechanically deposited zinc coating, ASTM B695, Class 50, for use with

galvanized steel only.

D. Stud Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grades 1015 through 1020, headed-stud type, cold-finished carbon steel; AWS D1.1, Type B.

E. Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, straight.

1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 heavy hex carbon steel. 2. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36carbon steel. 3. Washers: ASTM F 436 hardened carbon steel. 4. Finish: Plain unless indicated to be hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153, Class C.

F. Threaded Rods: ASTM A 36.

1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 heavy hex carbon steel. 2. Washers: ASTM A 36carbon steel. 3. Finish: Plain unless indicated to be hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153, Class C.

G. Deformed Bar Anchors: ASTM A496 and AWS D1.1, from cold-rolled steel with a minimum yield strength of 70 ksi and tensile strength of 80 ksi .

H. Eye Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A 108, Grade 1030, cold-finished carbon steel.

I. Sleeve Nuts: ASTM A 108, Grade 1018, cold-finished carbon steel.

2.3 PRIMER

A. Low-Emitting Materials: Paints and coatings shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

B. Steel not exposed to view or as indicated on drawings, provide chemically active, modified alkyd primer, Tnemec Series 10-99 at 2.5 mils thickness or approved equal.

1. Adhesion – ASTM D3359; no less than a rating of 5. 2. Salt Fog – ASTM B117; no blistering, cracking, rusting, or delamination of film after 500

hours exposure.


C. Interior steel exposed to view or as indicated on drawings, provide fast-curing polyamide epoxy primer, Tnemec Series 161 Tneme-Fascure (or Series 27 Typoxy), at 2.5 mil thickness, or approved equal.

1. Adhesion – ASTM D3359; no less than a rating of 5. 2. Abrasion – ASTM D4060 (CS-17 Wheel, 1,000 grams load); no more than 175 mg loss

after 1,000 cycles.

D. Exterior steel exposed to view or as indicated on drawings, provide fast-curing, two-component, moisture-cured, zinc-rich urethane primer, Tnemec Series 90-97 Tneme Zinc at 3 mil thickness, or approved equal.

1. AISC Class B rated for slip critical connections. Mean slip coefficient no less than 0.50. Tension creep not in excess of .005 inches.

2. Adhesion – ASTM D3359; no less than a rating of 5. 3. Salt Spray (Fog) – ASTM B117. No blistering, cracking, rusting, or delamination of

film. No more than 1/32 inch rust creepage at scribe after 10,000 hours exposure. 4. Non-Lead – ASTM D520 Type II; less than 0.06% lead.

E. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds and repair painting galvanized steel, with dry film containing not less than 93 percent zinc dust by weight, and complying with DOD-P-21035A or SSPC-Paint 20.

2.4 FINAL PAINTING

A. Unless noted otherwise on architectural documents for interior and exterior steel exposed to view or as indicated on drawings, provide two coats at site of Tnemec Series 73 (one coat gray, IN01, and one coat gray, IN05) Endura-Shield at 3-4 mil dry film thickness each coat, or approved equal.

2.5 GROUT

A. Non-metallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, non-metallic aggregate grout, non-corrosive, non-staining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time.

2.6 FABRICATION

A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate according to AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and AISC's "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings.”

1. Camber structural-steel members where indicated. 2. Identify high-strength structural steel according to ASTM A 6and maintain markings

until structural steel has been erected. 3. Mark and match-mark materials for field assembly. 4. Fabricate for delivery a sequence that will expedite erection and minimize field handling

of structural steel. 5. Complete structural-steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shop-

priming operations.


6. Furnish main steel members in one piece without splicing, unless otherwise noted on project drawings or approved by Structural Engineer.

B. Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible.

1. Plane thermally cut edges to be welded to comply with requirements in AWS D1.1.

C. Bolt Holes: Cut, drill, or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to metal surfaces.

D. Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting bearing loads.

E. Stud Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of stud connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed-stud connectors according to AWS D1.1 and manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Deformed Bar Anchors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of deformed bar anchors. Use stud welding gun in accordance with AWS D1.1 and manufacturer’s written instructions.

G. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for passage of other work through steel framing members.

1. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. Do not thermally cut bolt holes or enlarge holes by burning.

2. Base-Plate Holes: Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. 3. Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items indicated to receive other work.

H. Expansion and Control Joints: Provide expansion joints in steel shelf angles when part of structural steel frame; locate at vertical masonry expansion joints as indicated on drawings. The gap between ends of angles shall equal the width of the masonry expansion joint. The angles shall have support within 8” of the joints.

2.7 SHOP CONNECTIONS

A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified.

B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for welding procedure specifications, tolerances, appearance, and quality of welds and for methods used in correcting welding work.

1. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs, back gouge, and grind steel smooth. 2. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of

axes without exceeding tolerances of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" for mill material.

3. Verify that weld sizes, fabrication sequence, and equipment used for architecturally exposed structural steel will limit distortions to allowable tolerances. Prevent weld show-through on exposed steel surfaces. a. Grind butt welds flush. b. Grind or fill exposed fillet welds to smooth profile. Dress exposed welds.


C. Design of Connections: Typical AISC connections are to be used except where otherwise shown. Details shown are typical; similar details apply to similar conditions, unless otherwise indicated. Verify dimensions at site whenever possible without causing delay in the work. Promptly notify Architect whenever design of members and connections for any portion of structure are not clearly indicated.

D. Fabricate length of diagonal bracing to provide nominal tension in member when erected.

E. Connections: Weld or bolt shop connections, except as noted on project drawings.

F. Bolt field connections, except where welded connections or other connections are indicated.

2.8 SHOP PRIMING

A. Shop prime steel surfaces, except the following:

1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded members to a depth of 2 inches .

2. Surfaces to be field welded. 3. Surfaces to be high-strength bolted with slip-critical connections. 4. Galvanized surfaces.

B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and standards:

1. SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning" for all steel other than Architecturally Exposed Steel and steel to receive galvanizing.

2. SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling" for steel to be hot-dip galvanized.

C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces.

1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. 2. Apply two coats of shop paint to inaccessible surfaces after assembly or erection.

Change color of second coat to distinguish it from first.

2.9 GALVANIZING

A. All welded assemblies to be galvanized shall be prepared according to Recommended Practice for Providing High Quality Zinc Coatings (Hot-Dip) on Assembled Products (ASTM A385).

B. Hot-Dip Galvanized Finish: Apply zinc coating by the hot-dip process to structural steel according to ASTM A 123.

1. Fill vent holes and grind smooth after galvanizing.


C. All relieving angles, and lintels extending into cavities of exterior cavity walls and/or extending into the exterior wythes of exterior masonry walls are to be hot-dip galvanized unless otherwise indicated. See drawings and other sections of these specifications.

2.10 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Owner will engage an independent testing and inspecting agency to perform shop tests and inspections and prepare test reports. Such inspections and tests will not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for providing materials and fabrication procedures in compliance with specified requirements.

1. Testing agency will conduct and interpret tests and state in each report whether test specimens comply with or deviate from requirements.

2. Provide testing agency with access to places where structural-steel work is being fabricated or produced to perform tests and inspections.

B. Remove and replace or correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents.

C. Additional inspection and testing, at Contractor’s expense, will be performed to determine compliance of corrected Work with specified requirements.

D. Bolted Connections: Shop-bolted connections will be tested and inspected according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."

1. Verify that certification numbers on bolt, nut, and washer containers correspond to the identification numbers on mill test reports and that manufacturer’s symbol and grade markings appear on all bolts and nuts.

2. When direct-tension indicators are used, indicator gaps will be verified to comply with ASTM F959, Table 2.

E. Welded Connections: In addition to visual inspection, shop-welded connections will be tested and inspected according to AWS D1.1 and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option:

1. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. 2. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished

weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted. 3. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. 4. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.

F. In addition to visual inspection, shop-welded stud connectors will be tested and inspected according to requirements in AWS D1.1 for stud welding and as follows:

1. Bend tests will be performed if visual inspections reveal either a less-than- continuous 360-degree flash or welding repairs to any shear connector.

2. Tests will be conducted on additional stud connectors if weld fracture occurs on stud connectors already tested, according to requirements in AWS D1.1.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Before erection proceeds, verify elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments, with steel erector present, for compliance with requirements.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel, connections, and bracing are in place, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Do not remove temporary shoring supporting composite deck construction until cast-in-place concrete has attained its design compressive strength.

3.3 ERECTION

A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" (AISC 303-05) and "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings (AISC 360-05).

B. Base and Bearing Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting base and bearing plates. Clean bottom surface of base and bearing plates.

1. Set base and bearing plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required.

2. Weld plate washers to top of base plate. 3. Tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not

remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of base or bearing plate before packing with grout.

4. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and base or bearing plates so no voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts.

C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel and architecturally exposed structural steel within AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."

D. Align and adjust various members forming part of complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent contact with members. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment.

1. Level and plumb individual members of structure.

E. Splice members only where indicated.


F. Do not install shear studs on top flanges of beams until steel deck is installed. Shear studs will be installed on top flanges of beams by the steel deck installer.

G. Deformed bar anchors shall be installed to steel plate material in the shop unless otherwise directed. The anchors shall be welded in accordance with AWS D1.1. If the anchors cannot be installed in the shop, then they shall be installed prior to concrete placement, to fully embed anchors. Anchors not installed in shop are subject to additional testing as deemed required by the Engineer.

H. Remove erection bolts on welded, architecturally exposed structural steel; fill holes with plug welds; and grind smooth at exposed surfaces.

I. Do not use thermal cutting during erection.

J. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts.

3.4 FIELD CONNECTIONS

A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified.

B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for welding procedure specifications, tolerances, appearance, and quality of welds and for methods used in correcting welding work.

1. Comply with AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings” for bearing, adequacy of temporary connections, alignment, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds.

2. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs, back gouge, and grind steel smooth. 3. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of

axes without exceeding tolerances of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" for mill material.

4. Verify that weld sizes, fabrication sequence, and equipment used for architecturally exposed structural steel will limit distortions to allowable tolerances. Prevent weld show-through on exposed steel surfaces. a. Grind butt welds flush. b. Grind or fill exposed fillet welds to smooth profile. Dress exposed welds.

3.5 QUALITY CONTROL – SPECIAL STRUCTURAL TESTING AND INSPECTIONS

A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage qualified special inspectors to perform special inspections and to prepare test reports.

1. If special inspection of fabricator’s work is required, testing agent may test and inspect structural steel at plant before shipment. Owner and Architect/Structural Engineer of Record (SER) reserve the right to reject material not complying with Contract Documents at any time before final acceptance.

B. Definitions:


1. A.S.N.T.: The American Society for Non-Destructive Testing. 2. N.D.E.: Non-Destructive Evaluation. 3. A.W.S./C.A.W.I.: American Welding Society/Certified Associate Weld Inspector. 4. A.W.S./C.W.I.: American Welding Society/Certified Weld Inspector. 5. R.C.S.C.: Research Council on Structural Connections. 6. Special Inspector – Technical: Shall be employed by a testing agency and shall be

supervised by an A.W.S./C.W.I. with a minimum of 10 years experience or an A.S.N.T. Level III with a minimum of 10 years experience. These individuals shall satisfy the following requirements: a. Technical I: Non-Destructive Testing Technician S.N.T.-TC-1A Level I, and/or

A.W.S. Certified Associate Weld Inspector (C.A.W.I.) b. Technical II: Non-Destructive Testing Technician A.S.N.T. TC-1A Level II,

(NDE Technician II), A.W.S./C.A.W.I., with a minimum 3 years experience, or an A.W.S./C.W.I.

c. Technical III: A.S.N.T. Level III with a minimum of 10 years experience or an A.W.S./C.W.I. with a minimum of 10 years experience.

7. Special Inspector – Structural: a. Structural I: Graduate civil/structural engineer, or other personnel acceptable to

the SER, with experience in design of structural systems of this type. Inspections shall be preformed under the direct supervision of a Structural II.

b. Structural II: Civil/structural engineer regularly engaged in the design of structural systems of this type, licensed in the state in which the project is located. The licensed engineer shall review and approve all inspection reports.

c. Special Inspectors – Structural may be an employee of the SER.

C. Structural Testing and Special Inspection Requirements:

Item and Frequency Qualifications 1. High strength bolting (field installed):

a. General: 1) On a periodic basis, visually inspect mating surfaces and bolt type for all

slip-critical bolted connections for general conformance with the contract documents prior to bolting.

2) Determine the requirements for bolts, nuts, washers, paint, and installation/tightening standards are met.

3) Observe calibration procedures when such procedures are required in the contract documents and verify that selected procedure is used to tighten bolts.

Technical II

b. Slip critical bolts and tension bolts: 1) Test bolt tightening in 10% of all bolts. Test a minimum of two bolts in

each connection. Verify that all plies of connected elements have been brought into contact, at 100% of connections. Verify all tips are removed from “twist”-off bolts.

Technical II

c. Bearing bolts: 1) On a periodic basis, visually inspect to confirm all plies of connected

elements have been brought into contact, at 100% of connections. (Applies


only to bolts designed for values not requiring exclusion of threads from failure plane; all other bolts require testing as for tension bolts.)

Technical II

d. Standard: 1) Test high strength bolted connections per R.C.S.C. “Specifications for

Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts.”

2. High strength bolting (shop installed): a. For shop-fabricated work, perform tests required for field installation, except that

bolt testing may be reduced or deleted, if fabrication shop satisfies AISC Quality Certification Program – Category I, or more stringent criteria, or is approved by building official and SER.

3. Welding (General): The Special Inspector shall perform the following on a periodic

basis: a. Prior to start of fabrication, determine if fabrication shop meets the criteria for

exempting shop welds from inspection and confirm in writing to building official and SER.

b. Verify qualifications of all welders as AWS certified. c. Verify manufacturer’s certificate of compliance for weld filler materials. d. Verify proposed welding procedures and materials. e. Verify adequate preparation of faying surfaces. f. Verify preheat and interpass temperatures of steel, proper technique and sequence

of welding, and cleaning and number of passes are provided as required. Technical II

4. Welding (Field): a. Fillet Welds: On a periodic basis, visually inspect 100% of all fillet welds for size,

length, and quality, per AWS D1.1. Technical II b. Partial Penetration Welds: Test 100% of all partial penetration welds exceeding

5/16 inches, using ultrasonic testing per A.W.S. D1.1. Test 25% of all partial penetration welds less than 5/16 inches, using magnetic particle testing per ASTM E-109, performed on root pass and on finished weld.

Technical II c. Full Penetration Welds: Test 100% of all full penetration welds exceeding 5/16

inches, using ultrasonic testing per A.W.S. D1.1. Test 25% of all full penetration welds less than 5/16 inches, using magnetic particle testing per ASTM E-109, performed on root pass and on finished weld.

Technical II d. Stud Shear Connector Welds: Visually inspect 100% of installed studs for full

360 flash. Test all questionable studs, not showing full 360 flash by bending studs to 15 from vertical, away from weld discontinuity, per A.W.S. D1.1. All ceramic welding ferrules shall be removed by contractor. Randomly test all other studs by bending to 15 from vertical as noted: 1) Studs welded through deck – 15% 2) Studs welded to bare steel – 5%


Alternatively, sound 100% of installed studs, for full penetration weld, using an 8-pound maul. Test questionable studs as noted above. Welding ferrules need not be removed. Technical I

e. Steel Joists Welds: Provide testing and inspection for field welds previously described.

Technical I f. Deck Welds: On a periodic basis, visually inspect site, location, length, and burn

through for 100% of puddle welds on metal deck designed as a structural element, per AWS D1.3.

Technical I g. Miscellaneous Metals, Inserts, and Prefabricated Components: Where integrity of

the connections impact life safety or performance of the building structure, provide testing and inspection as for typical welds previously specified.

5. Welding (Shop):

a. Perform inspections as for field welding except weld testing may be reduced or deleted, if fabrication shop satisfies AISC Quality Certification Program – Category I, or more stringent criteria, and is approved by building official and SER.

Technical I

6. Structural Configuration: a. Submittals: Verify mill test reports and other submitted documentation, for

compliance with contract document. Structural I b. Materials: Verify that materials delivered to the site comply with contract

documents and approved shop drawings. Materials include: 1) Structural steel 2) Bolts 3) Electrodes. Technical I

c. Detail Compatibility: On a periodic basis: 1) Review project documents affecting integrity of the structure, including

contract documents and pertinent submittals (approved shop drawings). 2) Visit site, at intervals appropriate to the stage of construction, to perform

review of the structure and visually confirm general compliance with the project documents.

3) Inspect the following to verify member orientation, configuration, type, and size complies with details indicated on the contract documents and approved shop drawings. a) Bracing and stiffening members b) Proper applications of joint details at connections of structural

members c) Other work critical to the integrity of the building structure. Structural I


D. Conventional Testing and Inspection Requirements:

Item and Frequency Qualifications 1. High Strength Bolting:

a. Bolt Material Test: Test a minimum of two bolts of each ASTM class specified, for bolt hardness and tensile properties.

SNT-TC-1A b. Fabrication and Erection Tolerances: Verify in-place structure satisfies specified

tolerances.

E. Remove and replace and/or correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents.

F. Additional testing and inspections, at Contractor’s expense, will be performed to determine compliance of corrected Work with specified requirements.

3.6 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A. Repair damaged galvanized coatings on galvanized items with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Touchup Painting: After installation, promptly clean, prepare, and prime or reprime field connections, rust spots, and abraded surfaces of prime-painted joists and accessories bearing plates, and abutting structural steel.

1. Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC-SP 2 hand-tool cleaning or SSPC-SP 3 power-tool cleaning.

2. Apply a compatible primer of same type as shop primer used on adjacent surfaces.


LAWRENCE COUNTY STEEL JOIST FRAMING PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 05 2100 - 1 © 2014 Eckles Architecture and Engineering

SECTION 05 2100 - STEEL JOIST FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. K-series steel joists. 2. KCS-type K-series steel joists. 3. K-series steel joist substitutes. 4. Joist accessories.


1. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for installing bearing plates in concrete. 2. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry" for installing bearing plates in unit masonry. 3. Division 5 Section “Structural Steel” for furnishing bearing plates and anchors to be set

in concrete and masonry 4. Division 5 Section “Structural Steel” for Quality Control – “Special Structural Testing

and Inspections.”

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. SJI "Specifications": Steel Joist Institute's "Standard Specifications, Load Tables and Weight Tables for Steel Joists and Joist Girders."

B. Special Joists: Steel joists or joist girders requiring modification by manufacturer to support nonuniform, unequal, or special loading conditions that invalidate load tables in SJI's "Specifications."


A. Structural Performance: Provide special joists and connections capable of withstanding design loads indicated.

B. Design special joists to withstand design loads with live load deflections no greater than the following:

1. Floor Joists: Vertical deflection of 1/360 of the span. 2. Roof Joists: Vertical deflection of 1/360 of the span.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of joist, accessory, and product indicated.

STEEL JOIST FRAMING LAWRENCE COUNTY 05 2100 - 2 PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY

B. Shop Drawings: Show layout, designation, number, type, location, and spacings of joists. Include joining and anchorage details, bracing, bridging, joist accessories; splice and connection locations and details; and attachments to other construction.

C. Welding certificates.

D. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that joists comply with requirements.

E. Mill Certificates: Signed by bolt manufacturers certifying that bolts comply with requirements.

F. Qualification Data: For manufacturer and professional engineer.

G. Research/Evaluation Reports: For joists.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer certified by SJI to manufacture joists complying with applicable standard specifications and load tables of SJI "Specifications."

1. Manufacturer's responsibilities include providing professional engineering services for designing special joists to comply with performance requirements.

2. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally authorized to practices in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installation of joists that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.

B. SJI Specifications: Comply with standard specifications in SJI's "Specifications" that are applicable to types of joists indicated.

C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."


A. Deliver, store, and handle joists as recommended in SJI's "Specifications."

B. Protect joists from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Steel: Comply with SJI's "Specifications" for web and steel-angle chord members.

LAWRENCE COUNTY STEEL JOIST FRAMING PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 05 2100 - 3

1. Finish: Plain.

B. Carbon-Steel Bolts and Threaded Fasteners: ASTM A 307, Grade A, carbon-steel, hex-head bolts and threaded fasteners; carbon-steel nuts; and flat, unhardened steel washers.

1. Finish: Plain.

C. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563 heavy hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 hardened carbon-steel washers.

1. Finish: Plain.

D. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards.

2.2 PRIMERS

A. Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, or manufacturer's standard shop primer complying with performance requirements in SSPC-Paint 15.

B. Primer: Provide shop primer that complies with Division 09 painting Sections.

2.3 K-SERIES STEEL JOISTS

A. Manufacture steel joists of type indicated according to "Standard Specifications for Open Web Steel Joists, K-Series" in SJI's "Specifications," with steel-angle top- and bottom-chord members, underslung ends, and parallel top chord.

1. Joist Type: K-series steel joists and KCS-type K-series steel joists.

B. Steel Joist Substitutes: Manufacture according to "Standard Specifications for Open Web Steel Joists, K-Series" in SJI's "Specifications," with steel-angle or -channel members.

C. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for shop welding, appearance, quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

D. Provide holes in chord members for connecting and securing other construction to joists. Reduce joist load-carrying capacity proportionately to reduction in chord area.

E. Top-Chord Extensions: Extend top chords of joists with SJI's Type R top-chord extensions where indicated, complying with SJI's "Specifications."

F. Extended Ends: Extend bearing ends of joists with SJI's Type R extended ends where indicated, complying with SJI's "Specifications."

G. Camber joists according to SJI's Specifications unless noted otherwise on drawings.

H. Equip bearing ends of joists with manufacturer's standard beveled ends or sloped shoes if joist slope exceeds 1/4 inch per 12 inches.


2.4 JOIST ACCESSORIES

A. Bridging: Provide bridging anchors and number of rows of horizontal and/or diagonal bridging of material, size, and type required by SJI's "Specifications" for type of joist, chord size, spacing, and span. Furnish additional erection bridging if required for stability. See drawings for any additional bridging.

B. Steel bearing plates with integral anchorages are specified in Division 05 Section "Structural Steel."

C. Supply ceiling extensions, either extended bottom-chord elements or a separate extension unit of enough strength to support ceiling construction. Extend ends to within 1/2 inch of finished wall surface, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Supply miscellaneous accessories, including splice plates and bolts required by joist manufacturer to complete joist installation.

2.5 CLEANING AND SHOP PAINTING

A. Clean and remove loose scale, heavy rust, and other foreign materials from fabricated joists and accessories by hand-tool cleaning, SSPC-SP 2 or power-tool cleaning, SSPC-SP 3.

B. Apply 1 coat of shop primer to joists and joist accessories to be primed to provide a continuous, dry paint film not less than 1 mil thick.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine supporting substrates, embedded bearing plates, and abutting structural framing for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Do not install any joists damaged by shipment, storage, or handling.

B. Do not install joists until supporting construction is in place and secured.

C. No field modifications to the joists will be permitted unless approved by structural engineer.

D. Install joists and accessories plumb, square, and true to line; securely fasten to supporting construction according to SJI's "Specifications," joist manufacturer's written recommendations, and requirements in this Section.

LAWRENCE COUNTY STEEL JOIST FRAMING PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 05 2100 - 5

1. Before installation, splice joists delivered to Project site in more than one piece. 2. Space, adjust, and align joists accurately in location before permanently fastening. 3. Install temporary bracing and erection bridging, connections, and anchors to ensure that

joists are stabilized during construction.

E. Field weld joists to supporting steel bearing plates and framework. Coordinate welding sequence and procedure with placement of joists. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

F. Where bolting of joists to supporting steel is shown on drawings, bolt joists to supporting steel framework using high-strength structural bolts. Comply with RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or ASTM A 490 Bolts" for high-strength structural bolt installation and tightening requirements.

G. Install and connect bridging concurrently with joist erection, before construction loads are applied. Anchor ends of bridging lines at top and bottom chords if terminating at walls or beams.


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to inspect field welds and bolted connections and to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test and inspection reports.

B. Field welds will be visually inspected according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M. 1. For extent and frequency of inspection, see Division 5 “Structural Steel” for Quality

Control – “Special Structural Testing and Inspections.”

C. In addition to visual inspection, field welds will be tested according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following procedures, as applicable:

1. Radiographic Testing: ASTM E 94. 2. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709. 3. Ultrasonic Testing: ASTM E 164. 4. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. 5. For extent and frequency of testing, see Division 5 “Structural Steel” for Quality Control

– “Special Structural Testing and Inspections.”

D. Bolted connections will be visually inspected.

E. In addition to visual inspection, high-strength, field-bolted connections will be tested and verified according to procedures in RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or ASTM A 490 Bolts."

F. Correct deficiencies in Work that test and inspection reports have indicated are not in compliance with specified requirements.

G. Additional testing will be performed to determine compliance of corrected Work with specified requirements.



A. Touchup Painting: After installation, promptly clean, prepare, and prime or reprime field connections, rust spots, and abraded surfaces of prime-painted joists and accessories.

1. Clean and prepare surfaces by hand-tool cleaning, SSPC-SP 2, or power-tool cleaning, SSPC-SP 3.

2. Apply a compatible primer of same type as shop primer used on adjacent surfaces.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure that joists and accessories are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.


LAWRENCE COUNTY STEEL DECKING PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 05 3100 - 1 © 2014 Eckles Architecture and Engineering

SECTION 05 3100 - STEEL DECKING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Roof deck. 2. Composite floor deck 3. Non-composite form deck.


1. Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete fill. 2. Division 05 Section “Structural Steel” for Quality Control – “Special Structural Testing

and Inspections.” 3. Division 09 Painting sections for repair of primed deck.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of deck, accessory, and product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Show layout and types of deck panels, anchorage details, reinforcing channels, pans, cut deck openings, special jointing, accessories, and attachments to other construction.

C. Product Certificates: For each type of steel deck, signed by product manufacturer.

D. Welding certificates.

E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, indicating that each of the following complies with requirements:

1. Power-actuated mechanical fasteners.

F. Research/Evaluation Reports: For steel deck.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.

B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."

STEEL DECKING LAWRENCE COUNTY 05 3100 - 2 PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY

C. AISI Specifications: Comply with calculated structural characteristics of steel deck according to AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members."


A. Protect steel deck from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling.

B. Stack steel deck on platforms or pallets and slope to provide drainage. Protect with a waterproof covering and ventilate to avoid condensation. 1. Protect and ventilate acoustical cellular roof deck with factory-installed insulation to

maintain insulation free of moisture.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of sound-absorbing insulation strips in topside ribs of acoustical deck with roofing installation specified in Division 07 Section to ensure protection of insulation strips against damage from effects of weather and other causes.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Steel Deck:

a. ASC Profiles, Inc. b. Canam Steel Corp.;The Canam Manac Group. c. Consolidated Systems, Inc. d. DACS, Inc. e. D-Mac Industries Inc. f. Epic Metals Corporation. g. Marlyn Steel Decks, Inc. h. New Millennium Building Systems, LLC. i. Nucor Corp.; Vulcraft Division. j. Roof Deck, Inc. k. United Steel Deck, Inc. l. Valley Joist; Division of EBSCO Industries, Inc. m. Verco Manufacturing Co. n. Wheeling Corrugating Company; Div. of Wheeling-Pittsburgh Steel Corporation.

LAWRENCE COUNTY STEEL DECKING PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 05 3100 - 3

2.2 ROOF DECK

A. Steel Roof Deck: Fabricate panels, without top-flange stiffening grooves, to comply with "SDI Specifications and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck," in SDI Publication No. 30, and with the following:

1. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33 with G60 zinc coating.

2. Deck Profile: As indicated. 3. Profile Depth: As indicated. 4. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: As indicated. 5. Span Condition: Triple span or more. 6. Side Laps: Overlapped or interlocking seam at Contractor's option.

2.3 COMPOSITE FLOOR DECK

A. Composite Steel Floor Deck: Fabricate panels, with integrally embossed or raised pattern ribs and interlocking side laps, to comply with "SDI Specifications and Commentary for Composite Steel Floor Deck," in SDI Publication No. 30, with the minimum section properties indicated, and with the following: 1. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 50, G60

zinc coating. 2. Deck Profile: As indicated. 3. Profile Depth: As indicated. 4. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: As indicated. 5. Span Condition: Triple span or more.

2.4 NONCOMPOSITE FORM DECK

A. Non-composite Steel Form Deck: Fabricate ribbed-steel sheet non-composite form-deck panels to comply with "SDI Specifications and Commentary for Non-composite Steel Form Deck," in SDI Publication No. 30, with the minimum section properties indicated, and with the following:

1. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 50 min. with G60 zinc coating.

2. Side Laps: Overlapped or interlocking seam at Contractor's option.

2.5 ACCESSORIES

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard accessory materials for deck that comply with requirements indicated.

B. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, low-velocity, power-actuated or pneumatically driven carbon-steel fasteners; or self-drilling, self-threading screws.

C. Side-Lap Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, hexagonal washer head; self-drilling, carbon-steel screws, No. 10 minimum diameter.


D. Flexible Closure Strips: Vulcanized, closed-cell, synthetic rubber.

E. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi, not less than 0.0359-inch design uncoated thickness, of same material and finish as deck; of profile indicated or required for application.

F. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi, of same material and finish as deck, and of thickness and profile recommended by SDI Publication No. 30 for overhang and slab depth.

G. Column Closures, End Closures, Z-Closures, and Cover Plates: Steel sheet, of same material, finish, and thickness as deck, unless otherwise indicated.

H. Weld Washers: Uncoated steel sheet, shaped to fit deck rib, 0.0747 inch thick, with factory-punched hole of 3/8-inch minimum diameter.

I. Recessed Sump Pans: Single-piece steel sheet, 0.0747 inch thick, of same material and finish as deck, with 3-inch- wide flanges and sloped recessed pans of 1-1/2-inch minimum depth. For drains, cut holes in the field.

J. Flat Sump Plate: Single-piece steel sheet, 0.0747 inch thick, of same material and finish as deck. For drains, cut holes in the field.

K. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780, SSPC-Paint 20 or DOD-P-21035, with dry film containing a minimum of 94 percent zinc dust by weight.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine supporting frame and field conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.


A. Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and commentary in SDI Publication No. 30, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section.

B. Install temporary shoring before placing deck panels, if required to meet deflection limitations.

C. Locate deck bundles to prevent overloading of supporting members.

D. Place deck panels on supporting frame and adjust to final position with ends accurately aligned and bearing on supporting frame before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or contract side-lap interlocks.

E. Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting frame without warp or deflection.


F. Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work projecting through or adjacent to deck.

G. Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength, continuity of deck, and support of other work.

H. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used for correcting welding work.

I. Mechanical fasteners may be used in lieu of welding to fasten deck. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to deck manufacturer's written instructions.

3.3 ROOF-DECK INSTALLATION

A. Fasten roof-deck panels to steel supporting members by arc spot (puddle) welds of the surface diameter indicated or arc seam welds with an equal perimeter that is not less than 1-1/2 inches long, and as follows:

1. Weld Diameter: 5/8 inch, nominal. 2. Weld Spacing: Unless noted otherwise, weld edge and interior ribs of deck units with a

minimum of two welds per deck unit at each support. Space welds 12 inches apart in the field of roof and 6 inches apart in roof corners and perimeter.

B. Side-Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening: Fasten side laps and perimeter edges of panels between supports, at intervals not exceeding the lesser of 1/2 of the span or 36 inches, and as follows:

1. Mechanically fasten with self-drilling, No. 10 diameter or larger, carbon-steel screws. 2. Fasten with a minimum of 1-1/2-inch- long welds.

C. End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2 inches, with end joints as follows:

1. End Joints: Lapped 2 inches minimum or butted at Contractor's option.

D. Roof Sump Pans and Sump Plates: Install over openings provided in roof deck and weld flanges to top of deck. Space welds not more than 12 inches apart with at least one weld at each corner.

1. Install reinforcing channels or zees in ribs to span between supports and weld.

E. Miscellaneous Roof-Deck Accessories: Install ridge and valley plates, finish strips, end closures, and reinforcing channels according to deck manufacturer's written instructions. Weld to substrate to provide a complete deck installation.

1. Weld cover plates at changes in direction of roof-deck panels, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Flexible Closure Strips: Install flexible closure strips over partitions, walls, and where indicated. Install with adhesive according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure complete closure.


G. Sound-Absorbing Insulation: Installation into topside ribs of deck as specified in in Division 07 Section.

3.4 FLOOR-DECK INSTALLATION

A. Fasten floor-deck panels to steel supporting members by arc spot (puddle) welds of the surface diameter indicated and as follows:

1. Weld Diameter: 5/8 inch nominal. 2. Weld Spacing: Weld edge ribs of panels at each support. Space additional welds an

average of 12 inches apart, but not more than 18 inches apart. 3. Weld Washers: Install weld washers at each weld location.

B. Side-Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening: Fasten side laps and perimeter edges of panels between supports, at intervals not exceeding the lesser of half of the span or 36 inches, and as follows:

1. Mechanically fasten with self-drilling, No. 10 diameter or larger, carbon-steel screws.

2. Fasten with a minimum of 1-1/2 inch (38-mm) long welds.

C. End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 2 inches with end joints as follows:

1. End Joints: Lapped or butted at Contractor's option.

D. Pour Stops: Weld steel sheet pour stops and girder fillers to supporting structure according to SDI recommendations, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Floor-Deck Closures: Weld steel sheet column closures, cell closures, and Z-closures to deck, according to SDI recommendations, to provide tight-fitting closures at open ends of ribs and sides of deck.


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Field welds will be subject to inspection. See Division 5 “Structural Steel Framing” for Quality Control – “Special Structural Testing and Inspections.”

C. Testing agency will report inspection results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect.

D. Remove and replace work that does not comply with specified requirements.

E. Additional inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of corrected work with specified requirements.



A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on both surfaces of deck with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Repair Painting: Wire brushing, cleaning, and repair painting of rust spots, welds, and abraded areas of both deck surfaces are included in Division 09 Section.

C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions to ensure that steel deck is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.


LAWRENCE COUNTY STRUCTURAL COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 05 4000 - 1 © 2014 Eckles Architecture and Engineering

SECTION 05 4000 – STRUCTURAL COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Cold-Formed Light Gage Metal Framing (LGMF) for structural applications, including:

a. Exterior non-load-bearing wall and miscellaneous framing. b. Curtain wall and masonry veneer backup framing. c. Falsework metal framing at gable roof intersections

2. Design and Engineering requirements for load-resisting assemblies. 3. Exterior wall sheathing.

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry" for stone and brick veneer construction. 2. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for masonry shelf angles and connections. 3. Division 07 Section "Air Barriers" for continuity of air barrier system. 4. Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation" for cavity wall rigid insulation. 5. Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for interior non-load-bearing, metal-stud

framing, ceiling bulkhead and ceiling-suspension assemblies.


A. Design load information indicated represents non-factored service loads unless otherwise noted. Design and fabricate systems and assemblies using design load criteria indicated or otherwise required by authorities having jurisdiction. Coordinate with applicable notes on structural Drawings.

B. Structural Performance: Provide cold-formed metal framing capable of resisting design loads within limits and under conditions indicated. 1. Deflection Limits: Design framing systems to withstand design loads without deflections

greater than the following: a. Exterior Non-Load Bearing Framing (no Masonry/Stone Veneer): Horizontal

deflection of L/360 of the wall height. b. Exterior Masonry/Stone Veneer Backup Framing: Horizontal deflection of L/720 of

the wall height.

2. Design and lay out framing systems to provide for movement of framing members without damage or overstressing, sheathing failure, connection failure, undue strain on fasteners and anchors, or other detrimental effects when subject to seasonal and cyclic day/night temperature ranges.

3. Design and lay out framing system to maintain clearances at openings, to allow for construction tolerances, and to accommodate live load deflection of primary building structure.

STRUCTURAL COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING LAWRENCE COUN TY 05 4000 - 2 PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY

C. Cold-Formed Steel Framing, General: Design according to AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - General Provisions" (2007 edition) and "North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members" (2001 Edition with 2004 Supplement,) 1. Headers: Design according to AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Header

Design."

2. Exterior and Interior Stud Wall Framing: Design according to AISI’s “Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing – Wall Design.”

3. Lateral Design: Design for lateral loading on cold-formed framing according to AISI’s “Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing – Lateral Design.”

4. Design exterior non-load-bearing wall framing to accommodate horizontal deflection without regard for contribution of sheathing materials.

5. Structural Framing Deflections: Design framing systems to withstand deflection of structural steel without damage or overstressing, sheathing failure, connection failure, undue strain on fasteners and anchors, or other detrimental effects a. Exterior perimeter framing: Vertical deflections of L/360 of beam span for live loads;

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data – include storage, handling and installation requirements and recommendations: 1. For each type of cold-formed metal framing product and accessory indicated. 2. Wall sheathing and accessories

B. Shop Drawings: Show layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold-formed metal framing; fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners. Show reinforcing channels, opening framing, supplemental framing, strapping, bracing, bridging, splices, accessories, connection details, and attachment to adjoining work. Drawings to provide an elevation for each wall.

C. Calculations: For cold-formed metal framing indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified Pennsylvania professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1. Description of design criteria. 2. Engineering analysis depicting stress and deflection (stiffness) requirements for each framing

application. 3. Selection of framing components, accessories and welded connection requirements. 4. Verification of attachments to structure and adjacent framing components.

D. Manufacturer's Certificate: For sheathing and insulating deck panels. Certify panels will conform to specified performance requirements.

E. Welding certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel.

F. Qualification Data: For professional engineer.


A. Insulating Panel Manufacturer: Company that regularly manufactures polyisocyanurate and fully assembled nailbase insulation panels in-house with no outside fabrication operations.

LAWRENCE COUNTY STRUCTURAL COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 05 4000 - 3

B. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings, design calculations, and other structural data by a qualified professional engineer. 1. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to

practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of cold-formed metal framing that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, engaged by Owner, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM E 329 to conduct the testing indicated. 1. Scope, definitions and requirements as specified in separate agreement between Owner and

Testing Agency, available for limited review by contacting Construction Manager.

D. Product Tests: Mill certificates or data from a qualified independent testing agency indicating steel sheet complies with requirements, including base-metal thickness, yield strength, tensile strength, total elongation, chemical requirements, and metallic-coating thickness.

E. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code--Steel," and AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."

F. AISI Specifications and Standards: Comply with: 1. "North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members" 2. "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - General Provisions." 3. "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Header Design."

G. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." 1. Require representatives of each entity directly concerned with Work of this section to attend,

including affected subcontractors and separate Prime Contractors if applicable.

2. Review: a. Field quality control b. Quality standards c. Manufacturers’ installation instructions d. Layout and sequencing of installation, and coordination with other Work e. Substrate conditions. f. Decking, insulation, sheathing and air barrier g. Finishes and preparation for finishes h. Warranty requirements.


A. Protect cold-formed metal framing from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling.

B. Store cold-formed metal framing, protect with a waterproof covering, and ventilate to avoid condensation.

C. Block stored members with slight slope to permit draining, and prevent ponding or accumulation of water on the interior of metal members.


D. Stack panel products flat and off the ground, with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. Do not use panels that become wet before installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide cold-formed metal framing by a current member of Steel Stud Manufacturers Association. 1. Stud Wall and Masonry Backup Wall Assemblies:

a. Basis of Design: UltraSTEEL by ClarkDietrich Building Systems b. Marino\WARE c. Telling Industries

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1003, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of grade and coating weight as follows: 1. Grade: As required by structural performance. 2. Coating: G60 typical, G90 at masonry backup assemblies.

B. Steel Sheet for Vertical Deflection Clips: ASTM A 653, structural steel, zinc coated, of grade and coating as follows: 1. Grade: As required by structural performance. 2. Coating: G90.

2.03 EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING

A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened and dimpled flanges, and as follows: 1. Application: Exterior curtain wall/ veneer backup 2. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0428 inch (18 gage), or as required to meet design

criteria. 3. Flange Width: as required to meet design criteria. 4. Depth: As indicated on the drawings 5. Spacing: As required to meet design criteria, max. 16-in. o.c.

B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, and as follows: 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0538 inch (16 gage). 2. Flange Width: 1-1/4 inches to 2-1/4 inches.

C. Vertical Deflection Clips: Manufacturer's standard bypass or head clips, capable of accommodating upward and downward vertical displacement of primary structure through positive mechanical attachment to stud web.


D. Deflection Tracks: Manufacturer's double, deep-leg, U-shaped steel tracks, consisting of nested inner and outer tracks; unpunched, with unstiffened flanges. 1. Outer Track: Of web depth to allow free vertical movement of inner track, with flanges

designed to support horizontal and lateral loads and transfer them to the primary structure, and as follows: a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0428 inch (18 gage). b. Flange Width: 1 inch plus twice the design gap.

2. Inner Track: Of web depth indicated, and as follows: a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0428 inch (18 gage). b. Flange Width: Dimension equal to sum of outer deflection track flange width plus 1

inch.

3. Contractor's option: Single Deflection Track a. Manufacturer's single, deep-leg, U-shaped steel track; unpunched, with unstiffened

flanges, of web depth to contain studs while allowing free vertical movement, with flanges designed to support horizontal and lateral loads and transfer them to the primary structure, and as follows:

b. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0538 inch (16 gage).

c. Flange Width: 1 inch plus twice the design gap.

E. Drift Clips: Manufacturer's standard bypass or head clips, capable of isolating wall stud from upward and downward vertical displacement and lateral drift of primary structure.

2.04 FRAMING ACCESSORIES

A. Fabricate steel-framing accessories from steel sheet, ASTM A 1003, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of same grade and coating weight used for framing members.

B. Provide accessories of manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration, unless otherwise indicated, including the following, as appropriate: 1. Supplementary framing. 2. Bracing, bridging, and solid blocking. 3. Anchor clips. 4. End clips. 5. Foundation clips. 6. Gusset plates. 7. Stud kickers, knee braces, and girts. 8. Hole reinforcing plates. 9. Backer plates.

2.05 ANCHORS, CLIPS, AND FASTENERS

A. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36, zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 123.

B. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, threaded carbon-steel hex-headed bolts or headless hooked bolts, and carbon-steel nuts; and flat, hardened-steel washers; zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 153, Class C.

C. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 5 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.


D. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

E. Mechanical Fasteners: ASTM C 1513, corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-tapping steel drill screws. 1. Head Type: Low-profile head beneath sheathing, manufacturer's standard elsewhere.

F. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards.

2.06 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20 or ASTM A 780.

B. Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I; and clean, natural sand, ASTM C 404. Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand, by volume, with minimum water required for placement and hydration.

C. Nonmetallic, Nonshrink Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage-compensating agents, and plasticizing and water-reducing agents, complying with ASTM C 1107, with fluid consistency and 30-minute working time.

D. Shims: Load bearing, high-density multimonomer plastic, nonleaching.

E. Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch thick, selected from manufacturer's standard widths to match width of bottom track or rim track members.

F. Electrical Grommets: Snap bushing with hole-diameter of 1-1/8 inches 1. Basis-of-Design product: Heyco Snap Bushing.

2.07 WALL SHEATHING

A. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board; ASTM C 1177, or Cellulose Fiber-Reinforced Gypsum Sheathing: ASTM C 1278. 1. Type and Thickness: Regular, 1/2 inch thick.

2. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements: a. "Dens-Glass Gold" by G-P Gypsum Corp. b. “GlasRoc” by BPB America Inc. c. "Fiberock Sheathing with Aqua-Tough" by United States Gypsum Co.

2.08 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened, according to referenced AISI's specifications and standards, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section. 1. Fabricate framing assemblies using jigs or templates.

2. Cut framing members by sawing, plasma cutting or shearing; do not torch cut.


3. Fasten cold-formed metal framing members by welding, screw fastening, bolt connection, or riveting as standard with fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted. a. Comply with AWS D1.3 requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and

quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, with screw penetrating joined members by not less than three exposed screw threads.

4. Fasten other materials to cold-formed metal framing by welding, bolting, or screw fastening, according to Shop Drawings.

B. Reinforce, stiffen, and brace framing assemblies to withstand handling, delivery, and erection stresses. Lift fabricated assemblies to prevent damage or permanent distortion.

C. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate assemblies in compliance with AISI fabrication tolerances for level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and as follows: 1. Spacing: Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from plan

location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials.

2. Squareness: Fabricate each cold-formed metal framing assembly to a maximum out-of-square tolerance of 1/8 inch.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. General: 1. Examine supporting substrates and abutting structural framing for compliance with

requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

2. Inspect conditions under which installation is to be performed and submit written notification if such conditions are unacceptable to installer. Notify Architect and Owner within 24 hours of inspection.

3. Beginning construction activities before unacceptable conditions have been corrected is prohibited.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Install load bearing shims or grout between the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and the top of foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations to ensure a uniform bearing surface on supporting concrete or masonry construction.

B. Install sealer gaskets to isolate the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and the top of foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations.



A. Cold-formed metal framing may be shop or field fabricated for installation, or it may be field assembled.

B. Install cold-formed metal framing according to AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - General Provisions" and to manufacturer's written instructions unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

C. Install shop- or field-fabricated, cold-formed framing and securely anchor to supporting structure. 1. Screw, bolt, or weld wall panels at horizontal and vertical junctures to produce flush, even,

true-to-line joints with maximum variation in plane and true position between fabricated panels not exceeding 1/16 inch.

D. Install cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened.

1. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut.

2. Fasten cold-formed metal framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch fastening, or riveting. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted. a. Comply with AWS D1.3 requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and

quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, and complying with requirements for spacing, edge distances, and screw penetration.

E. Install framing members in one-piece lengths unless splice connections are indicated for track or tension members.

F. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads comparable in intensity to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place, undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent connections to framing are secured.

G. Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with cold-formed metal framing. Independently frame both sides of joints.

H. Install insulation, specified in Division 07 Section "Building Insulation," in built-up exterior framing members, such as headers, sills, boxed joists, and multiple studs at openings, that are inaccessible on completion of framing work.

I. Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's standard punched openings.

J. Erection Tolerances: Install cold-formed metal framing level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and as follows: 1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from plan location.

Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials.


3.04 EXTERIOR INSTALLATION

A. Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor to supporting structure as indicated.

B. Fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom track, unless otherwise indicated. Space studs as follows: 1. Stud Spacing: 16 inches, or as otherwise indicated, or in compliance with approved

submitted engineering calculations.

C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or warped surfaces and similar requirements.

D. Isolate non-load-bearing steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of vertical loads while providing lateral support. 1. Install single-leg deflection tracks and anchor to building structure. 2. Install double deep-leg deflection tracks and anchor outer track to building structure. 3. Connect vertical deflection clips to bypassing infill studs and anchor to building structure. 4. Connect drift clips to cold formed metal framing and anchor to building structure.

E. Install horizontal bridging in wall studs, spaced in rows indicated on Shop Drawings but not more than 48 inches apart. Fasten at each stud intersection. 1. Top Bridging for Single Deflection Track: Install row of horizontal bridging within 12

inches of single deflection track. Install a combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated and stud or stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness matching studs. Fasten flat straps to stud flanges and secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges. a. Install solid blocking at centers indicated on Shop Drawings.

2. Bridging: Proprietary bridging bars installed according to manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including stud kickers, web stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, fasteners, and stud girts, to provide a complete and stable wall-framing system.

3.05 GYPSUM SHEATHING INSTALLATION

A. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.

B. Coordinate sheathing installation with installation of materials installed over sheathing to minimize exposure of sheathing to weather.

C. Comply with GA-253 and with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Cut boards at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of the work; fit tightly against

abutting construction, except as provided below.

2. Fasten gypsum sheathing to cold-formed metal framing with screws, complying with manufacturer’s recommendations and the following: a. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. b. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's "International Building Code."


3. Install boards with a 3/8-inch gap where non-load-bearing construction abuts structural elements.

4. Install boards with a 1/4-inch gap where they abut masonry or similar materials that might retain moisture, to prevent wicking.

D. Coordinate sheathing installation with flashing and joint sealant installation so these materials are installed in the sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing through completed exterior wall assembly.

E. Apply fasteners so screw heads bear tightly against face of sheathing boards but do not cut into facing.

F. Do not bridge building expansion joints with sheathing; cut and space edges to match spacing of structural support elements.

G. Horizontal Installation: Install sheathing with V-grooved edge down and tongue edge up. Interlock tongue with groove to bring long edges in contact with edges of adjacent boards without forcing. Abut ends of boards over centers of studs, and stagger end joints of adjacent boards not less than one stud spacing. Attach boards at perimeter and within field of board to each steel stud at approximately 8 inches o.c. and set back a minimum of 3/8 inch from edges and ends of boards.

H. Vertical Installation: Install 48-inch-wide gypsum sheathing boards vertically with vertical edges centered over flanges of steel studs. Abut ends and edges of each board with those of adjacent boards. Screw-attach boards at perimeter and within field of board to each steel stud at approximately 8 inches o.c. and set back a minimum of 3/8 inch from edges and ends of boards. 1. For boards with tongue-and-groove edges, install with V-grooved edge down and tongue

edge up. Interlock tongue with groove to bring long edges in contact with edges of adjacent boards without forcing.

I. Air-Infiltration Barrier Application: Cover sheathing with air-infiltration barrier as specified in Section 07 2726 Air Barriers.

3.06 SHEATHING JOINT-AND-PENETRATION TREATMENT

A. Seal sheathing joints according to sheathing manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Apply glass-fiber sheathing tape to glass-mat gypsum sheathing board joints, and apply and

trowel silicone emulsion sealant to embed entire face of tape in sealant. Apply sealant to exposed fasteners with a trowel so fasteners are completely covered. Seal other penetrations and openings.

3.07 FLEXIBLE FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Apply flexible flashing where indicated to comply with manufacturers written instructions. 1. Prime substrates as recommended by flashing manufacturer. 2. Lap seams and junctures with other materials at least 4 inches, except that at flashing flanges

of other construction, laps need not exceed flange width. 3. Lap weather-resistant building paper over flashing at heads of openings. 4. After flashing has been applied, roll surfaces with a hard rubber or metal roller to ensure that

flashing is completely adhered to substrates.



A. Testing: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections, as required by authorities having jurisdiction and as indicated below, and prepare test and inspection reports 1. Field and shop welds will be subject to testing and inspecting.

B. Field and shop welds will be subject to testing and inspecting.

C. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect.

D. Remove and replace work where test results indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements.

E. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.


A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed cold-formed metal framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure that cold-formed metal framing is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.


LAWRENCE COUNTY METAL FABRICATIONS PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 05 5000 - 1 © 2014 Eckles Architecture and Engineering

SECTION 05 5000 - METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following fabrications, including Design and Engineering requirements for load-resisting assemblies, and coordination with other assemblies and systems. 1. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment. 2. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified in

other Sections. 3. Loose bearing and leveling plates for applications where they are not specified in other

Sections. 4. Loose steel lintels 5. Miscellaneous steel trim including steel edgings and angles. 6. Roof perimeter accessory steel where not specified in other Sections.

B. Related Sections: 1. Division 03 and 04 Sections for loose steel lintels, anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, and

wedge-type inserts indicated to be cast into concrete or built into unit masonry. 2. Division 05 Section “Structural Steel Framing” for general structural requirements of steel

design and fabrication.


A. Design load information indicated represent non-factored service loads unless otherwise noted. Design and fabricate systems and assemblies using design load criteria indicated or otherwise required by authorities having jurisdiction. Coordinate with applicable structural notes on Drawings

B. Thermal Movements: Provide exterior metal fabrications that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

C. Structural Performance of Ladders: Provide ladders capable of withstanding the effects of loads and stresses within limits and under conditions specified in ANSI A14.3.

D. Structural Performance of Gratings: Provide bearing bars and cross bars meeting size and spacing requirements indicated in the Drawings. If bearing bar size and spacing are not indicated, provide bar grating capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Elevator sump cover: Uniform superimposed load of 60 psf. 2. Limit deflection due to superimposed load to the smaller of the Span/360 or 1/4 inch.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

METAL FABRICATIONS LAWRENCE COUNTY 05 5000 - 2 PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY

A. Product Data: 1. Clips and anchorage devices 2. Paint products 3. Grout.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal fabrications. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections.

Show anchorage and accessory items.

2. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other Sections.

3. Structural analyses where delegated design is indicated, or with significant deviations from basis of design assemblies.


A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel." 2. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."

B. Engineering Responsibility: Where indicated, preparation of Shop Drawings, design calculations, and other structural data by a qualified professional engineer. 1. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to

practice in Pennsylvania and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated.

2. Engineering services are defined as those performed for fabrication and installation of assemblies that are similar to those specifically indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.

C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct at least one conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." 1. Require representatives of each entity directly concerned with metal fabrications to attend,

including the following: a. Contractor's superintendent. b. Affected subcontractors and separate Prime Contractors.

2. Review: a. Where indicated, special inspection and testing and inspecting agency procedures for

field quality control. b. Quality and appearance standards for various fabrication installations. c. Layout and sequencing of installation d. Interface with, attachment to, or incorporation within building structural components,

including steel framing, masonry or concrete construction, existing construction. e. Potential spatial or scheduling conflicts with other Work. f. Shop finishes and preparation for scheduled field finishes. g. Roof perimeter attachment requirements h. Other special installation requirements. i. Adjusting and cleaning

LAWRENCE COUNTY METAL FABRICATIONS PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 05 5000 - 3


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the

Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating metal fabrications without field measurements. Coordinate wall and other contiguous construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.

2. Provide allowance for trimming and fitting at site.

1.06 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal fabrications. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

B. Coordinate installation of steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete that are specified in this Section, or attached to structural steel or unit masonry assemblies, but required for work of another Section. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 METALS, GENERAL

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.

2.02 FERROUS METALS

A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36.

B. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade B cold-formed steel tubing.

C. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, standard weight (Schedule 40), unless another weight is indicated or required by structural loads.

D. Slotted Channel Framing: Cold-formed metal channels with continuous slot complying with MFMA-3. 1. Size of Channels: 1-5/8 by 1-5/8 inches.

2. Material: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 653, commercial steel, Type B, with G90 coating.

E. Cast Iron: ASTM A 48, Class 30, unless another class is indicated or required by structural loads.


2.03 FASTENERS

A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.

B. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A; with hex nuts, ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers.

C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36. 1. Provide hot-dip or mechanically deposited, zinc-coated anchor bolts where item being

fastened is indicated to be galvanized.

D. Eyebolts: ASTM A 489.

E. Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.3.

F. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1.

G. Wood Screws: Flat head, ASME B18.6.1.

H. Plain Washers: Round, ASME B18.22.1.

I. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, ASME B18.21.1.

J. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 1. Material for Anchors in Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to comply

with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5.

2. Material for Anchors in Exterior Locations: Alloy Group 1 stainless-steel bolts complying with ASTM F 593 and nuts complying with ASTM F 594.


A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded.

B. Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with SSPC-Paint 20 or SSPC-Paint 29 and compatible with scheduled topcoat. 1. Benjamin Moore & Co.; Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer CM18/19. 2. Carboline Company; Carbozinc 621. 3. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc.; Aquapon Zinc-Rich Primer 97-670. 4. Sherwin-Williams Company (The); Corothane I GalvaPac Zinc Primer. 5. Tnemec Company, Inc.; Tneme-Zinc 90-97.

C. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel, complying with SSPC-Paint 20.

D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.


E. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.

F. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 4000 psi, unless otherwise indicated.

2.05 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work.

D. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.

E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion

resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.

3. Remove welding flux immediately.

4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.

F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) screws or bolts, unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous.

G. Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.

H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items.

I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads. 1. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with

integrally welded steel strap anchors, 1/8 by 1-1/2 inches, with a minimum 6-inch embedment and 2-inch hook, not less than 8 inches from ends and corners of units and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.


2.06 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work.

B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction retained by framing and supports. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware, hangers, and similar items.

C. Fabricate supports for operable partitions from continuous steel beams of sizes indicated with attached bearing plates, anchors, and braces as indicated. Drill bottom flanges of beams to receive partition track hanger rods; locate holes where indicated on operable partition Shop Drawings.

D. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports where at exterior locations and in or attached to exterior walls.

E. Prime miscellaneous framing and supports with zinc-rich primer, except as otherwise indicated.

2.07 LOOSE STEEL LINTELS

A. Fabricate loose steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings and recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated, with member size as indicated in Loose Lintel Schedule on Structural Drawings. Weld adjoining members together to form a single unit where indicated.

B. Hot-dip galvanize loose steel lintels located in exterior walls, and provide high-performance shop prime coat on surfaces exposed to view. Use products specified in Section 05 1200 for exterior steel surfaces exposed to view and compatible with finish coat scheduled in Division 09 Section for painting. 1. Basis-of-Design: Fast-curing, two-component, moisture-cured, zinc-rich urethane primer,

Tnemec Series 90-97 Tnemec Zinc at 3 mil thickness, or approved equal. a. Adhesion – ASTM D3359; no less than a rating of 5. b. Salt Spray (Fog) – ASTM B117. No blistering, cracking, rusting, or delamination of

film. No more than 1/32 inch rust creepage at scribe after 10,000 hours exposure. c. Non-Lead – ASTM D520 Type II; less than 0.06% lead.

2.08 LOOSE ROOF NAILER ATTACHMENT STEEL

A. Fabricate loose steel pieces, continuous lengths and clips, from steel angles and bent plates, of size and dimensions indicated or otherwise required to anchor dimension lumber to structure at roof perimeters, expansion joints, parapets and miscellaneous roof transitions. Drill pieces to receive anchor bolts and for grouting.

B. Size and detail pieces for field welding or bolting to deck bearing plates or to joist top chords, or for grouting to top of CMU wall, and to receive through-bolts for wood attachment at size and spacing indicated.

C. Galvanize pieces after fabrication.


2.09 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES

A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting.

B. Galvanize plates after fabrication when installed in exterior walls.

2.10 STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES

A. Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported from concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with not less than two integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete.

2.11 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM

A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed field splices where possible.

B. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with other work. 1. Provide with integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete or masonry

construction.

C. Galvanize exterior miscellaneous steel trim, except as otherwise indicated.

D. Prime interior miscellaneous steel trim, with zinc-rich primer, except as otherwise indicated.

2.12 GRATING ASSEMBLIES

A. Acceptable Bar Grating Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. All American Grating, Inc. 2. Barnett/Bates Corp. 3. Borden Metal Products (Canada) Limited. 4. Fisher & Ludlow. 5. IKG Industries; a Harsco Company. 6. Marwas Steel Co.; Laurel Steel Products Division. 7. Ohio Gratings, Inc. 8. Tru-Weld.

B. Form from materials of size, thickness, and shapes indicated, but not less than that needed to support indicated loads.

C. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints.

D. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Fabricate and space the anchoring devices to secure gratings, frames, and supports rigidly in place and to support indicated loads.


E. Finish gratings, frames, and supports after assembly. 1. Galvanizing: For those items indicated for galvanizing, apply zinc coating by the hot-dip

process complying with ASTM A 123.

2.13 FINISHES, GENERAL

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.

2.14 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES

A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with applicable standard listed below: 1. ASTM A 123, for galvanizing steel and iron products. 2. ASTM A 153, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware.

B. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications: 1. Exteriors (SSPC Zone 1B) and Items Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Primer: SSPC-

SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 2. Interiors (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."

C. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those with galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. 1. Verify compatibility with scheduled finish coating as specified in Division 09 Section for

Painting.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels.

B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.


C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion





D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag bolts, wood screws, and other connectors.

E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction.

F. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will come into contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.

3.02 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings.

B. Anchor supports for ceiling mounted projector brackets securely to and rigidly brace from building structure.

C. Support steel girders on solid grouted masonry, concrete, or steel pipe columns. Secure girders with anchor bolts embedded in grouted masonry or concrete or with bolts through top plates of pipe columns. 1. Where grout space under bearing plates is indicated for girders supported on concrete or

masonry, install as specified in "Installing Bearing and Leveling Plates" Article.

D. Install pipe columns on concrete footings with grouted baseplates. Position and grout column baseplates as specified in "Installing Bearing and Leveling Plates" Article. 1. Grout baseplates of columns supporting steel girders after girders are installed and leveled.

E. Finish interior and exterior exposed ferrous metal surfaces as specified in Section 09 9100 Painting, unless otherwise indicated.

3.03 INSTALLING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES

A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates.


B. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with grout. 1. Use nonshrink, nonmetallic grout in concealed and exposed locations. 2. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain.

3.04 INSTALLING METAL BAR GRATINGS

A. General: Install gratings to comply with recommendations of referenced metal bar grating standards that apply to grating types and bar sizes indicated, including installation clearances and standard anchoring details.

B. Attach removable units to supporting members with type and size of clips and fasteners indicated or, if not indicated, as recommended by grating manufacturer for type of installation conditions shown.

C. Attach nonremovable units to supporting members by bolting as indicated above.

3.05 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. 1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness.

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.


LAWRENCE COUNTY METAL STAIRS PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 05 5100 - 1 © 2014 Eckles Architecture and Engineering

SECTION 05 5100 - METAL STAIRS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes: 1. Fabricated steel stairs with open bar grating treads, painted 2. Steel guard and rail assemblies as part of stair construction, painted. 3. Design and Engineering requirements for load-resisting assemblies.

B. Related Sections: 1. Division 05 Section “Structural Steel Framing” for coordination of edge conditions. 2. Division 05 Section "Pipe and Tube Railings" for pipe and tube railings not attached to metal

stairs or to walls adjacent to metal stairs.


A. Design load information indicated represents non-factored service loads unless otherwise noted. Design and fabricate systems and assemblies using design load criteria indicated or otherwise required by authorities having jurisdiction. Coordinate with applicable structural notes on Drawings.

B. Delegated Design: Design railings, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified Pennsylvania professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

C. Structural Performance of Stairs: Provide metal stairs assemblies capable of withstanding the effects of design loads required by current and applicable International Building Code (IBC) and following within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Uniform Load: 100 lbf/sq. ft.. 2. Concentrated Load: 300 lbf applied on an area of 4 sq. in. 3. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 4. Stair Framing: Capable of withstanding stresses resulting from railing loads in addition to

loads specified above. 5. Limit live load deflection of treads, platforms, and framing members to L/360 or 1/4 inch,

whichever is less.

D. Structural Performance of Railings: Provide railings capable of withstanding the effects of design loads required by current and applicable International Building Code (IBC) and following within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Handrails and Top Rails of Guards – comply with IBC and as follows:

a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied in any direction. c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

2. Top Rails of Guards: a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied in any direction.

3. Infill of Guards: a. Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft. b. Uniform load of 25 lbf/sq. ft. applied horizontally. c. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

METAL STAIRS LAWRENCE COUNTY 05 5100 - 2 PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY

E. Design assemblies to provide for movement of framing members without damage or overstressing, finish failure, connection failure, undue strain on fasteners and anchors, or other detrimental effects when subject to design loading and thermal movement.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For metal stairs and the following: 1. Metal stairs assemblies and components 2. Grout.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other Sections. 2. Include design calculations and other structural data bearing professional engineer's seal.

C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for stairs. 1. Test railings according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935.

D. Mill Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of products certifying that products furnished comply with requirements.

E. Welding certificates.

F. For components and assemblies indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

G. Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

H. Qualification Data: For professional engineer.

A. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required. 1. Section of handrail 6-inches long in profile and finish indicated. 2. Fittings and brackets. 3. Tread bar grating section 8 inches long.


A. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings, design calculations, and other structural data by a qualified professional engineer.

B. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in Pennsylvania and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. 1. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of metal stair

assemblies that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.

C. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.

D. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of railings and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Section 016000 "Product Requirements." 1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with

Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review.

LAWRENCE COUNTY METAL STAIRS PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 05 5100 - 3

E. NAAMM Stair Standard: Comply with "Recommended Voluntary Minimum Standards for Fixed Metal Stairs" in NAAMM AMP 510, "Metal Stairs Manual," for class of stair designated, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. 1. Preassembled Stairs: Commercial class.

F. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel" 2. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel" 3. AWS D1.6, "Structural Welding Code--Stainless Steel."

G. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." 1. Require representatives of each entity directly concerned with metal fabrications to attend,

including the following: a. Contractor's superintendent. b. Independent testing agency responsible for steel construction. c. Affected subcontractors and separate Prime Contractors.

2. Review: a. Special inspection and testing and inspecting agency procedures for field quality

control, b. Quality standards. c. Layout and sequencing of installation, and coordination with other Work, d. Protection for and temporary use of stairs during construction. e. Finishes and preparation for finishes.


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with stairs and railings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1. Provide allowance for trimming and fitting at site.

1.06 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another.

B. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal stairs. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

C. Coordinate locations of hanger rods and struts with other work so that they will not encroach on required stair width and will be within the fire-resistance-rated stair enclosure.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS



A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. For components exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.

2.02 FERROUS METALS

A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36.

B. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed) or ASTM A 513, Type 5 (mandrel drawn).

C. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786, rolled from plate complying with ASTM A 36 or ASTM A 283, Grade C or D.

D. Iron Castings: Either gray or malleable iron, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Gray Iron: ASTM A 48, Class 30, unless another class is indicated or required by structural

loads. 2. Malleable Iron: ASTM A 47.

E. Uncoated, Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011, structural steel, Grade 30, unless another grade is required by design loads.

F. Galvanized Steel Sheet for Exterior and Mechanical Room Stairs: ASTM A 653, G90 coating, structural steel, Grade 33, unless another grade is required by design loads.

G. Provide anchors for embedding units in concrete, either integral or applied to units, as standard with manufacturer.

H. Apply bituminous paint to concealed bottoms, sides, and edges of cast-metal units set into concrete.

2.03 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 25 for exterior use, and Class Fe/Zn 5 where built into exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.

B. General: Provide the following: 1. Steel Railings: Plated steel fasteners complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 25 for

electrodeposited zinc coating.

C. Fasteners for Anchoring Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade, and class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to other types of construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loads.

D. Fasteners for Interconnecting Railing Components: 1. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching them to

other work. 2. Provide tamper-resistant flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners, unless otherwise

indicated.



B. Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with SSPC-Paint 20 or SSPC-Paint 29 and compatible with topcoat.


1. Benjamin Moore & Co.; Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer CM18/19. 2. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc.; Aquapon Zinc-Rich Primer 97-670. 3. Sherwin-Williams Company (The); Corothane I GalvaPac Zinc Primer. 4. Tnemec Company, Inc.; Tneme-Zinc 90-97.



E. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.

F. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi, unless otherwise indicated.

G. Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, 6 by 6 inches --W1.4 by W1.4, unless otherwise indicated.


A. Provide complete stair assemblies, including metal framing, hangers, struts, clips, brackets, bearing plates, and other components necessary to support and anchor stairs and platforms on supporting structure. 1. Join components by welding, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.

B. Preassembled Stairs: Assemble stairs in shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

C. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated. Close ends of returns, unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 1/4 inch or less.

A. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work unless otherwise indicated. 1. At brackets and fittings fastened to plaster or gypsum board partitions, provide crush-

resistant fillers, or other means to transfer loads through wall finishes to structural supports and prevent bracket or fitting rotation and crushing of substrate.

B. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings to concrete or masonry work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by railings. Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure.

C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

D. Mechanical Connections: Connect members with concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints. 1. Fabricate splice joints for field connection using an epoxy structural adhesive if this is

manufacturer's standard splicing method.


E. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. 1. Bend members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each configuration required;

maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components.

F. Form, cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, bolts and similar items. Install exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.

G. Weld connections to comply with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion





H. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use tamper-resistant flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners or bolts unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous.

I. Close exposed ends of hollow railing members with prefabricated end fittings.

J. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.

2.06 STEEL-FRAMED STAIRS

A. Available Manufacturers: 1. Alfab, Inc. 2. Precision Ladders, LLC. 3. American Stair Corp. 4. Sharon Companies Ltd. 5. Local fabricator, subject to qualifications requirements and Architect’s approval

B. Stair Framing: 1. Fabricate stringers of steel shapes indicated.

a. Provide closures for exposed ends of tube and channel stringers. b. Provide tube stringers for ornamental stairs where indicated on the Drawings.

2. Construct platforms of steel plate or channel headers and miscellaneous framing members as needed to comply with performance requirements.

3. Weld stringers to headers; weld framing members to stringers and headers.

4. Unless detailed otherwise, where stairs are enclosed by gypsum board assemblies, provide hanger rods or struts to support landings from floor construction above or below. Locate hanger rods and struts where they will not encroach on required stair width and will be within the fire-resistance-rated stair enclosure.

5. Where masonry walls support metal stairs, provide temporary supporting struts designed for erecting steel stair components before installing masonry.


C. Open Grate Stairs: Risers shall be open grate steel. 1. Tread basis of design. McNichols, Quality Bar Grating Stair Treat, Type B, Standard

Galvanized, Checker Plate Nosing. Item no. 640431T053.

2. Directly weld and bolt metal treads to stringers; Locate welds on bottom of treads. 3. Top riser shall finish flush with adjacent floor surface. Coordinate flooring finishes indicated

on Drawings with final height of top riser.

2.07 STEEL TUBE RAILINGS

A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, details, finish, and member sizes, including wall thickness of tube, post spacings, and anchorage, but not less than that needed to withstand indicated loads. 1. Configuration: As detailed on Drawings 2. Fabricate grip handrails of painted steel tubing.

B. Welded Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections. Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings.

C. Form changes in direction of railings as detailed, by radius bends of radius indicated.

D. Form simple and compound curves by bending members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required; maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components.

E. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings.

F. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails, unless otherwise indicated. Close ends of returns unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 1/4 inch or less.

G. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide brackets, end closures, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors for interconnecting components and for attaching to other work. Furnish inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting to concrete or masonry work.

H. Removable railing system at EMA Garage mezzanine as detailed and described on drawings. Each 6’-0” section of railing shall be removable along full length of railing.

2.08 FINISHES

A. Steel stair and railings shall be field painted according to division 9 section ‘Painting’

B. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

C. Finish metal stairs after assembly.

D. Galvanizing For Exterior Stairs: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with applicable standard listed below: 1. ASTM A 123, for galvanizing steel and iron products. 2. ASTM A 153, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware.

E. Preparation for Shop Priming For Interior Stairs: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed products: 1. Interior Stairs (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."


F. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal stair components, except those with galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete or masonry unless otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.

G. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

H. Provide exposed fasteners with finish matching appearance, including color and texture, of railings.


A. Fill vent and drain holes that will be exposed in the finished Work, unless indicated to remain as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth.

B. For galvanized railings, provide hot-dip galvanized fittings, brackets, fasteners, sleeves, and other ferrous components.

C. For nongalvanized steel, provide nongalvanized ferrous-metal fittings, brackets, fasteners, and sleeves, except galvanize anchors to be embedded in exterior concrete or masonry.

D. Preparation for Shop Priming: 1. For galvanized metal components, thoroughly clean of grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other

foreign matter, and treat with metallic-phosphate process. 2. Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with minimum requirements indicated

below for SSPC surface preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed railings:

3. Exterior (SSPC Zone 1B): SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 4. Interior (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP 7/NACE No. 4, "Brush-off Blast Cleaning."

E. Apply shop primer to prepared surfaces , unless otherwise indicated. Comply with requirements in SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. Primer need not be applied to surfaces to be embedded in concrete or masonry. 1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing metal stairs to in-place construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, through-bolts, lag bolts, and other connectors.

B. Cutting, Fitting, Tapping, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, tapping, and fitting required for installing metal stairs. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured from established lines and levels and free of rack.

C. Install metal stairs by welding stair framing to steel structure or to weld plates cast into concrete, unless otherwise indicated.


D. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction.

E. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.

F. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion





G. Place and finish concrete fill for treads and platforms to comply with Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."


A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. 1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness.

B. Clean stainless steel by washing thoroughly with clean water and soap and rinsing with clean water.

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.

D. Clean and polish glass.

3.03 PROTECTION

A. Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period with temporary protective coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at time of Substantial Completion.

B. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop; make required alterations and refinish entire unit, or provide new units.


LAWRENCE COUNTY PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 05 5213 - 1 © 2013 Eckles Architecture and Engineering

ECTION 05 5213 - PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Interior painted steel architectural tube railings. 2. Exterior painted galvanized steel architectural tube railings.

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 05 Section “Metal Stairs” for prefabricated steel stairs. 2. Division 06 Section "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking for anchoring

railings.


A. Delegated Design: Design railings, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

B. General: 1. Design load information indicated represent non-factored service loads unless otherwise

noted. Design and fabricate systems and assemblies using design load criteria indicated or otherwise required by authorities having jurisdiction. Coordinate with applicable notes on structural Drawings.

2. In engineering railings to withstand structural loads indicated, determine allowable design working stresses of railing materials based on the following: a. Steel: 72 percent of minimum yield strength. b. Aluminum: The lesser of minimum yield strength divided by 1.65 or minimum

ultimate tensile strength divided by 1.95.

C. Structural Performance: Provide railings capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Handrails – comply with UCC and as follows:

a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied in any direction. c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

D. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.

E. Thermal Movements: Provide exterior railings that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS LAWRENCE COUNTY 05 5213 - 2 PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Manufacturer's product lines of mechanically connected and welded railings. 2. Grout, anchoring cement, and paint products.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data

signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required. 1. Sections of each distinctly different linear railing member, including handrails, top rails,

posts, and balusters.

2. Fittings and brackets.

3. Assembled Sample of railing system, made from full-size components, including top rail, post, handrail, and infill. Sample need not be full height. a. Show method of finishing or connecting members at intersections.

D. Mill Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of products certifying that products furnished comply with requirements.

E. Welding certificates.

F. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of railing through one source from a single manufacturer.

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 2. AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum."


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with railings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

1.06 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING

A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another.

B. Coordinate installation of anchorages for railings. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

LAWRENCE COUNTY PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 05 5213 - 3

C. Schedule installation so wall attachments are made only to completed walls. Do not support railings temporarily by any means that do not satisfy structural performance requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Carbon Steel Railings: a. Blum, Julius & Co., Inc. b. Pisor Industries, Inc. c. Stainless Fabricators, Inc. d. Tubular Specialties Manufacturing, Inc. e. Wagner, R & B, Inc.; a division of the Wagner Companies. f. Local fabricator, subject to requirements and prior approval.


A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes.

B. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as supported rails, unless otherwise indicated.

2.03 STEEL AND IRON

A. Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed) or ASTM A 513, Type 5 (mandrel drawn).

B. Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type F or Type S, Grade A, Standard Weight (Schedule 40), unless another grade and weight are required by structural loads. 1. Provide galvanized finish for locations where indicated.

C. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36.

D. Castings: Either gray or malleable iron, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Gray Iron: ASTM A 48, Class 30, unless another class is indicated or required by structural

loads. 2. Malleable Iron: ASTM A 47.

2.04 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide the following: 1. Steel Railings: Plated steel fasteners complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 25 for

electrodeposited zinc coating.

2. Ungalvanized-Steel Railings: Plated steel fasteners complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5 for zinc coating.

3. Hot-Dip Galvanized Railings: Type 304 stainless-steel or hot-dip zinc-coated steel fasteners complying with ASTM A 153or ASTM F 2329 for zinc coating.


B. Fasteners: Provide concealed fasteners, unless unavoidable or standard for railings indicated. Select fasteners of type, grade, and class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to other types of construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loads.

C. Fasteners for Anchoring Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade, and class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to other types of construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loads.

D. Fasteners for Interconnecting Railing Components: 1. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching them to

other work, unless otherwise indicated or specifically allowed.

E. Anchors: Provide cast-in-place, chemical and torque-controlled expansion anchors, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.



B. Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with SSPC-Paint 20 or SSPC-Paint 29 and compatible with topcoat. 1. Benjamin Moore & Co.; Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer CM18/19. 2. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc.; Aquapon Zinc-Rich Primer 97-670. 3. Sherwin-Williams Company (The); Corothane I GalvaPac Zinc Primer. 4. Tnemec Company, Inc.; Tneme-Zinc 90-97.



E. Anchoring Cement: Factory-packaged, two-component hydrophobic hybrid polyurethane system for anchoring, patching, and grouting , to provide a tough weather resistant seal in Portland cement. Product may be used with specified aggregate to create mix-in-place polymer concrete that withstands thermal and shock movement. 1. Water-Resistant product, resistant to erosion from water exposure without needing

protection by a sealer or waterproof coating, and recommended by manufacturer for exterior use.

2. Features: a. Excellent bonding strength in a wide temperature range b. Low moisture sensitivity, will tolerate small amounts of moisture when applied. c. Excellent chemical resistance. d. Mixed and delivered at the point of application. e. Completely cures in 15-20 minutes after application for heavy traffic at 70° F. f. Remains flexible for the life of the repair and at lower temperatures. g. Self-leveling, excess material may be sliced off after curing. h. Bonds well to concrete, brick, tile, steel, asphalt, and wood. i. Non flammable


3. Product: Flexible Cement II by Roadware Incorporated, 800-522-7623; www.concretemender.com

2.06 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage, but not less than that required to support structural loads.

B. Shop assemble railings to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.

C. Cut, drill, tap, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

D. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces.

E. Fabricate connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.

F. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, bolts and similar items.

G. Connections: Fabricate railings with either welded or nonwelded connections, unless otherwise indicated.

H. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings. 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion



3. Remove flux immediately.

4. At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces.

I. Welded Connections for Aluminum Pipe: Fabricate railings to interconnect members with concealed internal welds that eliminate surface grinding, using manufacturer's standard system of sleeve and socket fittings.

J. Nonwelded Connections: Connect members with concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints.

1. Fabricate splice joints for field connection using an epoxy structural adhesive if this is manufacturer's standard splicing method.

K. Form changes in direction as follows: By bending or by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings.


L. Form simple and compound curves by bending members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required; maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components.

M. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings.

N. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails, unless otherwise indicated. Close ends of returns unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 1/4 inch or less.

O. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work, unless otherwise indicated. 1. At brackets and fittings fastened to plaster or gypsum board partitions, provide fillers made

from crush-resistant material, or other means to transfer wall loads through wall finishes to structural supports and prevent bracket or fitting rotation and crushing of substrate.

P. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings to concrete or masonry work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by railings. Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure.

Q. For railing posts set in concrete, provide sleeves not less than 6 inches long with inside dimensions not less than 1/2 inch greater than outside dimensions of post, with steel plate forming bottom closure.

R. Toe Boards: Where indicated, provide toe boards at railings around openings and at edge of open-sided floors and platforms. Fabricate to dimensions and details indicated.



B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

D. Provide exposed fasteners with finish matching appearance, including color and texture, of railings.


A. Galvanized Railings: 1. Hot-dip galvanize indicated steel and iron railings, including hardware, after fabrication. 2. Comply with ASTM A 123 for hot-dip galvanized railings. 3. Comply with ASTM A 153 for hot-dip galvanized hardware. 4. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint adhesion. 5. Fill vent and drain holes that will be exposed in the finished Work, unless indicated to

remain as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth.


B. For galvanized railings, provide hot-dip galvanized fittings, brackets, fasteners, sleeves, and other ferrous components.

C. Preparing Galvanized Railings for Shop Priming: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean railings of grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with etching cleaner.

D. For nongalvanized steel railings, provide nongalvanized ferrous-metal fittings, brackets, fasteners, and sleeves, except galvanize anchors to be embedded in exterior concrete or masonry.

E. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."

F. Primer Application: Apply shop primer to prepared surfaces of railings unless otherwise indicated. Comply with requirements in SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. Primer need not be applied to surfaces to be embedded in concrete or masonry. 1. Do not apply primer to galvanized surfaces.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine plaster and gypsum board assemblies, where reinforced to receive anchors, to verify that locations of concealed reinforcements have been clearly marked for Installer. Locate reinforcements and mark locations if not already done.


A. Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints.

B. Perform cutting, drilling, tapping, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack. 1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been coated or finished

after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting.

2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet.

3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet.

C. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will be in contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint. In addition, provide felt gaskets in locations where aluminum brackets are attached to steel stringers.

D. Adjust railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints.

E. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing railings and for properly transferring loads to in-place construction.


3.03 RAILING CONNECTIONS

A. Nonwelded Connections: Use mechanical or adhesive joints for permanently connecting railing components. Use wood blocks and padding to prevent damage to railing members and fittings. Seal recessed holes of exposed locking screws using plastic cement filler colored to match finish of railings.

B. Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing components. Comply with requirements for welded connections in Part 2 "Fabrication" Article whether welding is performed in the shop or in the field.

C. Expansion Joints: Install expansion joints at locations indicated but not farther apart than required to accommodate thermal movement. Provide slip-joint internal sleeve extending 2 inches beyond joint on either side, fasten internal sleeve securely to 1 side, and locate joint within 6 inches of post.

3.04 ANCHORING POSTS

A. Form or core-drill holes not less than 5 inches deep and 3/4 inch larger than OD of post for installing posts in concrete. Clean holes of loose material, insert posts, and fill annular space between post and concrete with anchoring cement, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Leave anchorage joint exposed; wipe off surplus anchoring material; and leave 1/8-inch buildup, sloped away from post.

C. Anchor posts to metal surfaces with oval flanges, angle type, or floor type as required by conditions, connected to posts and to metal supporting members as follows: 1. For steel pipe railings, weld flanges to post and bolt to metal supporting surfaces.

3.05 ANCHORING RAILING ENDS

A. Anchor railing ends to concrete and masonry with round flanges connected to railing ends and anchored to wall construction with anchors and bolts.

B. Anchor railing ends to metal surfaces with flanges bolted to metal surfaces and welded to railing ends or connected to railing ends using nonwelded connections.

3.06 ATTACHING HANDRAILS TO WALLS AND POSTS

A. Attach handrails to wall and post with wall brackets. Provide brackets with 1-1/2-inch clearance from inside face of handrail and finished wall surface. 1. Use type of bracket with flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded hanger bolt.

B. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads.

C. Secure wall brackets to building construction as follows: 1. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and hanger or

lag bolts.

2. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts.


3. For wood stud partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into wood backing between studs. Coordinate with carpentry work to locate backing members.

4. For steel-framed gypsum board partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into fire-retardant-treated wood backing between studs. Coordinate with stud installation to locate backing members.

5. For steel-framed gypsum board partitions, fasten brackets directly to steel framing or concealed steel reinforcements using self-tapping screws of size and type required to support structural loads.

6. For steel-framed gypsum board partitions, fasten brackets with toggle bolts installed through flanges of steel framing or through concealed steel reinforcements.

3.07 ADJUSTING, CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean aluminum by washing thoroughly with clean water and soap and rinsing with clean water.

B. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. 1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness.

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.

D. Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period with temporary protective coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at time of Substantial Completion.

E. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop; make required alterations and refinish entire unit, or provide new units.


LAWRENCE COUNTY MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 06 1053 - 1 © 2014 Eckles Architecture and Engineering

SECTION 06 1053 - MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes lumber and panel products used in miscellaneous construction. 1. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. 2. Wood blocking, cants, and nailers. 3. Roof perimeter nailers. 4. Shelving and accessories. 5. Wood furring and grounds. 6. Plywood backing panels.

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for miscellaneous roof framing and lumber

anchorage to structure. 2. Division 06 Section "Architectural Woodwork" for interior woodwork not specified in this

Section. 3. Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories" for manufactured curbs for mounting roof

equipment and expansion assemblies (Contractor's Option).

1.02 ABBREVIATIONS

A. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following: 1. NELMA - Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association. 2. NLGA - National Lumber Grades Authority. 3. SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and

certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used, net amount of preservative retained, and chemical treatment manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, installing, and finishing treated material.

2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials, both before and after exposure to elevated temperatures when tested according to ASTM D 5516 and ASTM D 5664.

3. For fire-retardant treatments required to be High-Temperature (HT) type include physical properties of treated lumber both before and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM D 5664.

4. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site.

MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY LAWRENCE COUNTY 06 1053 - 2 PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY

5. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment.

B. Research/Evaluation Reports: For the following, showing compliance with building code in effect for Project: 1. Power-driven fasteners. 2. Powder-actuated fasteners. 3. Expansion anchors. 4. Metal framing anchors.


A. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels; place spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.

B. Deliver interior wood materials that are to be exposed to view only after building is enclosed and weatherproof, wet work other than painting is dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and humidity at occupancy levels.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of lumber grading agencies certified by the American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review. 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.

2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece.

3. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber.

4. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.

5. Provide dry lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing for 2-inch nominal thickness or less, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Wood Structural Panels: 1. Plywood: Either DOC PS 1 or DOC PS 2, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Thickness: As needed to comply with requirements specified but not less than thickness indicated.

3. Comply with "Code Plus" provisions in APA Form No. E30K, "APA Design/Construction Guide: Residential & Commercial."

4. Factory mark panels according to indicated standard.

LAWRENCE COUNTY MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 06 1053 - 3

2.02 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS

A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: C9 AWPA C2 (lumber) and AWPA (plywood), except that lumber that is not in contact with the ground and is continuously protected from liquid water may be treated according to AWPA C31 with inorganic boron (SBX).

B. Kiln-dry material after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent for lumber and 15 percent for plywood. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material.

C. Mark each treated item with the treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review.

D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings and the following as applicable: 1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar

members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.

2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete.

3. Wood floor plates and framing that are installed in direct contact with concrete slabs .

2.03 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with performance requirements in AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27 (plywood). 1. Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners.

2. Use Exterior type for exterior locations and where indicated.

3. Use Interior Type A, High Temperature (HT) for enclosed framing and interior locations where indicated.

4. Use Interior Type A, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of each piece.

C. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical formulations that do not bleed through, contain colorants, or otherwise adversely affect finishes.

D. Application: 1. Treat items indicated on Drawings, and where permitted by IBC 2009 Section 603.1.1 2. Treat wood framing and deck used for raised platforms constructed in accordance with IBC

2009 Section 410.4. 3. Treatment not required for items in concealed spaces and over a noncombustible roof deck,

if used for blocking, nailers and furring where permitted by IBC 2009 Sections 603.4, .14 and .18.


2.04 DIMENSION LUMBER

A. General: Provide dimension lumber of grades indicated according to the American Lumber Standards Committee National Grading Rule provisions of the grading agency indicated.

B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction, or No. 2 grade lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content and any of the following species:

1. Mixed southern pine; SPIB. 2. Hem-fir or Hem-fir (north); NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 3. Spruce-pine-fir (south) or Spruce-pine-fir; NELMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.

2.05 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER

A. General: Provide lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following: 1. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. 2. Blocking. 3. Cants. 4. Nailers. 5. Furring. 6. Grounds.

B. Concealed Boards: Provide lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content and any of the following species and grades: 1. Mixed southern pine, No. 2 grade; SPIB. 2. Hem-fir or Hem-fir (north), Construction or 2 Common grade; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 3. Spruce-pine-fir (south) or Spruce-pine-fir, Construction or 2 Common grade; NELMA,

NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.

2.06 PANEL PRODUCTS

A. Miscellaneous Concealed Plywood: Exterior or Exposure 1 sheathing, span rating to suit framing in each location, and thickness as indicated but not less than 1/2 inch.

B. Miscellaneous Exposed Plywood: DOC PS 1, A-D Interior, thickness 1/2 inch or as indicated.

C. Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, C-D Plugged, fire-retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 1/2 inch-thick.

2.07 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this Article for material and manufacture. 1. Where carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high relative

humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/ A 153M or Type 304 stainless steel.

B. Nails, Wire, Brads, and Staples: FS FF-N-105.

C. Power-Driven Fasteners: CABO NER-272.

D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.


E. Screws for Fastening to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C 954, except with wafer heads and reamer wings, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened.

F. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1.

G. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers.

H. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency. 1. Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633,

Class Fe/Zn 5. 2. Material: Stainless steel with bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594,

Alloy Group 1 or 2.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated.

B. Discard units of material with defects that impair quality of carpentry and that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.

C. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction.

D. Apply field treatment complying with AWPA M4 to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber and plywood. 1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water. 2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water.

E. Securely attach carpentry work as indicated and according to applicable codes and recognized standards.

F. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim.

G. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.


H. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. 2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code.

I. Countersink fastener heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes with wood filler.

J. Use fasteners of appropriate type and length. Predrill members when necessary to avoid splitting wood.

K. Wood Structural Panels: Comply with applicable recommendations contained in APA Form No. E30K, “APA Design/Construction Guide: Residential & Commercial,” for types of structural-use panels and applications indicated.

3.02 WOOD BLOCKING AND NAILER INSTALLATION

A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved.

B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.

3.03 ROOF PERIMETER WOOD BLOCKING

A. Provide perimeter roof rough carpentry work as a secure termination for roof membrane, and as a solid surface for termination of metal perimeter systems and flashings, securely attached to steel or masonry supporting structure, designed to resist a minimum pull-out resistance of 250 lbf/ft in all directions, and as follows: 1. Observe recommendations in Factory Mutual Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49

2. Observe Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in the 2009 International Building Code.

3. Use lumber salt pressure treated to Wood Preservation Institute LP-2 or better.

4. Do not use warped or split lumber.

5. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Provide continuous nailer using nom. 2 inch (actual 1 1/2 inch) dimension lumber: 1. Over existing woodblocking, provide continuous 2x6 or 2x8, as appropriate for conditions,

secured to existing blocking using 1/2 inch galv. lag bolt spaced at 24” o.c. max.

2. At new construction, as nailer for metal fascia system, provide continuous 3 inch thick woodblocking consisting of double 2x6 or 2x8, as appropriate for conditions. Stagger butt ends of individual layers at least 32 inches. Secure to metal structural supports using 1/2 galvanized inch through-bolts spaced at 48 inches o.c. max.

3. At expansion joints in new construction, provide continuous 1 1/2 inch thick woodblocking secured to metal structural supports using 1/2 inch galvanized through-bolts spaced at 48 inches o.c. min.


4. At parapet walls as nailer for finish metal coping system, provide continuous 1 1/2 inch thick woodblocking. Secure to top CMU wall using 1/2 inch x 10 inch galvanized anchor bolts, grouted into block, spaced at 32” o.c. max. Secure over face brick of masonry cavity walls by through-bolting to galv. stl. bent plate clip anchored to face of CMU backup by 1/2 inch exp. anchor or grouted anchor bolt, spaced at 32 inches o.c. max. Stagger bolts in woodblocking. Do not secure to face brick.

C. Countersink bolt heads flush with surface of woodblocking (max. 1/2 inch recess).

D. Do not use power-actuated fasteners or toggle bolts to secure lumber to substrate.

E. Pre-drill woodblocking prior to attachment.

F. Provide 1/4-inch gap between sections of woodblocking.

G. Provide fastener within 3 inches of the end of each section of woodblocking.

H. Do not allow wood to overhang support by more than 2 inches.

I. Optional Metal Blocking: At Contractor’s option, subject to compliance with requirements and Architects approval, and at no additional cost to project, provide specified metal insulating blocking system in lieu of lumber blocking at roof perimeter and openings. 1. Basis of Design Product: EdgeBox Perimeter Metal Blocking System by WP Hickman Co.,

2-pc assembly, 20 ga galvanized steel, pre-punched fastener holes, stainless steel fasteners, concealed splice at joints, closures and end caps as recommended by manufacturer.

2. Provide detailed engineered shop drawings for approval and record. Coordinate box dimensions and fastening with roofing manufacturer and installer. Include details indicating continuity of building air barrier system.

3. Provide insulating box infill (rigid foam, expanding foam, or lightweight insulating concrete) as recommended by manufacturer and compatible with roofing system.

4. Install in compliance with Manufacturer’s written instructions for specific installation conditions, applicable ANSI/SPRI ES-1 roof edge standards, and in a manner consistent with roofing manufacturer’s and installers warranties.

3.04 PROTECTION

A. Protect rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, rough carpentry becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.


LAWRENCE COUNTY ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK/ FINISH CARPENTRY PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 06 4000 - 1 © 2014 Eckles Architecture and Engineering

SECTION 06 4000 - ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK/ FINISH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Interior standing and running trim and casing. 2. Custom fabricated or field-assembled features.

a. Built-in display cases and accessories. b. Locker room benches

3. Flush wood paneling for clear and opaque finish. 4. Trim and Accessories

B. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips, unless concealed within other construction before woodwork installation.

C. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 06 Section "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims,

and hanging strips required for installing woodwork and concealed within other construction before woodwork installation.

2. Division 09 Section "Painting" for field finishing of interior architectural woodwork.

3. Division 10 Section “Visual Display Surfaces” for vinyl fabric wrapped tackboards.

4. Division 12 Section “Library Furniture” for custom modifications to stock library shelving units.

5. Division 12 Section “Manufactured Casework” for stock wood-bodied casework and custom fabricated casework, counters, and miscellaneous plastic-laminate panels.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing woodwork items unless concealed within other construction before woodwork installation.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For hardware and accessories, finishing materials and processes.

B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components. 1. Show details full size.

2. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections.

3. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for fixtures, faucets, fittings, outlets, grilles and other items installed in architectural woodwork.

ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK/ FINISH CARPENTRY LAWRENCE COUNTY 06 4000 - 2 PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY

4. Show veneer leaves with dimensions, grain direction, exposed face, and identification numbers indicating the flitch and sequence within the flitch for each leaf.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of material indicated. 1. Shop-applied transparent finishes. 2. Factory or field-applied finishes not scheduled on Drawings

D. Samples for Verification: For the following: 1. Lumber with or for transparent finish, 5 inches wide by 24 inches long, for each species and

cut, finished on 1 side and 1 edge.

2. Panel products, 6-inches square, for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish:

3. Lumber for trim with shop-applied opaque finish, 6-inches square for each finish system and color, with 1/2 of exposed surface finished.

4. Hardware: full size unit.

E. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of woodwork certifying that products furnished comply with requirements.

F. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.


A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with current ADA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A117.1 as referenced by PA Uniform Construction Code and as adopted by authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed architectural woodwork similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing architectural woodwork similar to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

D. Source Limitations: Engage a qualified woodworking firm to assume undivided responsibility for production and installation of interior architectural woodwork with sequence-matched wood veneers.

E. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" for grades of interior architectural woodwork, construction, finishes, and other requirements. 1. Provide AWI Quality Certification Program labels or certificate indicating that woodwork

complies with requirements of grades specified.

F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Coordination and Meetings." Review methods and procedures related to manufactured and custom casework, custom millwork and adjacent construction.

LAWRENCE COUNTY ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK/ FINISH CARPENTRY PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 06 4000 - 3


A. Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Project Conditions" Article.

B. Keep finished or installed surfaces covered or otherwise protected during handling and installation.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field

measurements before being enclosed and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

2. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating woodwork without field measurements. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.

1.07 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of the AWI quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish: Red Oak, plain sliced, except as otherwise scheduled or noted on Drawings.

C. Wood Species for Opaque Finish: Any closed-grain hardwood, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Wood Products: Comply with the following: 1. Hardboard: AHA A135.4. 2. Tempered Hardboard: 4-ft by 8-ft by 1/4-in Polymer-impregnated high-density fiberboard

panels, ANSI A135.4 Tempered Masonite by Masonite International Corporation a. Decorative Panels International; 800.521.4301; www.decpanels.com b. Panel Processing, Inc, 800-433-7142; www.panel.com c. Georgia Pacific; www.gp.com


3. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD. 4. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2. 5. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1. 6. Hardwood Plywood and Face Veneers: HPVA HP-1.

E. Flush Wood Paneling 1. Hardwood Plywood with Hardwood trim. 2. Grade: Custom. 3. Wood Species and Cut: Red Oak, plain sliced unless otherwise indicated. 4. Matching of adjacent veneer leaves: Slip match. 5. Veneer Matching with Panel Face: Balance match. 6. Panel Matching Method: Vertical slip match between panels is required. Select and arrange

panels for similarity of grain pattern and color between adjacent panels.

F. Clear Tempered Float Glass for Doors, shelves and mirrors: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Class 1, Quality q3; manufactured by horizontal (roller hearth) process, with exposed edges seamed before tempering, 6 mm thick, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Provide polished edges for shelves and doors.

2.02 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED (FRT) MATERIALS

A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated or required by authorities having jurisdiction, use materials complying with requirements in this Article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with fire-test-response characteristics specified. 1. Do not use treated materials that do not comply with requirements of referenced

woodworking standard or that are warped, discolored, or otherwise defective.

2. Use fire-retardant-treatment formulations that do not bleed through or otherwise adversely affect finishes. Do not use colorants to distinguish treated materials from untreated materials.

3. Identify fire-retardant-treated materials with appropriate classification marking of UL, U.S. Testing, Timber Products Inspection, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Comply with performance requirements of AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27 (plywood). Use the following treatment type: 1. Interior Type A: Low-hygroscopic formulation.

2. Mill lumber before treatment and implement special procedures during treatment and drying processes that prevent lumber from warping and developing discolorations from drying sticks or other causes, marring, and other defects affecting appearance of treated woodwork.

3. Kiln-dry materials before and after treatment to levels required for untreated materials.

C. Fire-Retardant Particleboard: Panels complying with the following requirements, made from softwood particles and fire-retardant chemicals mixed together at time of panel manufacture to achieve flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke-developed index of 25 or less per ASTM E 84. 1. For panels 3/4 inch thick and less, comply with ANSI A208.1 for Grade M-2 except for the

following minimum properties: modulus of rupture, 1600 psi; modulus of elasticity, 300,000 psi; internal bond, 80 psi; and screw-holding capacity on face and edge, 250 and 225 lbf, respectively.


2. For panels 13/16 to 1-1/4 inches thick, comply with ANSI A208.1 for Grade M-1 except for the following minimum properties: modulus of rupture, 1300 psi; modulus of elasticity, 250,000 psi; linear expansion, 0.50 percent; and screw-holding capacity on face and edge, 250 and 175 lbf, respectively.

3. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Duraflake FR" by Weyerhaeuser.

D. Fire-Retardant Fiberboard: Medium-density fiberboard panels complying with ANSI A208.2, made from softwood fibers, synthetic resins, and fire-retardant chemicals mixed together at time of panel manufacture to achieve flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke-developed index of 200 or less per ASTM E 84. 1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Medite FR" by SierraPine Ltd.;

Medite Div.

2.03 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln-dried to less than 15 percent moisture content.

B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide toothed-steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors. Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance.

C. Adhesives, General: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.

D. VOC Limits for Installation Adhesives and Glues: Use installation adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): 1. Wood Glues: 30 g/L. 2. Contact Adhesive: 250 g/L.


A. Quality Standard: AWI "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards," Section 400.

B. Interior Woodwork Grade: Provide Custom grade interior woodwork complying with the referenced quality standard, unless otherwise specified.

C. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood moisture content in relation to ambient relative humidity during fabrication and installation areas.

D. Sand fire-retardant-treated wood lightly to remove raised grain on exposed surfaces before fabrication.

E. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following: 1. Corners of Cabinets and Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members and Rails 3/4 inch Thick

or Less: 1/16 inch.

2. Edges of Rails and Similar Members More Than 3/4 Inch Thick: 1/8 inch.


F. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to maximum extent possible, before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. 1. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times woodwork fabrication will be

complete.

2. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check measurements of assemblies against field measurements indicated on Shop Drawings before disassembling for shipment.

G. Shop cut openings, to maximum extent possible, to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. 1. Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish.

2.05 FABRICATION QUALITY

A. Quality Standard: AWI "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards." Except as otherwise specified, comply with the following minimum standards: 1. Standing and Running Trim, Section 300: Custom Quality 2. Architectural Cabinets, Section 400: Custom Quality 3. Flush Wood Paneling, Section 500. Custom Quality

2.06 FLUSH WOOD PANELING FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH

A. Grade: Custom.

B. Wood Species and Cut: Red Oak, plain sliced unless otherwise indicated.

C. Matching of adjacent veneer leaves: Slip match.

D. Veneer Matching within Panel Face: Balance match.

E. Panel Matching Method: Vertical slip match between panels is required. Select and arrange panels for similarity of grain pattern and color between adjacent panels.

2.07 INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM AND CASING FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH

A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 300. 1. Grade: Premium.

B. Hardwood casing profiles by Baird Brothers Sawmill, Inc; 800 732 1697; for use as detailed or otherwise approved by Architect:

C. Wood Species and Cut: Hardwood as detailed and scheduled.

D. For trim items wider than available lumber, use veneered construction. Do not glue for width.


E. Back out or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat members, except for members with ends exposed in finished work.

F. Assemble casings in plant except where limitations of access to place of installation require field assembly.

G. Assemble moldings in plant to maximum extent possible. Miter corners in plant and prepare for field assembly with bolted fittings designed to pull connections together.

2.08 INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM FOR OPAQUE FINISH

A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 300. 1. Grade: Premium.

B. Back out or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat members, except for members with ends exposed in finished work.

C. Assemble casings in plant except where limitations of access to place of installation require field assembly.

D. Assemble moldings in plant to maximum extent possible. Miter corners in plant and prepare for field assembly with bolted fittings designed to pull connections together.

E. Wood Species, as approved and appropriate for specific use: 1. Any closed-grain hardwood. 2. Medium-density overlay (MDO) 3. Medium-density fiberboard (MDF)

2.09 CUSTOM-BUILT DISPLAY CASES

A. Provide interior ornamental work for transparent finish: 1. Grade: Custom.

B. Wood Species and Cut: As indicated in Drawings.

C. Provide shop-fabricated and shop-finished units as shown and detailed, ready for field installation. 1. Fabricate in shop to the maximum extent practicable. 2. Coordinate with work of other affected Prime Contracts.

2.10 SHOP FINISHING

A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 1500, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Grade: Provide finishes of same grades as items to be finished.

B. Finish Architectural Woodwork at Fabrication Shop. Defer only final touchup, cleaning, and polishing until after installation.

C. General: To the greatest extent possible shop finish transparent finished interior architectural woodwork at fabrication shop as specified in this Section. 1. Defer only final touchup, cleaning, and polishing until after installation.


2. Refer to Division 09 Section "Painting" for field-finishing opaque finished architectural woodwork.

D. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed surfaces of woodwork. Apply two coats to back of paneling.

E. Preparations for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing architectural woodwork, as applicable to each unit of work.

F. Transparent Finish: Comply with requirements indicated below for grade, finish system, staining, and sheen, with sheen measured on 60-degree gloss meter per ASTM D 523: 1. Grade: Premium.

2. AWI Finish System: Conversion varnish.

3. Staining: Match approved sample for color as selected by Architect.

4. Wash Coat for Stained Finish: Apply a wash-coat sealer to woodwork made from closed-grain wood before staining and finishing.

5. Sheen: Satin 31-45.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before installation.

B. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas and examine and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming before installation.

B. Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with AWI Section 1700 for the same grade specified in Part 2 of this Section for type of woodwork involved.

C. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches. Shim as required with concealed shims.

D. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, and refinish cut surfaces and repair damaged finish at cuts.

E. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated.


F. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to greatest extent possible. Do not use pieces less than 60 inches long, except where shorter single-length pieces are necessary. 1. Fill gaps, if any, between top of base and wall with plastic wood filler, sand smooth, and

finish same as wood base, if finished.

2. Install wall railings on indicated metal brackets securely fastened to wall framing.

3. Install standing and running trim with no more variation from a straight line than 1/8 inch in 96 inches.

G. Paneling: Anchor paneling to supporting substrate with splined connection strips. Do not use face fastening, unless covered by trim as indicated. 1. Install flush paneling with no more than 1/16 inch in 96-inch vertical cup or bow and 1/8

inch in 96-inch horizontal variation from a true plane.

H. Sliding Glass at Display Cases: Install upper channel and lower track as detailed, according to manufacturer’s instructions, with aluminum profile fully concealed within reveal in the wood cabinet box.

I. Complete the finishing work specified in this Section to extent not completed at shop or before installation of woodwork. Fill nail holes with matching filler where exposed. Apply specified finish coats, including stains and paste fillers if any, to exposed surfaces where only sealer/prime coats were applied in shop.

J. Refer to Division 09 Sections for final finishing of installed architectural woodwork items not already factory finished.


A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.

B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware.

C. Clean woodwork on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.


LAWRENCE COUNTY SHEET WATERPROOFING PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 07 1300 - 1 © 2014 Eckles Architecture and Engineering

SECTION 07 1300 - SHEET WATERPROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: Rubberized-asphalt sheet waterproofing and drainage accessories, used at below-grade walls enclosing occupied spaces, elevator pits, and as otherwise indicated. 1. Optional fluid-applied waterproofing, subject to conditions and prior approval.

B. Related Section: 1. Section 07 9200 "Joint Sealants" for joint-sealant materials and installation.


A. Provide durable protected continuous waterproofing barrier assembly that prevents the passage of water and drains exterior groundwater to appropriate site drainage system.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating substrate, technical data, and tested physical and performance properties of waterproofing.

B. Shop Drawings: Show locations and extent of waterproofing. Include details for substrate joints and cracks, sheet flashings, penetrations, inside and outside corners, tie-ins with adjoining waterproofing, and other termination conditions.

C. Samples: For the following products: 1. 6-inch square of waterproofing and flashing sheet. 2. 4-inch square of drainage panel.

D. Installer Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that installers comply with requirements.

E. Installer Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that installers comply with requirements.

F. Product Test Reports: For waterproofing, based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

G. Field quality-control reports.

H. Warranty: Copy of special waterproofing manufacturer's warranty stating obligations, remedies, limitations, and exclusions before starting waterproofing. 1. Include a letter from manufacturer certifying that the submitted warranty shall be issued at

Substantial Completion. 2. Owner reserves the right to reject waterproofing systems that do not meet warranty

requirements.

SHEET WATERPROOFING LAWRENCE COUNTY 07 1300 - 2 PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who for warranty purposes is authorized, approved, or licensed by waterproofing manufacturer to install manufacturer's products.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain waterproofing materials through one source from a single manufacturer.

C. Mockups: Before beginning installation, install waterproofing to 100 sq. ft. of wall to demonstrate surface preparation, crack and joint treatment, corner treatment, thickness, texture, and execution quality. 1. If Architect determines mockups do not comply with requirements, reapply waterproofing,

protection and drainage assembly until mockups are approved. 2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract

Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.

3. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Review waterproofing requirements including surface preparation, substrate condition and

pretreatment, minimum curing period, forecasted weather conditions, special details and flashings, installation procedures, testing and inspection procedures, and protection and repairs.

E. Final Inspection: Manufacturer's representative shall provide a comprehensive final inspection after completion of the waterproofing system. All application errors shall be addressed and final punch list completed.


A. Deliver liquid materials to Project site in original packages with seals unbroken, labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, and directions for storing and mixing with other components.

B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged packages in a clean, dry, protected location and within temperature range required by waterproofing manufacturer.

C. Remove and replace liquid materials that cannot be applied within their stated shelf life.

D. Store rolls according to manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight.

LAWRENCE COUNTY SHEET WATERPROOFING PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 07 1300 - 3


A. Environmental Limitations: Apply waterproofing within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. Do not apply waterproofing to a damp or wet substrate. 1. Do not apply waterproofing in snow, rain, fog, or mist, or when such weather conditions are

imminent during application and curing period.

B. Maintain adequate ventilation during preparation and application of waterproofing materials.

1.07 WARRANTY

A. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty, signed by waterproofing manufacturer agreeing to replace waterproofing material that does not comply with requirements or that does not remain watertight during specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Five years after date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Installer's Warranty: Specified form, on warranty form attached to this Section, signed by Installer, covering Work of this Section, for warranty period of two years. 1. Warranty includes uncovering, removing and reinstalling protection board, drainage panels,

insulation; and backfilling as specified.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following Rubberized-Asphalt Sheet Waterproofing products: 1. Basis of Design: Bituthene 4000 by W. R. Grace & Co. 2. Carlisle Corporation, Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Div.; CCW 701. 3. Henry Company; Blueskin WP 100/200. 4. Tremco; Tuff-n-Dri Waterproofing System 5. Polyguard Products, Inc; 650 Membrane 6. Substitutions subject to Division 01 Section “Product Requirements”

2.02 RUBBERIZED-ASPHALT SHEET WATERPROOFING

A. Rubberized-Asphalt Sheet: 60-mil-thick, self-adhering sheet consisting of 56 mils of rubberized asphalt laminated to a 4-mil-thick, polyethylene film with release liner on adhesive side. 1. Tensile Strength: 250 psi minimum; ASTM D 412, Die C, modified. 2. Ultimate Elongation: 300 percent minimum; ASTM D 412, Die C, modified. 3. Low-Temperature Flexibility: Pass at minus 20 deg F; ASTM D 1970. 4. Crack Cycling: Unaffected after 100 cycles of 1/8-inch movement; ASTM C 836. 5. Puncture Resistance: 40 lbf minimum; ASTM E 154. 6. Hydrostatic-Head Resistance: 150 feet minimum; ASTM D 5385. 7. Water Absorption: 0.15 percent weight-gain maximum after 48-hour immersion at 70 deg F;

ASTM D 570. 8. Vapor Permeance: 0.05 perms; ASTM E 96, Water Method.


2.03 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Furnish auxiliary materials recommended by waterproofing manufacturer for intended use and compatible with sheet waterproofing. 1. Furnish liquid-type auxiliary materials that comply with VOC limits of authorities having

jurisdiction.

B. Primer and/or Surface Conditioner: Liquid, waterborne or solvent-borne primer / surface conditioner recommended for substrate by manufacturer of sheet waterproofing material.

C. Sheet Strips: Self-adhering, rubberized-asphalt composite sheet strips of same material and thickness as sheet waterproofing.

D. Mastic, Adhesives, and Tape: Liquid mastic and adhesives, and adhesive tapes recommended by waterproofing manufacturer.

E. Metal Termination Bars: Aluminum bars, approximately 1 by 1/8 inch thick, predrilled at 9-inch centers.

2.04 OPTIONAL FLUID-APPLIED FOUNDATION WATERPROOFING

A. Application: At Contractor’s Option, in lieu of sheet waterproofing, under the following conditions and subject to Architect’s approval: 1. Project conditions are favorable to liquid application, due to foundation design, preparation

requirements, construction sequencing, seasonal and environmental conditions, 2. Installed system complies with performance, quality control and warranty requirements

specified in Part 1.

B. Initial Bid Price, Contract Sum, Schedule of Values and Combined Construction Schedule shall include specified sheet waterproofing. Approval of liquid-applied waterproofing shall be by Change Order to reduce the Contract Time, or Contract Sum, or both.

C. Product: Two-Component, Unreinforced, Latex-Rubber Waterproofing: Comply with ASTM C 836 and with manufacturer's written physical requirements.

a. Basis of Design: Procor by W. R. Grace & Co b. Poly Wall Commercial Stretch by Polyguard Products, Inc;

D. Auxiliary Materials: Provide auxiliary materials recommended by manufacturer to be compatible with one another and with waterproofing, as demonstrated by waterproofing manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 1. Primer: Manufacturer's standard, factory-formulated polyurethane or epoxy primer.

2. Sheet Flashing: 50-mil-minimum, nonstaining, sheet. a. Adhesive: Manufacturer's recommended contact adhesive.

3. Joint Reinforcing Strip: Manufacturer's recommended fiberglass mesh or polyester fabric.

4. Joint Sealant: Multicomponent polyurethane sealant, compatible with waterproofing, complying with ASTM C 920 Type M, Class 25; Grade NS for sloping and vertical applications or Grade P for deck applications; Use NT exposure; and as recommended by manufacturer for substrate and joint conditions. a. Backer Rod: Closed-cell polyethylene foam.


2.05 PROTECTION BOARD

A. Protection Course: At Contractor’s option provide one to the following types of protection board: 1. Semirigid sheets of fiberglass or mineral-reinforced-asphaltic core, pressure laminated

between two asphalt-saturated fibrous liners for 1/8 inch nominal thickness. a. Adhesive: Rubber-based solvent type recommended by waterproofing manufacturer

for type of protection course.

2. Fan folded, with a core of extruded-polystyrene board insulation sandwiched between 2 sheets of plastic film, nominal thickness 1/4 inch, with compressive strength of 15 psi per ASTM D 1621 and maximum water absorption by volume of 0.4 percent per ASTM C 272.

2.06 MOLDED-SHEET DRAINAGE PANELS

A. Nonwoven-Geotextile-Faced, Molded-Sheet Drainage Panel: Manufactured composite subsurface drainage panels consisting of a nonwoven, needle-punched geotextile facing with an apparent opening size not exceeding No. 70 sieve laminated to 1 side and a polymeric film bonded to the other side of a 3-dimensional, nonbiodegradable, molded-plastic-sheet drainage core, with a vertical flow rate of 9 to 15 gpm per ft.

2.07 INSULATION AND DRAINAGE PANELS

A. At Contractor’s option, with written approval by waterproofing installer and manufacturer, use one of the following systems over waterproofing membrane: 1. Protection board and molded-drainage panels with perimeter wall insulation specified in

Section 07 2100.

2. Unfaced Wall Insulation Drainage Panel: Extruded polystyrene board insulation, min 1.1/2-in. thick, ASTM C 578 Type IV 25 psi min compressive strength, unfaced, fabricated with shiplap or channel edges and with groove drainage channels on inside face. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following or alternative as approved by Architect: a. Certifoam 25 by Diversifoam Products b. Perimate by Dow Chemical Company c. Green-Guard DC by Pactiv G Building Products.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Verify that concrete has cured and aged for minimum time period recommended by

waterproofing manufacturer.

2. Verify that concrete is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary moisture by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263.

3. Verify that compacted subgrade is dry, smooth, and sound; ready to receive HDPE sheet.



3.02 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. Clean, prepare, and treat substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions. Provide clean, dust-free, and dry substrates for waterproofing application.

B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not receiving waterproofing to prevent spillage and overspray affecting other construction.

C. Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, and other penetrating contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete.

D. Remove fins, ridges, mortar, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets, holes, and other voids.

E. Prepare, fill, prime, and treat joints and cracks in substrate according to ASTM C 1471 and waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions. Remove dust and dirt from joints and cracks according to ASTM D 4258. 1. Comply with ASTM C 1193 for joint-sealant installation.

2. Apply bond breaker between sealant and preparation strip.

3. Prime substrate and apply a single thickness of preparation strip extending a minimum of 3 inches along each side of joint. Apply waterproofing in two separate applications and embed a joint reinforcing strip in the first preparation coat.

4. Install sheet flashing and bond to wall substrates where indicated or required according to waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions. a. Extend sheet flashings onto perpendicular surfaces and other work penetrating

substrate according to ASTM C 898.

F. Bridge and cover isolation joints and expansion joints with overlapping sheet strips. 1. Invert and loosely lay first sheet strip over center of joint. Firmly adhere second sheet strip

to first and overlap to substrate.

G. Corners: Prepare, prime, and treat inside and outside corners according to ASTM D 6135. 1. Install membrane strips centered over vertical inside corners. Install 3/4-inch fillets of liquid

membrane on horizontal inside corners and as follows: a. At footing-to-wall intersections, extend liquid membrane each direction from corner

or install membrane strip centered over corner.

H. Prepare, treat, and seal vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations and penetrations through waterproofing and at drains and protrusions according to ASTM D 6135/ C1471. 1. Prime substrate unless otherwise instructed by waterproofing manufacturer. 2. Apply waterproofing in two separate applications, and embed a joint reinforcing strip in the

first preparation coat when recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. a. Provide sealant cants around penetrations and at inside corners of deck-to-wall butt

joints when recommended by waterproofing manufacturer.


3.03 RUBBERIZED-ASPHALT SHEET APPLICATION

A. Install self-adhering sheets according to waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in ASTM D 6135.

B. Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow to dry. Limit priming to areas that will be covered by sheet waterproofing in same day. Reprime areas exposed for more than 24 hours.

C. Apply and firmly adhere sheets over area to receive waterproofing. Accurately align sheets and maintain uniform 2-1/2-inch-minimum lap widths and end laps. Overlap and seal seams and stagger end laps to ensure watertight installation. 1. When ambient and substrate temperatures range between 25 and 40 deg F, install self-

adhering, rubberized-asphalt sheets produced for low-temperature application. Do not use low-temperature sheets if ambient or substrate temperature is higher than 60 deg F.

D. Apply continuous sheets over sheet strips bridging substrate cracks, construction, and contraction joints.

E. Seal exposed edges of sheets at terminations not concealed by metal counterflashings or ending in reglets with mastic or sealant.

F. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in waterproofing not complying with requirements. Slit and flatten fishmouths and blisters. Patch with sheets extending 6 inches beyond repaired areas in all directions.

G. Correct deficiencies in or remove sheet waterproofing that does not comply with requirements, repair substrates, reapply waterproofing, and repair sheet flashings.

3.04 FLUID-APPLIED APPLICATION

A. Apply waterproofing according to ASTM C 1471 and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Start installing waterproofing in presence of manufacturer's technical representative.

C. Apply primer over prepared substrate.

D. Unreinforced Waterproofing Applications: Mix materials and apply waterproofing by spray, roller, notched squeegee, trowel, or other application method suitable to slope of substrate. 1. Apply one or more coats of waterproofing to obtain a seamless membrane free of entrapped

gases, with an average dry film thickness as recommended by Manufacturer. 2. Apply waterproofing to prepared wall terminations and vertical surfaces. 3. Verify wet film thickness of waterproofing every 100 sq. ft.

E. Install protection course with butted joints over nominally cured membrane before starting subsequent construction operations. 1. Drainage panels and board insulation may be used in place of a separate protection course to

vertical applications when approved by waterproofing manufacturer.


3.05 PROTECTION COURSE INSTALLATION

A. Install protection course with butted joints over waterproofing membrane before starting subsequent construction operations. 1. Molded-sheet drainage panels may be used in place of a separate protection course to

vertical applications when approved by waterproofing manufacturer.

3.06 MOLDED-SHEET DRAINAGE PANEL INSTALLATION

A. Place and secure molded-sheet drainage panels according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use adhesives. Lap edges and ends of geotextile to maintain continuity. Protect installed molded-sheet drainage panels during subsequent construction. 1. For vertical applications, install board insulation used as a protection course before installing

drainage panels.

3.07 INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Install one or more layers of board insulation to achieve required thickness over protection board, or insulation drainage panels over waterproofed surfaces. Cut and fit to within 3/4 inch of projections and penetrations. 1. On vertical surfaces, set insulation units in adhesive or tape applied according to

manufacturer's written instructions.


A. Engage a full-time site representative qualified by waterproofing membrane manufacturer to inspect substrate conditions; surface preparation; membrane application, flashings, protection, and drainage components; and to furnish daily reports to Architect.

3.09 CURING, PROTECTION AND CLEANING

A. Cure waterproofing according to manufacturer's written recommendations, taking care to prevent contamination and damage during application stages and curing.

B. Protect waterproofing from damage and wear during remainder of construction period.

C. Protect installed board insulation or insulation drainage panels from damage due to UV light, harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings where insulation will be subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation.

D. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.


07 1300 ATTACHMENT WATERPROOFING INSTALLER'S WARRANTY (sample)

LAWRENCE COUNTY WATERPROOFING INSTALLER'S WARRANTY (sample) PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 07 1300 ATTACHMENT

WHEREAS ___________________________________ of ___________________________________________,

(Firm Name) (Address) herein called the "Installer," has performed foundation waterproofing and associated work ("Work") on the following project:

Owner: Lawrence County Project: Public Safety Facility Proj. 14005 430 Court Street County Line Road

New Castle, PA 16101 New Castle, Lawrence County, Pennsylvania 16101

Area of Work: ________________________________________ Acceptance Date:_________________________

Warranty Period: ______________________________________ Expiration Date:_________________________

AND WHEREAS Installer has contracted (either directly with Owner or indirectly as a subcontractor) to warrant said Work against leaks and faulty or defective materials and workmanship for designated Warranty Period,

NOW THEREFORE Installer hereby warrants, subject to terms and conditions herein set forth, that during Warranty Period he will, at his own cost and expense, make or cause to be made such repairs to or replacements of said Work as are necessary to correct faulty and defective Work and as are necessary to maintain said Work in a watertight condi-tion.

This Warranty is made subject to the following terms and conditions:

1. Installer is responsible for damage to Work covered by this Warranty but is not liable for consequential damages to building or building contents resulting from leaks or faults or defects of Work.

2. During Warranty Period, if Owner allows alteration of Work by anyone other than Installer, including cutting, patch-ing, and maintenance in connection with penetrations or attachment of other work, this Warranty shall become null and void on date of said alterations, but only to the extent said alterations affect Work covered by this Warranty. If Owner engages Installer to perform said alterations, Warranty shall not become null and void unless Installer, before starting said Work, shall have notified Owner in writing, showing reasonable cause for claim, that said alterations would likely damage or deteriorate Work, thereby reasonably justifying a limitation or termination of this Warranty.

3. Owner shall promptly notify Installer of observed, known, or suspected leaks, defects, or deterioration and shall afford reasonable opportunity for Installer to inspect Work and to examine evidence of such leaks, defects, or deterioration.

7. This Warranty is recognized to be the only warranty of Installer on said Work and shall not operate to restrict or cut off Owner from other remedies and resources lawfully available to Owner in cases of waterproofing failure. Specifi-cally, this Warranty shall not operate to relieve Installer of responsibility for performance of original Work according to requirements of the Contract Documents, regardless of whether Contract was a contract directly with Owner or a subcontract with Owner's General Contractor.

IN WITNESS THEREOF, this instrument has been duly executed this _______ day of ________________, 20______

Name:_____________________________________________

_______________________________________ Title:_____________________________________________ Authorized Signature

LAWRENCE COUNTY THERMAL INSULATION PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 07 2100 - 1 © 2014 Eckles Architecture and Engineering

SECTION 07 2100 - THERMAL INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. Perimeter insulation under slabs-on-grade (extruded polystyrene). 2. Perimeter wall insulation supporting backfill (extruded polystyrene). 3. Continuous rigid cavity-wall insulation. 4. Concealed fibrous building insulation 5. Concealed spray-foam building insulation/ air barrier 6. EPS Foam underslab insulation – EMA Garage entire slab on grade.

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry" for insulation installed in masonry backup cavity walls.

2. Division 05 Section "Structural Cold-Formed Metal Framing" for sloped roof insulation installed over engineered fabricated metal roof trusses.

3. Division 07 Section “Fabricated Insulating Wall Panel System” for panelized insulating wall backup system.

4. Division 07 Sections for Membrane Roofing for insulation specified as part of low slope roofing construction.

5. Division 07 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems" for insulation installed as part of a perimeter fire-resistive joint system.

6. Divisions 22 and 23 Sections for insulation specified as part of plumbing and mechanical systems.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: Insulation composed of rock-wool fibers, slag-wool fibers, or glass fibers; produced in boards and blanket with latter formed into batts (flat-cut lengths) or rolls.


A. Plenum Rating: Provide glass or slag-wool-fiber/rock-wool-fiber insulation where indicated in ceiling plenums whose test performance is rated as follows for use in plenums as determined by testing identical products per "Mold Growth and Humidity Test" described in UL 181, or on comparable tests from another standard acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Mold Growth and Humidity Test Results: Insulation shows no evidence of mold growth,

delamination, or other deterioration due to the effects of high humidity, after inoculation with Chaetomium globosium on all surfaces and storing for 60 days at 100 percent relative humidity in the dark.

THERMAL INSULATION LAWRENCE COUNTY 07 2100 - 2 PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency for insulation products.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of building insulation through one source from a single manufacturer.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire-test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84.


A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.

B. Protect plastic insulation as follows: 1. Do not expose to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and

concealment.

2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver plastic insulating materials to Project site before installation time.

3. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified.

LAWRENCE COUNTY THERMAL INSULATION PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 07 2100 - 3

2.02 FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD INSULATION

A. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, of type and density indicated below, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively: 1. Manufacturers:

a. DiversiFoam Products. b. Dow Chemical Company. c. Owens Corning.

2. Type IV, 1.60 lb/cu. ft., unless otherwise indicated.

3. Polystyrene products will not be acceptable as masonry cavity insulation except as described in Division 04 Section “Unit Masonry”

2.03 CAVITY-WALL CONTINUOUS BOARD INSULATION

A. Basis of Design: Foil-Faced Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Polyisocyanurate Foam Insulation: ASTM C1289, Type I, Class 2, with compressive resistance 25 psi as per ASTM D1621. 1. Thermal Resistance: 5-year aged minimum R-value of 6.5 per inch. 2. Water Absorption: Maximum 0.05 percent by volume as per ASTM C 209. 3. Product: Thermax (ci) by Dow Building Materials, The Dow Chemical Company. 4. Thickness: 1-1/2 inches unless noted otherwise.

B. Fire Test Response Characteristics: Provide products tested, approved and appropriately labeled as follows: 1. ASTM E 84/ UL 723

a. Flame Spread Index 25or less (Class A) b. Smoke Developed Index 450 or less

2. Part of a tested and approved NFPA 285 wall assembly.

3. Products bearing on each piece the label of an approved agency, with manufacturer’s identifying information, performance characteristics, and approval agency’s identification.

C. Optional Insulation Product: (At contractor’s option, subject to acceptance) Unfaced Mineral Fiber Board: ASTM C518. Use of this optional product shall result in no additional cost to Owner. 1. Thermal Resistance: 5-year aged minimum R-value of 4.2 per inch. 2. Water Absorption: Maximum 0.05 percent by volume as per ASTM C 209. 3. Basis of Design Product: RainBarrier 45 by Thermafiber. 4. Thickness: 2-1/2 inches, unless noted otherwise.

D. Adhesive: Type recommended by insulation board manufacturer for application indicated, and compatible with air barrier membrane.

2.04 GLASS-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION

A. Manufacturers: 1. CertainTeed Corporation. 2. Guardian Fiberglass, Inc. 3. Johns Manville. 4. Knauf Fiber Glass. 5. Owens Corning.


B. Unfaced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.

C. Faced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type III (blankets with reflective membrane facing), Class A (membrane-faced surface with a flame-spread index of 25 or less); Category 1 (membrane is a vapor barrier), faced with polypropylene-scrim-kraft vapor-retarder membrane on 1 face.

D. Where glass-fiber blanket insulation is indicated by the following thicknesses, provide blankets in batt or roll form with thermal resistances indicated: 1. 3-5/8 inches thick with a thermal resistance of 11 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu at 75 deg F. 2. 5-1/2 inches thick with a thermal resistance of 21 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu at 75 deg F.

2.05 BELOW SLAB EPS FOAM AND VAPOR RETARDER

A. Located below entire slab on grade of the EMA Garage building. Basis of Design: “XBoard” by NOFP The Barrier. Northwestern Ohio Foam Products, Inc 725 Enterprise Avenue, Wauseon, Ohio 43567. Phone 800-339-4850. 1. Alternate manufacturers shall be considered provided they meet or exceed the requirements

of the specifications. Product substitutions shall be submitted for review and approval according to the requirements set forth in these specifications.

B. Core: Expanded Polystyrene

C. Vapor Barrier: (2) Two layers of polymeric film applied to EPS core.

D. Seams: Per manufacturer’s installation instructions, stagger joints.

E. Coverage: XBoard dimensions 2.38” thickness x 4’ wide x 8’ long(32sq ft)

F. Insulation R-Value: 15

G. ASTM C-518: 11.4/10

H. Weight: 13 lbs per unit.

I. Compressive Resistance: 25psi @ 10%

J. Use Temperature: 180 degrees F Max.

K. Permeance: Zero

2.06 AUXILIARY INSULATING MATERIALS

A. Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by insulation manufacturers for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor-retarder facings.

B. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation and substrates.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements of Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and for other conditions affecting performance. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulation or vapor retarders, including removing projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders or of interfering with insulation attachment.


A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and application indicated.

B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed at any time to ice, rain, and snow.

C. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.

D. Water-Piping Coordination: If water piping is located within insulated exterior walls, coordinate location of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation and insulation encapsulates piping.

E. For preformed insulating units, provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness.

3.04 INSTALLATION OF MASONRY CAVITY-WALL INSULATION

A. As specified in Division 04 Section “Unit Masonry”


3.05 INSTALLATION OF PERIMETER AND UNDER-SLAB INSULATION

A. On vertical surfaces, set insulation units in adhesive applied according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use adhesive recommended by insulation manufacturer.

B. On horizontal surfaces, loosely lay insulation units according to manufacturer's written instructions. Stagger end joints and tightly abut insulation units.

C. If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 24 inches below exterior grade line and 24 inches horizontally from exterior wall into building. Where practicable, extend top of vertical perimeter insulation to within 2 inches of finish floor elevation.

3.06 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION

A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units.

B. Seal joints between foam-plastic insulation units by applying adhesive, mastic, or sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in completed installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant as recommended by insulation manufacturer.

C. Stuff glass-fiber loose-fill insulation into miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where shown. Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume equaling a density of approximately 2.5 lb/cu. ft.

D. EPS Foam with vapor barrier: 1. Base material shall be compact, level and free of debris. 2. Install insulation according to manufacturer’s recommendations to maintain sufficient laping

of joints for adhesive to provide monolithic membrane. 3. Repair damaged film and punctures with manufacturer’s approved repair tape.



A. Owner’s Inspection and Testing: Cooperate with Owner’s testing agency. Allow access to work areas and staging. Notify Owner’s testing agency in writing of schedule for Work of this Section to allow sufficient time for testing and inspection. Daily inspection and testing may be required. Do not cover Work of this Section until testing and inspection is accepted.

B. ABAA Site Inspections (spray-foam installation): Arrange and pay for site inspections by qualified auditor to verify conformance with the manufacturer’s instructions, the ULC S705.2 Installation standard, the ABAA Quality Assurance Program, and this Section . 1. Inspections and testing shall be carried out at 5, 50 and 95 percent of completion. Forward

written inspection reports to the Architect within 10 working days of the inspection and test being performed.

2. If the inspections reveal any defects, promptly remove and replace defective work at no additional expense to the Owner.

3.08 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation.


LAWRENCE COUNTY AIR BARRIERS PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 07 2726 - 1 © 2013 Eckles Architecture and Engineering

SECTION 07 2726 - AIR BARRIERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Fluid-applied membrane air barrier assemblies, fire resistant, at perimeter wall enclosure. 2. Continuity and performance of building air barrier system.

B. Services included: 1. Coordination among various Prime Contractors, proper scheduling and sequencing of

Work, preconstruction meetings, inspections, tests and related actions, including reports performed by Contractors, by independent agencies, and by governing authorities. a. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect and

Construction Manager.

2. Each affected Contractor shall ensure that the intent of constructing the building enclosure with a continuous air barrier system to control air leaking into or out of the conditioned space is achieved. The air barrier system shall have the following characteristics: a. It must be continuous with all joints sealed

b. It must be structurally supported to withstand positive and negative air pressures applied to the building enclosure.

c. Connection shall be made between: 1) Foundation and walls 2) Walls and windows, doors, other openings 3) Different wall systems 4) Wall and roof 5) Wall and roof over unconditioned space 6) Walls, floor and roof across construction, control and expansion joints 7) Walls, floors and roofs to utility, pipe and duct penetrations

3. Air Barrier Penetrations: All penetrations of the air barrier and paths of air infiltration/ exfiltration shall be made air-tight.

4. Inspection and testing services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with Contract Document requirements.

5. Requirements of this section relate to the coordination among the Prime Contractors and subcontractors required to provide an airtight building enclosure and customized fabrication and installation procedures. Includes: a. Continuity of the air barrier materials and products with joints to provide

assemblies. b. Continuity of all the enclosure assemblies with joints and transition materials to

provide a whole building air barrier system.

AIR BARRIERS LAWRENCE COUNTY 07 2726 - 2 PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY

c. Specified inspections, tests and related actions do not limit Contractor’s quality-control procedures that facilitate compliance with Contract Document requirements.

d. Requirements for Contractor to provide an airtight building enclosure is not limited to quality-control services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Air Barrier System Summary: 1. Air Barrier Assembly at Roofing:

a. Metal Roofing: Self-adhered membrane underlayment specified in Division 07. b. Membrane Roofing: Roofing membrane performs as air barrier assembly. No

additional air barrier is specified.

2. Air Barrier Assembly at Perimeter Wall Enclosure: a. Masonry backup construction: Fluid-applied membrane specified in this Section. b. Structural metal-stud backup construction: Spray-applied foam insulation

performs as air-barrier assemby. No additional air barrier material is specified.

3. Air Barrier Continuity: Applications of accessory materials specified in this section, installed recommend by manufacturer and consistent with recommendations for system continuity in applicable ABAA Air Barrier specification. a. Self-adhering butyl and/or neoprene strips b. Self-adhering counterflashing strips c. Spray polyurethane foam sealant d. Preformed silicone-sealant extrusions e. Patching materials f. Mastic and sealants

D. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry" for embedded flashings. 2. Division 05 Section “Structural Metal Stud Framing” for exterior studwall sheathing. 3. Division 07 Sections for roofing assemblies for air-barrier performance of roofing

membrane. 4. Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation" for spray-applied foam-plastic insulation used

as air barrier material at metal stud backup system. 5. Division 07 Section “Metal Roofing” for air-barrier membrane applied to roofing

substrate. 6. Division 07 Section “Fabricated Insulating Wall Panel System” for panelized insulating/

air barrier assembly at cavity wall. 7. Division 08 Sections for doors and windows

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. ABAA: Air Barrier Association of America.

B. Air Barrier Material: The principal air barrier component material installed on the wall. 1. Air Barrier Accessory is a transitional element installed at joints and junctions between

air barrier assemblies to control air movement through the air barrier system.

LAWRENCE COUNTY AIR BARRIERS PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 07 2726 - 3

C. Air Barrier Assembly: The collection of air barrier materials and auxiliary materials applied to an opaque wall, including joints and junctions to abutting construction, to control air movement through the construction assembly.

D. Air Barrier System: The sum of air barrier assemblies that comprise a building envelope's walls, roof, and ground separation installed to control air movement through the building envelope.


A. General: Air barrier shall be capable of performing as a continuous vapor-retarding air barrier and as a liquid-water drainage plane flashed to discharge to the exterior incidental condensation or water penetration. 1. Where building element includes an air barrier separate from vapor barrier, provide vapor

permeable air barrier component.

B. Air barrier assemblies shall be capable of accommodating substrate movement and of sealing substrate expansion and control joints, construction material changes, penetrations, and transitions at perimeter conditions without deterioration and air leakage exceeding specified limits.

C. Air Barrier Assembly Air Leakage: Not to exceed 0.04 cfm/sq. ft. of surface area at 1.57 lbf/sq. ft.; ASTM E 783.

1.04 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING

A. Mockup Testing: Air barrier assemblies shall comply with performance requirements indicated, as evidenced by reports based on mockup testing by a qualified testing agency. 1. Owner may engage a qualified testing agency.

2. Qualitative or Quantitative Air Leakage Testing: per "Performance Requirements" Article for air barrier assembly air leakage.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating substrate; technical data; and tested physical and performance properties of air barrier. 1. Submit three complete bound sets of Manufacturer’s published installation instructions,

for information and reference, to be maintained in Construction Manager’s, Contractor’s and Architect’s field offices.

B. Shop Drawings: Show locations and extent of air barrier. Include details for substrate joints and cracks, counterflashing strip, penetrations, inside and outside corners, terminations, and tie-ins with adjoining construction. 1. Include details of interfaces with other materials that form part of air barrier. 2. Include details of mockups.


C. Product Certificates: For air barriers, certifying compatibility of air barrier and accessory materials with Project materials that connect to or that come in contact with air barrier; signed by product manufacturer.

D. Qualification Data: For Applicator.

E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for air barriers.


A. Applicator Qualifications: A firm experienced in applying air barrier materials similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in applications with a record of successful in-service performance 1. Comply with ABAA’s Quality Assurance Program.

B. Mockups: Before beginning installation of air barrier, build mockups of exterior wall assembly, 150 sq. ft., incorporating backup wall construction, external cladding, window, door frame and sill, insulation, and flashing to demonstrate surface preparation, crack and joint treatment, and sealing of gaps, terminations, and penetrations of air barrier membrane. 1. Coordinate construction of mockup to permit inspection by Owner's testing agency of air

barrier before external insulation and cladding is installed.

2. Include junction with roofing membrane, building corner condition, and foundation wall intersection.

3. If Architect determines mockups do not comply with requirements, reconstruct mockups and apply air barrier until mockups are approved.

4. Approved does not become part of the completed Work.

C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Include installers of other construction connecting to air barrier, such as roofing,

waterproofing, architectural precast concrete, masonry, joint sealants, windows, glazed curtain walls, and door frames.

2. Review air barrier requirements including surface preparation, substrate condition and pretreatment, minimum substrate curing period, forecasted weather conditions, special details and sheet flashings, mockups, installation procedures, sequence of installation, testing and inspecting procedures, and protection and repairs.

3. Review potential gaps, discontinuities and penetrations in barrier, and means for closure.


A. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged packages in a clean, dry, protected location and within temperature range required by air barrier manufacturer.

B. Remove and replace liquid materials that cannot be applied within their stated shelf life.

C. Store rolls according to manufacturer's written instructions.


D. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight.


A. Environmental Limitations: Apply air barrier within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended by air barrier manufacturer. Protect substrates from environmental conditions that affect performance of air barrier. Do not apply air barrier to a damp or wet substrate or during snow, rain, fog, or mist.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIER

A. Fluid-Applied, Vapor-Permeable Membrane Air Barrier: Elastomeric, modified bituminous or synthetic polymer membrane. Provide Manufacturer's complete system, compatible with penetration flashing, sealants, and adjacent components air-barrier assembly specified in other Sections. 1. Elastomeric, Modified Bituminous Membrane:

a. Henry Company; Air-Bloc 31. b. W.R.Meadows; Air-Shield LM c. Polyguard; Airlok Flex VP d. Prosoco, R-Guard MVP e. Tremco Inc; ExoAir 220 Vapor Permeable f. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing; Barritech VP.

2. Physical and Performance Properties: a. Membrane Air Permeance: Not to exceed 0.004 cfm/ sq. ft. of surface area at

1.57-lbf/sq. ft. pressure difference; ASTM E 2178.

b. Membrane Vapor Permeance: Not less than 10 perms; ASTM E 96.


A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by air barrier manufacturer for intended use and compatible with air barrier. Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Primer: Liquid waterborne primer recommended for substrate by manufacturer of air barrier material.

C. Counterflashing Strip: Modified bituminous 40-mil- thick, self-adhering sheet consisting of 32 mils of rubberized asphalt laminated to an 8-mil- thick, cross-laminated polyethylene film with release liner backing, or as otherwise recommended by air barrier manufacturer. 1. Application: counterflash metal flashings.


D. Butyl Strip: Vapor-retarding, 30- to 40-mil- thick, self-adhering; polyethylene-film-reinforced top surface laminated to layer of butyl adhesive with release liner backing, or as otherwise recommended by air barrier manufacturer. 1. Application: transition air barrier to EPDM roofing membrane or flashing.

E. Termination Mastic: Cold fluid-applied elastomeric liquid; trowel grade.

F. Joint Reinforcing Strip: Air barrier manufacturer's glass-fiber-mesh tape.

G. Substrate Patching Membrane: Manufacturer's standard trowel-grade substrate filler.

H. Adhesive and Tape: Air barrier manufacturer's standard adhesive and pressure-sensitive adhesive tape.

I. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304, 0.0187 inch thick, and Series 300 stainless-steel fasteners.

J. Sprayed Polyurethane Foam Sealant: 1- or 2-component, foamed-in-place, polyurethane foam sealant, 1.5 to 2.0 lb/cu. ft density; flame spread index of 25 or less according to ASTM E 162; with primer and noncorrosive substrate cleaner recommended by foam sealant manufacturer. 1. Application:

a. gaps at penetrations and openings. b. Roof/wall and floor/wall junctures c. Flute closures for metal roof deck perimeters and penetrations.

2. Product: Froth-Pak Class A Polyurethane Spray Foam by Dow Building Solutions.

K. Transition Membranes, as recommended by air barrier manufacturer for specific application: 1. Adhesive-Coated Transition Strip: Vapor-permeable, 17-mil- thick, self-adhering strip

consisting of an adhesive coating over a permeable laminate with a permeance of 37 perms.

2. Elastomeric Flashing Sheet: ASTM D 2000, 2BC415 to 3BC620, minimum 50- to 65-mil- thick, cured sheet neoprene with manufacturer's recommended contact adhesives and lap sealant with stainless-steel or aluminum termination bars and stainless-steel fasteners.

3. Preformed Silicone-Sealant Extrusion: Manufacturer's standard system consisting of cured low-modulus silicone extrusion, sized to fit opening widths, with a single-component, neutral-curing, Class 100/50 (low-modulus) silicone sealant for bonding extrusions to substrates. a. 123 Silicone Seal by Dow Corning Corporation b. UltraSpan US1100 by GE Silicones c. Sil-Span by Pecora Corporation d. Spectrem EZ Seal by Tremco Incorporated

L. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, single-component, neutral-curing silicone; Class 100/50 (low-modulus), Grade NS, Use NT related to exposure, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, Use O. Comply with Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Verify that substrates are sound and free of oil, grease, dirt or other contaminants. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. Clean, prepare, and treat substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions. Provide clean, dust-free, and dry substrate for air barrier application.

B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not covered by air barrier to prevent spillage and overspray affecting other construction.

C. Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, and other penetrating contaminants or film-forming coatings from substrate.

D. Remove fins, ridges, mortar, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets, holes, and other voids in concrete with substrate-patching membrane.

E. Prepare, fill, prime, and treat joints and cracks in substrates. Remove dust and dirt from joints and cracks according to ASTM D 4258. 1. Install modified bituminous strips and center over treated construction and contraction

joints and cracks exceeding a width of 1/16 inch.

F. Bridge and cover isolation joints expansion joints and discontinuous deck-to-wall and deck-to-deck joints with overlapping modified bituminous strips.

G. At changes in substrate plane, apply sealant or termination mastic beads at sharp corners and edges to form a smooth transition from one plane to another.

H. Cover gaps in substrate plane and form a smooth transition from one substrate plane to another with stainless-steel sheet mechanically fastened to structural framing to provide continuous support for air barrier.

3.03 TRANSITION STRIP INSTALLATION

A. Install strips, transition strips, and auxiliary materials according to air barrier manufacturer's written instructions to form a seal with adjacent construction and maintain a continuous air barrier. 1. Coordinate the installation of air barrier with installation of roofing membrane and base

flashing to ensure continuity of air barrier with roofing membrane.

2. Install butyl or modified bituminous strip on roofing membrane or base flashing so that a minimum of 3 inches of coverage is achieved over both substrates.


B. Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow to dry. Limit priming to areas that will be covered by air barrier sheet in same day. Reprime areas exposed for more than 24 hours. 1. Prime glass-fiber-surfaced gypsum sheathing with number of prime coats needed to

achieve required bond, with adequate drying time between coats.

C. Connect and seal exterior wall air barrier membrane continuously to roofing membrane air barrier, concrete below-grade structures, floor-to floor construction, exterior glazing and window systems, glazed curtain-wall systems, storefront systems, exterior louvers, exterior door framing, and other construction used in exterior wall openings, using accessory materials as detailed by manufacturer to ensure continuous, uninterrupted air barrier system.

D. At end of each working day, seal top edge of strips and transition strips to substrate with termination mastic.

E. Apply joint sealants forming part of air barrier assembly within manufacturer's recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges.

F. Wall Openings: Prime concealed perimeter frame surfaces of windows, curtain walls, storefronts, and doors. Apply transition strips, flashing sheets or preformed extrusions so that a minimum of 3 inches of coverage is achieved over both substrates. Maintain 3 inches of full contact over firm bearing to perimeter frames with not less than 1 inch of full contact. 1. Transition Strip: Roll firmly to enhance adhesion.

2. Elastomeric Flashing Sheet: Apply adhesive to wall, frame, and flashing sheet. Install flashing sheet and termination bars, fastened at 6 inches o.c. Apply lap sealant over exposed edges and on cavity side of flashing sheet.

3. Preformed Silicone-Sealant Extrusion: Set in full bed of silicone sealant applied to walls, frame, and membrane.

G. Fill gaps in perimeter frame surfaces of windows, curtain walls, storefronts, and doors, and miscellaneous penetrations of air barrier membrane with foam sealant.

H. Seal strips and transition strips around masonry reinforcing or ties and penetrations with termination mastic.

I. Seal top of through-wall flashings to air barrier with an additional 6-inch- wide, counterflashing strip.

J. Seal exposed edges of strips at seams, cuts, penetrations, and terminations not concealed by metal counterflashings or ending in reglets with termination mastic.

K. Repair punctures, voids, and deficient lapped seams in strips and transition strips. Slit and flatten fishmouths and blisters. Patch with transition strips extending 6 inches beyond repaired areas in strip direction.


3.04 AIR BARRIER MEMBRANE INSTALLATION

A. Apply air barrier membrane to form a seal with strips and transition strips and to achieve a continuous air barrier according to air barrier manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Apply air barrier membrane within manufacturer's recommended application temperature ranges.

C. Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow to dry. Limit priming to areas that will be covered by air barrier sheet in same day. Reprime areas exposed for more than 24 hours. 1. Prime glass-fiber-surfaced gypsum sheathing with number of prime coats needed to

achieve required bond, with adequate drying time between coats.

D. Apply a continuous unbroken air barrier to substrates according to the following minimum thickness. Apply membrane in full contact around protrusions such as masonry ties. 1. Vapor-Permeable Membrane Air Barrier: 120-mil minimum wet film thickness, or as

recommended by manufacturer to comply with specified performance requirement.

E. Apply strip and transition strip a minimum of 1 inch onto cured air membrane or strip and transition strip over cured air membrane overlapping 3 inches onto each surface according to air barrier manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Do not cover air barrier until it has been tested and inspected by Owner's testing agency.

G. Correct deficiencies in or remove air barrier that does not comply with requirements; repair substrates and reapply air barrier components.


A. Testing Agency: Owner may engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Inspections: Air barrier materials and installation are subject to inspection for compliance with requirements. Inspections may include the following: 1. Continuity of air barrier system has been achieved throughout the building envelope with

no gaps or holes.

2. Continuous structural support of air barrier system has been provided.

3. Substrate surfaces are smooth, clean and free of cavities, protrusions, and mortar droppings.

4. Site conditions for application temperature and dryness of substrates have been maintained.

5. Maximum exposure time of materials to UV deterioration has not been exceeded.

6. Surfaces have been primed.

7. Laps in sheet materials have complied with the minimum requirements and have been shingled in the correct direction (or mastic applied on exposed edges), with no fishmouths.

8. Termination mastic has been applied on cut edges.


9. Air barrier has been firmly adhered to substrate.

10. Compatible materials have been used.

11. Transitions at changes in direction and structural support at gaps have been provided.

12. Connections between assemblies (membrane and sealants) have complied with requirements for cleanliness, preparation and priming of surfaces, structural support, integrity, and continuity of seal.

13. All penetrations have been sealed.

C. Tests: Testing to be performed will be determined by Owner's testing agency from among the following tests: 1. Qualitative Testing: Air barrier assemblies will be tested for evidence of air leakage

according to one of the following: a. ASTM E 1186, smoke pencil with pressurization or depressurization b. ASTM E 1186, chamber pressurization or depressurization with smoke tracers c. ASTM E 1186, chamber depressurization using detection liquids.

2. Quantitative Air Leakage Testing: Testing not to exceed the test pressure differential, positive and negative, indicated in "Performance Requirements" Article for air barrier assembly air leakage according to ASTM E 783.

D. Remove and replace deficient air barrier components and retest as specified above.

3.06 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Protect air barrier system from damage during application and remainder of construction period, according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Protect air barrier from exposure to UV light and harmful weather exposure as required

by manufacturer. Remove and replace air barrier exposed to these conditions for more than 30 days.

2. Protect air barrier from contact with creosote, uncured coal-tar products, TPO, EPDM, flexible PVC membranes, and sealants not approved by air barrier manufacturer.

B. Clean spills, stains, and soiling from adjacent construction that would be exposed in the completed work using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.

C. Remove masking materials after installation.


LAWRENCE COUNTY METAL ROOFING PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 07 4113 - 1 © 2014 Eckles Architecture and Engineering, Inc.

SECTION 07 4113 - METAL ROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes rooftop prefinished metal equipment screen assemblies: 1. Factory-formed and field-assembled, concealed-fastener standing-seam metal roof system

including panels, attachments, trim and accessories.

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 06 Section "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking. 2. Division 07 Section "Air Barriers" for continuity of air barrier system. 3. Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for joint sealants, joint fillers, and joint preparation. 4. Division 07 Section "Metal Roof Edge Specialties" for metal gutters, downspouts, fascia and

trim, soffit, and iron downspout boot.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Metal Roof Panel Assembly: Metal roof panels, attachment system components, miscellaneous metal framing, thermal insulation, and accessories necessary for a complete weathertight roofing system.

B. Roofing Terminology: Refer to ASTM D 1079 and glossary of NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" for definition of terms related to roofing work in this Section.

C. Design Uplift Pressure: The uplift pressure, calculated according to procedures in SPRI's "Wind Load Design Guide for Fully Adhered and Mechanically Fastened Roofing Systems," before multiplication by a safety factor.

D. Factored Design Uplift Pressure: The uplift pressure, calculated according to procedures in SPRI's "Wind Load Design Guide for Fully Adhered and Mechanically Fastened Roofing Systems," after multiplication by a safety factor.


A. General: 1. Provide metal roof panel assemblies that comply with performance requirements specified as

determined by testing manufacturers' standard assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project, by a qualified testing and inspecting agency.

2. Design load information indicated represent non-factored service loads unless otherwise noted. Design and fabricate systems and assemblies using design load criteria indicated or otherwise required by authorities having jurisdiction. Coordinate with applicable structural notes on Drawing S000.

B. Delegated Design: Design metal roof panel assembly, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

METAL ROOFING LAWRENCE COUNTY 07 4113 - 2 PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY

C. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer, approved by manufacturer to install manufacturer's roofing system and metal support assemblies.

D. Air Infiltration: Air leakage through assembly of not more than 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. of roof area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at the following test-pressure difference: 1. Test-Pressure Difference: Positive and negative 1.57 lbf/sq. ft.

2. Positive Preload Test-Pressure Difference: Greater than or equal to 15.0 lbf/sq. ft. and the greater of 75 percent of building live load or 50 percent of building design positive wind-pressure difference.

3. Negative Preload Test-Pressure Difference: 50 percent of design wind-uplift-pressure difference.

E. Water Penetration: No water penetration when tested according to ASTM E 331 at the following test-pressure difference: 1. Test-Pressure Difference: 20 percent of positive design wind pressure, but not less than 6.24

lbf/sq. ft. and not more than 12.0 lbf/sq. ft.

F. Water Absorption: Maximum 1.0 percent absorption rate by volume when tested according to ASTM C 209.

G. Wind-Uplift Resistance: Provide metal roof panel assemblies that comply with UL 580 for wind-uplift resistance class indicated.

H. FMG Listing: Provide metal roof panels and component materials that comply with requirements in FMG 4471 as part of a panel roofing system and that are listed in FMG's "Approval Guide" for Class 1 or noncombustible construction, as applicable. Identify materials with FMG markings. 1. Fire/Windstorm Classification: Class 1A-90. 2. Hail Resistance: MH.

I. Structural Performance: Provide metal roof panel assemblies capable of withstanding the effects of indicated design loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated on Structural Drawings, based on testing according to ASTM E 1592:

J. Thermal Movements: Provide metal roof panel assemblies that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

LAWRENCE COUNTY METAL ROOFING PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 07 4113 - 3

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of metal roof panel and accessory.

B. Roof Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation layouts of metal panels and support; details of edge conditions, joints, corners, anchorages, trim, and accessories; and special details. Distinguish between factory- and field-assembled work. 1. Accessories: Include details of the following items, at a scale of not less than 1-1/2 inches

per 12 inches: a. Flashing and trim. b. Roof curbs. c. Snow guards.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For metal roof panel assembly indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1. Snow Retention System Calculations: Include calculation of number and location of snow

guards based on snow load, roof slope, panel length and finish, and seam type and spacing.

D. Coordination Drawings: Roof plans drawn to scale and coordinating penetrations and roof-mounted items. Show the following: 1. Metal panels and attachments. 2. Roof-edge drainage system

E. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below. 1. Metal Panel: 6 inches long by actual panel width. Include fasteners, clips, trim, and other

metal roof panel accessories.

2. Accessories: 6-inch-long Samples for each type of accessory.

F. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and professional engineer

G. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for each product.

H. Field quality-control reports.

I. Maintenance Data: For metal roof panels to include in maintenance manuals.

J. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.


A. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of metal framing supporting equipment screens that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.

B. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer.


C. Source Limitations: Obtain metal roof panels and equipment screen panels through one source from a single manufacturer.

D. Mockups: Build in situ mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.

1. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.


E. Preliminary Roofing Conference: Before procuring materials, conduct conference at Project site. Comply with requirements for preinstallation conferences in Division 01 Section "Coordination and Meetings." Review methods and procedures related to roof deck construction and roofing system including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Meet with Owner; Architect; Construction Manager; Owner's insurer if applicable; testing

and inspecting agency representative; roofing Installer; roofing system manufacturer's representative; deck Installer; and installers whose work interfaces with or affects roofing, including installers of roof accessories and roof-mounted equipment.

2. Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including manufacturer's written instructions.

3. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

4. Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing.

5. Review special details, supports, and condition of other construction that will affect roofing system.

6. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if applicable.

7. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after installation.

8. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation.

F. Preinstallation Conference: Before starting field operations, conduct conference at Project site as follow-up to Preliminary Roofing Conference. Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Coordination and Meetings." Review methods and procedures as discussed in Preliminary Roofing Conference, and examine substrates and adjacent work for compliance with requirements.


A. Deliver components, metal roof panels, and other manufactured items so as not to be damaged or deformed. Package metal roof panels for protection during transportation and handling.

B. Unload, store, and erect metal roof panels in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage.

C. Stack metal roof panels on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and ventilated covering. Store metal roof panels to ensure dryness. Do not store metal roof panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage.


D. Protect strippable protective covering on metal roof panels from exposure to sunlight and high humidity, except to extent necessary for period of metal roof panel installation.


A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit assembly of metal roof panels to be performed according to manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements.

B. Field Measurements: Verify locations of roof framing and roof opening dimensions by field measurements before metal roof panel fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the

Work, either establish framing and opening dimensions and proceed with fabricating metal roof panels without field measurements, or allow for field-trimming of panels. Coordinate roof construction to ensure that actual building dimensions, locations of structural members, and openings correspond to established dimensions.

1.08 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate metal panel roof assemblies with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, and construction of decks and roof structure, parapets, walls, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.

1.09 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace metal roof panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. 1. Fluoropolymer Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:

a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.

2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 PANEL MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Sheet: 20 ga (0.032-in) Coil-coated sheet, ASTM B 209, alclad alloy 3003, 3004, or 3105 for painted finishes, with temper as required to suit forming operations and structural performance required. 1. Exposed Finishes: Apply the following coating, as specified or indicated on Drawings.

a. High-Performance Organic Finish: AA-C12C42R1x (Chemical Finish: cleaned with inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: acid-chromate-fluoride-phosphate conversion coating; Organic Coating: as specified below). Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. 1) Fluoropolymer Two-Coat System: Manufacturer's standard two-coat,

thermocured system consisting of specially formulated inhibitive primer and


fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; complying with AAMA 2605.

B. Concealed Finish: Apply pretreatment and manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or polyester backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil.

C. Panel Sealants: 1. Butyl-Rubber-Based, Solvent-Release Sealant: ASTM C 1311.

2. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick.

3. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920; silicone sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in metal roof panels and remain weathertight; and as recommended in writing by metal roof panel manufacturer.


A. Fasteners: Self-tapping screws, bolts, nuts, self-locking rivets and bolts, end-welded studs, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed fasteners with heads matching color of metal roof panels by means of plastic caps or factory-applied coating. 1. Fasteners for Metal Panels: Self-drilling or self-tapping, zinc-plated, hex-head carbon-steel

screws, with a stainless-steel cap or zinc-aluminum-alloy head and EPDM or neoprene sealing washer.

2. Fasteners for Flashing and Trim: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws with hex washer head.

3. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets.

B. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.

2.03 STANDING-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS

A. Provide factory-formed metal roof panels designed to be field assembled by lapping and interconnecting raised side edges of adjacent panels with joint type indicated and mechanically attaching panels to supports using concealed fasteners and factory-applied sealant in side laps. Include clips, cleats, pressure plates, and accessories required for weathertight installation. 1. Aluminum Panel Systems: Unless more stringent requirements are indicated, comply with

ASTM E 1637. 2. Manufacturers:

a. Basis for Design: ATAS International, Inc. b. Berridge Manufacturing Company c. Butler Manufacturing, A BlueScope Steel Company d. CENTRIA Architectural Systems. e. Copper Sales Inc. f. Petersen Aluminum Corporation. g. Innovative Metals Company. h. Una-Clad/ Firestone Building Products


3. Clips: Floating to accommodate thermal movement.

B. Vertical-Rib, Seamed-Joint, Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels: Formed with vertical ribs at panel edges and intermediate stiffening ribs symmetrically spaced between ribs; designed for sequential installation by mechanically attaching panels to supports using concealed clips located under one side of panels and engaging opposite edge of adjacent panels, and mechanically seaming panels together. 1. Panel Design: FLN 1 1/2”-inch Field-Lok Standing Seam, by Atas International Inc.

a. Panel coverage: manufacturer’s standard 16 inch nominal. b. Panel length: Continuous from ridge to eave. c. Uplift Rating: UL 90. d. Texture: Smooth

2.04 ACCESSORIES

A. Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete metal roof panel assembly including trim, copings, fasciae, corner units, ridge closures, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal roof panels, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Closures: Provide closures at eaves and ridges, fabricated of same metal as metal roof

panels.

2. Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin-foam or closed-cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch- thick, flexible closure strips; cut or premolded to match metal roof panel profile. Provide closure strips where indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction.

3. Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricated from material recommended by manufacturer.

4. Clips: Minimum 0.0625-inch-thick, stainless-steel panel clips designed to withstand negative-load requirements.

B. Flashing and Trim: Formed from same material as roof panels, prepainted with coil coating, minimum 0.018 inch thick. Provide flashing and trim as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to, eaves, rakes, corners, bases, framed openings, ridges, fasciae, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent metal roof panels.

C. Gutters: As specified in Section 07 7125. 1. Provide products manufactured or recommended by approved roof panel manufacturer.

D. Downspout: As specified in Section 07 7125. 1. Provide products manufactured or recommended by approved roof panel manufacturer.

E. Soffit assemblies: As specified in Section 07 7125. 1. Provide products manufactured or recommended by approved roof panel manufacturer.

F. Metal drip trim: As specified in Section 07 7125. 1. Provide products manufactured or recommended by approved roof panel manufacturer.

G. Downspout Boot: As specified in Section 07 7125. 1. Neenah, Zurn or approved equivalent.


H. Splash Blocks: As specified in Section 07 7125

2.05 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS

A. Mechanically attached synthetic underlayment and self-adhering Ice and Snow Shield sheet underlayment: 1. Manufacturer: InterWrap Inc.; www.interwrap.com/titanium

a. Synthetic Roofing Underlayment: TITANIUM UDL 30 Polyolefin based, asphalt free, high strength, reinforced roofing underlayment mechanically attached to sloped roof decks beneath metal panels.

b. Water Barrier Membrane High Temperature/Low Temperature and Ice Damming Membrane: TITANIUM PSU-30- Synthetic polymer surfaced self-adhered membrane roofing underlayment.

c. Sealant and fasteners as furnished or recommended by manufacturer.

2.06 SNOW GUARDS

A. Snow Guards: Prefabricated, noncorrosive units designed to be installed without penetrating metal roof panels, and complete with predrilled holes, clamps, or hooks for anchoring. 1. Seam-Mounted, Stop-Type Snow Guards: Cast-aluminum or Malleable-iron stops designed

for attachment to vertical ribs of standing-seam metal roof panels with stainless-steel set screws.

2. Seam-Mounted, Bar-Type Snow Guards: Aluminum or stainless-steel rods or bars held in place by stainless-steel clamps attached to vertical ribs of standing-seam metal roof panels. a. Aluminum Finish: Powder coated to match roofing panels. Custom color as required

to match color of roofing panels. b. Stainless-Steel Finish: No. 2B. c. Provide complete system including mounting and accessories including but not

limited to end caps, end collars, internal couplings and ice flags.

3. Products: Provide products as indicated and recommended by manufacturer for specific application, subject to compliance with requirements and approval by Architect a. Basis of Design: #4000 Clamp to seam style by Alpine SnowGuards b. Bar-type:

1) Alpine SnowGuards, Div. of Vermont Slate & Copper Services, Inc. 2) LMCurbs;. 3) Metal Roof Innovations, Ltd.;. 4) Riddell & Company, Inc.; 5) Snow Management Systems, a division of Contek, Inc. 6) TRA-MAGE, Inc.;.

2.07 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate and finish metal panels and accessories at the factory to greatest extent possible, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements.


B. Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full length of panel.

C. Where indicated, fabricate metal roof panel joints with factory-installed captive gaskets or separator strips that provide a tight seal and prevent metal-to-metal contact, in a manner that will minimize noise from movements within panel assembly.

D. Sheet Metal Accessories: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to the design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated. 1. Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil canning, buckling, and

tool marks and that are true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.

2. Seams for Other Than Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams in accessories with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder.

3. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA standards.

4. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces of accessories exposed to view.

5. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer. a. Size: As recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" or metal

roof panel manufacturer for application but not less than thickness of metal being secured.



B. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, metal roof panel supports, and other conditions affecting performance of work.

B. Examine roughing-in for components and systems penetrating metal roof panels to verify actual locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of metal roof panels before metal roof panel installation.



3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to proper installation, including projections capable of interfering with attachment.

B. Support Framing: Install metal posts, purlins, subpurlins, eave angles, furring, and miscellaneous roof panel support members and anchorage according to metal roof panel manufacturer's written recommendations.

3.03 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with underlayment manufacturer's written installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated unless more stringent requirements apply.

B. Follow procedures found in the current version of the National Roofing Contractors Association's (NRCA) "Steep Slope Roofing and Waterproofing Manual", and requirements of all code bodies having jurisdiction. In the event of a conflict in installation requirements, the more stringent method of installation will prevail.

C. Ice and Snow Shield: Install Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment, wrinkle free, on roof deck. Comply with low-temperature installation restrictions of underlayment manufacturer if applicable. Install at locations indicated below and shown on Drawings, lapped in direction to shed water. Lap sides not less than 3-1/2 inches. Lap ends not less than 6 inches staggered 24 inches between courses. Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within seven days. 1. Eaves: Extend from edges of eaves 24 inches beyond interior face of exterior wall. 2. Rakes: Extend from edges of rake 24 inches beyond interior face of exterior wall. 3. Valleys: Extend from lowest to highest point 18 inches on each side.

a. Exception: Concealed woven or closed-cut valleys. 4. Sidewalls: Extend beyond sidewall 18 inches, and return vertically against sidewall not less

than 4 inches. 5. Dormers, Chimneys, Skylights, and Other Roof-Penetrating Elements: Extend beyond

penetrating element 18 inches, and return vertically against penetrating element not less than 4 inches.

6. Roof Slope Transitions: Extend 18 inches on each roof slope.

D. Synthetic Roofing Underlayment: Install in compliance with manufacturer’s current installation guidelines. 1. Roof Deck: Starting at the lowest point of the roof section, apply one layer of underlayment

horizontally over all sections of roof deck not protected by eave or valley membrane and nail in place. Lap horizontal edges 2 inches. Overlap ends at least 4 inches; stagger end laps at least 36 inches apart.

2. Eaves: Place eave edge metal flashing tight with fascia boards; lap joints 2 inches and seal; nail at top of flange.

3. Valleys: Install a full width of weather barrier centered on valley; lap ends 6 inches and seal. Where open valley construction is specified, install metal flashing over weather barrier before roof deck underlayment is installed. Lap underlayment over valley protection at least 6 inches

4. Vent Pipes and Field Penetrations: Apply a 24 inch square target sheet of weather barrier around the penetration. Lap over underlayment beneath and at the sides of the penetration


and beneath underlayment above the penetration. Apply sealant to the seam above the penetration.

5. Sidewalls, Headwalls and Chimneys: Apply weather barrier extending at least 8 inches up the wall and 12 inches on to the roof surface. Lap over roof deck protection.

6. Rake Edges: Apply weather barrier and underlayment prior to installation of any rake edge flashing. Apply sealant to the edge prior to installation of metal flashing and nail metal edge flashing every 6

3.04 ROOFING INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual.". Allow for thermal expansion; set true to line and level as indicated. Install Work with laps, joints, and seams permanently watertight and weatherproof; conceal fasteners where possible.

B. Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system. 1. Do not solder aluminum.

C. Roof Panels Fasteners: Use stainless-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the exterior and aluminum or galvanized steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the interior.

D. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating, by applying rubberized-asphalt underlayment to each contact surface, or by other permanent separation as recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer. 1. Coat back side of aluminum roof panels with bituminous coating where roof panels will

contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.

2. Underlayment: Where installing metal flashing directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of synthetic underlayment.

3. Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required for waterproof performance.

E. Thermal Movement. Rigidly fasten metal roof panels to structure at one and only one location for each panel. Allow remainder of panel to move freely for thermal expansion and contraction. Predrill panels for fasteners. 1. Point of Fixity: Fasten each panel along a single line of fixing located at ridge. 2. Avoid attaching accessories through roof panels in a manner that will inhibit thermal

movement.

F. Joint Sealers: Install gaskets, joint fillers, and sealants where indicated and where required for weatherproof performance of metal roof panel assemblies. Provide types of gaskets, fillers, and sealants indicated or, if not indicated, types recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer. 1. Seal metal roof panel end laps with double beads of tape or sealant, full width of panel. Seal

side joints where recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer.

2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."


3.05 FIELD-ASSEMBLED METAL ROOF PANEL INSTALLATION

A. Provide metal roof panels of full length from eave to ridge, unless otherwise indicated or restricted by shipping limitations. Anchor metal roof panels and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. 1. Commence metal roof panel installation and install minimum of 300 sq. ft. in presence of

factory-authorized representative.

2. Field cutting of metal roof panels by torch is not permitted.

3. Rigidly fasten eave end of metal roof panels and allow ridge end free movement due to thermal expansion and contraction. Predrill panels.

4. Provide metal closures at peaks, rake edges, rake walls and each side of ridge and hip caps.

5. Flash and seal metal roof panels with weather closures at eaves, rakes, and at perimeter of all openings. Fasten with self-tapping screws.

6. Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment.

7. Install ridge and hip caps as metal roof panel work proceeds.

8. Locate panel splices over, but not attached to, structural supports. Stagger panel splices and end laps to avoid a four-panel lap splice condition.

9. Lap metal flashing over metal roof panels to allow moisture to run over and off the material.

B. Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels: Fasten metal roof panels to supports with concealed clips at each standing-seam joint at location, spacing, and with fasteners recommended by manufacturer. 1. Install clips to supports with self-tapping fasteners.

2. Install pressure plates at locations indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions.

3. Snap Joint: Nest standing seams and fasten together by interlocking and completely engaging factory-applied sealant.

4. Seamed Joint: Crimp standing seams with manufacturer-approved motorized seamer tool so clip, metal roof panel, and factory-applied sealant are completely engaged.

3.06 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION

A. General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components. 1. Install components required for a complete metal roof panel assembly including trim,

copings, ridge closures, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items.

B. Bar-Type Snow Guards: Attach snow guards to metal roof panels by clamping to standing seam, as recommended by manufacturer. Do not use fasteners that will penetrate metal roof panels. 1. Unless indicated otherwise, provide 2 rows of snow guards, beginning 15-inches up from

gutter.

C. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant.


1. Install exposed flashing and trim that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in waterproof and weather-resistant performance.

2. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weather resistant and waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints).

D. Roof Curbs: Install curbs at locations indicated on Drawings. Install flashing around bases where they meet metal roof panels.

E. Pipe Flashing: Form flashing around pipe penetration and metal roof panels. Fasten and seal to metal roof panels as recommended by manufacturer.

3.07 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align metal roof panel units within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.


A. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect roofing installation on completion and submit report to Architect. 1. Notify Architect and Construction Manager 48 hours in advance of date and time of

inspection.

B. Repair or remove and replace components of roofing system where test results or inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.

C. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.


A. Clean finished surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions and maintain in a clean condition during construction.

B. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering.

C. Replace panels or other components that have been damaged or that cannot be successfully repaired by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.

D. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal roof panels are installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of metal roof panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.

LAWRENCE COUNTY FORMED METAL WALL PANELS PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 07 4214 - 1 © 2014 Eckles Architecture and Engineering

SECTION 07 4214 - FORMED METAL WALL PANELS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Concealed-fastener, lap-seam metal wall panels.

1.02 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site, concurrent with conference with Metal-Faced Composite Wall Panels. 1. Meet with Owner, Architect, metal panel Installer, metal panel manufacturer's

representative, structural-support Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects metal panels, including installers of doors, windows, and louvers.

2. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

3. Review methods and procedures related to metal panel installation, including manufacturer's written instructions.

4. Examine support conditions for compliance with requirements, including alignment between and attachment to structural members.

5. Review flashings, special siding details, wall penetrations, openings, and condition of other construction that affect metal panels.

6. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance, certificates, and tests and inspections if applicable.

7. Review temporary protection requirements for metal panel assembly during and after installation.

8. Review of procedures for repair of metal panels damaged after installation. 9. Document proceedings, including corrective measures and actions required, and furnish

copy of record to each participant.

1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components

and profiles, and finishes for each type of panel and accessory.

B. Shop Drawings: 1. Include fabrication and installation layouts of metal panels; details of edge conditions,

joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment system, trim, flashings, closures, and accessories; and special details.

2. Accessories: Include details of the flashing, trim, and anchorage systems, at a scale of not less than 1-1/2 inches per 12 inches.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of metal panel indicated with factory-applied finishes. 1. Include Samples of trim and accessories involving color selection.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish, prepared on Samples of size indicated below: 1. Metal Panels: 12 inches long by actual panel width. Include fasteners, closures, and

other metal panel accessories.

FORMED METAL WALL PANELS LAWRENCE COUNTY 07 4214 - 2 PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY

1.04 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For Installer.

B. Product Test Reports: For each product, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

C. Field quality-control reports.

D. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.

1.05 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Maintenance Data: For metal panels to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer.

B. Mockups: Build and test mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation. 1. Build mockup of typical metal panel assembly as part of exterior wall Sample Panel

specified in 04 2000, including corner, soffits, supports, attachments, and accessories. 2. Water-Spray Test: Conduct water-spray test of metal panel assembly mockup, testing for

water penetration according to AAMA 501.2. 3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract

Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.


A. Deliver components, metal panels, and other manufactured items so as not to be damaged or deformed. Package metal panels for protection during transportation and handling.

B. Unload, store, and erect metal panels in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage.

C. Stack metal panels horizontally on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and ventilated covering. Store metal panels to ensure dryness, with positive slope for drainage of water. Do not store metal panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage.

D. Retain strippable protective covering on metal panels during installation.

1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit assembly of metal panels to be performed according to manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements.

1.09 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate metal panel installation with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, construction of soffits, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.

LAWRENCE COUNTY PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY

FORMED METAL WALL PANELS07 4214 - 3

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of metal panel systems that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Structural failures including rupturing, cracking, or puncturing. b. Deterioration of metals and other materials beyond normal weathering.

2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace metal panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. 1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Structural Performance: Provide metal wall panel assemblies capable of withstanding the effects of wind loads and stresses within limits indicated, acting inward or outward, based on testing according to ASTM E 330: 1. Deflection Limits: Engineer metal wall panel assemblies to withstand test pressures with

deflection no greater than 1/180 of the span and no evidence of material failure, structural distress, or permanent deformation exceeding 0.2 percent of the clear span.

B. Thermal Movements: Provide metal wall panel assemblies that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

C. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.

D. Air Infiltration: Air leakage of not more than 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. when tested according to ASTM E 283 at the following test-pressure difference: 1. Test-Pressure Difference: 1.57 lbf/sq. ft..

E. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: No water penetration when tested according to ASTM E 331 at the following test-pressure difference: 1. Test-Pressure Difference: 6.24 lbf/sq. ft..

2.02 CONCEALED-FASTENER, LAP-SEAM METAL WALL PANELS

A. General: Provide factory-formed metal panels designed to be field assembled by lapping and interconnecting side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching through panel to


supports using concealed fasteners and factory-applied sealant in side laps. Include accessories required for weathertight installation. 1. Aluminum Sheet: Coil-coated sheet, ASTM B 209, alloy as standard with manufacturer,

with temper as required to suit forming operations and structural performance required. a. Thickness: 0.032 inch. b. Surface: Smooth, flat finish. c. Exterior Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer. d. Color: As indicated on the Architectural Drawings

B. Wide-Rib, Clipless Concealed-Fastener Metal Wall Panels: Formed with slightly tapered panel rib edges, a flat pan between panel rib edges, and wide reveal joint between ribs. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Multi-Purpose Wind-Lok Panel MPW by ATAS International,

Inc. 2. Panel Coverage: 8 inches. 3. Panel Height: 1.25 inches.

C. Other manufacturers of similar products, subject to compliance with requirements and Architect’s written approval: 1. CENTRIA Architectural Systems. 2. Metal Sales Manufacturing Corporation. 3. Morin; a Kingspan Group company. 4. Petersen Aluminum Corporation.

2.03 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete, weathertight panel system including trim, copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal panels unless otherwise indicated. 1. Closures: Provide closures fabricated of same metal as metal panels.

2. Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricated from material recommended by manufacturer.

3. Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin-foam or closed-cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch- thick, flexible closure strips; cut or premolded to match metal panel profile. Provide closure strips where indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction.

4. Splice plates required at Corra-Lok panels: Provide corrugated splice plates at butt joints of Corra-Lok panels. Splice plates shall have color to match adjacent panels. Multiple colors splice plates will be required. Colors to be as specified on Architectural Drawings.

B. Flashing and Trim: Provide flashing and trim formed from same material as metal panels as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to, bases, drips, sills, jambs, corners, endwalls, framed openings, rakes, fasciae, parapet caps, soffits, reveals, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent metal panels. 1. Trim profiles shall be as detailed on Architectural Drawings

C. Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping screws designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed fasteners with heads matching color of metal panels by means of plastic caps or factory-applied coating. Provide EPDM or PVC sealing washers for exposed fasteners.

D. Panel Sealants: Provide sealant type recommended by manufacturer that are compatible with panel materials, are nonstaining, and do not damage panel finish.




2. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920; elastomeric polyurethane or silicone sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in metal panels and remain weathertight; and as recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer.

3. Butyl-Rubber-Based, Solvent-Release Sealant: ASTM C 1311.

2.04 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate and finish metal panels and accessories at the factory, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements.

B. Provide panel profile for full length of panel.

C. Fabricate metal panel joints with factory-installed captive gaskets or separator strips that provide a weathertight seal and prevent metal-to-metal contact, and that minimize noise from movements.

D. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with manufacturer's recommendations and recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated. 1. Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil canning, buckling,

and tool marks and that are true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.

2. Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength.

3. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate sealant and to comply with SMACNA standards.


2.05 FINISHES

A. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

C. Aluminum Panels and Accessories: 1. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 620. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than

70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.


2.06 SUBSTRATE

A. Concealed Plywood: Exterior or Exposure 1 sheathing, span rating to suit framing in each location, and thickness as indicated but not less than 1/2 inch.

B. Substrate-Board Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal plates complying with corrosion-resistance provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening substrate board to substrate.

C. Weather-Resistive Barrier: Sheet building wrap, tape, flashing and accessories per 07 2500.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, metal panel supports, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Examine wall framing to verify that panel support members and anchorage have been

installed within alignment tolerances required by metal wall panel manufacturer. 2. Examine wall sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing or

blocking and that installation is within flatness tolerances required by metal wall panel manufacturer. a. Verify that weather-resistive barriers have been installed over sheathing or backing

substrate to prevent air infiltration or water penetration.

B. Examine roughing-in for components and systems penetrating metal panels to verify actual locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of metal panels before installation.


3.02 PREPARATION

A. Miscellaneous Supports: Install subframing, furring, and other miscellaneous panel support members and anchorages according to ASTM C 754 and metal panel manufacturer's written recommendations.

3.03 METAL PANEL INSTALLATION

A. General: Install metal panels according to manufacturer's written instructions in orientation, sizes, and locations indicated. Install panels perpendicular to supports unless otherwise indicated. Anchor metal panels and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. 1. Shim or otherwise plumb substrates receiving metal panels. 2. Flash and seal metal panels at perimeter of all openings. Fasten with self-tapping screws.

Do not begin installation until weather-resistive barriers and flashings that will be concealed by metal panels are installed.

3. Install screw fasteners in predrilled holes. 4. Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment. 5. Install flashing and trim as metal panel work proceeds. 6. Locate panel splices over, but not attached to, structural supports. Stagger panel splices

and end laps to avoid a four-panel lap splice condition.



7. Align bottoms of metal panels and fasten with blind rivets, bolts, or self-tapping screws. Fasten flashings and trim around openings and similar elements with self-tapping screws.

8. Provide weathertight escutcheons for pipe- and conduit-penetrating panels.

B. Fasteners: 1. Aluminum Panels: Use aluminum or stainless-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the

exterior; use aluminum or galvanized-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the interior.

C. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action as recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer.

D. Lap-Seam Metal Panels: Fasten metal panels to supports with fasteners at each lapped joint at location and spacing recommended by manufacturer. 1. Lap ribbed or fluted sheets one full rib. Apply panels and associated items true to line for

neat and weathertight enclosure. 2. Provide metal-backed washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather side

of metal panels. 3. Locate and space exposed fasteners in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment. Use

proper tools to obtain controlled uniform compression for positive seal without rupture of washer.

4. Install screw fasteners with power tools having controlled torque adjusted to compress washer tightly without damage to washer, screw threads, or panels. Install screws in predrilled holes.

5. Flash and seal panels with weather closures at perimeter of all openings.

E. Watertight Installation: 1. Apply a continuous ribbon of sealant or tape to seal lapped joints of metal panels, using

sealant or tape as recommend by manufacturer on side laps of nesting-type panels; and elsewhere as needed to make panels watertight.

2. Provide sealant or tape between panels and protruding equipment, vents, and accessories. 3. At panel splices, nest panels with minimum 6-inch end lap, sealed with sealant and

fastened together by interlocking clamping plates.

F. Accessory Installation: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting, and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components. 1. Install components required for a complete metal panel system including trim, copings,

corners, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Provide types indicated by metal wall panel manufacturer; or, if not indicated, provide types recommended by metal panel manufacturer.

G. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that are permanently watertight. 1. Install exposed flashing and trim that is without buckling and tool marks, and that is true

to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and achieve waterproof performance.

2. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints).



A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Water-Spray Test: After installation, test area of assembly as directed by Architect and Construction Manager for water penetration according to AAMA 501.2.

C. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect completed metal wall panel installation, including accessories.

D. Remove and replace metal wall panels where tests and inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.

E. Additional tests and inspections, at Contractor's expense, are performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports.


A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal panels are installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of metal panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.

B. After metal panel installation, clear weep holes and drainage channels of obstructions, dirt, and sealant.

C. Replace metal panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.


LAWRENCE COUNTY FIBER CEMENT SIDING AND TRIM PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 07 4641 - 1 © 2014 Eckles Architecture and Engineering, Inc.

SECTION 07 4641 – FIBER CEMENT SIDING AND TRIM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Fiber-cement siding, trim, panels, soffit and accessories.

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 05 Sections for cold formed metal framing 2. Division 07 Sections for flashing, gutters, and other sheet metal work. 3. Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." 4. Division 07 Sections for air barrier and exterior insulation 5. Division 09 Section “Painting” for finishing of fiber cement board siding and trim.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods. 4. For building wrap, include data on air and water-vapor permeance based on testing

according to referenced standards.

B. Samples for Verification: For each type, color, texture, and pattern required. 1. 12-inch- long-by-actual-width Sample. 2. Sample shall include paint color applied to half of sample and factory primer on the

remaining half of sample 3. Weather Barrier Membrane, minimum 8-1/2 inches by 11 inch.

C. Product Certificates: For each type of product, signed by product manufacturer.

D. Research/Evaluation Reports: For each type of siding required.

E. Installation Guide: Submit as part of the submittal literature the manufacturer’s best practices installation manual. Installation manual shall include installation requirements and guidelines for each product being specified and provided on the project. The manufacturer’s installation guide shall be used to judge storage, handling, installation and finishing of components.

F. Informational Submittals 1. Quality Assurance Submittals

a. Manufacturer Instructions: Provide manufacturer’s written installation instructions.

b. Manufacturer’s Field Service Reports: Provide site reports from authorized field service representative, indicating observation of weather barrier assembly installation.

FIBER CEMENT SIDING AND TRIM LAWRENCE COUNTY 07 4641 - 2 PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY


A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type, color, texture, and pattern of siding and soffit, including related accessories, through one source from a single manufacturer.

B. Weather Barrier Installer: 1. Installer shall have experience with installation of DuPont Tyvek weather barrier

assemblies under similar conditions. 2. Installation shall be in accordance with weather barrier manufacturer’s installation

guidelines and recommendations. 3. Source Limitations: Provide weather barrier and accessory materials produced by single

manufacturer.

C. Mockup: Build mockup to evaluate workmanship and to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects. 1. Build mockup of typical wall area as shown on Drawings.

2. Mockup shall include components of each product specified and indicated. Include panel siding, trim, soffit, flashing, sealants and related accessories.

3. Build mockup approximately 48 inches long by 60 inches high. Include outside corner on one end of mockup and inside corner on other end.

4. Mockup shall be constructed in conjunction with mockup required in section 04 2000 Unit Masonry.

5. Mockup shall be constructed in a location on site where the panel shall remain intact during the entire construction period. Demolition and removal of the sample panel shall be approved by the Architect in writing.

6. Do not proceed with work until workmanship, materials and finishes of mockup are approved by Architect.

7. Incorporate mock up for fiber cement components into the mock up of remaining wall components so that a comprehensive example of all exterior materials and their related installation can be evaluated.

D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." 1. Conduct meeting in compliance with manufacturer’s warranty requirements. 2. Hold a pre-installation conference, two weeks prior to start of installation. Attendees shall

include Contractor, Architect, installers, Owner’s Representative, and siding and weather barrier manufacturer’s designated representative.

3. Review all related project requirements and submittals, status of substrate work and preparation, areas of potential conflict and interface, availability of assembly materials and components, installer’s training requirements, equipment, facilities and scaffolding, and coordinate methods, procedures and sequencing requirements for full and proper installation, integration and protection.


A. Store materials in a dry, well-ventilated, weathertight place. 1. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.

LAWRENCE COUNTY FIBER CEMENT SIDING AND TRIM PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 07 4641 - 3

2. Store siding on edge or lay flat on a smooth level surface. Protect edges and corners from chipping. Store sheets under cover and keep dry prior to installing.

3. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.


A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with siding installation only if substrate is completely dry and if existing and forecasted weather conditions permit siding to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1.06 SEQUENCING

A. Coordinate installation with flashings and other adjoining construction to ensure proper sequencing.

B. Review requirements for sequencing of installation of weather barrier assembly with installation of windows, doors, louvers and flashings to provide a weather-tight barrier assembly.

C. Schedule installation of exterior cladding within four months of weather barrier assembly installation.

1.07 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace siding that does not comply with requirements or that fails within specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, cracking, deforming, fading, or otherwise deteriorating beyond normal weathering. 1. Fading is defined as loss of color, after cleaning with product recommended by

manufacturer, of more than 4 Hunter color-difference units as measured according to ASTM D 2244.

2. Warranty Period: 1. Hardieplank lap and Hardipanel vertical siding for 50 years. 2. Hardie Shingleside for 30 years. 3. HardieTrim for 10 years.

B. Special Manufacturer’s Warranty 1. Weather barrier manufacturer's warranty for weather barrier for a period of ten years

from date of Substantial Completion. 2. Approval by weather barrier manufacturer for warranty is required prior to assembly

installation.

1.08 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Furnish full lengths of siding and trim in a quantity equal to 2 percent of amount

installed.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for each component is based on products by the named manufacturer. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named products or comparable products, subject to Architect’s approval, by one of the other manufacturers specified. 1. Substitutions are only considered as set forth in Section 01 1600

2.02 FIBER CEMENT SIDING PRODUCTS

A. Manufacturer: 1. Basis-of-Design: James Hardie Building Products, Inc; 866-274-3464;

www.jameshardiecommercial.com. 2. Available Manufacturers:

a. Cemplank, Inc. b. CertainTeed Corp. c. MaxiTile, Inc. d. Nichiha Fiber Cement.

B. Fiber-Cement Siding: Siding made from fiber-cement board that does not contain asbestos fibers; complies with ASTM C 1186, Type A, Grade II; is classified as noncombustible when tested according to ASTM E 136; and has a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84. 1. Hardiplank Lap Siding – Select Cedarmill, width and exposure as detailed. 2. Harditrim Boards – 5/4 XLD Smooth Trim, Widths and lengths as needed or detailed

2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Siding Accessories: Provide starter strips, edge trim, corner cap, and other items as recommended by siding manufacturer for building configuration. 1. Provide accessories made from same material as adjacent siding, unless otherwise

indicated.

2. Provide accessories matching color and texture of adjacent siding, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Aluminum Accessories: Where aluminum accessories are indicated, provide accessories complying with AAMA 1402, including Paragraph 3.2.4.2.2, "High Performance Coating." 1. Texture: Smooth.

2. Minimum Nominal Thickness: 0.024 inch.

3. Finish: Custom color as selected by Architect.

C. Flashing: Provide stainless-steel flashing complying with Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" at window and door heads and where indicated.


D. Elastomeric Joint Sealant: Single-component neutral-curing silicone joint sealant complying with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for Use NT (nontraffic) and for Uses M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O joint substrates.

E. Fasteners: 1. For fastening to wood, use ribbed bugle-head screws of sufficient length to penetrate a

minimum of 1 inch into substrate.

2. For fastening to metal, use ribbed bugle-head screws of sufficient length to penetrate a minimum of 1/4 inch or 3 screw-threads into substrate.

3. For fastening aluminum, use aluminum fasteners. Where fasteners will be exposed to view, use prefinished aluminum fasteners in color to match item being fastened.

4. For fastening fiber-cement siding, use stainless-steel fasteners.

2.04 FINISHES

A. Factory Primed and Painted: Provide factory applied universal primer and finish coat.

B. Topcoat: Factory applied.

C. Apply finishes in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

D. Colors: As indicated on Exterior Color Schedule. Colors shall be approved by Architect.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of siding.

B. Verify substrate and surface conditions are in accordance with weather barrier manufacturer recommended tolerances prior to installation of weather barrier and accessories.


D. Minimum 20 gauge 3-5/8 inch C-Stud 16 inches maximum on center or 16 gauge 3-5/8 inches C-Stud 24 inches maximum on center metal framing complying with local building codes, including the use of weather-resistive barriers (air barrier) where required. Minimum 1-1/2 inches face and straight, true, of uniform dimensions and properly aligned. 1. Install weather-resistive barriers and claddings to dry surfaces. 2. Repair any punctures or tears in the weather-resistive barrier prior to the installation of

the siding. 3. Protect siding from damage by construction activities.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application.


B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions

3.03 WATER-RESISTIVE BARRIER INSTALLATION

A. Install weather barrier according to division 07 section Air Barrier.

3.04 SIDING INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with siding manufacturer's written installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated unless more stringent requirements apply. Center nails in elongated nailing slots without binding siding to allow for thermal movement. Overlap joints to shed water away from direction of prevailing wind.

B. Isolate dissimilar metals by separating with rubber gaskets or elastomeric sealant. Use rubber washers where fasteners made from dissimilar metal penetrate siding. Isolate dissimilar metals behind siding by covering with polyethylene film.

C. Installation: Siding 1. Install materials in strict accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.

2. Starting: Install a minimum 1/4 inch thick lath starter strip at the bottom course of the wall. Apply planks horizontally with minimum 1-1/4 inches wide laps at the top. The bottom edge of the first plank overlaps the starter strip.

3. Allow minimum vertical clearance between the edge of siding and any other material in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s installation instructions.

5. Align vertical joints of the planks over framing members.

6. Maintain clearance between siding and adjacent finished grade.

7. Locate splices at least one stud cavity away from window and door openings.

8. Use off-stud metal joiner in strict accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions.

10. Face nail to sheathing.

11. Locate splices at least 12 inches away from window and door openings.

12. Wind Resistance: Where a specified level of wind resistance Is required lap siding shall be installed to framing members and secured with fasteners described in Table No. 2 in National Evaluation Service Report No. NER-405.

D. Installation: Trim, Fascia and Moulding

1. Install materials in strict accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. Install flashing around all wall openings.

2. Fasten through trim into structural framing or code complying sheathing. Fasteners must penetrate minimum 3/4 inch or full thickness of sheathing. Additional fasteners may be required to ensure adequate security.

3. Place fasteners no closer than 3/4 inch and no further than 2 inches from side edge of trim board and no closer than 1 inch from end. Fasten maximum 16 inches on center.


4. Maintain clearance between trim and adjacent finished grade.

6. Trim inside corner with single board.

7. Outside Corner Board: For 3/4 inch trim only. Install single board of outside corner board then align second corner board to outside edge of first corner board. Do not fasten fiber cement board to fiber cement board.

8. Outside Corner Board: For 1 inch and 1-1/2 inches trim only. Pre Build corners by fastening trim together with 16 ga. corrosion resistant finish nail 1/2 inch from edge spaced 16 inches apart, weather cut each end spaced minimum 12 inches apart.

9. Allow 1/8 inch gap between trim and siding.

10. Seal gap with high quality, paint-able caulk.

11. Shim frieze board as required to align with corner trim.

12. Install fascia over structural subfascia.

14. Overlay siding with moulding at windows, doors and inside corners.

15. Fasten through overlapping boards. Do not nail between lap joints.

16. Overlay siding with single board of outside corner board then align second corner board to outside edge of first corner board. Do not fasten fiber cement boards to fiber cement boards.

17. Shim frieze board as required to align with corner trim.

18. Install fascia over structural subfascia.

3.05 FINISHING

A. Obtain touch up paint from Manufacturer to match the factory applied finish. Field apply paint to exposed edges according to manufacturer’s instructions.


A. Notify manufacturer’s designated representative to obtain periodic observations of weather barrier assembly installation.


A. Remove damaged, improperly installed, or otherwise defective siding materials and replace with new materials complying with specified requirements.

B. Clean finished surfaces according to siding manufacturer's written instructions and maintain in a clean condition during construction.


LAWRENCE COUNTY METAL ROOF-EDGE SPECIEALTIES PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 07 7125 - 1 © 2014 Eckles Architecture and Engineering, Inc.

SECTION 07 7125 - METAL ROOF-EDGE SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes rooftop prefinished metal equipment screen assemblies: 1. Copings 2. Roof edge drainage and trim. 3. Metal Downspouts 4. Manufactured reglets and flashings. 5. Custom-Formed roof flashing and trim. 6. Manufactured downspout adapter 7. Metal soffit assembly.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer, approved by manufacturer to install manufacturer's roofing system and metal support assemblies.

B. Structural Performance: Provide metal assemblies capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the indicated design loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated on Structural Drawings, based on testing according to ASTM E 1592:

C. Thermal Movements: Provide metal assemblies that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of metal roof panel and accessory.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation layouts; details of edge conditions, joints, corners, anchorages, trim, and accessories; and special details. Distinguish between factory- and field-assembled work. Include details at a scale of not less than 1-1/2 inches per 12 inches: 1. Details for forming sheet metal flashing and trim, including profiles, shapes, seams, and

dimensions. Include detail of flashing at junction of walls and sloped metal roofing. 2. Details for fastening, joining, supporting, and anchoring sheet metal flashing and trim,

including fasteners, clips, cleats, and attachments to adjoining work. 3. Details for expansion and contraction; locations of expansion joints, including direction of

expansion and contraction. 4. Pattern of seams and layout of fasteners, cleats, clips, and other attachments. 5. Details of termination points and assemblies, including fixed points. 6. Details of special conditions.

METAL ROOF-EDGE SPECIALTIES LAWRENCE COUNTY 07 7125 - 2 PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below. 1. 6-inch-long Samples for each type of accessory.

D. Field quality-control reports.

E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for copings and roof-edge flashings.

F. Maintenance Data: For metal roof panels to include in maintenance manuals.

G. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.


A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer.

B. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Conform to dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

C. Mockups: Build in situ mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation. 1. Build mockup wide with typical outside corner and inside corner, including framing,

attachments, and accessories.

2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.

D. Preliminary Roofing Conference: Include relevant discussion of metal roof-edge specialties in agenda of conference required under Division 07 Roofing Sections. 1. Review methods and procedures related to installation, including manufacturer's written

instructions.

2. Review construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

3. Review special details, supports, and condition of other construction that will affect design and installation.

4. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if applicable.

5. Review temporary protection requirements during and after installation.

E. Pre-installation Conference: Include relevant discussion of metal roof-edge specialties in agenda of conference required under Division 07 Roofing Sections. Review methods and procedures as discussed in Preliminary Roofing Conference, and examine substrates and adjacent work for compliance with requirements. 1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, Installer, and installers whose

work interfaces with or affects roof specialties including installers of roofing materials and accessories.

2. Examine substrate conditions for compliance with requirements, including flatness and attachment to structural members.

LAWRENCE COUNTY METAL ROOF-EDGE SPECIALTIES PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 07 7125 - 3

3. Review special roof details, roof drainage, and condition of other construction that will affect roof specialties.


A. Deliver components and other manufactured items so as not to be damaged or deformed. Package components for protection during transportation and handling.

B. Unload, store, and erect components in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage.

C. Store to ensure dryness. Do not store in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage.

D. Protect strippable protective covering from exposure to sunlight and high humidity, except to extent necessary for period of installation.


A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecast weather conditions permit assembly to be performed according to manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements.

B. Field Measurements: Verify locations of roof framing and roof opening dimensions by field measurements before metal roof panel fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

1.07 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate rain drainage and soffit work with roof assemblies, flashing, trim, and construction of other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.

1.08 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace metal assemblies show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. 1. Fluoropolymer Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 PANEL MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Sheet: 20 ga (0.032-in) Coil-coated sheet, ASTM B 209, alclad alloy 3003, 3004, or 3105 for painted finishes, with temper as required to suit forming operations and structural performance required. 1. Exposed Finishes: Apply the following coating, as specified or indicated on Drawings.

a. High-Performance Organic Finish: AA-C12C42R1x (Chemical Finish: cleaned with inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: acid-chromate-fluoride-phosphate conversion coating; Organic Coating: as specified below). Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. 1) Fluoropolymer Two-Coat System: Manufacturer's standard two-coat,

thermocured system consisting of specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; complying with AAMA 2605.

B. Provide colors as scheduled and approved by Architect

C. Concealed Finish: Apply pretreatment and manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or polyester backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil.

D. Zinc-Tin Alloy-Coated Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240, Type 304, dead-soft, fully annealed stainless-steel sheet, coated on both sides with a zinc-tin alloy (50 percent zinc, 50 percent tin). 1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "TCS II" by Follansbee Steel.

E. Panel Sealants: 1. Butyl-Rubber-Based, Solvent-Release Sealant: ASTM C 1311.


3. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920; silicone sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in metal roof panels and remain weathertight; and as recommended in writing by metal roof panel manufacturer.


A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items required by manufacturer for a complete installation.

B. Fasteners: Self-tapping screws, bolts, nuts, self-locking rivets and bolts, end-welded studs, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed fasteners with heads matching color of metal roof panels by means of plastic caps or factory-applied coating. 1. Fasteners for Metal Panels: Self-drilling or self-tapping, zinc-plated, hex-head carbon-steel

screws, with a stainless-steel cap or zinc-aluminum-alloy head and EPDM or neoprene sealing washer.

2. Fasteners for Flashing and Trim: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws with hex washer head.


3. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets.

C. Sealing Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealing tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape.

D. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polyurethane or silicone polymer sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight.

E. Butyl Sealant (for movement joints): ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant, polyisobutylene plasticized, heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited movement.

F. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.

G. Flashing and Trim: Formed and prepainted with coil coating, minimum 0.018 inch thick. Provide flashing and trim as shown, and as otherwise required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance.

2.03 METAL GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS

A. General: 1. Provide factory-formed box products designed to be field applied and mechanically attached

to supporting construction using blind nailing. Include accessories required for complete installation. a. If construction at some locations does not permit blind nailing, provide countersunk

nail heads concealed with putty filler of color to match molding finish.

2. Fabricate in minimum length sections indicated, of size and metal thickness according to SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide wire ball strainers of compatible metal at outlets.

B. Hanging Gutters: Fabricate to cross section indicated, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes, and other accessories as required. Furnish flat-stock gutter spacers and gutter brackets fabricated from same metal as gutters, of size recommended by SMACNA but not less than twice the gutter thickness. Fabricate expansion joints, expansion-joint covers, and gutter accessories from same metal as gutters. 1. Gutter Style: SMACNA designation “Style F”. 2. Material:

a. Up to 15-inch girth, fabricate from roll-formed 0.032-inch thick aluminum in 20-foot minimum lengths. Otherwise, use .0.050-inch material.

b. Color: As scheduled or otherwise approved by Architect. Custom color may be required if manufacturers standard colors do not match.

c. Joints: Lap type. 3. Accessories:

a. Continuous cleat support. a. Continuous removable leaf screen with sheet metal frame and hardware cloth screen b. Wire ball downspout strainer


C. Heavy Duty downspout 1. Fabricate rectangular downspouts complete with mitered elbows. Furnish with metal

hangers, from same material as downspouts, and anchors.

2. Material: Roll-formed 0.050-inch thick aluminum sections in 10-foot minimum lengths. a. Size: 3”x4” inch rectangular section b. Color: As scheduled, subject to Architect's approval. Custom color may be required

if manufacturers standard colors do not match. c. Thickness: 0.050 to 10 ft above ground; 0.032 above 10 ft. d. Joints: Lap type. e. Mounting: Wall brackets as required to fasten downspout into wall material and

substrate. Locate brackets as indicated on Drawings. f. Design: Fabricate downspout sections as required to follow profile of wall surface.

3. Fabricated Hanger Style: SMACNA figure designation 1-35C or 1-35H. a. Aluminum: 0.040 inch thick.

D. Splash Blocks: Precast concrete splash blocks 1. Back height: 5 inches 2. Back width: downspout width plus 4 inches 3. Sides: 5 inches tapered down to 1 inch 4. Front width: 18 inches 5. Length: 30 inches

2.04 CAST IRON DOWNSPOUT ADAPTER

A. Under the General Contract, at the base of each downspout provide exterior galvanized cast-iron leader boots to connect with site storm sewer system.

B. Rainwater Leader Boot: ASTM A 48 grey-iron with strap ears for attaching to building; Offset type with cleanout plug, 4" x 3" rectangular top inlet, 4" round no-hub outlet; Factory-applied bituminous or galvanized coating (subject to Architect’s approval); Min. 24-in length. 1. Neenah Foundry #R-4929-O2C", 2. Zurn #C192-CA

C. Boot shall be firmly anchored to masonry wall and caulked into the connecting pipe.

2.05 METAL SOFFIT PANELS

A. General: Provide factory-formed metal soffit panels designed to be field assembled by lapping and interconnecting side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching through panel to supports using concealed fasteners in side laps. Include accessories required for weathertight installation.

B. Reveal-Joint-Profile Metal Soffit Panels: Smooth panels formed with vertical panel edges and intermediate stiffening ribs symmetrically spaced between panel edges; with recessed reveal joint between panels. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Atas International, Inc. Wind-Lok Soffit Panels or a comparable

product by same manufacturer as roof panels.

2. Material: Coil-coated aluminum, 0.032 in.

3. Color: As scheduled, subject to Architect’s approval.


2.06 COPINGS

A. Copings: Manufactured coping system consisting of formed-metal coping cap in section lengths not exceeding 12 feet, concealed anchorage, concealed splice plates with same finish as coping caps, mitered corner units, and end cap units. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Snap-Tight Coping System by Architectural Products Co., or a

comparable product, subject to specified requirements, by one of the following: a. ATAS International, Inc. b. W. P. Hickman Company. c. Metal-Era, Inc. d. Perimeter Systems, a division of Southern Aluminum Finishing Co. e. Petersen Aluminum Corp. f. Innovative Metals Company.

2. Formed Aluminum: Thickness shall be determined by manufacturer based on face dimensions and to comply with specified performance, however minimum thickness shall be 0.050 inches.

3. Coping Cap Color: As scheduled and approved by Architect.

4. Standard Shapes, Factory-Fabricated and Continuously Welded: a. Corners: Continuously welded inside and outside corners with 24-inch minimum

nominal horizontal face dimension on long side. b. End Cap: End face matching front face with drip, factory welded at all joined edges. c. End Termination: Integral high-wall flange continuously factory-welded to top and

faces of coping for installation under high-wall counter-flashing.

5. Snap-on Coping Anchor Plates: Concealed, galvanized steel sheet, 12 inches wide, 0.028 inch thick, with integral cleats. a. Wood nailer not required at top of masonry parapet.

2.07 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate and finish metal panels and accessories at the factory to greatest extent possible, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements.

B. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and metal.

C. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.

D. Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full length of panel.

E. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA recommendations.

F. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions in the Work cannot be used, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with elastomeric or butyl sealant concealed within joints.


G. Where indicated, fabricate metal roof panel joints with factory-installed captive gaskets or separator strips that provide a tight seal and prevent metal-to-metal contact, in a manner that will minimize noise from movements within panel assembly.

H. Sheet Metal Accessories: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to the design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated. 1. Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil canning, buckling, and

tool marks and that are true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.

2. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA standards.


4. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer. a. Size: As recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" or metal

roof panel manufacturer for application but not less than thickness of metal being secured.



B. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

2.09 LOW-SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Roof and Roof to Wall Transition Expansion-Joint Cover: Fabricate from the following material: Zinc-Tin Alloy-Coated Stainless Steel: 0.0250 inch thick.

B. Base Flashing: Fabricate from the following material: 1. For Areas in contact with aluminum gravel stops or coping: Aluminum: 0.040 inch thick. 2. For Areas with no aluminum gravel stops or coping: Zinc-Tin Alloy-Coated Stainless Steel:

0.018 inch thick.

C. Counterflashing: Fabricate from the following material: 1. For Areas with no aluminum coping: Zinc-Tin Alloy-Coated Stainless Steel: 0.018 inch

thick. 2. For areas in contact with aluminum coping: Aluminum: 0.0320 inch thick.

D. Flashing Receivers: Fabricate from: Zinc-Tin Alloy-Coated Stainless Steel: 0.015 inch thick.

E. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Fabricate from: Zinc-Tin Alloy-Coated Stainless Steel 0.018 inch thick.


F. Roof-Drain Flashing: Fabricate from: Zinc-Tin Alloy-Coated Stainless Steel: 0.015 inch thick.

2.10 AIR BARRIER MATERIALS

A. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: Minimum 30 to 40 mils thick, consisting of slip-resisting polyethylene-film top surface laminated to layer of butyl or SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, with release-paper backing; cold applied. Provide primer when recommended by underlayment manufacturer. 1. Thermal Stability: ASTM D 1970; stable after testing at 240 deg F. 2. Low-Temperature Flexibility: ASTM D 1970; passes after testing at minus 20 deg F. 3. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing; CCW WIP 300HT. b. Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co.; Ultra. c. Henry Company; Blueskin PE200 HT. d. Metal-Fab Manufacturing, LLC; MetShield. e. Owens Corning; WeatherLock Metal High Temperature Underlayment.

4. Application: For use as part of overall air barrier system as necessary to maintain continuity of roof air barrier assembly with other parts of air barrier system.

B. Slip Sheet: Rosin-sized paper, minimum 3 lb/100 sq. ft. 1. Application: For use over dissimilar substrate materials, as recommended by roof-specialty

manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, metal roof panel supports, and other conditions affecting performance of work.

B. Examine roughing-in for components and systems penetrating metal roof panels to verify actual locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of metal roof panels before metal roof panel installation.


3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to proper installation, including projections capable of interfering with attachment.

B. Support Framing: Provide support members and anchorage according to manufacturer's written recommendations.


A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" Allow for thermal expansion; set true to line and level as indicated. Install Work with laps, joints, and seams permanently watertight and weatherproof; conceal fasteners where possible.


B. Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system.

C. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating, by applying rubberized-asphalt underlayment to each contact surface, or by other permanent separation as recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer. 1. Coat back side of aluminum with bituminous coating where members will contact wood,

ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.

D. Joint Sealers: Install gaskets, joint fillers, and sealants where indicated and where required for weatherproof performance. Provide types of gaskets, fillers, and sealants indicated or, if not indicated, types recommended by manufacturer.

3.04 ROOF-EDGE DRAINAGE-SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. General: Install sheet metal roof drainage and trim items to produce complete roof drainage system according to SMACNA recommendations, according to manufacturer's written instructions and as indicated. Coordinate installation of roof perimeter drip flashing/ fascia with installation of roof drainage system. 1. Where applicable, comply with standards published in "The NRCA Roofing and

Waterproofing Manual."

B. Hanging Gutters: Join sections with lapped joints sealed with sealant. Provide for thermal expansion. Attach gutters at eave or fascia to firmly anchored gutter supports spaced not more than 24 inches apart. Provide end closures and seal watertight with sealant. 1. Anchor and loosely lock back edge of gutter to continuous cleat. 2. Loosely lock straps to front gutter bead and anchor to wood roof structure. 3. Install gutter with expansion joints at locations indicated, but not exceeding, 50 feet apart.

Install expansion-joint caps. 4. Install continuous gutter screens on gutters with noncorrosive fasteners, hinged to swing

open for cleaning gutters.

C. Downspouts: Join sections with telescoping joints. 1. Provide hangers with fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely to walls. Locate

hangers at top and bottom and at approximately 60 inches o.c. in between. 2. Connect downspouts to underground drainage system indicated.

D. Splash Blocks: Install where downspouts discharge on roof. Set in asphalt roofing cement or elastomeric sealant compatible with roofing membrane.

E. Downspout adapters: Install where indicated on Drawings.

F. Expansion-Joint Covers: Install expansion-joint covers at locations and of configuration indicated. Lap joints a minimum of 4 inches in direction of water flow.



A. General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components. 1. Install components required for a complete metal roof panel assembly including trim,


B. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant. 1. Install exposed flashing and trim that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool

marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in waterproof and weather-resistant performance.

2. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weather resistant and waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints).

C. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install wrinkle free. Apply primer if required by underlayment manufacturer. Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation; use primer rather than nails for installing underlayment at low temperatures. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water. Overlap edges not less than 3-1/2 inches. Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days.

D. Slip Sheet: Install with tape or adhesive for temporary anchorage to minimize use of mechanical fasteners under roof specialties. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with lapped joints of not less than 2 inches.

3.06 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align metal roof panel units within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.

3.07 COPING INSTALLATION

A. Install cleats, anchor plates, and other anchoring and attachment accessories and devices with concealed fasteners.

B. Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for specified wind zone and as indicated. 1. Interlock face and back leg drip edges of snap-on coping cap into cleated anchor plates

anchored to substrate at manufacturer's recommended spacing.


3.08 ROOF EDGE FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Install cleats and other anchoring and attachment accessories and devices with concealed fasteners.

B. Anchor roof edgings to resist uplift and outward forces according to performance requirements.

3.09 REGLET AND COUNTERFLASHING INSTALLATION

A. General: Coordinate installation of reglets and counterflashings with installation of base flashings.

B. Embedded Reglets: See Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies" for installation of reglets.

C. Surface-Mounted Reglets: Install reglets to receive flashings where flashing without embedded reglets is indicated on Drawings. Side lap reglet joints a minimum of 2 inches, or provide splice plate with minimum 2 inches lap on each side, and bed with elasomeric sealant. Install at height so that inserted counterflashings overlap 4 inches over top edge of base flashings.

D. Counterflashings: Insert counterflashings into reglets or other indicated receivers; ensure that counterflashings overlap 4 inches over top edge of base flashings. Lap counterflashing joints a minimum of 4 inches and bed with elastomeric sealant. Fit counterflashings tightly to base flashings.

3.10 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. General: Install flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements, sheet metal manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, set units true to line, and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight.

B. Roof Edge Flashing: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for specified wind zone and as indicated.

C. Pipe or Post Counterflashing: Install counterflashing umbrella with close-fitting collar with top edge flared for elastomeric or butyl sealant, extending a minimum of 4 inches over base flashing. Install stainless-steel draw band and tighten.

D. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof-penetration flashing with installation of roofing and other items penetrating roof. 1. Seal with elastomeric or butyl sealant and clamp flashing to pipes penetrating roof except for

lead flashing on vent piping.


A. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect installation on completion and submit report to Architect. 1. Coordinate manufacturer’s inspection to be concurrent with final roof manufacturer’s

inspection. 2. Notify Architect and Construction Manager 48 hours in advance of date and time of

inspection.


B. Repair or remove and replace components of where test results or inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.

C. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.


A. Clean finished surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions and maintain in a clean condition during construction.

B. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering.

C. Replace panels or other components that have been damaged or that cannot be successfully repaired by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.

D. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal panels and profiles are installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.


LAWRENCE COUNTY PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 07 8413 - 1 © 2014 Eckles Architecture and Engineering

SECTION 07 8413 – PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes through-penetration firestop systems for penetrations through the following fire-resistance-rated assemblies, including both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items: 1. Floors. 2. Walls and partitions. 3. Smoke resistant partitions. 4. Construction enclosing compartmentalized areas.

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 07 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems." 2. Divisions 20 through 23 Sections specifying additional requirements for duct and piping

penetrations for HVAC, plumbing and fire-suppression systems. 3. Division 26, 27, and 28 Sections specifying additional requirements for cable and conduit

penetrations.


A. General: For the following constructions, provide through-penetration firestop systems that are produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of assembly penetrated. 1. Fire-resistance-rated load-bearing walls, including partitions, with fire-protection-rated

openings. 2. Fire-resistance-rated non-load-bearing walls, including partitions, with fire-protection-rated

openings. 3. Fire-resistance-rated floor assemblies. 4. Fire-resistance-rated roof assemblies.

B. F-Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with F-ratings indicated, as determined per ASTM E 814, but not less than that equaling or exceeding fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.

C. T-Rated Systems: For the following conditions, provide through-penetration firestop systems with T-ratings indicated, as well as F-ratings, as determined per ASTM E 814, where systems protect penetrating items exposed to potential contact with adjacent materials in occupiable floor areas: 1. Penetrations located outside wall cavities. 2. Penetrations located outside fire-resistive shaft enclosures. 3. Penetrations located in construction containing fire-protection-rated openings. 4. Penetrating items larger than 4-inch-diameter nominal pipe or 16 sq. in. in overall cross-

sectional area.

PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING LAWRENCE COUNTY 07 8413 - 2 PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY

D. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, traffic, moisture, and physical damage, provide products that after curing do not deteriorate when exposed to these conditions both during and after construction. 1. For piping penetrations for plumbing and wet-pipe sprinkler systems, provide moisture-

resistant through-penetration firestop systems.

2. For floor penetrations with annular spaces exceeding 4 inches in width and exposed to possible loading and traffic, provide firestop systems capable of supporting floor loads involved either by installing floor plates or by other means.

3. For penetrations involving insulated piping, provide through-penetration firestop systems not requiring removal of insulation.

E. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, provide products with flame-spread ratings of less than 25 and smoke-developed ratings of less than 450, as determined per ASTM E 84.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of through-penetration firestop system product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: For each through-penetration firestop system, show each kind of construction condition penetrated, relationships to adjoining construction, and kind of penetrating item. Include firestop design designation of testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that evidences compliance with requirements for each condition indicated.

C. Through-Penetration Firestop System Schedule: Indicate locations of each through-penetration firestop system, along with the following information: 1. Types of penetrating items. 2. Types of constructions penetrated, including fire-resistance ratings and, where applicable,

thicknesses of construction penetrated. 3. Through-penetration firestop systems for each location identified by firestop design

designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency.

D. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.

E. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of through-penetration firestop system products certifying that products furnished comply with requirements.


A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed through-penetration firestop systems similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Installation Responsibility: Assign installation of through-penetration firestop systemsin Project to a single qualified installer.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain through-penetration firestop systems, for each kind of penetration and construction condition indicated, from a single manufacturer.

LAWRENCE COUNTY PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 07 8413 - 3

D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide through-penetration firestop systems that comply with the following requirements and those specified in "Performance Requirements" Article: 1. Firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. A qualified

testing and inspecting agency is UL, or another agency performing testing and follow-up inspection services for firestop systems acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Through-penetration firestop systems are identical to those tested per ASTM E 814. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements: a. Products bear classification marking of qualified testing and inspecting agency.

b. Systems correspond to those indicated by reference to system designations listed by UL in "Fire Resistance Directory."

E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Coordination and Meetings."


A. Deliver through-penetration firestop system products to Project site in original, unopened containers or packages with intact and legible manufacturers' labels identifying product and manufacturer; date of manufacture; lot number; shelf life, if applicable; qualified testing and inspecting agency's classification marking applicable to Project; curing time; and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials.

B. Store and handle materials for through-penetration firestop systems to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install through-penetration firestop systems when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by through-penetration firestop system manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

B. Ventilate through-penetration firestop systems per manufacturer's written instructions by natural means or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.

1.07 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that through-penetration firestop systems are installed according to specified requirements.

B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate through-penetration firestop systems.

C. Notify Owner's inspecting agency at least seven days in advance of through-penetration firestop system installations; confirm dates and times on days preceding each series of installations.

D. Do not cover up through-penetration firestop system installations that will become concealed behind other construction until each installation has been examined by Owner's inspecting agency and building inspector, if required by authorities having jurisdiction.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: 1. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc. 2. Grace, W. R. & Co. - Conn. 3. Hilti, Inc. 4. Isolatek International. 5. Nelson Firestop Products. 6. Owens Corning 7. Specified Technologies Inc. 8. Tremco; Sealant/Weatherproofing Division. 9. USG Corporation. 10. 3M; Fire Protection Products Division.

2.02 FIRESTOPPING, GENERAL

A. Compatibility: Provide through-penetration firestop systems that are compatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and with the items, if any, penetrating through-penetration firestop systems, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

B. Accessories: Provide components for each through-penetration firestop system that are needed to install fill materials and to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Use only components specified by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestop systems indicated. Accessories include, but are not limited to, the following items: 1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials, including the following:

a. Slag-/rock-wool-fiber insulation. b. Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming/backing materials to

prevent leakage of fill materials in liquid state. c. Fire-rated form board. d. Fillers for sealants.

2. Temporary forming materials.

3. Substrate primers.

4. Collars.

5. Steel sleeves.

2.03 FILL MATERIALS

A. General: Provide through-penetration firestop systems containing the types of fill materials needed to attain required fire protection rating of surface being penetrated. Fill materials are those referred to in directories of the referenced testing and inspecting agencies as fill, void, or cavity materials.

B. Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled collars formed from galvanized steel and lined with intumescent material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant.


C. Intumescent Composite Sheets: Rigid panels consisting of aluminum-foil-faced elastomeric sheet bonded to galvanized steel sheet.

D. Intumescent Putties: Nonhardening dielectric, water-resistant putties containing no solvents, inorganic fibers, or silicone compounds.

E. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single-component intumescent elastomeric sheets with aluminum foil on one side.

F. Mortars: Prepackaged, dry mixes consisting of a blend of inorganic binders, hydraulic cement, fillers, and lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site to form a nonshrinking, homogeneous mortar.

G. Pillows/Bags: Reusable, heat-expanding pillows/bags consisting of glass-fiber cloth cases filled with a combination of mineral-fiber, water-insoluble expansion agents and fire-retardant additives.

H. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.

I. Silicone Sealants: Moisture-curing, single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of grade indicated below: 1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal

surfaces and nonsag formulation for openings in vertical and other surfaces requiring a nonslumping, gunnable sealant, unless indicated firestop system limits use to nonsag grade for both opening conditions.

2. Grade for Horizontal Surfaces: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces.

3. Grade for Vertical Surfaces: Nonsag formulation for openings in vertical and other surfaces.

2.04 MIXING

A. For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with through-penetration firestop system manufacturer's written instructions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other items or procedures needed to produce products of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance.



3.02 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing through-penetration firestop systems to comply with written recommendations of firestop system manufacturer and the following requirements: 1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign materials

that could interfere with adhesion of through-penetration firestop systems.

2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with through-penetration firestop systems. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.

3.03 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. General: Install through-penetration firestop systems to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article and firestop system manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated.

B. Install forming/damming/backing materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated.

C. Install fill materials for firestop systems by proven techniques to produce the following results: 1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and penetrating

items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.

2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items.

3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.


3.04 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify through-penetration firestop systems with preprinted metal or plastic labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches of edge of the firestop systems so that labels will be visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or firestop systems. Use mechanical fasteners for metal labels. For plastic labels, use self-adhering type with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels are placed and, in combination with label material, will result in partial destruction of label if removal is attempted. Include the following information on labels: 1. The words "Warning - Through-Penetration Firestop System - Do Not Disturb. Notify

Building Management of Any Damage."

2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number.

3. Through-penetration firestop system designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

4. Date of installation.

5. Through-penetration firestop system manufacturer's name.

6. Installer's name.


A. Inspecting Agency: Owner may engage a qualified, independent inspecting agency to inspect through-penetration firestops. Independent inspecting agency shall comply with ASTM E 2174 requirements including those related to qualifications, conducting inspections, and preparing test reports.

B. Where deficiencies are found, repair or replace through-penetration firestop systems so they comply with requirements.

C. Proceed with enclosing through-penetration firestop systems with other construction only after inspection reports are issued and firestop installations comply with requirements.


A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by through-penetration firestop system manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure through-penetration firestop systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated through-penetration firestop systems immediately and install new materials to produce through-penetration firestop systems complying with specified requirements.


LAWRENCE COUNTY JOINT SEALANTS PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 07 9200 - 1 © 2014 Eckles Architecture and Engineering

SECTION 07 9200 - JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes joint sealants for the following applications, including those specified by reference to this Section: 1. Exterior joints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces:

a. Construction joints in cast-in-place concrete. b. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry. c. Joints between different materials listed above. d. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors, windows and

louvers. e. Control and expansion joints in soffits and other overhead surfaces. f. Other joints as indicated.

2. Exterior joints in the following horizontal traffic surfaces: a. Isolation and contraction joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs. b. Other joints as indicated.

3. Interior joints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces: a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls. b. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated. c. Tile control and expansion joints. d. Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of interior unit masonry walls and partitions. e. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors and

windows f. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters. g. Other joints as indicated.

4. Interior joints in the following horizontal traffic surfaces: a. Isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs. b. Control and expansion joints in tile flooring. c. Other joints as indicated.


A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.

B. Provide joint sealants for interior applications that establish and maintain airtight and water-resistant continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.

JOINT SEALANTS LAWRENCE COUNTY 07 9200 - 2 PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY

C. Product Certificates: For each type of joint sealant and accessory, signed by product manufacturer.

D. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.


A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized Installer who is approved or licensed for installation of elastomeric sealants required for this Project.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single manufacturer.


A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: 1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-

sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F.

2. When joint substrates are wet.

3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for applications indicated.

4. Contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint substrates.

1.06 WARRANTY

A. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: In manufacturer's standard form.

B. Elastomeric sealant manufacturer agrees to furnish elastomeric joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Sealant manufacturer’s standard pre-printed warranty period (years). Include copy of pre-printed warranty in Operations and Maintenance Manual.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.02 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS

LAWRENCE COUNTY JOINT SEALANTS PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 07 9200 - 3

A. Elastomeric Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates.

B. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where elastomeric sealants are specified to be nonstaining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project.

C. Single-Component Medium Modulus Neutral-Curing Silicone Sealant: 1. Joints:

a. Exterior butt and/or slip joints between metals.

2. Products: a. Dow Corning Corporation; 795 b. GE Silicones; SilPruf NB SCS9000. c. GE Silicones; UltraPruf II SCS2900. d. Pecora Corporation; 865.

3. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag).

4. Class: 50.

5. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic).

6. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O. a. Use O Joint Substrates: Coated glass, color anodic aluminum, aluminum coated with

a high-performance coating, galvanized steel, marble and wood.

D. Single-Component Mildew-Resistant Acid-Curing Silicone Sealant: 1. Joints:

a. Interior ceramic tile expansion, control, contraction, and isolation joints in horizontal traffic surfaces.

b. Interior joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters.

2. Products: a. Dow Corning; 786 Mildew Resistant. b. GE Silicones; Sanitary SCS1700. c. Pecora Corporation; 898.


4. Class: 25.


6. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O. a. Use O Joint Substrates: Coated glass, color anodic aluminum, aluminum coated with

a high-performance coating, ceramic tile, stainless steel and galvanized steel.

E. Multicomponent Pourable Urethane Sealant: 1. Pavement Joints:

a. Exterior horizontal nontraffic and traffic isolation and contraction joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs.

2. Products:

a. Pecora Corporation; Urexpan NR-200. b. Pecora Corporation; Urexpan NR 300, Type M.


c. Sonneborn, Division of ChemRex Inc.; SL 2. d. Tremco; THC-900.

3. Type and Grade: M (multicomponent) and P (pourable).

4. Class: 25 and 12-1/2.

5. Use Related to Exposure: T (traffic).

6. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated.

F. Single-Component Nonsag Polyurethane Sealant: 1. Joints:

a. Exterior and interior vertical control and expansion joints in unit masonry and stone veneer.

b. Exterior and interior perimeter joints between masonry and frames of doors, windows and louvers.

c. Exterior and interior joints in vertical and horizontal nontraffic masonry surfaces and other materials.

d. Vertical control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior masonry walls.

2. Products: a. Pecora Corporation; Dynatrol I. b. Tremco; DyMonic.


4. Class: 25.


6. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, A, and as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O. a. Use O Joint Substrates: Color anodic aluminum, aluminum coated with a high-

performance coating, galvanized steel, brick, marble, ceramic tile and wood.

G. Multi-Component Nonsag Polyurethane Sealant: Where interior joints on concrete slabs-on-grade are indicated provide high-durometer urethane product complying with the following: 1. Products: Provide one of the following:

a. Chemtron; Chemtron Polymers, Inc. b. HPL Sealant; Tremco.

2. Type and Grade: M (multi-component) and NS (nonsag).

3. Class: 12-1/2.

4. Use Related to Exposure: T (traffic).

5. Shore A Hardness: Per ASTM C 661 yields 44-55 after 14 days.

2.03 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS

A. Latex Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 834, Type P, Grade NF.

B. Joints: 1. Interior perimeter joints of exterior openings. 2. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors and windows

C. Products:


1. Pecora Corporation; AC-20+. 2. Sonneborn, Division of ChemRex Inc.; Sonolac. 3. Tremco; Tremflex 834.

2.04 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING

A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.

B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material) non-outgassing and as approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint application indicated, and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.

C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.


A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-sealant performance.


3.02 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: 1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint

sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.


2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following: a. Concrete. b. Masonry. c. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

4. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants.

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates, where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

3.03 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS

A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.

B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

C. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and

replace them with dry materials.

D. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow

optimum sealant movement capability.

E. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not

discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise

indicated.

3.04 CLEANING


A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.

3.05 PROTECTION

A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.


LAWRENCE COUNTY HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 08 1113 - 1 © 2014 Eckles Architecture and Engineering

SECTION 08 1113 – HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Hollow-metal steel doors and frames. 2. Hollow-metal steel frames for mounting wood doors. 3. Hollow-metal steel view windows. 4. Hollow-metal fire-rated assemblies, positive-pressure.

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies" for building anchors into and grouting

standard steel frames in masonry construction. 2. Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for caulking around door frames. 3. Division 08 Section "Glazing" for glazed lites in standard steel doors and frames. 4. Division 08 Section for door hardware. 5. Division 08 Sections for wood doors mounted in hollow metal frames. 6. Division 09 Section “Painting” for field painting steel doors and frames. 7. Division 26 and 28 Sections for electrical and access control requirements at doors

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings.


A. Heat-Barrier Door Frames: Observe Fire Rating Requirements as scheduled in Drawings. 1. Adjust fire rating minutes in paragraphs below to suit Project.

2. Air infiltration: Provide systems that allow a maximum air leakage through fixed glazed openings of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. of area when tested per ASTM E 283 at a static air differential of 1.57 lbf/sq ft

3. Water Penetration a. Under Static pressure, provide systems that do not show uncontrolled water leakage

when tested according to ASTM E 331 under static pressure equal to 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft.

b. Under Dynamic pressure, provide systems that do not show uncontrolled water leakage when tested according to AAMA 501.1 under static pressure equal to 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft.

HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES LAWRENCE COUNTY 08 1113 - 2 PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, label compliance, fire-resistance rating, and finishes for each type of steel door and frame specified.

B. Door hardware supplier is to furnish templates, template reference number and/or physical hardware to the steel door and frame supplier in order to prepare the doors and frames to receive the finish hardware items.

C. Shop Drawings: In addition to requirements below, provide a schedule of standard steel doors and frames using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings: 1. Elevations of each door design. 2. Details of doors, including vertical and horizontal edge details. 3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles. 4. Details and locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. 5. Details of each different wall opening condition. 6. Details of anchorages, accessories, joints, and connections. 7. Details of glazing frames and stops showing glazing. 8. Details of conduit and preparations for electrified door hardware and controls.

D. Samples: For following products: Two 8-inch by 10-inch Samples for glass.

E. Glazing Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings for glazed openings in preparing a schedule listing glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location.

F. Technical Information: Submit latest edition of manufacturer’s product data providing product descriptions, technical data and installation instructions. Including blank warranty form.

G. Installer Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.


A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer. 1. Employ an experienced installer who has completed glazing similar in material, design, and

extent to that indicated for this Project; whose work has resulted in glass installations with a record of successful in-service performance; and who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association Glazier Certification Program as Level 2 (Senior Glaziers) or Level 3 (Master Glaziers).

B. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8, latest edition, "Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames".

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.

LAWRENCE COUNTY HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 08 1113 - 3

D. Source Limitations: 1. Obtain standard steel doors and frames through one source from a single manufacturer. 2. Obtain glazing and accessories from one source for each product and installation method

indicated

E. Fire-Rated Door Sidelight and Transom Frame Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated. 1. Test Pressure: Test at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C.

F. Fire-Rated, Borrowed-Light Frame Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257, ASTM E119or UL 9. Label each individual glazed lite. 1. Assemblies must be factory-welded or come complete with factory-installed mechanical

joints and must not require job site fabrication.

G. Temperature-Rise Limit: Where indicated and at vertical exit enclosures (stairwell openings) and exit passageways, provide doors that have a maximum transmitted temperature end point of not more than 450 deg F above ambient after 30 minutes of standard fire-test exposure.

H. Certification: Signed by manufacturers of glass and glazing products certifying that products furnished comply with requirements. 1. Door assemblies shall be tested to the acceptance criteria of ASTM E2074-00, NFPA 252,

UL 9, UL 10-C Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.

2. Window assemblies shall be tested to the acceptance criteria of ASTM E2010-01, NFPA 257, UL 10-B, UL 10-C Standard methods for Fire Tests of Window Assemblies.

3. Wall assemblies shall be tested to the acceptance criteria of ASTM E119, NFPA 251, UL 263 Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.

4. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) shall conduct fire test.

I. Listings and Labels - Fire Rated Assemblies: Under current follow-up service by an approved independent agency maintaining a current listing or certification. Label assemblies accordance with limits of manufacturer’s listing.

J. Smoke Control Door Assemblies: Comply with NFPA 105. 1. Smoke "S" Label: Doors to bear “S” label, and include smoke and draft control gasketing

applied to frame and on meeting stiles of pair doors.

K. Sound Transmission Class (STC) Rated Doors: Provide sound transmission class rated doors fabricated as sound-reducing types with testing according to ASTM E 90, and classifications according to ASTM E 413. Submit manufacturer’s written results of STC ratings from testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency for sound resistant doors.

L. Door assemblies shall be marked with the hourly rating followed by the letter "S". The letter "S" indicates air leakage resistance testing conformance to UBC 7-2 Parts I and II.

M. Window assemblies with ratings of less than 60 minutes may be tested in accordance with ASTM E2010-01, NFPA 257, UBC 7-4, UL 9, CAN4-S106 Standard Test Methods.


N. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with provisions of the following: 1. Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with ANSI A117.1, as

follows: a. Handles, Pulls, Latches, Locks, and other Operating Devices: Shape that is easy to

grasp with one hand and does not require tight grasping, tight pinching, or twisting of the wrist.

b. Door Closers: Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements indicated: 1) Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having

jurisdiction.

2. NFPA 101: Comply with the following for means of egress doors: a. Latches, Locks, and Exit Devices: Not more than 15 lbf to release the latch. Locks

shall not require the use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation.

b. Door Closers: Not more than 30 lbf to set door in motion and not more than 15 lbf to open door to minimum required width.

O. Pre-Submittal Conference: Conduct conference at jobsite with attendance by representatives of Supplier, Installer, and Contractor to review proper methods and procedures for installing hollow metal doors and frames and to verify installation of electrical knockout boxes and conduit at frames with electrified or access control hardware.


A. Deliver doors and frames palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic. 1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory-finished doors and

frames. 2. At delivery inspect all containers for damage. 3. Examine glass and frame units for damage. 4. List all damage to containers on the shipping company’s Bill of Lading 5. Report damage to manufacturer immediately. 6. Store glazing materials and frame units in original packing containers 7. Do expose glazing material of frame units to sunlight and weather. 8. Do not store horizontally. 9. Place glass and frames upright, no less than 6 degrees from vertical. 10. Store all materials in dry conditions, off the ground. 11. Protect from construction activities. 12. Fully support Glass units along entire length 13. Glass and frame units must be separated by non abrasive pads such as cloth or cork. 14. Do not stack containers

B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions.

C. Store doors and frames under cover at Project site. Place in stacks of five units maximum in a vertical position with heads up, spaced by blocking, on minimum 4-inch-high wood blocking. Avoid using nonvented plastic or canvas shelters that could create a humidity chamber. 1. If wrappers on doors become wet, remove cartons immediately. Provide minimum 1/4-inch

space between each stacked door to permit air circulation.



A. Field Measurements: Verify openings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

1.08 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for standard steel frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

1.09 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

B. Warranty includes installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand Company. 2. Curries; an Assa Abloy Group company 3. Ceco Dooran; Assa Abloy Group company

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications.

B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.

C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with minimum A40 zinc-iron-alloy (galvannealed) coating designation.

D. Electrolytic Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 591, Commercial Steel (CS), Class B coating; mill phosphatized.

E. Supports and Frame Anchors: ASTM A 653, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with minimum G60 metallic coating. 1. After fabricating, galvanize units to be built into exterior walls according to ASTM A 153,

Class B.


F. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Provide items to be built into exterior walls, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153.

G. Grout: Comply with Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies."

H. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool with 6- to 12-lb/cu. ft. density; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50 respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.

I. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing."

J. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.

K. Temperature-rise Steel Framing System, fire resistance rating as scheduled on Drawings. 1. Steel Frame: Profiled steel tubing permanently joined with steel bolts.

2. Insulation: Insulate framing system against effects of fire, smoke, and heat transfer from either side. Insulate profiled steel tubing using a shell construction that incorporates Promatect-H intermediate interlayer. Firmly pack perimeter of framing system to rough opening with mineral wool fire stop insulation or appropriately rated intumescent sealant.

3. Frame meets Bullet resistance rating Level 8 per UL 752

4. Steel Glazing Beads: Extruded steel beads with dimensions recommended by manufacturer to securely hold glazing material in place.

5. Fasteners: Type recommended by manufacturer

6. Glazing Accessories: Set Pilkington Pyrostop glass using calcium silicate, or setting blocks.

7. Glazing Gaskets, Compounds and tapes: Glaze Pilkington Pyrostop glass with approved EPDM glazing gaskets and closed cell PVC tape, or pure silicone sealant.

2.03 STANDARD STEEL DOORS

A. General: Provide 1-3/4 inch doors of design indicated, fabricated with smooth surface without visible joints or seams on exposed faces, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with ANSI A250.8. 1. Basis of Design: Steel flush panel, standard by Curries/Assa Abloy

a. Factory Prime Finish: Curries Series 707N (polystyrene core) and Series 727N (mineral fire door core) with seamless welded edge.

2. Thickness of Steel Panels: 0.053-inch (16 gage).

3. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, polystyrene, polyurethane, mineral-board, or vertical steel-stiffener core that produces doors complying with ANSI A250.8. a. Fire Door Core: As required to provide fire-protection ratings indicated.

b. Polystyrene and Polyurethane (Insulated) Doors: Where indicated, provide doors fabricated as thermal-rated assemblies with a minimum R-value 11 or better.

4. Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Beveled edge.

5. Vertical Edges for Double-Acting Doors: Round vertical edges with 2-1/8-inch radius.


6. Top and Bottom Edges: Closed with flush or inverted 0.042-inch-thick end closures or channels of same material as face sheets.

7. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117, "Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and Frames."

B. Interior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet, unless otherwise indicated to comply with exterior door requirements. Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI A250.4 for physical-endurance level: 1. Level 3 and Physical Performance Level A (Extra Heavy Duty), Model 2 (Seamless). 2. Finish: Shop primed.

C. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate reinforcement plates from same material as door face sheets to comply with the following minimum sizes: 1. Hinges: Minimum 0.123 inch thick by 1-1/2 inches wide by 6 inches longer than hinge,

secured by not less than 6 spot welds.

2. Lock Face, Flush Bolts, Closers, and Concealed Holders: Minimum 0.067 inch thick.

3. All Other Surface-Mounted Hardware: Minimum 0.067 inch thick.

D. Fabricate concealed stiffeners and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet.

2.04 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL FRAMES

A. General: Comply with ANSI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile.

B. Interior Frames: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet, unless otherwise indicated to comply with exterior frame requirements. 1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped and welded face corners and seamless face joints.

2. Frames for Level 3 Steel Doors, and Stile and Rail Doors: 0.053-inch-thick steel sheet.

3. Frames for Borrowed Lights: 0.053-inch-thick steel sheet.

4. Frames for Wood Doors: 0.042-inch-thick (18 gage) steel sheet.

5. Finish: Shop primed ready for field finish.

C. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate reinforcement plates from same material as frames to comply with the following minimum sizes: 1. Hinges: Minimum 0.123 inch thick by 1-1/2 inches wide by 6 inches longer than hinge,

secured by not less than 6 spot welds.

2. Lock Face, Flush Bolts, Closers, and Concealed Holders: Minimum 0.067 inch thick.

3. All Other Surface-Mounted Hardware: Minimum 0.067 inch thick.

D. Supports and Anchors: Fabricated from electrolytic zinc-coated or metallic-coated steel sheet.

E. Jamb Anchors: 1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not less

than 0.042 inch thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 inches wide by 10 inches long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177 inch thick.


2. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042 inch thick.

3. Postinstalled Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 3/8-inch-diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from frame to wall, with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor location.

F. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.042 inch thick, and as follows: 1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners.

2. Separate Topping Concrete Slabs: Adjustable-type anchors with extension clips, allowing not less than 2-inch height adjustment. Terminate bottom of frames at finish floor surface.

G. Fabricate concealed stiffeners and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet.

H. Plaster Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016-inch thick.

2.05 HOLLOW METAL PANELS

A. Provide hollow metal panels of same materials, construction, and finish as specified for adjoining hollow metal work.

2.06 STOPS AND MOLDINGS

A. Moldings for Glazed Lites in Doors: Minimum 0.042 inch thick, fabricated from same material as door face sheet in which they are installed.

B. Fixed Frame Moldings: Formed integral with standard steel frames, minimum 5/8 inch high, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Removable Stops for Glazed Lites in Frames: Minimum 0.042 inch thick, fabricated from same material as frames in which they are installed.

D. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing" and with the hollow metal door manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Factory Glazing: Factory install glazing in doors as indicated. Doors with factory installed

glass to include all of the required glazing material.

2.07 MATERIALS - GLASS

A. Impact Safety Resistance: ANSI Z97.1 and CPSC 16CFR1201 (Cat. I and II).

B. Fire Rated Glazing: Composed of multiple sheets of Pilkington “Optiwhite” low iron, high-visible-light transmission glass laminated with an intumescent interlayer.

C. Properties Interior Fire Glazing


Property Fire Rating 60 minute 90 minute 120 minute Manufacturer’s designation 60-101 90-102 120-104 Glazing type single single Insulated glass

unit Nominal Thickness 7/8” (23mm) 1-7/16” (37mm) 2-1/8 (54mm) Weight in lbs/sf 10.85 17.61 21.71 Daylight Transmission 88% 85% 78% Sound Transmission Coefficient 41dB 45dB 46dB Bullet Resistance Rating per UL-752 Level I Level III* Level III*

* Level III achieved with the use of 3M SCLARL400 surface applied film in the assembly. Without this film Level II was achieved.

D. Logo: Each piece of fire-rated glazing shall be labeled with a permanent logo including name of product, manufacture, testing laboratory (UL), fire rating period, safety glazing standards, and date of manufacture.

E. Glazing Accessories: Manufacturer’s standard compression gaskets, spacers, setting blocks and other accessories necessary for a complete installation.

2.08 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate standard steel doors and frames to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness of metal. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment. 1. When shipping limitations so dictate, frames for large openings are to be fabricated in

sections for splicing or splining in the field.

B. Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in ANSI/SDI A250.8.

C. Standard Steel Doors: 1. Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottom of exterior doors to permit moisture

to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration.

2. Glazed Lites: Factory cut openings in doors.

3. Astragals: Provide overlapping astragals as noted in door hardware sets in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware" on one leaf of pairs of doors where required by NFPA 80 for fire-performance rating or where indicated. Extend minimum 3/4 inch beyond edge of door on which astragal is mounted.

4. Continuous Hinge Reinforcement: Provide welded continuous 12 gauge strap for continuous hinges specified in hardware sets in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware".

5. Electrical Raceways: Provide hollow metal doors to receive electrified hardware with concealed wiring harness and standardized Molex plug connectors on both ends to accommodate up to twelve wires. Coordinate connectors on end of the wiring harness to plug directly into the electrified hardware and the through-wire transfer hardware or wiring harness specified in hardware sets in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware". Wire nut connections are not acceptable.


D. Standard Steel Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames. 1. Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth,

flush, and invisible.

2. Sidelight and Transom Bar Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints; fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs by butt welding.

3. Equal Rabbet Frames: Provide frames with equal rabbet dimensions unless glazing and removable stops require wider dimensions on glass side of frame.

4. High Frequency Hinge Reinforcement: Provide high frequency hinge reinforcements at door openings 48-inches and wider with mortise butt type hinges at top hinge locations.

5. Continuous Hinge Reinforcement: Provide welded continuous 12 gauge straps for continuous hinges specified in hardware sets in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware".

6. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners, unless otherwise indicated.

7. Plaster Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames installed in concrete or masonry.

8. Where installed in masonry, leave vertical mullions in frames open at top for grouting.

9. Electrical Knock Out Boxes: Factory weld 18 gauge electrical knock out boxes to frame for electrical hardware preps; including but not limited to, electric through wire transfer hardware, electrical raceways and wiring harnesses, door position switches, electric strikes, magnetic locks, and jamb mounted card readers as specified in hardware sets in Division 08 Sections "Door Hardware" and "Access Control Hardware". a. Provide electrical knock out boxes with a dual 1/2-inch and 3/4-inch knockouts.

b. Conduit to be coordinated and installed in the field (Division 26) from middle hinge box and strike box to door position box.

c. Electrical knock out boxes to comply with NFPA requirements and fit electrical door hardware as specified in hardware sets in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware".

d. Electrical knock out boxes for continuous hinges should be located in the center of the vertical dimension on the hinge jamb.

10. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot welds per anchor.

11. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows: a. Masonry and Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of

frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows: 1) Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches in height.

b. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows: 1) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches in height.

2) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches in height.

3) Five anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches or fraction thereof more than 96 inches in height.


4) Two anchors per head for frames more than 42 inches wide and mounted in metal-stud partitions.

c. Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches o.c.

12. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped doors, drill stops to receive door silencers as follows. Provide plastic plugs to keep holes clear during construction. a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers. b. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two per door silencers.

13. Bituminous Coating: Where frames are fully grouted with an approved Portland Cement based grout or mortar, coat inside of frame throat with a water based bituminous or asphaltic emulsion coating to a minimum thickness of 3 mils DFT, tested in accordance with UL 10C and applied to the frame under a 3rd party independent follow-up service procedure.

E. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare standard steel doors and frames to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping, according to the Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware." 1. Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to ANSI/SDI A250.8.

2. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated mortised and surface-mounted door hardware.

3. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI A250.6 and ANSI/DHI A115 Series specifications for door and frame preparation for hardware. Locate hardware as indicated on Shop Drawings or, if not indicated, according to ANSI A250.8.

4. Coordinate locations of conduit and wiring boxes for electrical connections with Division 26 Sections, and prepare hollow metal work accordingly.

F. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints. 1. Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of door or

frame.

2. Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings such that each glazed lite is capable of being removed independently.

3. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors and frames.

4. Provide removable stops and moldings on inside of doors and frames.

2.09 STEEL FINISHES

A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. 1. Finish standard steel door and frames after assembly.

B. Metallic-Coated Steel Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces with nonpetroleum solvent so surfaces are free of oil and other contaminants. After cleaning, apply a conversion coating suited to the organic coating to be applied over it. Clean welds, mechanical connections, and abraded areas, and apply galvanizing repair paint specified below to comply with ASTM A 780.


C. Steel Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning"; remove dirt, oil, grease, or other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel; comply with SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning," or SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."

D. Factory Priming for Field-Painted Finish: Apply shop primer specified below immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Apply a smooth coat of even consistency to provide a uniform dry film thickness of not less than 0.7 mils. 1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer

complying with ANSI A250.10 acceptance criteria; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied finish paint system indicated; and providing a sound foundation for field-applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of standard steel doors and frames. 1. Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations of

standard steel frame connections before frame installation.

2. Ensure 3/8 inch shim space at all walls


3.02 PREPARATION

A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory.

B. Prior to installation and with installation spreaders in place, adjust and securely brace standard steel door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances: 1. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from

jamb perpendicular to frame head.

2. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall.

3. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.

4. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a perpendicular line from head to floor.

C. Tolerances shall comply with SDI-117 "Manufacturing Tolerances Standard Steel Doors and Frames."

D. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated mortised and surface-mounted door hardware.


3.03 INSTALLATION

A. General: Provide doors and frames of sizes, thicknesses, and designs indicated. Install standard steel doors and frames plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place; comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Standard Steel Frames: Install standard steel frames for doors, sidelights, transoms, borrowed lights and other openings, of size and profile indicated. Comply with SDI 105. 1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent

anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. a. At fire-protection-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80.

b. Install frames with removable glazing stops located on un-secure side of opening.

c. Install door silencers in frames before grouting.

d. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been properly set and secured.

e. Check plumb, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances.

f. Apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that are filled with mortar, grout, and plaster containing antifreezing agents.

2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors.

3. Metal-Stud Partitions: Spot grout and solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation behind frames.

4. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space between frames and masonry with mortar as specified in Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies."

5. Installation Tolerances: Adjust standard steel door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances: a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees

from jamb perpendicular to frame head.

b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall.

c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.

d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor.

C. Standard Steel Doors: Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. Shim as necessary. 1. Non-Fire-Rated Standard Steel Doors:

a. Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch.

b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch.

c. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch.

d. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold): Maximum 3/4 inch. 1) Provide door undercuts where indicated on the drawings.


2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80.

D. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing" and with standard steel door and frame manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Provide nonremovable stops on outside of exterior doors and on secure side of interior doors

for glass, louvers, and other panels in doors.

2. Provide removable concealed fastener type screw-applied with snap-on cover or snap-on removable, glazing stops on inside of glass, louvers, and other panels in doors.

E. Fire-Glazed Framing: 1. Follow manufacturer’s written instructions and reviewed shop drawings.

2. Install fully welded fire window and door assemblies in strict accordance with the approved shop drawings.

3. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed to produce a watertight installation

4. Install fire safing / fire stopping at edges of system

5. Install glazing in strict accordance with fire resistant glazing material manufacturer’s specifications. Field cutting or tampering is not permissible.

6. Do not install damaged frames or chipped glazing units.

7. Install plumb and true. Limit out of plumb or true to 1/8 inch in 10’-0” in any dimension.

3.04 REPAIR AND TOUCH UP

A. Limited to minor repair of small scratches. Use only manufacturer’s recommended products. 1. Such repairs shall match original finish for quality or material and view. 2. Repairs and touch-up not visible from a distance of 5 feet Owner and Architect to approve.

B. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged.

3.05 PROTECTING, ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including standard steel doors or frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.

B. Clean grout and other bonding material off standard steel doors and frames immediately after installation.

C. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer, zinc rich primer (exterior and galvanized openings) or finish paint.


D. Protect glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface`. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces. 1. Do not clean with astringent cleaners. Use a clean “grit free” cloth and a small amount of

mild soap and water or mild detergent.

2. Protect surface applied film. Do not use any of the following: a. Steam jets b. Abrasives c. Strong acidic or alkaline detergents, or surface-reactive agents d. Detergents not recommended in writing by the manufacturer e. Do not use any detergent above 77 degrees F f. Organic solvents including but not limited to those containing ester, ketones, alcohols,

aromatic compounds, glycol ether, or halogenated hydrocarbons. g. Metal or hard parts of cleaning equipment must not touch the glass surface

E. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations, including weld splatter. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove them immediately as recommended by glass manufacturer.

F. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended by glass manufacturer.


LAWRENCE COUNTY FLUSH WOOD DOORS PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 08 1416 - 1 © 2014 Eckles Architecture and Engineering

SECTION 08 1416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Solid-core doors with thermal-fused plastic-laminate veneer faces.

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 08 Section “Steel Doors and Frames” for steel frames. 2. Division 08 Section “Door Hardware” for hardware in flush wood doors. 3. Division 08 Section "Glazing" for glass view panels in flush wood doors.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of core and edge construction and trim for openings. Include factory-finishing specifications.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit schedules, indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware blocking; and other pertinent data. 1. Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. 2. Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts. 3. Undercuts. 4. Indicate finish requirements. 5. Indicate fire-protection ratings for fire-rated doors.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: Color charts consisting of actual materials in small sections for plastic-laminate door faces proposed as other than scheduled products.

D. Samples for Verification: 1. Factory finishes applied to actual door face materials, approximately 8 by 10 inches, for each

material and finish. a. Submit corner sections of doors, approximately 8 by 10 inches with door faces and

edges representing actual materials to be used. Provide Samples for each color, texture, and pattern of plastic laminate required

2. Frames for light openings, 6 inches long, for each material, type, and finish required.

E. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain flush doors through one source from a single manufacturer.

B. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated.” 1. Provide AWI Quality Certification Labels or an AWI letter of licensing for Project

indicating that doors comply with requirements of grades specified.

FLUSH WOOD DOORS LAWRENCE COUNTY 08 1416 - 2 PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY

C. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252. 1. Temperature-Rise Rating: At exit enclosures, provide doors that have a temperature-rise

rating of 450 deg F maximum in 30 minutes of fire exposure.

D. Minimum Performance Criteria: 1. Screw Holding: 700 lbs. minimum per TM10 WDMA.

2. Split Resistance: 900 lbs. minimum per TM5 WDMA.

3. Hinge Loading: 860 lbs. minimum per TM8 WDMA.


A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Package doors individually in plastic bags or cardboard cartons.

C. Mark each door on top and bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and will maintain temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

1.06 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by manufacturer, Installer, and Contractor, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that are defective in materials or workmanship, have warped (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42-by-84-inch section, or show telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch span. 1. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or

replacement of defective doors.

2. Warranty shall be in effect during the following period of time from date of Substantial Completion: a. Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. The Maiman Company(Basis of Design) 2. Graham Wood Doors 3. Marshfield Door Systems, Inc. 4. VT Industries 5. Eggers Industries; Architectural Door Division.

LAWRENCE COUNTY FLUSH WOOD DOORS PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 08 1416 - 3

2.02 DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL

A. Doors for Laminated Finish: 1. Grade: Premium 2. Thermal-Fused-Laminate Faces: Low-pressure decorative laminates (LPDL) complying

with NEMA LD 3-2005. 3. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range. 4. Exposed Vertical and Top Edges: 1mm polymer, as scheduled or otherwise approved.

a. Polymer Edging Color: Coordinate with faces. 5. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: Heavy Duty

2.03 SOLID-CORE DOORS

A. Interior Laminate-Faced Doors: 1. Core: Structural composite lumber with approved core material per WDMA and AWI

acceptance criteria.

2. Construction: Five plies premium grade bonded to structural composite lumber core, then entire unit abrasive planed before veneering.

3. Edge Construction: At hinge stiles, provide manufacturer's standard laminated-edge construction with improved screw-holding capability and split resistance and with outer stile matching face veneer. a. 5/8-inch single-ply stiles.

B. Labeled Fire-Rated Doors: 1. Construction: Construction and core specified above for type of face indicated and meeting

minimum test ratings specified in Article 1.03 “Quality Assurance.”

2. Blocking: For mineral-core doors, provide composite blocking with improved screw-holding capability approved for use in doors of fire ratings indicated as follows: a. 5-inch top-rail blocking. b. 5-inch bottom-rail blocking, in doors indicated to have protection plates. c. 5-inch midrail blocking, in doors indicated to have exit devices.

3. Edge Construction: At hinge stiles, provide manufacturer's standard laminated-edge construction with improved screw-holding capability and split resistance and with outer stile matching face veneer. a. 5/8-inch single-ply stiles. b. For Single Doors and Pairs of Doors: No metal edges acceptable.

2.04 LIGHT FRAMES

A. Wood Beads for Light Openings in Wood Doors: 1. Wood Species: Any compatible closed-grain hardwood, must match laminate color of door

as approved by Architect. 2. Profile: Manufacturer's standard shape.

B. Wood-Veneered Beads for Light Openings in Fire Doors: Manufacturer's standard noncombustible beads matching door faces and approved for use in doors of fire rating indicated. Include concealed metal glazing clips where required for opening size and fire rating indicated.

FLUSH WOOD DOORS LAWRENCE COUNTY 08 1416 - 4 PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY

2.05 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate doors in sizes indicated for Project-site fitting.

B. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated, with the following uniform clearances and bevels, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting. Comply with

requirements in NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors. 2. Bevel non-fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3-1/2 degrees) at lock and hinge edges. 3. Bevel fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3-1/2 degrees) on lock edge; trim stiles and rails

only to extent permitted by labeling agency.

C. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, DHI A115-W series standards, and hardware templates. 1. Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and

alignment before factory machining.

D. Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors to comply with applicable requirements of referenced standards for kind of door required. 1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated. 2. Undercut: Factory trim as scheduled

E. Glazed Openings: Factory install glazing in doors, complying with Section 08 8000 "Glazing." Install glass using manufacturer's standard elastomeric glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920. Secure glass in place with wood moldings fixed on public side, removable on secured side. Miter wood moldings at corner joints.

F. Provide Factory-Undercut doors where scheduled.

G. Transom and Side Panels: Fabricate panels to match adjoining doors in materials, finish, and quality of construction.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine doors and installed door frames before hanging doors. 1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing

characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs.

2. Reject doors with defects.


LAWRENCE COUNTY FLUSH WOOD DOORS PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 08 1416 - 5

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Hardware: For installation, see Division 08 Section "Door Hardware."

B. Manufacturer's Written Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions, referenced quality standard, and as indicated. 1. Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80.

C. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.

D. Job-Fitted Doors: If factory-fitted doors are not available as manufacturer’s standard, job-fit doors. Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted for fire-rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal cut surfaces after fitting and machining. 1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/8 inch

from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 inch from bottom of door to top of threshold.

2. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.

E. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Project site.

3.03 ADJUSTING

A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.

B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or do not comply with requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing.


LAWRENCE COUNTY ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 08 3113 - 1 © 2014 Eckles Architecture and Engineering

SECTION 08 3113 - ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: Access doors and frames.

1. Access doors and frames for walls and ceilings.

B. Except as otherwise indicated, access doors and frames shall be sized and located as indicated on Coordination Drawings prepared under Section 01 3100, and shall be furnished and installed under the General Contract. 1. Provide access doors and frames as indicated in Contract Drawings, or otherwise required by

authorities having jurisdiction, whether or not indicated on Contract Documents.

C. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for blocking out openings for access doors and frames in concrete where applicable.

2. Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry" for anchoring and grouting access door frames set in masonry construction where applicable.

3. Division 08 Section "Door Hardware" for mortise or rim cylinder locks and master keying. 4. Division 09 Section "Acoustical Ceilings" for suspended acoustical tile ceilings. 5. Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for heating and air-conditioning duct access

doors.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of access door and frame indicated. Include construction details, fire ratings, materials, individual components and profiles, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details of access doors and frames for each type of substrate. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

C. Access Door and Frame Schedule: Provide complete access door and frame schedule, including types, locations, sizes, latching or locking provisions, and other data pertinent to installation.

D. Coordination Drawings: Drawn to scale and coordinating access door and frame installation with ceiling support, ceiling-mounted items, and concealed Work above ceiling.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of access door(s) and frame(s) through one source from a single manufacturer.

B. Size and Location Verification: Determine specific locations and sizes for access doors needed to gain access to concealed equipment, and indicate on schedule.

1. Size Variations: Obtain Architect's acceptance of manufacturer's standard-size units, which may vary slightly from sizes indicated.

ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES LAWRENCE COUNTY 08 3113 - 2 PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY

C. Fire-Rated Access Doors and Frames: Units complying with NFPA 80 that are identical to access door and frame assemblies tested for fire-test-response characteristics per the following test method and that are listed and labeled by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction:

1. NFPA 252 for vertical access doors and frames. 2. ASTM E 119 for horizontal access doors and frames. 3. Provide fire-rated access doors and frames in fire-rated walls with same fire-rating as wall.

1.04 COORDINATION

A. Verification: Determine specific locations and sizes for access doors needed to gain access to concealed plumbing, mechanical, or other concealed work, and indicate in the schedule specified in "Submittals" Article.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

1. Hot-Dip Galvanized Steel: Coat to comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M for steel and iron products and ASTM A 153/A 153M for steel and iron hardware.

B. Steel Sheet:

1. Hot-Rolled: ASTM A 569/A 569M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, and surface defects; pickled and oiled.

2. Cold-Rolled: ASTM A 366/A 366M, Commercial Steel (CS), or ASTM A 620/A 620M, Drawing Steel (DS), Type B; stretcher-leveled standard of flatness.

a. Electrolytic zinc-coated steel sheet, complying with ASTM A 591/A 591M, Class C coating, may be substituted at fabricator's option.

C. Steel Finishes: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

1. Surface Preparation for Steel Sheet: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning," to remove dirt, oil, grease, or other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, complying with SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning," or SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling."

2. Surface Preparation for Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Clean surfaces with nonpetroleum solvent so surfaces are free of oil and other contaminants. After cleaning, apply a conversion coating suited to the organic coating to be applied over it. Clean welds, mechanical connections, and abraded areas, and apply galvanizing repair paint specified below to comply with ASTM A 780.

a. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel, complying with SSPC-Paint 20.

3. Factory-Primed Finish: Apply shop primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating.

LAWRENCE COUNTY ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 08 3113 - 3

4. Baked-Enamel Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-enamel finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. Comply with paint manufacturer's written instructions for applying and baking to achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils .

5. Shop Primer for Metallic-Coated Steel: Organic zinc-rich primer complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with topcoat.

D. Drywall Beads: Edge trim formed from 0.0299-inch zinc-coated steel sheet formed to receive joint compound and in size to suit thickness of gypsum board.

E. Plaster Beads: Casing bead formed from 0.0299-inch zinc-coated steel sheet with flange formed out of expanded metal lath and in size to suit thickness of plaster.

2.02 STAINLESS-STEEL MATERIALS

A. Rolled-Stainless-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 793, manufacturer's standard finish.

B. Stainless-Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bars: ASTM A 666, Type 304. Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines or blend into finish.

1. Finish: Directional Satin Finish, No. 4.

2.03 ALUMINUM MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 , Alloy 6063-T6.

1. Mill finish, AA-M10 (Mechanical Finish: as fabricated, unspecified).

B. Aluminum-Alloy Rolled Tread Plate: ASTM B 632/B 632M, Alloy 6061-T6.

1. Mill finish, AA-M10 (Mechanical Finish: as fabricated, unspecified).

C. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 , alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and with not less than strength and durability properties of Alloy 5005-H15; with minimum sheet thickness indicated representing specified thickness according to ANSI H35.2 .

1. Class II, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A31 (Mechanical Finish: nonspecular as fabricated; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class II, clear coating 0.010 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611.

2.04 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES FOR WALLS AND CEILINGS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Acudor Products, Inc. 2. Babcock-Davis; A Cierra Products Co. 3. Bar-Co, Inc. Div.; Alfab, Inc. 4. Elmdor/Stoneman; Div. of Acorn Engineering Co. 5. Jensen Industries. 6. J. L. Industries, Inc. 7. Karp Associates, Inc.


8. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. 9. MIFAB, Inc. 10. Milcor Inc.

B. Flush Access Doors and Frames with Exposed Trim: Fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet.

1. Locations: wall and ceiling surfaces. 2. Door: Minimum 0.060-inch thick sheet metal, set flush with exposed face flange of frame. 3. Frame: Minimum 0.060-inch thick sheet metal with 1-1/4-inch wi de, surface-mounted trim. 4. Hinges: Continuous piano. 5. Latch: Cam latch operated by screwdriver with interior release.

C. Flush Access Doors and Trimless Frames: Fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet.

1. Locations: Wall and ceiling surfaces. 2. Door: Minimum 0.060-inch thick sheet metal, set flush with surrounding finish surfaces. 3. Frame: Minimum 0.060-inch thick sheet metal with drywall bead flange. 4. Hinges: Continuous piano. 5. Latch: Cam latch operated by screwdriver with interior release.

D. Recessed Access Doors and Trimless Frames: Fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet.

1. Locations: Wall and ceiling surfaces. 2. Door: Minimum 0.060-inch thick sheet metal in the form of a pan recessed 5/8 inch for

gypsum board infill. 3. Frame: Minimum 0.060-inch thick sheet metal with drywall bead for gypsum board surfaces. 4. Hinges: Concealed pivoting rod hinge. 5. Latch: Cam latch operated by screwdriver with interior release.

E. Aluminum Flush Access Doors and Frames with Exposed Trim: Fabricated from aluminum sheet and extruded-aluminum shapes.

1. Locations: Wall and ceiling surfaces. Provide this type of access door in restroom locations. 2. Door: Minimum 0.080-inch thick aluminum sheet. 3. Frame: Minimum 0.060-inch thick extruded aluminum with 1-1/4-inch- wide rolled flange. 4. Hinges: Concealed continuous aluminum. 5. Latch: Screwdriver-operated cam latch. 6. Latch: Restroom locations – provide key locks. Provide two sets of keys to owner for each

access door.

F. Exterior Flush Access Doors and Frames with Exposed Trim: Weatherproof with extruded door gasket.

1. Locations: Wall and ceiling surfaces. 2. Door: Minimum 0.040-inch thick, metallic-coated steel sheet; flush panel construction with

manufacturer's standard 2-inch- thick fiberglass insulation. 3. Frame: Minimum 0.060-inch thick extruded aluminum. 4. Hinges: Continuous piano, zinc plated. 5. Lock: Dual-action handles with key lock.

G. Fire-Rated, Insulated, Flush Access Doors and Frames with Exposed Trim: Fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet.

1. Locations: Wall and ceiling surfaces. 2. Fire-Resistance Rating: Not less than that of adjacent construction. 3. Temperature Rise Rating: 250 deg F at the end of 30 minutes.

LAWRENCE COUNTY ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 08 3113 - 5

4. Door: Flush panel with a core of mineral-fiber insulation enclosed in sheet metal with a minimum thickness of 0.036 inch .

5. Frame: Minimum 0.060-inch thick sheet metal with 1-1/4 inch wide, surface-mounted trim. 6. Hinges: Continuous piano. 7. Automatic Closer: Spring type. 8. Latch: Self-latching device operated by ring turn with interior release.

H. Fire-Rated, Insulated, Flush Access Doors and Trimless Frames: Fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet.

1. Locations: Wall and ceiling surfaces. 2. Fire-Resistance Rating: Not less than that of adjacent construction. 3. Temperature Rise Rating: 250 deg F at the end of 30 minutes. 4. Door: Flush panel with a core of mineral-fiber insulation enclosed in sheet metal with a

minimum thickness of 0.036 inch . 5. Frame: Minimum 0.060-inch thick sheet metal with drywall bead. 6. Hinges: Continuous piano. 7. Automatic Closer: Spring type. 8. Latch: Self-latching device operated by ring turn with interior release.

I. Hardware: Provide the following:

1. Hinges: Heavy-duty, zinc-coated steel butt hinges with stainless-steel pins. 2. Latch: Stainless-steel slam latch. 3. Hardware Material: Manufacturer's standard.

2.05 FABRICATION

A. General: Provide access door and frame assemblies manufactured as integral units ready for installation.

B. Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness.

C. Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access panels to types of supports indicated.

1. Exposed Flanges: Nominal 1 to 1-1/2 inches wide around perimeter of frame. 2. For trimless frames with drywall bead, provide edge trim for gypsum board and gypsum

base securely attached to perimeter of frames. 3. For trimless frames with plaster bead for full-bed plaster applications, provide zinc-coated

expanded metal lath and exposed casing bead welded to perimeter of frames. 4. Provide mounting holes in frames for attachment of units to metal or wood framing. 5. Provide mounting holes in frame for attachment of masonry anchors. Furnish adjustable

metal masonry anchors.

D. Recessed Access Doors: Form face of panel to provide recess for application of applied finish. Reinforce panel as required to prevent buckling.

1. For recessed doors with plaster infill, provide self-furring expanded metal lath attached to door panel.


E. Latching Mechanisms: Furnish number required to hold doors in flush, smooth plane when closed.

1. For cylinder lock, furnish two keys per lock and key all locks alike. 2. For recessed panel doors, provide access sleeves for each locking device. Furnish plastic

grommets and install in holes cut through finish.

F. Extruded Aluminum: After fabrication, apply manufacturer's standard protective coating on aluminum that will come in contact with concrete.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Advise installers of other work about specific requirements relating to access door and floor door installation, including sizes of openings to receive access door and frame, as well as locations of supports, inserts, and anchoring devices.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames.

C. Set frames accurately in position and attach securely to supports with plane of face panels aligned with adjacent finish surfaces.

D. Install doors flush with adjacent finish surfaces or recessed to receive finish material.

E. Adjust doors and hardware after installation for proper operation.

F. Remove and replace doors and frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged.


LAWRENCE COUNTY OVERHEAD COILING DOORS PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 08 3323 - 1 © 2014 Eckles Architecture and Engineering

SECTION 08 3323 - OVERHEAD COILING DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes manually and electric-motor-operated overhead coiling doors: 1. Exterior insulated service doors, motorized operation (Type ICD)

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for miscellaneous steel supports. 2. Division 08 Section "Door Hardware" for lock cylinders and keying. 3. Division 26 Sections for electrical service and connections for powered operators and

accessories.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Operation Cycle: One cycle of a door is complete when it is moved from the closed position to the fully open position and returned to the closed position.


A. Structural Performance: Provide exterior overhead coiling doors capable of withstanding wind loads, the effects of gravity loads and loads and stresses under conditions indicated according to SEI/ASCE 7 and prevailing building code: 1. Wind Load: Uniform pressure (velocity pressure), acting inward and outward.

a. Interior Doors: 5 lbf/sq. ft. b. Exterior Doors: 20 lbf/sq. ft.

2. Deflection Limits: Design overhead coiling doors to withstand design wind load without evidencing permanent deformation or disengagement of door components.

3. Windborne-Debris-Impact-Resistance Performance: Provide impact-protective overhead coiling doors that pass missile-impact and cyclic-pressure tests when tested according to ASTM E 1886 and ASTM E 1996. a. Large Missile Test: For overhead coiling doors located within 30 feet of grade.

b. Small Missile Test: For overhead coiling doors located more than 30 feet above grade.

B. Operability under Wind Load: Design overhead coiling doors to remain operable under design wind load, acting inward and outward.

C. Operation-Cycle Requirements: Provide overhead coiling door components and operators capable of operating for not less than 20,000 cycles, or as otherwise indicated in Part 2.

OVERHEAD COILING DOORS LAWRENCE COUNTY 08 3323 - 2 PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type and size of overhead coiling door and accessory. 1. Construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components, profiles

for slats, and finishes. 2. Rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished

accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: For special components and installations not dimensioned or detailed in manufacturer's product data. 1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances,

method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Samples for Verification: Of each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below. 1. Curtain Slats: 6 inches long. 2. Bottom Bar: 6 inches long. 3. Hood: 6 inches square.

D. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

E. Maintenance Data: For overhead coiling doors to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain overhead coiling doors through one source from a single manufacturer. 1. Obtain operators and controls from overhead coiling door manufacturer.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100.

D. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in ICC/ANSI A117.1.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis of Design: Thermiser (Model ESD20) by Cornell Iron Works Inc. 800 233-8366 1. Local distributor: Specified Supply, Inc. 412.304.3841

B. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Clopay Building Products Company, Inc. 2. Cookson Company. 3. Overhead Door Corp. 4. Raynor. 5. Wayne-Dalton Corp. 6. McKeon Door Company

LAWRENCE COUNTY OVERHEAD COILING DOORS PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 08 3323 - 3

2.02 DOOR CURTAIN MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION

A. Door Curtains: Fabricate overhead coiling door curtain of interlocking slats, designed to withstand wind loading indicated, in a continuous length for width of door without splices. Unless otherwise indicated, provide slats of thickness and mechanical properties recommended by door manufacturer for performance, size, and type of door indicated, and as follows: 1. Exterior Insulated Service Door Slats: Galvanized Steel: 20/24 gauge, Grade 40, ASTM A

653 galvanized steel zinc coating; factory thermoset color coating. a. Minimum Base-Metal (Uncoated) Thickness: 0.0239 inch (interior slat)/ 0.035 inch

(exterior slat). b. Flat profile slats 1 1/2-inch high by 1/2-inch deep. c. Color: Dual color (inside/ outside) as scheduled. Where not scheduled or otherwise

indicated, Architect will select from Manufacturer’s full range.

d. Minimum R value: 7.3R

2. Insulation: Fill indicated exterior door slats with manufacturer's standard rigid cellular polystyrene or polyurethane-foam-type thermal insulation complying with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, according to ASTM E 84. Enclose insulation completely within metal slat faces.

a. Minimum R value: 7.3R

3. Gasket Seal: Provide insulated slats with manufacturer's standard interior-to-exterior thermal break or with continuous gaskets between slats.

B. Endlocks and Windlocks for Service Doors: Malleable-iron casings galvanized after fabrication, secured to curtain slats with galvanized rivets or high-strength nylon. Provide locks on not less than alternate curtain slats for curtain alignment and resistance against lateral movement.

C. Curtain Jamb Guides: Fabricate curtain jamb guides angles or channels and angles, finished as indicated, with sufficient depth and strength to retain curtain, to allow curtain to operate smoothly, and to withstand loading. Slot bolt holes for guide adjustment. Provide continuous integral wear strips/ pile runners on both sides of curtain, to prevent metal-to-metal contact and to minimize operational noise. Provide removable stops on guides to prevent overtravel of curtain, and a continuous bar for holding windlocks. 1. Jamb Guides, Steel Service Door: Build up units with not less than 3/16-inch-thick

galvanized steel sections complying with ASTM A 36 and ASTM A 123. Finish to match curtain slats.

2. Jamb Guides, Steel Counter Doors: Manufacturer's standard angles or channels and angles. Factory prime finish for field coating to match HM frame.

2.03 HOODS AND ACCESSORIES

A. Hood: Provide at each door. Form to act as weatherseal and entirely enclose coiled curtain and operating mechanism at opening head. Contour to fit end brackets to which hood is attached. Roll and reinforce top and bottom edges for stiffness. Provide closed ends for surface-mounted hoods and provide fascia for any portion of between-jamb mounting projecting beyond wall face. Provide intermediate support brackets as required to prevent sagging.

1. Galvanized Steel: Nominal 0.028-inch-thick, hot-dip galvanized steel sheet with G90 zinc coating, complying with ASTM A 653.

2. Shape: Round, unless otherwise indicated.


B. Push/Pull Handles: For push-up-operated doors, provide galvanized steel lifting handles on each side of door. 1. Provide pull-down leather straps for doors more than 84 inches high.

C. Locking Device Assemblies: 1. Provide no lock assembly at motor-operated exterior service door.

2. Crank Hoist: Padlockable slide bolt on coil side of bottom bar at each jamb extending into slots in guides.

3. Manual Chain Hoist: Padlockable chain keeper on guide.

2.04 COUNTERBALANCING MECHANISM

A. General: Counterbalance doors by means of adjustable-tension, steel helical torsion spring mounted around a steel shaft and contained in a spring barrel connected to door curtain with barrel rings. Use grease-sealed bearings or self-lubricating graphite bearings for rotating members.

B. Counterbalance Barrel: Fabricate spring barrel of hot-formed, structural-quality, welded or seamless carbon-steel pipe, of sufficient diameter and wall thickness to support rolled-up curtain without distortion of slats and to limit barrel deflection to not more than 0.03 in./ft. of span under full load.

C. Provide spring balance of one or more oil-tempered, heat-treated steel helical torsion springs. Size springs to counterbalance weight of curtain, with uniform adjustment accessible from outside barrel. Provide cast-steel barrel plugs to secure ends of springs to barrel and shaft.

D. Fabricate torsion rod for counterbalance shaft of cold-rolled steel, sized to hold fixed spring ends and carry torsional load.

E. Brackets: Provide mounting brackets of manufacturer's standard design, either cast iron or cold-rolled steel plate.

2.05 ELECTRIC DOOR OPERATORS

A. General: Provide electric door operator assembly of size and capacity recommended and provided by door manufacturer for door and operation-cycle requirements specified, with electric motor and factory-prewired motor controls, starter, gear-reduction unit, solenoid-operated brake, clutch, remote-control stations, control devices, integral gearing for locking door, and accessories required for proper operation. 1. Comply with NFPA 70. 2. Provide control equipment complying with NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, and NEMA ICS 6,

with NFPA 70 Class 2 control circuit, maximum 24 V, ac or dc.

B. Disconnect Device: Provide hand-operated disconnect or mechanism for automatically engaging chain and sprocket operator and releasing brake for emergency manual operation while disconnecting motor without affecting timing of limit switch. Mount disconnect and operator so they are accessible from floor level. Include interlock device to automatically prevent motor from operating when emergency operator is engaged.

C. Design operator so motor may be removed without disturbing limit-switch adjustment and without affecting emergency auxiliary operator.


D. Door-Operator Type: Provide indicated wall-, hood-, or bracket-mounted, jackshaft-type door operator unit consisting of electric motor, worm-gear running-in-oil drive, and chain and sprocket secondary drive.

E. Electric Motors: Provide high-starting torque, reversible, continuous-duty, Class A insulated, electric motors complying with NEMA MG 1; with overload protection; sized to start, accelerate, and operate door in either direction from any position, at not less than 2/3 fps and not more than 1 fps, without exceeding nameplate ratings or service factor. 1. Type: Single phase.

2. Service Factor: According to NEMA MG 1, unless otherwise indicated.

3. Coordinate wiring requirements and electrical characteristics of motors with building electrical system.

4. Provide open dripproof-type motor, and controller with NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosure.

5. Motor Type and Controller: Reversible motor and controller (disconnect switch) for motor exposure indicated.

6. Motor Size: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough to start, accelerate, and operate door in either direction from any position, at a speed not less than 8 in./sec. and not more than 12 in./sec., without exceeding nameplate ratings or service factor.

7. Operating Controls, Controllers (Disconnect Switches), Wiring Devices, and Wiring: Manufacturer's standard unless otherwise indicated.

8. Coordinate wiring requirements and electrical characteristics of motors and other electrical devices with building electrical system and each location where installed.

F. Obstruction Detection Device: Provide each motorized door with indicated external automatic safety sensor capable of protecting full width of door opening. Activation of sensor immediately stops and reverses downward door travel. 1. Sensor Edge: Provide each motorized door with an automatic fail-safe safety sensor edge,

located within astragal or weather stripping mounted to bottom bar. Contact with sensor immediately stops and reverses downward door travel. Connect to control circuit using manufacturer's standard coil cord. a. Self-Monitoring Type: Four-wire configured device designed to interface with door

operator control circuit to detect damage to or disconnection of sensor edge.

G. Limit Switches: Provide adjustable switches, interlocked with motor controls and set to automatically stop door at fully opened and fully closed positions.

H. Remote-Control Station: Momentary-contact, three-button control station with push-button controls labeled "Open," "Close," and "Stop." 1. Interior units, full-guarded, surface-mounted, heavy-duty type, with general-purpose

NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosure. 2. Exterior units, full-guarded, standard-duty, surface-mounted, weatherproof type,

NEMA ICS 6, Type 4 enclosure, key operated.

I. Emergency Manual Operation: Equip each electrically powered door with capability for emergency manual operation. Design manual mechanism so required force for door operation does not exceed 25 lbf.


J. Emergency Operation Disconnect Device: Equip operator with hand-operated disconnect mechanism for automatically engaging manual operator and releasing brake for emergency manual operation while disconnecting motor without affecting timing of limit switch. Mount mechanism so it is accessible from floor level. Include interlock device to automatically prevent motor from operating when emergency operator is engaged.

K. Audible and Visual Signals: Audible alarm and visual indicator lights in compliance with regulatory requirements for accessibility.

2.06 DOOR ASSEMBLY

A. Type ICD - Insulated Service Door, face-of-wall mounting 1. Operation Cycles: Not less than 100,000.

a. Include tamperproof cycle counter.

2. Curtain R-Value: Min 7.3 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu.

3. Door Curtain Material: Galvanized steel with factory-applied thermoset color coating.

4. Windows: factory installed 2 way vision windows. Glazing shall be impact resistant laminated 9/16” thick.

5. Door Curtain Slats: Flat profile slats of 1-7/8-inch to 3-1/4-inch center-to-center height. a. Insulated-Slat Interior Facing: Metal matching door curtain.

6. Curtain Jamb Guides: Galvanized steel with exposed finish matching curtain slats. Provide continuous integral wear strips to prevent metal-to-metal contact and to minimize operational noise.

7. Hood: Match curtain material and finish. a. Shape: Round.

8. Locking Devices: not required at motorized door.

9. Electric Door Operator: a. Usage Classification: Standard duty, up to 60 cycles per hour. b. Operator Location: Front of hood or as shown on Drawings. c. Motor Exposure: Exterior, wet, and humid. d. Emergency Manual Operation: Chain type. e. Obstruction-Detection Device: Electric sensing edge; self-monitoring type. f. Remote-Control Station: Where shown on Drawings.

10. Door Finish: a. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coated Finish: Color as scheduled on Drawings. b. Interior Curtain-Slat Facing: Color as scheduled on Drawings. Where not scheduled,

match finish of exterior curtain-slat face.


A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.


2.08 FACTORY COATING FINISHES

A. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: Manufacturer's standard baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat, according to coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, pretreatment, application, thermosetting, and minimum dry film thickness. 1. Color and Gloss: As scheduled.

2.09 STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES

A. Surface Preparation: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish.

B. Polished Finishes: Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish, free of cross scratches. 1. Run grain of directional finishes with long dimension of each piece. 2. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign

matter and leave surfaces chemically clean. 3. Directional Satin Finish: No. 4.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for substrate construction and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine locations of electrical connections.


3.02 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install door and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, jamb and head mold strips, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports according to Shop Drawings, manufacturer's written instructions, and as specified.

B. Install overhead coiling doors, hoods, and operators at the mounting locations indicated for each door.

C. Accessibility: Install overhead coiling doors, switches, and controls along accessible routes in compliance with regulatory requirements for accessibility.

D. Fire-Rated Doors: Install according to NFPA 80.

E. Smoke-Control Doors: Install according to NFPA 80 and NFPA 105.


3.03 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service. 1. Perform installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and

equipment.

3.04 ADJUSTING

A. Lubricate bearings and sliding parts; adjust doors to operate easily, free of warp, twist, or distortion and with weathertight fit around entire perimeter.

B. Adjust seals to provide weathertight fit around entire perimeter.

3.05 TESTING SERVICES

A. Perform testing service. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. Run each door through complete cycle from fully closed to fully opened. Verify that cylinder locks operate properly from both sides.

B. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

3.06 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain overhead coiling doors.


LAWRENCE COUNTY ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONT PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 08 4113 - 1 © 2014 Eckles Architecture and Engineering

SECTION 08 4113 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Exterior and interior aluminum-framed glazed entrances, doors and storefront.. Glazing is

retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides. 2. Exterior manual-swing FRP (Fiberglass Reinforced Polyester) flush doors.

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for installation of joint sealants installed with

aluminum-framed systems and for sealants to the extent not specified in this Section.

2. Division 08 Section "Aluminum Windows" for fixed and operating window assemblies.

3. Division 08 Section "Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls" for curtain-wall systems that mechanically retain glazing on four sides.

4. Division 08 Section "Glazing" for glazing requirements to the extent not specified in this Section.

5. Division 08 Section "Door Hardware" for hardware to the extent not specified in this Section.

6. Division 26 and 28 Sections for electrical and access control requirements at entrances


A. General: Provide aluminum-framed systems, including anchorage, that are large missile impact resistant capable of withstanding, without failure, the effects of the following: 1. Structural loads.

2. Thermal movements.

3. Movements of supporting structure indicated on Drawings including, but not limited to, story drift and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads.

4. Dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction.

5. Failure includes the following: a. Deflection exceeding specified limits. b. Thermal stresses transferred to building structure. c. Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and

structural movements, to glazing. d. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements. e. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components. f. Sealant failure. g. Failure of operating units to function properly.

B. Structural Loads – Design in compliance with prevailing building code, using required basic wind speeds, importance factor and exposure category, with the following minimum requirements: 1. Wind Speed: Design for 3-second gusts at min 90 mph, and sustained 25 mph wind speed.

ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONT LAWRENCE COUNTY 08 4113 - 2 PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY

C. Deflection of Framing Members: 1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to 1/175 of clear span for spans up to 13 feet 6

inches and to 1/240 of clear span plus 1/4 inch for spans greater than 13 feet 6 inches or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch, whichever is less.

2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to 1/360 of clear span or 1/8 inch, whichever is smaller.

D. Structural-Test Performance: Provide aluminum-framed systems tested according to ASTM E 330 as follows: 1. When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, systems do not evidence

deflection exceeding specified limits.

2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures, systems, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, and permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span.

3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity but not less than 10 seconds.

E. Thermal Movements: Provide aluminum-framed systems that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

F. Exterior Fixed Glazing and Framing Areas (if used): 1. Air Infiltration: maximum air leakage of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. of fixed wall area when tested

according to ASTM E 283 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 6.24 lbf/sq. ft..

2. Water Penetration Under Static Pressure: no evidence of water penetration when tested according to ASTM E 331 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft..

3. Condensation Resistance: CRF of not less than 53 when tested according to AAMA 1503.

4. Average Thermal Conductance: average U-factor of not more than 0.43 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F when tested according to AAMA 1503.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, product test reports dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: For aluminum-framed systems. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer

responsible for their preparation.

2. Include details of provisions for system expansion and contraction and for draining moisture occurring within the system to the exterior.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's standard sizes.

D. Maintenance Data: For aluminum-framed systems and FRP doors to include in maintenance manuals.

LAWRENCE COUNTY ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONT PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 08 4113 - 3

E. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.


A. Installer Qualifications: Capable of assuming engineering responsibility and performing work of this Section and who is acceptable to manufacturer. 1. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for aluminum-framed systems including

Shop Drawings based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project and submission of reports of tests performed on manufacturer's standard assemblies.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain aluminum systems, components and accessories of work specified in the following specification Sections, through one source from a single manufacturer or single re-seller authorized by, and in good standing with, manufacturer or manufacturers 1. 08 4113 Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefront.

a. FRP door and frame assemblies may be by separate manufacturer 2. 08 4413 Glazed Aluminum Curtain Wall 3. 08 5113 Aluminum Windows

A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code--Aluminum."


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of structural supports for aluminum-framed systems by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the

Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating aluminum-framed systems without field measurements. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.

1.06 WARRANTY

A. Special Assembly Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of aluminum-framed systems that do not comply with requirements or that deteriorate as defined in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. b. Noise or vibration caused by thermal movements. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal

weathering. d. Water leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas. e. Failure of operating components to function properly.

2. Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Painted Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components on which finishes fail within specified warranty period. Warranty does not include normal weathering. 1. Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Aluminum Doors and Frames: 1. Basis for Design: 5-in wide stile non- thermal break door, factory-glazed with impact

resistant 9/16-in laminated clear IG unit. a. EFCO Series D500 Wide Stile swing door b. EFCO Series 526 2-1/2” x 5” Thermal Impact storefront at all exterior locations.

B. FRP Doors and Frames: 1. Special-Lite, Inc. represented by Bekon Sales 330-530-0300. 2. Commercial Door Systems, represented by Architectural Products Corp 412 221 0100 3. Corrim Company, 920 231-2000 4. Aluminum Door manufacturer

C. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide basis-of-design products or products by one of the following: 1. Traco, an Alcoa Company 2. Kawneer, an Alcoa Company 3. YKK AP America Inc. 4. Wausau Window and Wall Systems 5. Aluminum Window Manufacturer, subject to specific approval.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated. 1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209. 2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221. 3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429. 4. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308. 5. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS A5.10.

B. Steel Reinforcement: With manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant primer complying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00 applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPC-SP COM and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard. 1. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36. 2. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008. 3. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011.

2.03 FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded-aluminum framing members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads. 1. Construction: Framing members are composite assemblies of two separate extruded-

aluminum components permanently bonded by an elastomeric material of low thermal conductance.

B. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.


C. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. 1. Where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and structural

movements, wind loads, or vibration, use self-locking devices.

2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads.

D. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel inserts complying with ASTM A 123 or ASTM A 153 requirements.

E. Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding flashing compatible with adjacent materials. Form exposed flashing from sheet aluminum finished to match framing and of sufficient thickness to maintain a flat appearance without visible deflection.

F. Framing System Gaskets and Sealants: Manufacturer's standard recommended by manufacturer for joint type.

2.04 GLAZING SYSTEMS

A. Glazing: As scheduled and as specified in Division 08 Section "Glazing." 1. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard compression types, replaceable, molded or

extruded, that maintain uniform pressure and watertight seal. 2. Spacers and Setting Blocks: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric types. 3. Impact rated glazing shall be provided at all storefront and entrance systems.

a. Storefront: 1-5/16” insulated with ¼” temp exterior Solarban 60 #2 surface, ½” air space, 9/16” laminated (1/4” hs x .090 interlayer x ¼” hs).

b. Doors: 9/16” laminated. (1/4” hs x .090 interlayer x ¼” hs).

2.05 DOORS

A. Glazed Alum. Storefront Doors: As specified under “Manufacturers” Article above. 1. Finish: Custom Color: Painted finish as scheduled 2. Door Bottom Rails: Bottom rails must be a minimum of 10 inches high.

B. FRP Door Construction: 1-3/4-inch overall thickness with 1/4-inch SL-20 FRP face sheets with minimum 0.125-inch-extruded-aluminum edging/framing members with poured-in-place urethane cores. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that are deep penetration and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie rods. 1. Colors, as indicated on drawings and as verified with Architect

a. Finish extruded aluminum edging same color as door.

2. Door Design: As indicated on Drawings, with rectangular vision lites where indicated.

3. Panel Pattern: Pebbled

4. Locations: Exterior Doors as scheduled.

5. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Beveled snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and preformed gaskets. a. Provide nonremovable glazing stops on outside of door. b. Finish: Thermafused organic paint glazing stops to match door finish color.


2.06 DOOR HARDWARE

A. Door Hardware: As scheduled and specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware," and as follows

B. Exit devices specified in Division 08 shall be factory-installed by door manufacturer.

C. Silencers: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1.

D. Manual Flush Bolts: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1.

E. Operating Trim: BHMA A156.6.

F. Thresholds: Raised thresholds beveled with a slope of not more than 1:2, with maximum height of 1/2 inch. 1. Standard: BHMA A156.21.

G. Finger Guards: Manufacturer's standard collapsible neoprene or PVC gasket anchored to frame hinge-jamb at center-pivoted doors.

H. FRP Doors: 1. Door Pulls – SL-82 Recessed Pull for flush doors by Special-Lite, or CDS-P2 by

Commercial Door Systems. Anodized aluminum finish.

2. Weather Stripping at Jamb, Head, Threshold, and Meeting Stiles by door manufacturer. Manufacturer's standard replaceable components.

I. Glazed Aluminum Doors: 1. Weather Stripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable components.

a. Compression Type: Made of ASTM D 2000, molded neoprene, or ASTM D 2287, molded PVC.

b. Sliding Type: AAMA 701, made of wool, polypropylene, or nylon woven pile with nylon-fabric or aluminum-strip backing.

2. Exit devices to be factory-installed by door manufacturer.

2.07 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Joint Sealants: For installation at perimeter of aluminum-framed systems, as specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

B. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements except containing no asbestos, formulated for 30-mil thickness per coat.

2.08 FABRICATION

A. Form aluminum shapes before finishing.

B. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding.


C. Framing Members, General: Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics: 1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. 3. Means to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members, and

moisture migrating within the system to exterior. 4. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. 5. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to maintain

required glazing edge clearances. 6. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest extent

possible.

D. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing (without projecting stops).

E. Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and for installing hardware. 1. At exterior doors, provide compression weather stripping at fixed stops. 2. At interior doors, provide silencers at stops to prevent metal-to-metal contact. Install three

silencers on strike jamb of single-door frames and two silencers on head of frames for pairs of doors.

F. Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing hardware. 1. At pairs of exterior doors, provide sliding weather stripping retained in adjustable strip

mortised into door edge. 2. At exterior doors, provide weather sweeps applied to door bottoms.

G. Hardware Installation: Factory install hardware to the greatest extent possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed hardware before applying finishes.

H. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings.

2.09 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.

C. Organic Finish: Single-finish frame, with AA-C12C42R1x baked enamel finish system on interior surfaces and AA-C12C40R1x High-Performance finish on exterior surfaces.

1. Exterior/interior surfaces: a. Chemical Finish: cleaned with inhibited chemicals; conversion coating; b. Organic Coating: manufacturer's standard 2-coat, thermocured system consisting of

specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; complying with AAMA 2605.

2. Colors: Custom color as scheduled on Drawings or as otherwise approved in writing. Color on the exterior shall be the same as on the interior.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. General: 1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Do not install damaged components. 3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. 4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. 5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic

deterioration. 6. Seal joints watertight, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Metal Protection: 1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting

contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape or installing nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.

2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.

C. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior.

D. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" and to produce weathertight installation.

E. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades, without warp or rack.

F. Install glazing as specified in Division 08 Section "Glazing."

G. Entrances: Install to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points. 1. Exterior Entrances: Install to produce tight fit at weather stripping and weathertight closure. 2. Field-Installed Hardware: Install surface-mounted hardware according to hardware

manufacturers' written instructions using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible.

H. Install perimeter joint sealants as specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" and to produce weathertight installation.

I. Erection Tolerances: Install aluminum-framed systems to comply with the following maximum tolerances: 1. Location and Plane: Limit variation from true location and plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet; 1/4

inch over total length.

2. Alignment: a. Where surfaces abut in line, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch. b. Where surfaces meet at corners, limit offset from true alignment to 1/32 inch.


3. Diagonal Measurements: Limit difference between diagonal measurement to 1/8 inch.

3.03 ADJUSTING

A. Entrances: Adjust operating hardware for smooth operation according to hardware manufacturers' written instructions.


LAWRENCE COUNTY DOOR HARDWARE PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 08 7100 - 1

SECTION 08 7100 – DOOR HARDWARE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes commercial door hardware for the following:

1. Swinging doors. 2. Sliding doors. 3. Other doors to the extent indicated.

B. Door hardware includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following:

1. Mechanical door hardware. 2. Electromechanical door hardware, power supplies, back-ups and surge protection. 3. Cylinders specified for doors in other sections.

C. Related Sections:

1. Division 08 Section “Door Hardware Schedule”. 2. Division 08 Section “Hollow Metal Doors and Frames”. 3. Division 08 Section “Interior Aluminum Doors and Frames”. 4. Division 08 Section “Flush Wood Doors”.

D. Codes and References: Comply with the version year adopted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction.

1. ANSI A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities. 2. ICC/IBC - International Building Code. 3. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows. 4. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code. 5. NFPA 105 - Installation of Smoke Door Assemblies. 6. State Building Codes, Local Amendments.

E. Standards: All hardware specified herein shall comply with the following industry standards:

1. ANSI/BHMA Certified Product Standards - A156 Series 2. UL10C – Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Manufacturer's product data sheets including installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, operational descriptions and finishes.

DOOR HARDWARE LAWRENCE COUNTY 08 7100 - 2 PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY

B. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate the final Door Hardware Schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware.

1. Format: Comply with scheduling sequence and vertical format in DHI's "Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule."

2. Organization: Organize the Door Hardware Schedule into door hardware sets indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Organize door hardware sets in same order as in the Door Hardware Sets at the end of Part 3. Submittals that do not follow the same format and order as the Door Hardware Sets will be rejected and subject to resubmission.

3. Content: Include the following information:

a. Type, style, function, size, label, hand, and finish of each door hardware item. b. Manufacturer of each item. c. Fastenings and other pertinent information. d. Location of door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings, both on floor plans

and in door and frame schedule. e. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. f. Mounting locations for door hardware. g. Door and frame sizes and materials.

4. Submittal Sequence: Submit the final Door Hardware Schedule at earliest possible date, particularly where approval of the Door Hardware Schedule must precede fabrication of other work that is critical in the Project construction schedule. Include Product Data, Samples, Shop Drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of the Door Hardware Schedule.

C. Shop Drawings: Details of electrified access control hardware indicating the following:

1. Wiring Diagrams: Upon receipt of approved schedules, submit detailed system wiring diagrams for power, signaling, monitoring, communication, and control of the access control system electrified hardware. Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. Include the following:

a. Elevation diagram of each unique access controlled opening showing location and interconnection of major system components with respect to their placement in the respective door openings.

b. Complete (risers, point-to-point) access control system block wiring diagrams.

2. Electrical Coordination: Coordinate with related Division 26 Electrical Sections the voltages and wiring details required at electrically controlled and operated hardware openings.

D. Keying Schedule: Prepared under the supervision of the Owner, separate schedule detailing final keying instructions for locksets and cylinders in writing. Include keying system explanation, door numbers, key set symbols, hardware set numbers and special instructions. Owner to approve submitted keying schedule prior to the ordering of permanent cylinders.


E. Operating and Maintenance Manuals: Provide manufacturers operating and maintenance manuals for each item comprising the complete door hardware installation in quantity as required in Division 01, Closeout Submittals. The manual to include the name, address, and contact information of the manufacturers providing the hardware and their nearest service representatives. The final copies delivered after completion of the installation test to include "as built" modifications made during installation, checkout, and acceptance.

F. Warranties and Maintenance: Special warranties and maintenance agreements specified in this Section.


A. Manufacturers Qualifications: Engage qualified manufacturers with a minimum 5 years of documented experience in producing hardware and equipment similar to that indicated for this Project and that have a proven record of successful in-service performance.

B. Installer Qualifications: Installers, trained by the primary product manufacturers, with a minimum 3 years documented experience installing both standard and electrified builders hardware similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

C. Door Hardware Supplier Qualifications: Experienced commercial door hardware distributors with a minimum 5 years’ documented experience supplying both mechanical and electromechanical hardware installations comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project. Supplier recognized as a factory direct distributor in good standing by the manufacturers of the primary materials with a warehousing facility in Project's vicinity. Supplier to have on staff a certified Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) available during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner concerning both standard and electromechanical door hardware and keying.

1. Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedules.

D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of Door Hardware specified in this Section from a single source, qualified supplier unless otherwise indicated.

1. Electrified modifications or enhancements made to a source manufacturer's product line by a secondary or third party source will not be accepted.

2. Provide electromechanical door hardware from the same manufacturer as mechanical door hardware, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with NFPA 70, NFPA 80, NFPA 101 and ANSI A117.1 requirements and guidelines as directed in the model building code including, but not limited to, the following:

1. NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code", including electrical components, devices, and accessories listed and labeled as defined in Article 100 by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

2. All openings must comply with accessibility requirements, comply with Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), "Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)," ANSI A117.1 as follows:


a. Handles, Pulls, Latches, Locks, and other Operating Devices: Shape that is easy to grasp with one hand and does not require tight grasping, tight pinching, or twisting of the wrist.

b. Door Closers: Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements indicated:

1) Interior Hinged Doors: 5 lbf applied perpendicular to door. 2) Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having

jurisdiction.

c. Thresholds: Not more than 1/2 inch high. Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1:2.

3. NFPA 101: Comply with the following for means of egress doors:

a. Latches, Locks, and Exit Devices: Not more than 15 lbf to release the latch. Locks shall not require the use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation.

b. Thresholds: Not more than 1/2 inch high.

4. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Provide door hardware for assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252 (neutral pressure at 40" above sill) or UL-10C.

a. Test Pressure: Positive pressure labeling.

F. Each unit to bear third party permanent label demonstrating compliance with the referenced standards.

G. Keying Conference: Conduct conference to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Meetings." Keying conference to incorporate the following criteria into the final keying schedule document:

1. Function of building, purpose of each area and degree of security required. 2. Plans for existing and future key system expansion. 3. Requirements for key control storage and software. 4. Installation of permanent keys, cylinder cores. 5. Installation of temporary cores in systems equipment rooms to secure equipment installed

by Owner under these and separate contracts during construction phases. 6. Address and requirements for delivery of keys.

H. Pre-Submittal Conference: Conduct coordination conference in compliance with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Meetings" with attendance by representatives of Supplier(s), Installer(s), and Contractor(s) to review proper methods and the procedures for receiving, handling, and installing door hardware.

1. Prior to installation of door hardware being installed onsite, conduct a project specific training meeting to instruct the installing contractors' personnel on the proper installation and adjustment of their respective products. Product training to be attended by installers of door hardware (including electromechanical hardware) for aluminum, hollow metal and wood doors. Training will include the use of installation manuals, hardware


schedules, templates and physical product samples as required. If hardware is being pre-installed by the supplier, this training meeting is not required.

2. Inspect and discuss electrical roughing-in, power supply connections, and other preparatory work performed by other trades.

3. Review sequence of operation narratives for each unique access controlled opening. 4. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials. 5. Review the required inspecting, testing, commissioning, and demonstration procedures

I. At completion of installation, provide written documentation that components were applied to manufacturer's instructions and recommendations and according to approved schedule.


A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up and shelving for door hardware delivered to Project site. Do not store electronic access control hardware, software or accessories at Project site without prior authorization.

B. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final Door Hardware Schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package.

C. Deliver, as applicable, permanent keys, cylinders, cores, access control credentials, software and related accessories directly to Owner via registered mail or overnight package service. Instructions for delivery to the Owner shall be established at the "Keying Conference".

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for installing standard and electrified hardware. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing hardware to comply with indicated requirements.

B. Door Hardware and Electrical Connections: Coordinate the layout and installation of scheduled electrified door hardware and related access control equipment with required connections to source power junction boxes, low voltage power supplies, detection and monitoring hardware, and fire and detection alarm systems.

C. Door and Frame Preparation: Related Division 08 Sections (Steel, Aluminum and Wood) doors and corresponding frames are to be prepared, reinforced and pre-wired (if applicable) to receive the installation of the specified electrified, monitoring, signaling and access control system hardware without additional in-field modifications.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. General Warranty: Reference Division 01, General Requirements. Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.

B. Warranty Period: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer(s), agreeing to repair or replace components of standard and electrified door hardware that fails in materials or workmanship


within specified warranty period after final acceptance by the Owner. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage. 2. Faulty operation of the hardware. 3. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. 4. Electrical component defects and failures within the systems operation.

C. Standard Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Special Warranty Periods:

1. Ten years for mortise locks and latches. 2. Five years for exit hardware. 3. Twenty five years for manual surface door closers. 4. Two years for electromechanical door hardware.

1.7 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware.

B. Continuing Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, and running concurrent with the specified warranty period, the manufacturer’s representative shall provide continuous 6 months full maintenance including repair and replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper door opening operation. Provide parts and supplies as used in the manufacture and installation of original products.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE

A. General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in Door Hardware Sets and each referenced section that products are to be supplied under.

1. Designations: Requirements for quantity, item, size, finish or color, grade, function, and other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in the Door Hardware Sets at the end of Part 3. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows:

a. Named Manufacturer's Products: Product designation and manufacturer are listed for each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing requirements. Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in the Door Hardware Schedule.

B. Substitutions: Requests for substitution and product approval for inclusive mechanical and electromechanical door hardware in compliance with the specifications must be submitted in writing and in accordance with the procedures and time frames outlined in Division 01,


Substitution Procedures. Approval of requests is at the discretion of the architect, owner, and their designated consultants.

2.2 HANGING DEVICES

A. Hinges: ANSI/BHMA A156.1 certified butt hinges with number of hinge knuckles as specified in the Door Hardware Sets.

1. Quantity: Provide the following hinge quantity, unless otherwise indicated:

a. Two Hinges: For doors with heights up to 60 inches. b. Three Hinges: For doors with heights 61 to 90 inches. c. Four Hinges: For doors with heights 91 to 120 inches.

2. Hinge Size: Provide the following, unless otherwise indicated, with hinge widths sized for door thickness and clearances required:

a. Widths up to 3’0”: 4-1/2” standard or heavy weight as specified. b. Sizes from 3’1” to 4’0”: 5” standard or heavy weight as specified.

3. Hinge Weight and Base Material: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following:

a. Exterior Doors: Heavy weight, non-ferrous, ball bearing or oil impregnated bearing hinges unless Hardware Sets indicate standard weight.

b. Interior Doors: Standard weight, steel, ball bearing or oil impregnated bearing hinges unless Hardware Sets indicate heavy weight.

4. Hinge Options: Comply with the following where indicated in the Hardware Sets or on Drawings:

a. Non-removable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened into a groove in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while door is closed; for the following applications:

1) Out-swinging exterior doors. 2) Out-swinging access controlled doors. 3) Out-swinging lockable doors.

5. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. McKinney Products (MK). b. Hager Companies (HA). c. Ives (IV). d. Stanley (ST)

B. Continuous Geared Hinges: ANSI/BHMA A156.26 certified continuous geared hinge with minimum 0.120-inch thick extruded 6060 T6 aluminum alloy hinge leaves and a minimum overall width of 4 inches. Hinges are non-handed, reversible and fabricated to template screw locations. Provide concealed flush mount (with or without inset), full in standard and heavy duty models, as specified in the Hardware Sets. Concealed continuous hinges to be U.L. listed for use on up to and including 90 minute rated door installations and U.L. listed for windstorm


components where applicable. Factory cut hinges for door size and provide with removable service power transfer panel where indicated at electrified openings.


a. McKinney Products (MK). b. Hager Companies (HA).

2.3 POWER TRANSFER DEVICES

A. Electrified Quick Connect Transfer Hinges: Provide electrified transfer hinges with Molex™ standardized plug connectors and sufficient number of concealed wires (up to 12) to accommodate the electrified functions specified in the Door Hardware Sets. Connectors plug directly to through-door wiring harnesses for connection to electric locking devices and power supplies. Wire nut connections are not acceptable.


a. Hager Companies (HA) - ETW-QC (# wires) Option. b. McKinney Products (MK) - QC (# wires) Option. c. Stanley (ST) - QC (# wires) Option.

B. Electric Door Hardware Cords: Provide electric transfer wiring harnesses with standardized plug connectors to accommodate up to twelve (12) wires. Connectors plug directly to through-door wiring harnesses for connection to electric locking devices and power supplies. Provide sufficient number of concealed wires to accommodate electric function of specified hardware. Provide a connector for through-door electronic locking devices and from hinge to junction box above the opening. Wire nut connections are not acceptable. Determine the length required for each electrified hardware component for the door type, size and construction, minimum of two per electrified opening.


a. McKinney Products (MK) – QC-C Series. Provide one each of the following tools as part of the base bid contract:

a. McKinney Products (MK) - Electrical Connecting Kit: QC-R001. b. McKinney Products (MK) - Connector Hand Tool: QC-R003.

2.4 DOOR OPERATING TRIM

A. Flush Bolts and Surface Bolts: ANSI/BHMA A156.3 and A156.16, Grade 1, certified automatic, self-latching, and manual flush bolts and surface bolts. Manual flush bolts to be furnished with top rod of sufficient length to allow bolt location approximately six feet from the floor. Furnish dust proof strikes for bottom bolts. Surface bolts to be minimum 8” in length and U.L. listed for labeled fire doors and U.L. listed for windstorm components where applicable. Provide related accessories (mounting brackets, strikes, coordinators, etc.) as required for appropriate installation and operation.



a. Rockwood Manufacturing (RO). b. Trimco (TC).

B. Door Push Plates and Pulls: ANS/BHMA A156.6 certified door pushes and pulls of type and design specified below or in the Hardware Sets. Coordinate and provide proper width and height as required where conflicting hardware dictates.

1. Push/Pull Plates: Minimum .050 inch thick, size as indicated in hardware sets, with square corners and beveled edges, secured with exposed screws unless otherwise indicated.

2. Door Pull and Push Bar Design: Size, shape, and material as indicated in the hardware sets. Minimum clearance of 2 1/2-inches from face of door unless otherwise indicated.

3. Offset Pull Design: Size, shape, and material as indicated in the hardware sets. Minimum clearance of 2 1/2-inches from face of door and offset of 90 degrees unless otherwise indicated.

4. Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's designated fastener type as indicated in Hardware Sets. 5. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Hiawatha, Inc. (HI). b. Rockwood Manufacturing (RO). c. Trimco (TC).

2.5 CYLINDERS AND KEYING

A. General: Cylinder manufacturer to have minimum (10) years experience designing secured master key systems and have on record a published security keying system policy.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of keyed cylinder and keys from the same source manufacturer as locksets and exit devices, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Cylinders: Original manufacturer cylinders complying with the following:

1. Mortise Type: Threaded cylinders with rings and straight- or clover-type cam. 2. Rim Type: Cylinders with back plate, flat-type vertical or horizontal tailpiece, and raised

trim ring. 3. Mortise and rim cylinder collars to be solid and recessed to allow the cylinder face to be

flush and be free spinning with matching finishes.

D. Patented Cylinders: ANSI/BHMA A156.5, Grade 1, certified cylinders employing a utility patented and restricted keyway requiring the use of patented controlled keys. Provide bump resistant, fixed core cylinders as standard with solid recessed cylinder collars. Cylinders are to be factory keyed where permanent keying records will be established and maintained.

1. Provide a 6 pin multi-level master key system comprised of patented controlled keys and security and high security cylinders operated by one (1) key of the highest level.

a. Provide utility patented controlled keyway cylinders that are furnished with patented keys available only from authorized distribution.

b. Refer to hardware sets for specified cylinders.

2. Acceptable Manufacturer:


a. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - Degree Series. b. Corbin Russwin (RU) – Access 3 Series. c. Schlage (SC)- Everest Primus. d. Best (BE) - Coremax

E. Keying System: Each type of lock and cylinders to be factory keyed. Conduct specified "Keying Conference" to define and document keying system instructions and requirements. Furnish factory cut, nickel-silver large bow permanently inscribed with a visual key control number as directed by Owner. Incorporate decisions made in keying conference, and as follows:

1. Master Key System: Cylinders are operated by a change key and a master key. 2. Grand Master Key System: Cylinders are operated by a change key, a master key, and a

grand master key. 3. Great-Grand Master Key System: Cylinders are operated by a change key, a master key, a

grand master key, and a great-grand master key. 4. Existing System: Master key or grand master key locks to Owner's existing system. 5. Keyed Alike: Key all cylinders to same change key.

F. Key Quantity: Provide the following minimum number of keys:

1. Top Master Key: One (1) 2. Change Keys per Cylinder: Two (2) 3. Master Keys (per Master Key Group): Two (2) 4. Grand Master Keys (per Grand Master Key Group): Two (2) 5. Construction Keys (where required): Ten (10) 6. Construction Control Keys (where required): Two (2) 7. Permanent Control Keys (where required): Two (2)

G. Construction Keying: Provide temporary keyed construction cores for all locks or cylinders provided. Provide construction master keys in quantity as required by project Contractor. GC is to replace construction cores with the permanent cores. Furnish permanent cores for installation as directed under specified "Keying Conference". All construction cores are to be returned to the supplier when the permanent cores are installed. 1. Provide temporary keyed cores for all systems equipment rooms which contain

equipment installed by Owner under separate contracts as well as by these contracts. Locations to be confirmed with Owner during construction.

H. Key Registration List: Provide keying transcript list or bitting to Owner's representative.

I. Key Control Cabinet: Provide a key control system including envelopes, labels, and tags with self-locking key clips, receipt forms, 3-way visible card index, temporary markers, permanent markers, and standard metal cabinet. Key control cabinet shall have expansion capacity of 150% of the number of locks required for the project.


a. Lund Equipment (LU). b. MMF Industries (MM). c. Telkee (TK).


2.6 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHING DEVICES

A. Mortise Locksets, Grade 1 (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.13, Series 1000, Operational Grade 1 certified mortise locksets furnished in the functions as specified in the Hardware Sets. Locksets to be manufactured with a corrosion resistant, stamped 12 gauge minimum formed steel case and be field-reversible for handing without disassembly of the lock body. Lockset trim to be the product of a single manufacturer. Furnish with standard 2 3/4" backset, 3/4" throw anti-friction stainless steel latchbolt, and a full 1" throw stainless steel bolt for deadbolt functions.


a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) – ML2000 Series. b. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) – 8200 Series. c. Schlage (SC) – L9000 Series. d. Best (BE) – 45H Series

2.7 LOCK AND LATCH STRIKES

A. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each latch or lock bolt, with curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match door hardware set, unless otherwise indicated, and as follows:

1. Flat-Lip Strikes: For locks with three-piece antifriction latchbolts, as recommended by manufacturer.

2. Extra-Long-Lip Strikes: For locks used on frames with applied wood casing trim. 3. Aluminum-Frame Strike Box: Provide manufacturer's special strike box fabricated for

aluminum framing.

B. Standards: Comply with the following:

1. Strikes for Mortise Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.13.

2.8 ELECTRIC STRIKES

A. Standard Electric Strikes: Heavy duty electric strikes conforming to ANSI/BHMA A156.31, Grade 1, UL listed for both Burglary Resistance and for use on fire rated door assemblies. Stainless steel construction with dual interlocking plunger design tested to exceed 3000 lbs. of static strength and 350 ft-lbs. of dynamic strength. Strikes tested for a minimum 1 million operating cycles. Provide strikes with 12 or 24 VDC capability and supplied standard as fail-secure unless otherwise specified. Option available for latchbolt and latchbolt strike monitoring indicating both the position of the latchbolt and locked condition of the strike.


a. Folger Adam EDC (FO). b. HES (HS). c. Von Duprin (VO).

B. Provide 24VDC Power Supplies for Electric Strikes.


C. Provide electric strikes with in-line power controller and surge suppressor by the same manufacturer as the strike with the combined products having a five year warranty.

2.9 CONVENTIONAL EXIT DEVICES

A. General Requirements: All exit devices specified herein shall meet or exceed the following criteria:

1. At doors not requiring a fire rating, provide devices complying with NFPA 101 and listed and labeled for "Panic Hardware" according to UL305. Provide proper fasteners as required by manufacturer including sex nuts and bolts at openings specified in the Hardware Sets.

2. Where exit devices are required on fire rated doors, provide devices complying with NFPA 80 and with UL labeling indicating "Fire Exit Hardware". Provide devices with the proper fasteners for installation as tested and listed by UL. Consult manufacturer’s catalog and template book for specific requirements.

3. Except on electric latch retraction or fire rated doors, provide exit devices with hex key dogging device to hold the pushbar and latch in a retracted position. Provide optional keyed cylinder dogging on devices where specified in Hardware Sets.

4. Lever Operating Trim: Where exit devices require lever trim, furnish manufacturer's heavy duty trim with cold forged escutcheons, beveled edges, and four threaded studs for thru-bolts.

a. Lock Trim Design: As indicated in Hardware Sets, provide finishes and designs to match that of the specified locksets. Provided free-wheeling type trim where indicated.

b. Where function of exit device requires a cylinder, provide an interchangeable core type keyed cylinder (Rim or Mortise) as specified in Hardware Sets.

5. Dummy Push Bar: Nonfunctioning push bar matching functional push bar.

6. Rail Sizing: Provide exit device rails factory sized for proper door width application.

7. Through Bolt Installation: For exit devices and trim as indicated in Door Hardware Sets.

8. Lockable Removeable Mullions shall be from the same manufacturer as the exit devices.

B. Conventional Push Rail Exit Devices (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.3, Grade 1 certified panic and fire exit hardware devices furnished in the functions specified in the Hardware Sets. Mounting rails to be formed from smooth stainless steel, brass or bronze architectural materials no less than 0.072" thick, with push rails a minimum of 0.062" thickness. Painted or aluminum metal rails are not acceptable.


a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) - ED4000 / ED5000 Series. b. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - 80 Series. c. Von Duprin (VD) - 98 Series. d. Precision (PR) Apex 2000 Series


2.10 ELECTROMECHANICAL CONVENTIONAL EXIT DEVICES

A. Electrified Conventional Push Rail Devices (Heavy Duty): Subject to same compliance standards and requirements as mechanical exit devices, electrified devices to be of type and design as specified in the hardware sets.


a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) - ED4000 / ED5000 Series. b. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - 80 Series. c. Von Duprin (VD) - 35A/98 Series. d. Precision (PR) Apex 2000 Series

B. Electrified Options: As indicated in hardware sets, provide electrified exit device options including: electric latch retraction. Unless otherwise indicated, provide electrified exit devices standard as fail secure.

2.11 DOOR CLOSERS

A. All door closers specified herein shall meet or exceed the following criteria:

1. General: Door closers to be from one manufacturer, matching in design and style, with the same type door preparations and templates regardless of application or spring size. Closers to be non-handed with full sized covers including installation and adjusting information on inside of cover.

2. Standards: Closers to comply with UL-10C and UBC 7-2 for Positive Pressure Fire Test and be U.L. listed for use of fire rated doors.

3. Cycle Testing: Provide closers which have surpassed 10 million cycles in a test witnessed and verified by UL.

4. Size of Units: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for sizing of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Where closers are indicated for doors required to be accessible to the physically handicapped, provide units complying with ANSI ICC/A117.1.

5. Closer Arms: Provide heavy duty, forged steel closer arms unless otherwise indicated in Hardware Sets.

a. Where closers are indicated to have mechanical dead-stop, provide heavy duty arms and brackets with an integral positive stop.

b. Where closers are indicated to have mechanical hold open, provide heavy duty units with an additional built-in mechanical holder assembly designed to hold open against normal wind and traffic conditions. Holder to be manually selectable to on-off position.

c. Where closers are indicated to have a cushion-type stop, provide heavy duty arms and brackets with spring stop mechanism to cushion door when opened to maximum degree.

d. Closers shall not be installed on exterior or corridor side of doors; where possible install closers on door for optimum aesthetics. Provide drop plates or other accessories as required for proper mounting.


6. Closer Accessories: Provide door closer accessories including custom templates, special mounting brackets, spacers and drop plates, and through-bolt or security type fasteners as specified in the door Hardware Sets.

B. Door Closers, Surface Mounted (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.4, Grade 1 surface mounted, heavy duty door closers with complete spring power adjustment, sizes 1 thru 6; and fully operational adjustable according to door size, frequency of use, and opening force. Closers to be rack and pinion type, one piece cast iron or aluminum alloy body construction, with adjustable backcheck and separate non-critical valves for closing sweep and latch speed control. Provide non-handed units standard.


a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) – DC6200 Series. b. LCN Closers (LC) - 1460 Series. c. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - 1431 Series. d. Stanley (ST) - 3551 Series.

2.12 ARCHITECTURAL TRIM

A. Door Protective Trim

1. General: Door protective trim units to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware Sets.

2. Size: Fabricate protection plates (kick, armor, or mop) not more than 2" less than door width (LDW) on stop side of single doors and 1” LDW on stop side of pairs of doors, and not more than 1" less than door width on pull side. Coordinate and provide proper width and height as required where conflicting hardware dictates. Height to be as specified in the Hardware Sets.

3. Metal Protection Plates: ANSI/BHMA A156.6 certified metal protection plates (kick, armor, or mop), beveled on four edges (B4E), fabricated from the following.

a. Stainless Steel: 050-inch thick, with countersunk screw holes (CSK).

4. Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's designated fastener type as specified in the Hardware Sets.

5. Metal Door Edging: Door protection edging fabricated from a minimum .050-inch thick metal sheet, formed into an angle or "U" cap shapes, surface or mortised mounted onto edge of door. Provide appropriate leg overlap to account for protection plates as required. Height to be as specified in the Hardware Sets.


a. Rockwood Manufacturing (RO). b. Trimco (TC). c. Ives (IV)


2.13 DOOR STOPS AND HOLDERS

A. General: Door stops and holders to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware Sets.

B. Door Stops and Bumpers: ANSI/BHMA A156.16, Grade 1 certified door stops and wall bumpers. Provide wall bumpers, either convex or concave types with anchorage as indicated, unless floor or other types of door stops are specified in Hardware Sets. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic. Where floor or wall bumpers are not appropriate, provide overhead type stops and holders.


a. Rockwood Manufacturing (RO). b. Trimco (TC). c. Ives (IV)

C. Overhead Door Stops and Holders: ANSI/BHMA A156.6, Grade 1 certified overhead stops and holders to be surface or concealed types as indicated in Hardware Sets. Track, slide, arm and jamb bracket to be constructed of extruded bronze and shock absorber spring of heavy tempered steel. Provide non-handed design with mounting brackets as required for proper operation and function.


a. Rixson Door Controls (RF). b. Sargent Manufacturing (SA). c. Glynn Johnson (GJ).

2.14 ARCHITECTURAL SEALS

A. General: Thresholds, weatherstripping, and gasket seals to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware Sets. Provide continuous weatherstrip gasketing on exterior doors and provide smoke, light, or sound gasketing on interior doors where indicated. At exterior applications provide non-corrosive fasteners and elsewhere where indicated.

B. Smoke Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 105 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for smoke control ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL 1784.

1. Provide smoke labeled perimeter gasketing at all smoke labeled openings.

C. Fire Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL-10C.

1. Provide intumescent seals as indicated to meet UL10C Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies, and UBC 7-2, Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.

D. Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strips are easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer.


E. Provide Heavy Duty mounting stainless steel screws for Thresholds as specified.

F. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. Pemko Manufacturing (PE). 2. Reese Enterprises, Inc. (RS). 3. Zero International (ZE).

2.15 ELECTRONIC ACCESSORIES

A. Power Supplies: Provide Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory Listed 12VDC or 24VDC (field selectable) filtered and regulated power supplies. Include battery backup option with integral battery charging capability in addition to operating the DC load in event of line voltage failure. Provide the least number of units, at the appropriate amperage level, sufficient to exceed the required total draw for the specified electrified hardware and access control equipment.


a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) – 781N. b. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) – 3500 Series. c. Securitron (SU) - BPS Series. d. Von Duprin (VO) - PS. e. Precision (PR) –ELR151 Series

2.16 FABRICATION

A. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates generally prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws according to manufacturers recognized installation standards for application intended.

2.17 FINISHES

A. Standard: Designations used in the Hardware Sets and elsewhere indicate hardware finishes complying with ANSI/BHMA A156.18, including coordination with traditional U.S. finishes indicated by certain manufacturers for their products.

B. Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition, hardness, and other qualities complying with manufacturer's standards, but in no case less than specified by referenced standards for the applicable units of hardware.

C. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine scheduled openings, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Notify architect of any discrepancies or conflicts between the door schedule, door types, drawings and scheduled hardware. Proceed only after such discrepancies or conflicts have been resolved in writing.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Comply with ANSI/DHI A115 series.

B. Wood Doors: Comply with ANSI/DHI A115-W series.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install each item of mechanical and electromechanical hardware and access control equipment to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and according to specifications.

1. Installers are to be trained and certified by the manufacturer on the proper installation and adjustment of fire, life safety, and security products including: hanging devices; locking devices; closing devices; and seals.

B. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable publications, unless specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations:

1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames."

2. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors."

3. Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with ANSI A117.1 "Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities."

4. Provide blocking in drywall partitions where wall stops or other wall mounted hardware is located.

C. Retrofitting: Install door hardware to comply with manufacturer's published templates and written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved.

D. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."


E. Storage: Provide a secure lock up for hardware delivered to the project but not yet installed. Control the handling and installation of hardware items so that the completion of the work will not be delayed by hardware losses before and after installation.


A. Field Inspection: Supplier will perform a final inspection of installed door hardware and state in report whether work complies with or deviates from requirements, including whether door hardware is properly installed, operating and adjusted.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.


A. Protect all hardware stored on construction site in a covered and dry place. Protect exposed hardware installed on doors during the construction phase. Install any and all hardware at the latest possible time frame.

B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation.

C. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper finish. and provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of owner occupancy.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION

A. Instruct Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain mechanical and electromechanical door hardware.

3.8 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE

A. The hardware sets represent the design intent and direction of the owner and architect. They are a guideline only and should not be considered a detailed hardware schedule. Discrepancies, conflicting hardware and missing items should be brought to the attention of the architect with corrections made prior to the bidding process. Omitted items not included in a hardware set should be scheduled with the appropriate additional hardware required for proper application and functionality.


:

Hardware Set 1 Doors: 100.1, 116.1, 132.1 Each to Receive: 1 EA Cont. Hinge MCK-12HD x 83" x SER-8 ALUM MK 1 EA Cont. Hinge MCK-12HD x 83" ALUM MK 1 EA Elec Exit Dev 56-60-8804 x LOST US32D SA 1 EA Exit Device 16-8810 US32D SA 1 EA Rem. Mullion L980A ALUM SA 3 EA Perm Core 10-6500 US15 SA 2 EA Door Pull BF158 x 12HD US32D RO 2 EA Conc. OH Stay 1-336 US32D RF 2 EA Door Closer 1431-O/P9 ALUM SA 1 EA Threshold 271A x MSES10SS x 72"" ALUM PE 2 EA Door Sweep 18062CNB x 36" ALUM PE 1 EA Wiring Diagram Point To Point N/A SA 1 EA Power Supply 3520 (1 Amp 24VDC) PC SA CARD READER PROVIDED BY OWNER.

PERIMETER GASKETING PROVIDED BY ALUMINUM DOOR MANUFACTURER.

Hardware Set 2

Doors: 118.3 Each to Receive: 6 EA Hinge 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" TA3386 - NRP US32D MK 2 EA Flush Bolt 555-12" US26D RO 1 EA DP Strike 570 US26D RO 1 EA Storeroom Lock 60-8204-LNJ x 7/8" LTC US26D SA 1 EA Perm Core 10-6500 US15 SA 2 EA OH Stay 9-336 US32D RF 1 EA Door Closer 1431-P3 ALUM SA (Active Leaf) 1 EA Threshold 271A x MSES10SS x 72"" ALUM PE 1 SET Gasket 303AS (Width x Height) ALUM PE 2 EA Door Sweep 18062CNB x 36" ALUM PE 1 EA Astragal 357C x 84" ALUM PE


Hardware Set 3

Doors: 118.2 Each to Receive: 3 EA Hinge 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" TA3386 - NRP US32D MK 1 EA Storeroom Lock 60-8204-LNJ US26D SA 1 EA Perm Core 10-6500 US15 SA 1 EA OH Stay 9-336 US32D RF 1 EA Door Closer 1431-P3 ALUM SA 1 EA Threshold 271A x MSES10SS x 36" ALUM PE 1 SET Gasket 303AS (Width x Height) ALUM PE 1 EA Door Sweep 18062CNB x 36" ALUM PE

Hardware Set 4

Doors: 135A.1 Each to Receive: 1 EA Cont. Hinge MCK-12HD x 83" ALUM MK 1 EA Exit Device 60-8804-ETJ US32D SA 1 EA Perm Core 10-6500 US15 SA 1 EA Electric Strike 9400 (Fail Secure) US32D HS 1 EA Conc. OH Stay 1-336 US32D RF 1 EA Threshold 271A x MSES10SS x 36" ALUM PE 1 EA Door Sweep 18062CNB x 36" ALUM PE 1 EA Power Control 2005M3 Smart Pac III N/A HS 1 EA Power Supply BPS-24-1 PC HS CARD READER PROVIDED BY OWNER.

PERIMETER GASKETING PROVIDED BY ALUMINUM DOOR MANUFACTURER.

Hardware Set 5

Doors: 105.1, 115.1, 118.1, 145.1 Each to Receive: 3 EA Hinge 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" TA3786 US26D MK 1 EA Storeroom Lock 60-8204-LNJ US26D SA 1 EA Perm Core 10-6500 US15 SA 1 EA Door Closer 1431-O/P9 ALUM SA 1 EA Wall Stop 406 US32D RO 1 SET Gasket S88D17 BROWN PE

Hardware Set 6

Doors: 100.2, 116.2, 132.2 Each to Receive: 2 EA Cont. Hinge MCK-14HD x 83" ALUM MK 2 EA Push Rail 8895 US32D SA 2 EA Door Pull BF158 x 12HD US32D RO 2 EA Conc. OH Stay 1-336 US32D RF 2 EA Door Closer 1431-O/P9 ALUM SA


1 SET Gasket S88D20 BROWN PE 2 EA Door Sweep 18062CNB x 36" ALUM PE 1 SET Astragal 303AS x 303AS - 84" ALUM PE

Hardware Set 7

Doors: 130A.1, 130A.2, 135.1 Each to Receive: 1 EA Cont. Hinge MCK-14HD x 83" ALUM MK 1 EA Exit Device 60-8804-ETJ US32D SA 1 EA Perm Core 10-6500 US15 SA 1 EA Electric Strike 9400 (Fail Secure) US32D HS 1 EA Door Closer 1431-O/P9 ALUM SA 1 EA Wall Stop 406 US32D RO 3 EA Silencer SR64 GRAY IV 1 EA Power Control 2005M3 Smart Pac III N/A HS 1 EA Wiring Diagram Point To Point N/A SA 1 EA Power Supply BPS-24-1 PC HS CARD READER PROVIDED BY OWNER.

Hardware Set 8

Doors: G101.1, 102.1, 107.1, 129.1, 131.1, 142.1 Each to Receive: 3 EA Hinge 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" TA3786 US26D MK 1 EA Office Lock 60-8205-LNJ US26D SA 1 EA Perm Core 10-6500 US15 SA 1 EA Wall Stop 406 US32D RO 3 EA Silencer SR64 GRAY IV

Hardware Set 9

Doors: G102.1, 103.1, 104.1, 133.1, 134.1 Each to Receive: 3 EA Hinge 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" TA2714 US26D MK 1 EA Privacy Set 49-8265-LNJ (Occupied/Vacant) US26D SA 1 EA Wall Stop 406 US32D RO 3 EA Silencer SR64 GRAY IV


Hardware Set 10

Doors: 120.1 Each to Receive: 3 EA Hinge 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" TA3786 US26D MK 1 EA Office Lock 60-8205-LNJ US26D SA 1 EA Perm Core 10-6500 US15 SA 1 EA Floor Stop 441 US32D RO 1 Set Gasket S88D17 BROWN IV 1 EA Auto Dr Bottom 4301CRL-36” ALUM PE

Hardware Set 11

Doors: 106.1 Each to Receive: 3 EA Hinge 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" TA2714 US26D MK 1 EA Storeroom Lock 60-8204-LNJ US26D SA 1 EA Perm Core 10-6500 US15 SA 1 EA Wall Stop 406 US32D RO 3 EA Silencer SR64 GRAY IV

Hardware Set 12

Doors: 119A.1, 122.1, 124A.1, 126A.1, 127A.1, 127B.1, 143.1, 143A.1, 143B.1 Each to Receive: 3 EA Hinge 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" TA2714 - NRP US26D MK 1 EA Storeroom Lock 60-8204-LNJ US26D SA 1 EA Perm Core 10-6500 US15 SA 1 EA OH Stay 9-336 US32D RF 3 EA Silencer SR64 GRAY IV

Hardware Set 13

Doors: 108.1, 111.1 Each to Receive: 3 EA Hinge 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" TA3786 US26D MK 1 EA Push Plate 70E (6" x 16") US32D RO 1 EA Pull Plate BF111 x 70E (6" x 16") US32D RO 1 EA Door Closer 1431-O/P9 ALUM SA 1 EA Wall Stop 406 US32D RO 3 EA Silencer SR64 GRAY IV

Hardware Set 14


Doors: 112.1, 113.1 Each to Receive: 3 EA Hinge 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" TA3786 - NRP US26D MK 1 EA Privacy Set 49-8265-LNJ US26D SA 1 EA Wall Stop 406 US32D RO 1 SET Gasket S88D17 BROWN PE 1 EA Door Sweep 18062CNB x 36" ALUM PE

Hardware Set 15

Doors: G103.1, 121.1, 126.2 Each to Receive: 3 EA Hinge 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" TA3786 US26D MK 1 EA Passage Set 8215-LNJ US26D SA 1 EA Wall Stop 406 US32D RO 1 SET Gasket S88D17 BROWN PE

Hardware Set 16

Doors: 126.1 Each to Receive: 3 EA Hinge 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" TA3786 US26D MK 1 EA Passage Set 8215-LNJ US26D SA 1 EA Floor Stop 441 US32D RO 1 SET Gasket S88D17 BROWN PE

Hardware Set 17

Doors: G104.1 Each to Receive: 6 EA Hinge 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" TA2714 - NRP US26D MK 2 EA Flush Bolt 555-12" US26D RO 1 EA DP Strike 570 US26D RO 1 EA Storeroom Lock 60-8204-LNJ x 7/8" LTC US26D SA 1 EA Perm Core 10-6500 US15 SA 1 EA Door Closer 1431-O/P9 ALUM SA (Active Leaf) 2 EA Wall Stop 406 US32D RO 1 EA Astragal 357C x 84" ALUM PE 2 EA Silencer SR64 GRAY IV

Hardware Set 18

Doors: 124.1, 128.1


Each to Receive: 6 EA Hinge 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" TA2714 - NRP US26D MK 2 EA Flush Bolt 555-12" US26D RO 1 EA DP Strike 570 US26D RO 1 EA Office Lock 60-8205-LNJ x 7/8" LTC US26D SA 1 EA Perm Core 10-6500 US15 SA 1 EA Door Closer 1431-O/P9 ALUM SA (Active Leaf) 2 EA Wall Stop 406 US32D RO 1 SET Gasket S88D20 ALUM PE 1 EA Astragal 357C x 84" ALUM PE

Hardware Set 19

Doors: G100.1, G100.9, G100.10 Each to Receive: 3 EA Hinge 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" TA3386 - NRP US32D MK 1 EA Exit Device 60-8813-ETJ US32D SA 1 EA Perm Core 10-6500 US15 SA 1 EA OH Stay 9-336 US32D RF 1 EA Door Closer 1431-P3 ALUM SA 1 EA Kickplate 8" x 34" x B4E US32D RO 1 EA Threshold 271A x MSES10SS x 36" ALUM PE 1 SET Gasket 303AS (Width x Height) ALUM PE 1 EA Door Sweep 18062CNB x 36" ALUM PE

Hardware Set 20

Doors: G100.3, G100.4, G100.5, G100.6, G100.7, G100.8 Each to Receive: ALL HARDWARE PROVIDED BY DOOR SUPPLIER.

Hardware Set 21

Doors: 119.1, 127.1, 127.2, 136.1, 137.1, 140.1, 144.1, 144.2 Each to Receive: 3 EA Hinge 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" TA3786 US26D MK 1 EA Office Lock 60-8205-LNJ US26D SA 1 EA Perm Core 10-6500 US15 SA 1 EA Wall Stop 406 US32D RO 1 Set Gasket S88D17 BROWN IV 1 EA Auto Dr Bottom 4301CRL-36” ALUM PE

Hardware Set 22

Doors: 114.1 Each to Receive: 6 EA Hinge 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" TA2714 - NRP US26D MK 2 EA Flush Bolt 555-12" US26D RO


1 EA DP Strike 570 US26D RO 1 EA Storeroom Lock 60-8204-LNJ x 7/8" LTC US26D SA 1 EA Perm Core 10-6500 US15 SA 1 EA Door Closer 1431-O/P9 ALUM SA (Active Leaf) 2 EA Wall Stop 406 US32D RO 1 EA Astragal 357C x 96" ALUM PE 2 EA Silencer SR64 GRAY IV 1 SET Gasket S88D20 ALUM PE

End of Section 087100

LAWRENCE COUNTY GLAZING PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 08 8000 - 1 © 2014 Eckles Architecture and Engineering

SECTION 08 8000 – GLAZING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified in other Sections: 1. Doors. 2. Glazed entrances and storefront systems, Impact resistant laminated glass. 3. Interior borrowed lites.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Manufacturers of Glass Products: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in referenced glazing publications.

B. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit that contains dehydrated air.

C. Deterioration of Coated Glass: Defects developed from normal use that are attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in metallic coating.

D. Deterioration of Insulating Glass: Failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass.

E. Deterioration of Laminated Glass: Defects developed from normal use that are attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include edge separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated-glass standard.


A. Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction.

GLAZING LAWRENCE COUNTY 08 8000 - 2 PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY

B. Glass Design: Glass thickness designations indicated are minimums and are for detailing only. Confirm glass thicknesses by analyzing Project loads and in-service conditions. Provide glass lites in the thickness designations indicated for various size openings, but not less than thicknesses and in strengths (heat treated) required to meet or exceed the following criteria: 1. Glass Thicknesses: Select minimum glass thicknesses to comply with ASTM E 1300,

according to the following requirements: a. Specified Design Wind Loads: As indicated or required by prevailing Building Code,

but not less than wind loads applicable to Project as required by ASCE 7 "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures": Section 6.0 "Wind Loads."

b. Probability of Breakage for Vertical Glazing: 8 lites per 1000 for lites set vertically or not more than 15 degrees off vertical and under wind action. 1) Load Duration: 3 seconds.

c. Maximum Lateral Deflection: For the following types of glass supported on all 4 edges, provide thickness required that limits center deflection at design wind pressure to 1/50 times the short side length or 1 inch, whichever is less. 1) For monolithic-glass lites heat treated to resist wind loads. 2) For insulating glass. 3) For laminated-glass lites.

d. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: Not less than 6.0 mm.

e. Thickness of Tinted and Heat-Absorbing Glass: Provide the same thickness for each tint color indicated throughout Project.

C. Thermal Movements: Provide glazing that allows for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures acting on glass framing members and glazing components. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

D. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified based on manufacturer's published test data, as determined according to procedures indicated below: 1. For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites 6 mm thick.

2. For laminated-glass lites, properties are based on products of construction indicated.

3. For insulating-glass units, properties are based on units of thickness indicated for overall unit and for each lite.

4. Center-of-Glass Values: Based on using LBL-44789 WINDOW 5.0 computer program for the following methodologies: a. U-Factors: NFRC 100 expressed as Btu/ sq. ft. x h x deg F. b. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: NFRC 200. c. Solar Optical Properties: NFRC 300.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated.

B. Qualification Data: For installers.

C. Samples: For each glass product and glazing material.

LAWRENCE COUNTY GLAZING PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 08 8000 - 3

D. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of glass and glazing products certifying that products furnished comply with requirements. 1. For solar-control low-e-coated glass, provide documentation demonstrating that

manufacturer of coated glass is certified by coating manufacturer.

E. Glazing Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings for glazed openings in preparing a schedule listing glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location.

F. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.


A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed glazing similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project; whose work has resulted in glass installations with a record of successful in-service performance; and who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program.

B. Source Limitations for Glass Sputter-Coated with Solar-Control Low-E Coatings: Where solar-control low-e coatings of a primary glass manufacturer that has established a certified fabricator program is specified, obtain sputter-coated solar-control low-e-coated glass in fabricated units from a manufacturer that is certified by coated-glass manufacturer.

C. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252.

D. Fire-Rated Window Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257. Glazing shall be CPSC CAT II.

E. Safety Glass: Category II materials complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 and ANSI Z97.1. 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, permanently mark safety glass with certification

label of Safety Glazing Certification Council or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

F. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. 1. GANA Publications: GANA'S "Glazing Manual" and "Laminated Glass Design Guide." 2. SIGMA Publications: SIGMA TM-3000, "Vertical Glazing Guidelines." 3. SIGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "Glazing Guidelines for Sealed

Insulating Glass Units."

G. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of the following inspecting and testing agency: Insulating Glass Certification Council.

H. Safety Glazing Products: Comply with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201


I. Glazing for Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Glazing for assemblies that comply with NFPA 80 and that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257. Glazing shall be CPSC CAT II.

J. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination."


A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions and as needed to prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

1.08 WARRANTY

A. General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. 1. Warranties specified in this Article or under other provisions of the Contract Documents

shall not deprive Owner of other rights or remedies available to Owner under prevailing laws.

B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Coated-Glass Products: Written warranty, made out to Owner and signed by coated-glass manufacturer agreeing to furnish replacements for those coated-glass units that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" Article, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below.

1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

C. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Laminated Glass: Manufacturer's standard form, made out to Owner and signed by laminated-glass manufacturer agreeing to replace laminated-glass units that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" Article, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

D. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Insulating Glass: Written warranty, made out to Owner and signed by insulating-glass manufacturer agreeing to furnish replacements for insulating-glass units that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" Article, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass lites in thicknesses as needed to comply with requirements indicated. 1. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: Not less than 6.0 mm.

B. Strength: 1. Where float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, Kind HS heat-treated float glass,

or Kind FT heat-treated float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article.

2. Where heat-strengthened glass is indicated, provide Kind HS heat-treated float glass or Kind FT heat-treated float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article.

3. Where fully tempered glass is indicated, provide Kind FT heat-treated float glass.

C. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated below: 1. For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites 6.0 mm thick. 2. For laminated-glass lites, properties are based on products of construction indicated. 3. For insulating-glass units, properties are based on units of thickness indicated for overall unit

and for each lite. 4. U-Factors: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on LBL's

WINDOW 5.2 computer program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F . 5. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance: Center-of-glazing values, according

to NFRC 200 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program. 6. Visible Reflectance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 300.

D. Structural Performance: Glazing shall withstand the following design loads within limits and under conditions indicated determined according to the International Building Code and ASTM E 1300. 1. Design Wind Pressures: As indicated on Structural Drawings.

2. Differential Shading: Design glass to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading

within individual glass lites.

E. Windborne-Debris-Impact Resistance: Exterior glazing shall comply with enhanced-protection testing requirements in ASTM E 1996 for Wind Zone 1 when tested according to ASTM E 1886. Test specimens shall be no smaller in width and length than glazing indicated for use on Project and shall be installed in same manner as glazing indicated for use on Project.

F. Safety Glazing: Where safety glazing is indicated, provide glazing that complies with 16 CFR 1201, Category II.

2.02 GLASS PRODUCTS

A. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below unless more stringent requirements are indicated. See these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. 1. GANA Publications: "Laminated Glazing Reference Manual" and "Glazing Manual." 2. AAMA Publications: AAMA GDSG-1, "Glass Design for Sloped Glazing," and

AAMA TIR A7, "Sloped Glazing Guidelines."


3. IGMA Publication for Sloped Glazing: IGMA TB-3001, "Guidelines for Sloped Glazing." 4. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North American Glazing

Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use."

B. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing is indicated, permanently mark glazing with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction or manufacturer. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies.

C. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of IGCC.

D. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass that complies with performance requirements and is not less than the thickness indicated.

E. Strength: Where annealed float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, heat-strengthened float glass, or fully tempered float glass per local codes and standards. Where heat-strengthened float glass is indicated, provide heat-strengthened float glass or fully tempered float glass local codes and standards. Where fully tempered float glass is indicated, provide fully tempered float glass.

F. Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I (transparent glass, flat), Quality q3 (glazing select); Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated.

G. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I (transparent flat glass); Quality-Q3; of class, kind, and condition indicated. 1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel

to bottom edge of glass as installed, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Provide Kind HS (heat-strengthened) float glass to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading of individual glass lites and to comply with glass design requirements specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article.

3. For uncoated glass, comply with requirements for Condition A.

4. For coated vision glass, comply with requirements for Condition C (other uncoated glass).

5. Provide Kind FT (fully tempered) float glass in place of annealed or Kind HS (heat-strengthened) float glass where safety glass is indicated.

6. Provide 5/16” Kind FT (fully tempered) and Laminated clear safety glass where indicated on drawings.

H. Sputter-Coated Float Glass: ASTM C 1376, float glass with metallic-oxide or -nitride coating deposited by vacuum deposition process after manufacture and heat treatment (if any), and complying with other requirements specified. 1. Provide Solarban 60 by PPG Industries, Inc. comply with the following physical properties:

a. Visible Light Transmission: 69 percent. b. U-Value Winter/Summer: 0.29. c. Shading Coefficient: 0.44. d. Outdoor Visible Light Reflectance: 12 percent.


I. Laminated Glass: ASTM C 1172, and complying with other requirements specified and with the following: 1. Interlayer: Polyvinyl butyral of .090” thickness indicated with a proven record of no

tendency to bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties after laminating glass lites and installation. a. For polyvinyl butyral interlayers, laminate lites in autoclave with heat plus pressure.

b. For cured-resin interlayers, laminate lites with laminated-glass manufacturer's standard cast-in-place and cured-transparent-resin interlayer.

2. Laminating Process: Fabricate laminated glass to produce glass free of foreign substances and air or glass pockets.

3. Provide 5/16” Kind FT (fully tempered) and Laminated clear safety glass where indicated on drawings.

4. Laminated Glass: composition per impact and load testing requirements of the International Building Code. All exterior glazing shall be impact resistant laminated glass as part of insulated units or door glazing.

J. Sound reducing Glass: Complying with requirements for laminated glass and as follows: 1. Interlayer: 0.060 Saflex clear acoustical PVB by Solutia Inc.

Glass: 1 layer 1/8”, 1 layer 1/4", Clear FT or HS as scheduled.

2.03 INSULATING-GLASS UNITS

A. General: Preassembled units consisting of dual-sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated interspace, and complying with ASTM E 774 for Class CBA units and with requirements specified in this Article and as scheduled. 1. Provide Kind HS (heat-strengthened) float glass in place of annealed glass where needed to

resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading of individual glass lites and to comply with glass design requirements specified in "Performance Requirements" Article.

2. Provide Kind FT (fully tempered) glass lites where safety glass is indicated.

3. Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Lite: Dimensions indicated in the Insulating-Glass Schedule are nominal and the overall thicknesses of units are measured perpendicularly from outer surfaces of glass lites at unit's edge.

4. Sealing System: Dual seal, with primary and secondary sealants as follows:

a. Manufacturer's standard sealants.

5. Spacer Specifications: Manufacturer's standard warm edge spacer material and construction.

B. Alternate Bid - Low-E Insulated-Glass Units: Annealed or Kind HS (heat-strengthened) typical, or Kind FT (fully tempered) where indicated or required by authority having jurisdiction. 1. Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Lite: 1-inch and 1/4-inch. 2. Interspace Content: Air 3. Outdoor Lites: Class 1 (clear) float glass 4. Interior Lites: Class 1 (clear) float glass 5. Low-E Coating: Solarban 60 on surface 2.

C. Base Bid – Impact Resistant Low-E Insulated-Glass Units: Annealed or Kind HS (heat-strengthened) typical, or Kind FT (fully tempered) where indicated or required by authority having jurisdiction. 1. Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Lite: 1 5/16-inch and 1/4-inch & 9/16-inch


2. Interspace Content: ½” Air 3. Outdoor Lites: 1/4" clear FT (fully tempered) 4. Interior Lites: 9/16” laminated (1/4” HS, .090 interlayer, ¼” HS) 5. Low-E Coating: Solarban 60 on surface 2.

D. Impact Resistant Glass Units For Exterior Doors: 1. Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Lite: 9/16-inch and 1/4-inch. 2. Lites: 9/16” laminated (1/4” HS, .090 interlayer, ¼” HS)

2.04 FIRE-RATED GLAZING PRODUCTS

A. Film-Faced Ceramic Glazing Material: Proprietary Category II safety glazing product in the form of a 3/16-inch- thick, ceramic glazing material polished on both surfaces, faced on one surface with a clear 3M Scotchshield glazing film, and as follows: 1. Fire-Protection Rating: As indicated for the assembly in which glazing material is installed,

and permanently labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Product: a. FireLite NT by Nippon Electric Glass Co., Ltd., distributed by Technical Glass

Products b. Keralite FR-F by Vetrotech Saint-Gobain International distributed by R.J. Bridges

Corp. 412-276-9300.

B. Clear Fire-Rated Glazing with Intumescent Interlayer: safety glazing product utilized in both Interior and Exterior Applications. 1. Fire Protection Rating: As indicated for the assembly in which glazing material is installed,

and permanently labeled by a testing and inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Product: a. Pilkington Pyrostop as manufactured by the Pilkington Group and distributed by

Technical Glass Products. b. Contraflam as manufactured by Vetrotech Saint-Gobain International distributed by

R.J. Bridges Corp. 412-276-9300.

3. Interior Applications: a. 60 min. fire-rating; provides protection from radiant and conductive heat transfer; 7/8-

inch thick single glazed units.

4. Exterior Applications: a. 120 min. fire-rating; provides protection from radiant and conductive heat transfer; 2-

1/8-inch thick double glazed insulated glass units with Low-E coating.

2.05 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS

A. Lock-Strip Gaskets: Neoprene extrusions in size and shape indicated, fabricated into frames with molded corner units and zipper lock strips, complying with ASTM C 542, black.

B. Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of material indicated below, complying with standards referenced with name of elastomer indicated below, and of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal: 1. Neoprene, ASTM C 864.


2. EPDM, ASTM C 864. 3. Silicone, ASTM C 1115. 4. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber. 5. Any material indicated above.

C. Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or molded, closed-cell, integral-skinned gaskets of material indicated above; complying with ASTM C 509, Type II, black; and of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal.

D. General: Provide neutral-curing silicone glazing complying with the following requirements: 1. Compatibility: Select glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other

materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation.

3. Comply with ASTM C 920 for liquid-applied chemically neutral-curing silicone sealant type S (single component) and NS (nonsag), and use related for NT (nontraffic) Exposure.

E. Glazing Sealants for Fire-Resistive Glazing Products: Identical to products used in test assemblies to obtain fire-protection rating.

F. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.

G. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5.

H. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore A durometer hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.

I. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking).

J. Miscellaneous Glazing Materials: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.

2.06 FABRICATION OF GLASS AND OTHER GLAZING PRODUCTS

A. Fabricate glass and other glazing products in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing standard, to comply with system performance requirements.

2.07 MONOLITHIC FLOAT-GLASS UNITS

A. For Glazed Interior Doors, Sidelites, Transoms, and View Windows: Uncoated clear float-glass units Class 1 (clear), Kind FT (fully tempered), 1/4-inch-thick. 1. Provide specified fire-rated glazing where indicated on the Drawings or otherwise required

by applicable code.


B. For Single Glazed Interior assemblies, where indicated: Kind FT (fully tempered) as scheduled or required of authority having jurisdiction. 1. Lites: Uncoated clear or tinted, as scheduled.

a. Thickness: 1/4-inch min, or as required for size of opening.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine framing glazing, with Installer present, for compliance with the following: 1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at

corners. 2. Presence and functioning of weep system. 3. Minimum required face or edge clearances. 4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.


3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.

3.03 GLAZING

A. General: Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. 1. Glazing channel dimensions, as indicated on Drawings, provide necessary bite on glass,

minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. Adjust as required by Project conditions during installation.

2. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance.

3. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction sealant-substrate testing.

4. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.

5. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.

6. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches.


7. Provide spacers for glass lites where the length plus width is larger than 50 inches as follows: a. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass.

Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements.

b. Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width.

8. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications.

9. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.

B. Gasket Glazing (Dry): Fabricate compression gaskets in lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation. 1. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in

place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.

2. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

3. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.

3.04 PROTECTION AND CLEANING

A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces.

B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations, including weld splatter. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove them immediately as recommended by glass manufacturer.

C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for build-up of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended by glass manufacturer.

D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged in any way, including natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period.

E. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended by glass manufacturer.


LAWRENCE COUNTY MIRRORS PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 08 8300 - 1 © 2014 Eckles Architecture and Engineering

SECTION 08 8300 - MIRRORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes the following types of silvered flat glass mirrors as wall finish in areas indicated: 1. Safety backed glass mirrors qualifying as safety glazing.

B. Related Sections: 1. Division 10 Section "Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories" for metal-framed mirrors.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1. Mirrors. Include description of materials and process used to produce each type of

silvered flat glass mirror specified that indicates sources of glass, glass coating components, edge sealer, and quality-control provisions.

B. Shop Drawings: Include mirror elevations, edge details, mirror hardware, and attachments to other work.

C. Samples: For each type of the following products: 1. Mirrors: 12 inches square, including edge treatment on two adjoining edges. 2. Mirror Clips: Full size. 3. Mirror Trim: 12 inches long.

D. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

E. Product Certificates: For each type of mirror and mirror mastic, from manufacturer.

F. Preconstruction Test Reports: From mirror manufacturer indicating that mirror mastic was tested for compatibility and adhesion with mirror backing paint and substrates on which mirrors are installed.

G. Maintenance Data: For mirrors to include in maintenance manuals.

H. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program.

B. Source Limitations for Mirrors: Obtain mirrors from single source from single manufacturer.

C. Source Limitations for Mirror Accessories: Obtain mirror glazing accessories from single source.

MIRRORS LAWRENCE COUNTY 08 8300 - 2 PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY

D. Glazing Publications: Comply with the following published recommendations: 1. GANA's "Glazing Manual" unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to

this publication for definitions of glass and glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.

2. GANA Mirror Division's "Mirrors, Handle with Extreme Care: Tips for the Professional on the Care and Handling of Mirrors."

E. Safety Glazing Products: For tempered mirrors, provide products complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 for Category II materials.

F. Preconstruction Mirror Mastic Compatibility Test: Submit mirror mastic products to mirror manufacturer for testing to determine compatibility of mastic with mirror backing paint and substrates on which mirrors are installed.


A. Protect mirrors according to mirror manufacturer's written instructions and as needed to prevent damage to mirrors from moisture, condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes.

B. Comply with mirror manufacturer's written instructions for shipping, storing, and handling mirrors as needed to prevent deterioration of silvering, damage to edges, and abrasion of glass surfaces and applied coatings. Store indoors.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install mirrors until ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at levels indicated for final occupancy.

1.06 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which mirror manufacturer agrees to replace mirrors that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of mirrors is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to mirror breakage or to maintaining and cleaning mirrors contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include discoloration, black spots, and clouding of the silver film. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

LAWRENCE COUNTY MIRRORS PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 08 8300 - 3

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 SILVERED FLAT GLASS MIRRORS

A. Glass Mirrors, General: ASTM C 1503. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. D & W Incorporated b. Donisi Mirror Company. c. Gardner Glass, Inc. d. Gilded Mirrors, Inc. e. Guardian Industries. f. Lenoir Mirror Company. g. Stroupe Mirror Co., Inc. h. Sunshine Mirror; Westshore Glass Corp. i. Virginia Mirror Company, Inc.

2. Safety Backing: Mirrors shall be provided with a safety backing adhered to the painted mirror surface. The backing shall meet Category II Mirror Safety Backing. Backing shall comply with ANSI Z97.1 and 16CFR 1201 impact resistance and safety glazing requirements.


A. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5.

B. Edge Sealer: Coating compatible with glass coating and approved by mirror manufacturer for use in protecting against silver deterioration at mirrored glass edges.

C. Mirror Mastic: An adhesive setting compound, asbestos-free, produced specifically for setting mirrors and certified by both mirror manufacturer and mastic manufacturer as compatible with glass coating and substrates on which mirrors will be installed. 1. Franklin International; Titebond Division. 2. Laurence, C. R. Co., Inc. 3. Macco Adhesives; Liquid Nails Division. 4. OSI Sealants, Inc. 5. Palmer Products Corporation. 6. Pecora Corporation. 7. Royal Adhesives & Sealants; Gunther Mirror Mastics Division. 8. Sommer & Maca Industries, Inc.


2.03 MIRROR HARDWARE

A. Top and Bottom Aluminum J-Channels: Aluminum extrusions with a return deep enough to produce a glazing channel to accommodate mirrors of thickness indicated and in lengths required to cover bottom and top edges of mirror assembly. 1. Bottom Trim: J-channels formed with front leg and back leg not less than 3/8 and 7/8

inch in height, respectively, and a thickness of not less than 0.04 inch. a. Laurence, C. R. Co., Inc.; CRL Standard "J" Channel. b. Sommer & Maca Industries, Inc.; Aluminum Shallow Nose "J" Moulding Lower

Bar. c. Sommer & Maca Industries, Inc.; Heavy Gauge Aluminum Shallow Nose "J"

Moulding Lower Bar.

2. Top Trim: J-channels formed with front leg and back leg not less than 5/8 and 1 inch in height, respectively, and a thickness of not less than 0.04 inch. a. Laurence, C. R. Co., Inc.; CRL Deep "J" Channel. b. Sommer & Maca Industries, Inc.; Aluminum Deep Nose "J" Moulding Upper Bar. c. Sommer & Maca Industries, Inc.; Heavy Gauge Aluminum Deep Nose "J"

Moulding Lower Bar.

3. Finish: Clear bright anodized.

2.04 MIRROR FRAMES

A. Welded Frames: Fabricate frames for glass-mirror units to accommodate glass edge protection material. Provide mirror backing and support system that permits rigid, tamper-resistant glass installation and prevents moisture accumulation. 1. Provide galvanized steel backing sheet, not less than 0.034 inch and full mirror size, with

non-absorptive filler material. Corrugated cardboard is not an acceptable filler material.

2.05 FABRICATION

A. Mirror Sizes: To suit Project conditions, and before tempering, cut mirrors to final sizes and shapes.

B. Cutouts: Fabricate cutouts before tempering for notches and holes in mirrors without marring visible surfaces. Locate and size cutouts so they fit closely around penetrations in mirrors.

C. Mirror Edge Treatment: Flat polished. 1. Require mirror manufacturer to perform edge treatment and sealing in factory

immediately after cutting to final sizes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, over which mirrors are to be mounted, with Installer present, for compliance with installation tolerances, substrate preparation, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

LAWRENCE COUNTY MIRRORS PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 08 8300 - 5

B. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility of mirror mastic with existing finishes or primers.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Comply with mastic manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparation of substrates, including coating substrates with mastic manufacturer's special bond coating where applicable.

B. Coordinate pre-drilling or cutting of mirror glass to accommodate notches and holes, where used.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install mirrors to comply with mirror manufacturer's written instructions and with referenced GANA publications. Mount mirrors accurately in place in a manner that avoids distorting reflected images.

B. Provide a minimum air space of 1/8 inch between back of mirrors and mounting surface for air circulation between back of mirrors and face of mounting surface.

C. Wall-Mounted Mirrors: Install mirrors with mastic and mirror hardware. Attach mirror hardware securely to mounting surfaces with mechanical fasteners installed with anchors or inserts as applicable. Install fasteners so heads do not impose point loads on backs of mirrors. 1. Top and Bottom Aluminum J-Channels: Provide setting blocks 1/8 inch thick by 4

inches long at quarter points. To prevent trapping water, provide, between setting blocks, two slotted weeps not less than 1/4 inch wide by 3/8 inch long at bottom channel.

2. Mirror Clips: Place a felt or plastic pad between mirror and each clip to prevent spalling of mirror edges. Locate clips so they are symmetrically placed and evenly spaced.

3. Install mastic as follows: a. Apply barrier coat to mirror backing where approved in writing by manufacturers

of mirrors and backing material. b. Apply mastic to comply with mastic manufacturer's written instructions for

coverage and to allow air circulation between back of mirrors and face of mounting surface.

c. After mastic is applied, align mirrors and press into place while maintaining a minimum air space of 1/8 inch between back of mirrors and mounting surface.


A. Protect mirrors from breakage and contaminating substances resulting from construction operations.

B. Do not permit edges of mirrors to be exposed to standing water.


C. Maintain environmental conditions that will prevent mirrors from being exposed to moisture from condensation or other sources for continuous periods of time.

D. Wash exposed surface of mirrors not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash mirrors as recommended in writing by mirror manufacturer.


LAWRENCE COUNTY GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 09 2116 - 1 © 2014 Eckles Architecture and Engineering

SECTION 09 2116 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Interior gypsum board. 2. Tile backing panels. 3. Non-structural steel framing members for the following applications:

a. Furring and partitions, 4. Sound attenuation insulation

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 05 Section “Structural Metal Stud Framing” for non-load and load-bearing LGMF

steel framing, exterior gypsum sheathing. 2. Division 06 Section "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry” for wood blocking and furring.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Gypsum Board Terminology: Refer to ASTM C 11 for definitions of terms for gypsum board assemblies not defined in this Section or in other referenced standards.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Samples: For the trim accessories products full-size Sample in 12-inch-long length for each trim accessory indicated.


A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authority having jurisdiction. 1. Products used in the assembly shall carry a classification label from a testing laboratory

acceptable to authority having jurisdiction..

2. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Indicated by design designations from FM's "Approval Guide, Building Products" or UL's "Fire Resistance Directory."

B. Observe requirements of prevailing building code and SSMA technical recommendations in component selection, design, detailing and installation of metal stud construction

C. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.

GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES LAWRENCE COUNTY 09 2116 - 2 PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY

D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures for installing gypsum board assemblies including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Control and expansion joint requirements 2. Fasteners proposed for anchoring nonstructural steel framing to building structure. 3. Bracing at terminations, transitions, and tall partition assemblies. 4. Top of partition anchorage, deflection clearance, fire stopping, and sound isolation. 5. Supplementary framing, stiffening and blocking. 6. Manufacturer’s published installation recommendations for standard drywall studs, including

load and span tables, and bracing, bridging, fastening and anchoring recommendations


A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier.

B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other causes. Stack panels flat to prevent sagging.

C. Protect and store cold-formed metal framing from corrosion, deformation and other damage during delivery, storage and handing per requirements of AISI’s “Code of Standard Practice”.

D. Stack panels flat on leveled supports off floor or slab to prevent sagging.


A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.

B. Do not install interior products until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.

C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,

discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 PANELS, GENERAL

A. Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: a. BPB America Inc. b. G-P Gypsum. c. National Gypsum Company.

LAWRENCE COUNTY GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 09 2116 - 3

d. USG Corporation.

2. Metal Framing and Accessories: a. CLARKWESTERN Building Systems b. Dietrich Metal Framing; a Worthington Industries Company. c. MarinoWare; a division of Ware Industries. d. The Steel Network e. Total Steel Solutions f. Natoma Technologies g. NuconSteel

2.02 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. General: Complying with ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, as applicable to type of gypsum board indicated.

B. Panel Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and correspond with support system indicated.

C. Regular Type: 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch Type X, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. 3. Locations: Vertical surfaces, as indicated in Part 3 "Panel Application" Article, unless

otherwise indicated.

D. Sag-Resistant Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 1396, manufactured to have more sag resistance than regular-type gypsum board. 1. Thickness: 1/2 inch or as indicated. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. 3. Locations: Ceiling surfaces.

E. Gypsum Liner Panels: Comply with ASTM C 442/C 442M. 1. Moisture and Mold-Resistant Type X: Manufacturer's proprietary liner panels with

moisture- and mold-resistant core and surfaces; comply with ASTM D 3273. a. Core: 1 inch thick. b. Long Edges: Double bevel.

2.03 TILE BACKING PANELS

A. Water-Resistant Backing Board: Minimum 1/2-inch-thick, provide one of the following 1. Complying with ASTM C 1278/ C 1178. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements,

provide "DensShield Tile Guard" by G-P Gypsum or “Fiberock Aquatough Interior Panels” by USG.

2. Complying with ASTM C 1177. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "DensArmor Plus Interior Guard" by G-P Gypsum.

3. For backing panels used as part of a fire-resistance rated assembly, use 5/8-inch thick ASTM Type X board as listed in the Gypsum Association Fire Reference Design Manual, Pub. GA-600.

B. Board Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and correspond with support system indicated.


2.04 TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide drywall trims and accessories by manufacturer specified in Article 2.01, except as otherwise indicated.

B. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper-faced

galvanized steel sheet.

2. Shapes: a. Cornerbead, metal.

1) Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges, metal.

b. Bullnose bead, metal. c. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound, plastic. d. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound, plastic. e. Expansion (control) joint, plastic.

C. Aluminum Trim: Extruded accessories of profiles and dimensions indicated. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: a. Fry Reglet Corp. b. Gordon, Inc. c. Pittcon Industries.

2. Aluminum: Alloy and temper with not less than the strength and durability properties of ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5.

3. Finish: Class II clear anodic.

2.05 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475.

B. Joint Tape: 1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper. 2. Abuse Resistant Gypsum Board: As recommended by panel manufacturer. 3. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10-by-10 glass mesh. 4. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.

C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 1. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas, use

setting-type taping compound.

2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound. a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories.

3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying -type, sandable topping compound.

4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying -type, sandable topping compound.

5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use drying-type, sandable all-purpose joint compound and/or high-build interior coating product designed for application by airless


sprayer and to be used instead of skim coat to produce Level 5 finish, to thickness as recommended by manufacturer.

D. Joint Compound for Exterior Applications: 1. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: As recommended by sheathing board manufacturer.

E. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by backing panel manufacturer.

2.06 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT

A. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining, latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 that effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.


A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations. 1. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power,

and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.

B. Patching Compound: One-component gypsum veneer plaster, ASTM C 587 and formulated for application directly over substrate indicated without use of separate base-coat material.

C. Gypsum Base for Veneer Plaster: ASTM C 1396 and products of same manufacturer as plaster, regular type, 1/2-inch-thick.

D. SAFB: Mineral fiber Sound Attenuation Fire Blankets with an STC 49 rating and defined as “noncombustible” by NFPA Standard 220 when tested according to ASTM E 136. Provide Thermafiber SAFB Blanket by Thermafiber LLC or equal.

E. Fire Blocking: Mineral fiber tested in accordance with ASTM E 119 for up to 3 hour rating, having a density of 2.5 – 3.0 lbs/cu.ft. Provide Thermafiber Insulation by Thermafiber LLC.

F. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate. 1. Use adhesives that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to

40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

G. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033

to 0.112 inch thick.

H. Track Fasteners: Power-driven fasteners of size and material required to withstand loading conditions imposed on partition or shaftwall assemblies without exceeding allowable design stress of track, fasteners, or structural substrates in which anchors are embedded. 1. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to

sustain, without failure, a load equal to 5 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified testing agency.

2. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a


load equal to 10 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified testing agency.

I. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide one of the following: 1. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt), nonperforated.

2. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch thick, in width to suit steel stud size.

J. Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

K. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation."

2.08 SOUND ATTENUATION INSULATION

A. Provide unfaced slag-wool-fiber/rock-wool-fiber or unfaced fiberglass batts or cellulous.

B. Unfaced, Slag-Wool-Fiber/Rock-Wool-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. Subject to specified requirements, provide products by one of the following manufacturers, or as otherwise approved by Architect. 1. Fibrex Insulations Inc. 2. Owens Corning. 3. Thermafiber.

C. Unfaced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. Subject to specified requirements, provide products by one of the following manufacturers, or as otherwise approved by Architect. 1. CertainTeed Corporation. 2. Guardian Fiberglass, Inc. 3. Johns Manville. 4. Knauf Fiber Glass. 5. Owens Corning.

2.09 NON-STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL

A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. 1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal, unless

otherwise indicated.

2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 1003, G40, hot-dip galvanized or equivalent corrosion resistance, unless otherwise indicated.


2.10 SUSPENSION SYSTEM COMPONENTS

A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch-diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475-inch-diameter wire.

B. Hangers: 1. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.162-inch diameter.

2. Rod Hangers: ASTM A 510, mild carbon steel. a. Diameter: 1/4-inch. b. Protective Coating: ASTM A 153, hot-dip galvanized.

3. Flat Hangers: steel sheet ASTM A 653, G60, hot-dip galvanized. a. Size: 1 by 3/16 inch by length required. Angle hangers may be required for exterior

soffits subject to exceptional uplifts.

4. Angle Hangers: ASTM A 653, G60, hot-dip galvanized steel sheet. a. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0312 inch. b. Size: 7/8 by 1-3/8 inches.

C. Carrying Channels: steel sheet with a base-metal thickness of 0.0538 inch and minimum 1/2-inch-wide flanges with manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant zinc coating. 1. Depth 1-1/2 inches.

D. Furring Channels (Furring Members): Commercial-steel sheet with manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant zinc coating. 1. Channels: 0.0538-inch bare-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch-wide flanges, 3/4 inch deep.

2. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645-07, 7/8 inch deep. a. Basis-of-Design product: Dietrich Metal Framing UltraSTEEL™ 20 gauge equivalent. b. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0296 inch. or members that can show

independently verified test performance per ASTM C645-07 Section 9.2.

E. Grid Suspension System for Ceilings: ASTM C 645-07, direct-hung heavy duty system composed of main beams and cross-furring members that interlock. 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Drywall Grid Systems. 2. Chicago Metallic Corporation; 660-C Drywall Furring System. 3. USG Corporation; Drywall Suspension System.

2.11 STEEL FRAMING FOR PARTITION ASSEMBLIES

A. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. 1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness:

a. For Applying One Layer of Gypsum: 0.0179-inch (25 gage) or members that can show independently verified test performance per ASTM C645-07 Section 9.2.

b. For Applying Two Layers of Gypsum: 0.0270 inch (20 gage). c. For Applying Abuse Resistant Gypsum and Tile Backer Board: 0.0312 inch (20 gage)

or members that can show independently verified test performance per ASTM C645-07 Section 9.2.

2. Depth: As indicated, or as otherwise approved by Architect.

3. Basis-of-Design product: Dietrich Metal Framing UltraSTEEL 25 or 20 gauge equivalent, as indicated.


4. Curved track where required. a. Basis-of-Design product - Dietrich Metal Framing Contour Track

B. Snap Trak: At Contractor's option provide steel runners by Total Steel. Solutions 1-877-294-7958.

C. Deep-Leg Deflection Track: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2-inch-deep flanges. 1. Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes applied to interior

partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. a. Designed to be installed with studs friction fit into top runner and with continuous

bridging located within 12 inches of the top of studs to provide lateral bracing.

2. Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, same manufacturer as steel studs or the following: a. Steel Network Inc.; VertiClip SLD or VTD Series, as appropriate for application. b. Superior Metal Trim; Superior Flex Track System (SFT). c. Dietrich Metal Framing SLP-TRK Slotted Deflection Track by Brady Innovations.

D. Deflection Track Slotted: Manufacturer’s single, deep-leg, U-shaped steel track: punched with vertical slots in both legs. 1. Basis-of-Design product: Dietrich Metal Framing SLP-TRK Slotted Deflection Track by

Brady Innovations.

E. Backup Clip at Structural Steel Framing: Shaped galvanized flange clips. 1. Natoma Technologies; The Claw

F. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated. 1. Basis-of-Design products: Dietrich Metal Framing . Danback Fire Treated Wood Backing

Plate D16F or D24F

G. Channel Bridging: 0.0538-inch bare-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch-wide flanges. 1. Depth: 1-1/2 inches. 2. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches, 0.068-inch thick, galvanized steel. 3. Basis-of-Design products:

a. Dietrich Metal Framing: Spazzer 9200 Bridging and Bracing Bar and Spazzer Bar Guard, or

b. U-Channel Assembly: Size as recommended by manufacturer for specific application, with EasyClip U-Series Clip Angle or equivalent.

H. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645. 1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0296 inch, or members that can show independently

verified test performance per ASTM C645-07 Section 9.2. 2. Depth: 7/8 inch. 3. Basis-of-design product: Dietrich Metal Framing UltraSTEEL 20 gauge equivalent.

I. Furring Channels: 0.0538-inch bare-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch-wide flanges. 1. Depth: 3/4 inch.

2. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with minimum bare-steel thickness of 0.0312 inch. a. Dietrich Metal Framing Adjustable Wall-Furring Bracket

3. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch-diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475-inch-diameter wire.


J. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch-deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound transmission. 1. Configuration: Asymmetrical or hat shaped. 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, suggested product - Dietrich Metal Framing:

Resilient Channel RCSD UltraSTEEL 20 gauge equivalent.

K. Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches, wall attachment flange of 7/8 inch, minimum bare-metal thickness of 0.0179 inch, and depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated. 1. Dietrich Metal Framing UltraSTEEL 25 gauge equivalent.

L. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.

M. Sound-Isolation Clips: Screwed to studs to support vertical furring channels, to isolate finish gypsum board from partition structure assembly. 1. Iso-Max Sound Isolation Clips by Kinetics Noise Control, Dublin, Ohio.

a. Description: Rubber element into which a standard galvanized steel furring channel, 7/8 in. x 25 gauge, is captured. The channel legs snap into the rubber element without any metal-to-metal or other contact with rigid building elements.

b. The isolation clip is attached to the wall/ceiling framing or other structural substrate through galvanized steel brackets on each side of the rubber isolation element. The brackets shall be of sufficient strength to carry the wall or ceiling weight without bending or failure.

c. Spacing and location of sound isolation clips shall be determined by the manufacturer based on wall or ceiling type. Installation drawing details shall be provided by the manufacturer to assure optimum sound control and structural integrity of the system.

2. Design and install for final assembly minimum STC of 57

2.12 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT-WALL

A. Fire-Resistance Rating: As indicated .

B. STC Rating: 51, minimum.

C. Studs: Rigid, roll-formed sections for cavity shaft walls shaped to engage 1-inch liner panels, provide 2-inch-width, minimum bare-metal thickness 0.0179 inch. 1. Provide manufacturer's standard profile for repetitive members, corner and end members,

and fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated.

D. Runner Tracks: Manufacturer's standard J-profile track with long-leg length as standard with manufacturer, but at least 2 inches long and in depth matching studs. 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: Matching steel studs.

E. Jamb Struts: Manufacturer's standard J-profile strut with long-leg length of 3 inches, in depth matching studs, and not less than 0.0329 inch thick.

F. Room-Side Finish: Gypsum board.

G. Shaft-Side Finish: As indicated by fire-resistance-rated assembly design designation.


H. Insulation: Sound attenuation blankets.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames and framing, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.


3.02 PREPARATION

A. Suspended Assemblies: Coordinate installation of suspension systems with installation of overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure have been installed to receive hangers at spacing required to support the Work and that hangers will develop their full strength. 1. Furnish concrete inserts and other devices indicated to other trades for installation in

advance of time needed for coordination and construction.

3.03 INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL

A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754. 1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to

framing installation.

B. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. 1. Comply with details indicated and with gypsum board manufacturer's written

recommendations or with United States Gypsum's "Gypsum Construction Handbook."

C. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.

D. Isolate steel framing from building structure at locations indicated to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. 1. Isolate ceiling assemblies where they abut or are penetrated by building structure. 2. Isolate partition framing and wall furring where it abuts structure, except at floor. Install

slip-type joints at head of assemblies that avoid axial loading of assembly and laterally support assembly.

E. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently.


3.04 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Install suspension system components in sizes and spacings indicated on Drawings, but not less than those required by referenced steel framing installation standards for assembly types and other assembly components indicated.

B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.

C. Grid Suspension System: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension system meets vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track.

D. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling

plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system. a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal

forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.

2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices. a. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within

performance limits established by referenced installation standards and deflection.

3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.

4. Secure rod, flat, and angle hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eyescrews, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for structure and hanger, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.

5. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck.

6. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts that extend through forms.

7. Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck.

8. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.

E. Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track.

F. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes.


3.05 INSTALLING STEEL PARTITION ASSEMBLIES

A. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.

B. Install steel studs so flanges point in the same direction and leading edge or end of each panel can be attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.

C. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling. 1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to

produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies.

D. Door Openings: 1. Comply with GA-600 and with gypsum board manufacturer's applicable written

recommendations.

2. Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.

3. Install two studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated.

4. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly.

5. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead structure.

E. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings, unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads.

F. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure.

G. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated

H. Direct Furring: 1. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or

powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c.

I. Z-Furring Members: 1. Erect insulation (specified in Division 07 Section "Building Insulation") vertically and hold

in place with Z-furring members spaced 24 inches o.c.

2. Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall with concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c.

3. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange extending beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw-attach short flange of furring channel to web of attached channel. At interior corners, space second member no more than 12 inches from corner and cut insulation to fit.


J. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch in 20-feet.

3.06 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL

A. Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards: ASTM C 840 and GA-216.

B. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels, unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side.

C. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member.

D. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place.

E. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.

F. Attach gypsum panels to steel studs so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.

G. Attach gypsum panels to framing provided at openings and cutouts.

H. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.

I. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally. 1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings,

coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area.

2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.

3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch-wide joints to install sealant.

J. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch-wide spaces at these locations, and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.

K. Space fasteners in panels that are tile substrates a maximum of 8 inches o.c.


3.07 PANEL APPLICATION

A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations, except as otherwise indicated: 1. Regular Type, Type X: Vertical surfaces as scheduled from 8’ – 0” above finish floor,

above suspended ceilings, concealed spaces, closets.

2. Firecode ‘C’: Where required for fire-resistance-rated assembly.

3. Ceiling Type: Ceiling surfaces.

4. Abuse-Resistant Type: Vertical surfaces identified as gypsum wallboard or Abuse-Resistant gypsum wallboard, from floor to 8’ – 0” above finish floor. a. Exception: Where wall finish is ceramic tile to 6’-0 or higher AFF, or where wall is

behind permanent casework, gypsum assembly may employ Regular Type X boards (with appropriate tile backer behind ceramic) in lieu of Abuse-Resistant type.

5. Impact-Resistant Type: Where specifically indicated on Drawings.

B. Single-Layer Application: 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest extent

possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated.

2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) or horizontally (perpendicular to framing), unless otherwise indicated or required, and minimize end joints. a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of

panels.

b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.

3. On Z-furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members.

4. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.

C. Multilayer Application: 1. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers vertically

(parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions.

2. On Z-furring members, apply base layer vertically (parallel to framing) and face layer either vertically (parallel to framing) or horizontally (perpendicular to framing) with vertical joints offset at least one furring member. Locate edge joints of base layer over furring members.

3. Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws.

D. Curved Partitions: 1. Install panels horizontally and unbroken, to the extent possible, across curved surface plus

12-inch-long straight sections at ends of curves and tangent to them.

2. Wet gypsum panels on surfaces that will become compressed where curve radius prevents using dry panels. Comply with gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations for curve radii, wetting methods, stacking panels after wetting, and other preparations that precede installing wetted gypsum panels.


3. On convex sides of partitions, begin installation at one end of curved surface and fasten gypsum panels to studs as they are wrapped around curve. On concave side, start fastening panels to stud at center of curve and work outward to panel ends. Fasten panels to framing with screws spaced 12 inches o.c.

4. For double-layer construction, fasten base layer to studs with screws 16 inches o.c. Center gypsum board face layer over joints in base layer, and fasten to studs with screws spaced 12 inches o.c.

5. Allow wetted gypsum panels to dry before applying joint treatment.

E. Laminating to Substrate: Where gypsum panels are indicated as directly adhered to a substrate (other than studs, joists, furring members, or base layer of gypsum board), comply with gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations and temporarily brace or fasten gypsum panels until fastening adhesive has set.

3.08 APPLYING TILE BACKING PANELS

A. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panel: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and install in kitchens, restroom and janitor closets where tile finish is indicated. Install with 1/4-inch gap where panels abut other construction or penetrations.

B. Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in same plane, shim surfaces to produce a uniform plane across panel surfaces.

C. Areas Not Subject to Wetting and Moisture: Install regular-type gypsum wallboard panels to produce a flat surface indicated to receive decorative ceramic tile patterns.

D. Provide water-resistant panels on vertical surfaces of gypsum assemblies adjacent to sinks, lavatories, water coolers and similar plumbing fixtures.

3.09 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. At exposed edges of gypsum board and edges abutting dissimilar materials install ‘Mud on J-mold’ and finish exposed surfaces with joint compound.

C. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840. Install control joints at locations indicated on Drawings, in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect, and at the following locations: 1. Form control and expansion joints in gypsum board above doors, and above and below

windows. Form joints even with both edges of door and window jambs.

2. Form control and expansion joints at L, T – or U intersections, where gypsum finish abuts dissimilar materials, or where dissimilar gypsum types abut.

3. Form control and expansion joints 20-feet on center or less to evenly space joints on any single wall; e.g. if wall is 32-lineal-feet, place control joint near center of the wall at approx.16-feet, or locate center of 20-foot panel near centerline of wall, with approval of Architect.


D. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations: 1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners. 2. L-Bead: Use where indicated. 3. U-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.

3.10 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.

B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.

C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for tape.

D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below, according to ASTM C 840, for locations indicated: 1. Level 1: Embed tape at joints; panel surfaces free of excess joint compound; tool marks and

ridges are acceptable, unless a higher level of finish is required for fire-resistance-rated assemblies and sound-rated assemblies. Provide Level 1 finish at gypsum surfaces in the following areas: a. Ceiling plenum areas b. Temporary partitions c. Concealed areas d. Where indicated.

2. Level 2: Embed tape and immediately apply separate first coat of joint compound to tape, fasteners, and trim flanges; panel surfaces free of excess joint compound; tool marks and ridges are acceptable. Provide Level 2 finish at gypsum surfaces as follows: a. Where panels are substrate for tile b. Where indicated.

3. Level 4: Embed tape and apply separate first, fill, and finish coats of joint compound to tape, fasteners, and trim flanges; panel surfaces and joint compound surfaces smooth and free of tool marks and ridges; primer coat applied to entire surface. Provide Level 4 finish as follows: a. At surfaces that will be exposed to view inside closets, storage spaces, and janitor

washrooms, b. Surfaces scheduled for paint finish, except as otherwise noted. c. Surfaces that will be finished with wallcoverings

4. Level 5: Level 4 finish with additional skim coat of joint compound over entire surface of gypsum board, or spray apply Sheetrock Primer-Surfacer according to manufacturer’s written instructions; surfaces smooth and free of tool marks and ridges. Provide Level 5 finish as follows: a. Gloss, semigloss or enamel painted surface b. Long continuous planar painted surface subject to bright ambient lighting (avg 25 fc

or brighter) c. Surface not otherwise indicated to receive Level 1, 2 or 4 finish.

E. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other Division 09 Sections.


F. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panels: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.11 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.

B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,

discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.


LAWRENCE COUNTY TILING PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 09 3000 - 1 © 2014 Eckles Architecture and Engineering

SECTION 09 3000 - TILING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Ceramic floor and wall tile

a. Porcelain wall tile. b. Porcelain floor tile. c. Slate & Glass tile. d. Base tile, shapes and accessories.

2. Stone saddle thresholds

3. Metal trim and edging installed as part of tile installations

4. Installation accessories and materials a. Crack-suppression membrane for thin-set tile installations. b. Waterproofing membranes for thin-set and mortar-bed set tile installations. c. Underlayment and patching materials d. Mortars and Grout

1) Portland Cement and Urethane Grout

5. Protection and maintenance

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for monolithic slab finishes specified for tile

substrates and for cementitious underlayment and repair. 2. Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealing of expansion, contraction, control, and

isolation joints in tile surfaces. 3. Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for tile backing panels.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Module Size: Actual tile size (minor facial dimension as measured per ASTM C 499 plus joint width indicated.

B. Facial Dimension: 1. Actual tile size (minor facial dimension as measured per ASTM C 499). 2. Nominal tile size as defined in ANSI A137.1.


A. Static Coefficient of Friction: For tile installed on walkway surfaces, provide products with the following values as determined by testing identical products per ASTM C 1028: 1. Level Surfaces: Minimum 0.6. 2. Step Treads: Minimum 0.6. 3. Ramp Surfaces: Minimum 0.8.

TILING LAWRENCE COUNTY 09 3000 - 2 PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Show widths, details, and locations of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile substrates and finished tile surfaces.

C. Samples for Verification: 1. Full-size units of each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required.

2. Assemble samples with grouted joints for each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required, at least 12 inches square and mounted on rigid panel. Use grout of type and in color or colors approved for completed work.

3. Prepare samples of same thickness and from same material to be used for the Work in size indicated below: a. Crack-suppression membrane in 6-inch square sample. b. Waterproof membrane in 6-inch square sample. c. Metal edge strips in 6-inch length.

D. Installer Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that installers comply with requirements.

E. Manufacturer’s written installation recommendations: For specified products, materials and applications; Four copies, to be maintained in a binder or bound volume for the duration of the Project in each of the following locations: 1. Architect’s main office 2. Architect’s field office 3. Prime Contractor’s field office 4. Construction Manager’s field office.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer (applicator) who is acceptable to flooring manufacturer to install manufacturer's products.

B. Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain all tile of same type and color or finish from one source or producer. 1. Obtain tile from same production run and of consistent quality in appearance and physical

properties for each contiguous area.

C. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from a single manufacturer and each aggregate from one source or producer.

D. TCNA Standards: Comply with specifications under the current Handbook for Tile Installation

E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section “Project Management and Coordination”. 1. Review requirements in ANSI A108.01 for substrates and for preparation by other affected

Contractors and Installers. 2. Review and confirm requirements for slab waterproofing and floor-drain tie-in with

plumbing installer and with local authority having jurisdiction.

LAWRENCE COUNTY TILING PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 09 3000 - 3

3. Review and confirm products and details proposed to be used at joints in tile substrate, door thresholds, ramps, nosings, changes in direction, interface (transition) between dissimilar tile finishes, edges of tile finishes, and interface (transition) between tile finishes and other flush finishes.


A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Comply with requirement in ANSI A137.1 for labeling sealed tile packages.

B. Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location.

C. Handle tile that has temporary protective coating on exposed surfaces to prevent coated surfaces from contacting backs or edges of other units. If coating does contact bonding surfaces of tile, remove coating from bonding surfaces before setting tile.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Provide permanent lighting or, if permanent lighting is not in place, simulate permanent lighting conditions during tile installation.

C. Close spaces to traffic during tile application and for not less than 24 hours after application unless manufacturer recommends a longer period.

D. Control and collect dust produced by any grinding operations. Protect adjacent construction from detrimental effects of any grinding operations. 1. Provide dustproof partitions and temporary enclosures to limit dust migration and to isolate

areas from noise.


A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Ceramic Tile, Quarry Tile and Trim Units: Remaining portion of cartons of tile or trim

units, plus at least two percent of installed product in original unopened carton with appropriate labels.

2. Grout. One new two-gallon bucket of each type and color.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: 1. Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1, "Specifications for Ceramic Tile," for types,

compositions, and other characteristics indicated.

2. Provide tile complying with Standard grade requirements, unless otherwise indicated.

3. For facial dimensions of tile, comply with requirements relating to tile sizes specified in Part 1 "Definitions" Article.

4. Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI standards referenced in "Setting and Grouting Materials" Article.

B. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: Where manufacturer's selected products are indicated for tile, grout, and other products requiring selection of colors, surface textures, patterns, and other appearance characteristics, provide specific products or materials complying with the following requirements: 1. As indicated by manufacturer's designations in finish and color schedules on the Drawings.

C. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges selected during Sample submittals, blend tile in factory and package so tile units taken from one package show same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples.

D. Mounting: For factory-mounted tile, provide back- or edge-mounted tile assemblies as standard with manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Factory-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: Where indicated under tile type, protect exposed surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout by precoating with continuous film of petroleum paraffin wax, applied hot. Do not coat unexposed tile surfaces.

F. Bullnose Edge: At any condition where wall tile ends and the edges are exposed, provide bullnose edges on top and/or top and sides.

2.02 CERAMIC TILE PRODUCTS

A. Basis of Design Manufacturers: As scheduled on Drawings. 1. Colors and Styles: Manufacturer's designations per Color Schedule on Drawings.

B. Porcelain Floor Tile: Factory-mounted flat tile as follows: 1. Composition: Impervious porcelain. 2. Module Size: as scheduled. 3. Tile Sizes: as scheduled. 4. Shapes: Straight profile at base. 5. Nominal Thickness: 5/16 inch. 6. Face: Plain with cushion edges. 7. Surface: Slip-resistant, with abrasive admixture.


C. Slate & Glass Tile: Square-edged flat tile mounted on 12.5x12.5 sheet as follows: 1. Wearing Surface: Textured, with abrasive admixture 2. Facial Dimensions: 6 by 6 inches, as scheduled. 3. Shapes: Random Brick Pattern. 4. Thickness: 5/16 inch. 5. Face: Slate textured and Smooth Polished & Unpolished Glass as scheduled.

D. Porcelain Wall Tile: Flat decorative tile as follows: 1. Composition: Impervious porcelain. 2. Surface: Smooth, without abrasive admixture. 3. Module Sizes: as scheduled. 4. Tile Sizes: as scheduled. 5. Thickness: 5/16 inch. 6. Face: Plain with cushion edges. 7. Finish: Matte as scheduled.

E. Trim Units: Matching characteristics of adjoining flat tile and coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where applicable. Provide shapes as follows, selected from manufacturer's standard shapes: 1. Colors: Manufacturer's designations per Color Schedule on Drawings, except as otherwise

indicated.

2. For base cap, wainscot cap, edge trim and outside corners, except as otherwise indicated, provide aluminum Metal Edge Trim.

3. Internal Corners: Field-butted square corners with field-applied flexible sealant per Division 07 Section “Joint Sealants.” a. Exception: cap angle pieces designed to fit with stretcher shapes.

4. Porcelain Floor Tile Trim Units, Thin-Set Mortar Installations: a. Base: Straight, module size 6 by 36 inch.

5. Glass & Slate Decorative Wall Tile, Thin-Set Mortar Installations: a. Trim: Straight, as applicable, with surface top and side edges same as wall tiles, facial

dimensions as scheduled.

2.03 METAL CORNER AND EDGE TRIM

A. Aluminum corner edging, side and wainscot cap edge return, for integral installation with new ceramic wall tile finishes, except where otherwise indicated. 1. Product: RONDEC-AE by Schluter; aluminum, brushed nickel anodized finish (ANIGB).

B. For surface-mounted corner edging required in non-tile or retrofit applications, refer to Division 10 Section “Impact-Resistant Wall Protection.”

2.04 WATERPROOFING AND CRACK-SUPPRESSION MEMBRANE FOR THIN-SET TILE INSTALLATIONS

A. General: Provide waterproofing membrane for toilet rooms, and as otherwise indicated. Provide crack isolation membrane as directed by tile manufacturer, and ANSI A 108. 1. Verify acceptance with local plumbing authority having jurisdiction, of products and

application methods for waterproofing membranes used at elevated slabs where clamping into drains. Coordinate with floor drain installer.


B. Fluid-Applied Membrane: ANSI A118.10 and A118.12 ready-to-use, elastomeric polymer waterproofing and crack prevention membrane. Provide membrane for all toilet rooms on elevated slabs. For drain tie-ins, corners, changes in plan and individual cracks or saw cuts use manufacturer’s recommend mesh reinforcing fabric or tape. 1. LATICRETE International Inc. 9235 Waterproofing Membrane 2. ARDEX; 8+9 Waterproofing Compound 3. Custom Building Products; Redgard Waterproofing and Crack Prevention Membrane. 4. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc.; Southcrete 1100 Crack Suppression and Waterproofing. 5. TEC; a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company; HydraFlex - Waterproofing Crack Isolation

Membrane.

C. Crack Isolation Membrane: Chlorinated-polyethylene (CPE), nonplasticized, faced on both sides with high-strength, nonwoven polyester fabric, for adhering to latex-portland cement mortar; 60 inches wide by 0.030-inch nominal thickness. 1. Product: Noble Company (The); Nobleseal CIS.

2.05 SETTING AND GROUTING MATERIALS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Custom Building Products. 2. LATICRETE International Inc. 3. MAPEI Corporation. 4. Summitville Tiles, Inc. 5. Bostik Findley, Inc. 6. ARDEX; 7. StarQuartz.

B. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.4, consisting of the following: 1. Prepackaged dry-mortar mix containing dry, redispersible, ethylene vinyl acetate additive to

which only water must be added at Project site. a. For wall applications, provide nonsagging mortar that complies with Paragraph F-

4.6.1 in addition to the other requirements in ANSI A118.4. b. Product: CustomFloat Bedding Mortar by Custom Building Products.

2. Provide white grout for use as glass tile setting bed, as recommended by manufacturer.

C. Pre-blended non-slump mortar for use with simulated dry-stacked stone, for application over cement-board tile backer, can be applied up to 2" thick without shrinking, checking or cracking 1. Premium PCL Stone Veneer Mortar by Custom Building Products Thin Veneer Installation

Sytem

D. Fast-setting preblended underlayment specifically designed as a flexible bonding substrate for thinset ceramic tile, capable of bridging cracks and trowelable to a feather edge. 1. MegaFlex Crack Prevention Mortar by Custom Building Products.

E. Urethane Grout Materials: Chemical-Resistant, Water-Cleanable, Tile-Setting and Grouting, as specified below. All urethane grout applications shall be considered as Stain Resistant and Wet applications when determining the manufacturer’s installation requirements. 1. Pre-mixed, single –part, pigment-free grout.

a. Basis of Design Product: Quartz-Lock Grout by StarQuartz Industries, Inc., 866-220-4500.


2. Physical and chemical properties: Per manufacturer’s standard product component specifications.

3. Accelerators: StarCure Accelerator for wet and stain resistant applications, and where required for accelerated curing.

4. Shelf Life: Do not use epoxy components after 3 years from manufacturing date

5. Disposal: Dispose of waste in accordance with all manufacturer’s recommendations, MSDS requirements, and applicable laws.

6. Cure Time: Do not apply grout when temperature is below 40 degrees F. Allow grout to cure as follows or as otherwise required by the manufacturer at the time of the application of the product: a. Working time: 4hrs. b. Light and heavy foot traffic: 48 hrs. c. For stain-resistant applications, 72 hrs. d. For wet areas: 168 hours.

7. Colors: per Color Schedule on Drawings.


A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations indicated.

B. Flooring Metal Edge Strips: Angle or L-shape, height to match tile and setting-bed thickness, metallic or combination of metal and PVC or neoprene base, designed specifically for flooring applications, white zinc alloy, nickel silver, or stainless steel; ASTM A 666, 300 Series exposed-edge material.

C. Marble Thresholds (Floor Saddle) – ASTM C503: White Carrera, w/ minimum abrasion resistance of 10 per ASTM C 1353 or ASTM C 241 and with honed finish.: Fabricate to sizes and profiles indicated, or as otherwise required to provide accessible transitions between adjacent floor finishes. 1. Bevel edges at 1:2 slope, with lower edge of bevel aligned with or up to 1/16 inch above

adjacent floor surface. Finish bevel to match top surface of threshold. Limit height of threshold to 1/2 inch or less above adjacent floor surface.

2. Description: Uniform, fine-to-medium-grained whitestone with gray veining.

D. Temporary Protective Coating: Product formulated to protect exposed surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout; compatible with tile, mortar, and grout products; and easily removable after grouting is completed without damaging grout or tile. 1. Grout release in form of manufacturer's standard proprietary liquid coating that is specially

formulated and recommended for use as temporary protective coating for tile.

E. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout manufacturers.

F. Grout Sealer: Manufacturer's recommended product for sealing grout joints and unglazed tile from oil-based or water-based stains, and that does not change color or appearance of grout or tile surface.


2.07 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT

A. Mix mortars and grouts, where applicable, to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout manufacturers' written instructions.

B. Add materials, water, and additives, where applicable, in accurate proportions.

C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for installations indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 ACCEPTANCE

A. Prior to ordering materials or starting Work, verify acceptance with local authority having jurisdiction, of products and application methods for tile-setting waterproofing compounds used at elevated slabs where clamping membrane into drains.

3.02 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of installed tile. 1. Verify that substrates are firm, within flatness tolerances required by referenced ANSI A108

Series of tile installation standards for installations indicated.

2. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed before installing tile.

3. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with Architect.

4. Concrete surface to be steel troweled, with a fine broom finish and no curing compounds

5. Before setting, ensure surfaces are free from coatings, curing compounds, oil, grease, wax, or dust.


3.03 PREPARATION

A. Remove coatings, including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, that are incompatible with tile-setting materials.

B. Provide concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thin-set mortar that comply with flatness tolerances specified in referenced ANSI A108 Series of tile installation standards. 1. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions with trowelable leveling and patching compound

according to tile-setting material manufacturer's written instructions. Use product specifically recommended by tile-setting material manufacturer.

2. Apply self-leveling underlayment compatible with setting mortar, where necessary to remedy unsatisfactory conditions.


3. Remove protrusions, bumps, and ridges by scarifying or grinding.

C. Locate and determine expansion joints based on building control joints, cold joints, sawed joints, and recommend expansion joints based on TCNA specifications current issue 1. Crack Isolation Membrane to be used on non-directional cracks, shrinkage cracks, and all

areas where crack transfer is suspected.

D. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges selected during Sample submittals, verify that tile has been factory blended and packaged so tile units taken from one package show same range of colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing.

E. Field-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: Where needed to prevent grout from staining or adhering to exposed tile surfaces, precoat them with continuous film of temporary protective coating, taking care not to coat unexposed tile surfaces.

3.04 PREPARATION, ELEVATED TOILET ROOMS

A. Install trowelable substrate over flat, level depressed concrete slab deck surface, according to manufacturer's instructions, to bond with deck and sloping to drains.

B. Apply liquid-applied waterproofing and crack suppression membrane to entire surface according to manufacturer's recommendations, at minimum 85 mil wet film thickness, 47 mil dry film thickness. 1. Use only products and methods acceptable to local plumbing enforcement authority where

clamping to floor drains. 2. Use acceptable mesh reinforcing fabric at drain tie-ins, corners, changes in plan, individual

crack and sawcuts. 3. Use acceptable joint methods and materials at movement joints.

C. Install tile using setting material manufacturer’s recommended thin-set latex-Portland cement bedding mortar and compatible grout.


A. TCNA Installation Guidelines: TCNA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation." Comply with TCNA installation methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules.

B. ANSI Tile Installation Standards: Comply with parts of ANSI A108 Series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that apply to types of setting and grouting materials and to methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules. 1. Use white color grout as bedding for glass mosaic wall tile. Add second layer of grout

where necessary to bring surface of glass tile flush with adjacent ceramic wall tile.

C. Floor Tolerance: Measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and/or existing surface and 10-foot-long straightedge resting on 2 high spots placed anywhere on the surface does not exceed 1/8 inch

D. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering without interruptions, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.


E. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.

F. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern, unless otherwise indicated. Align joints when adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, and trim are same size. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize tile cutting. Provide uniform joint widths, unless otherwise indicated. 1. For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets same width as joints within tile

sheets so joints between sheets are not apparent in finished work.

G. Lay out tile wainscots to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated.

H. Expansion Joints: Locate expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control, contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles. 1. Locate joints in tile surfaces directly above joints in concrete substrates.

2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."

I. Grout tile to comply with requirements of the following tile installation standards: 1. For ceramic tile grouts (sand-portland cement; commercial portland cement; latex-portland

cement grouts, and urethane grouts), comply with ANSI A108.10.

2. Install Urethane Grout in strict compliance with manufacturer’s published instructions, as submitted.

3.06 WATERPROOFING AND CRACK-SUPPRESSION MEMBRANE INSTALLATION

A. Install waterproofing to comply with ANSI A108.13 and waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions to produce waterproof membrane of uniform thickness bonded securely to substrate.

B. Install crack-suppression membrane to comply with manufacturer's written instructions to produce membrane of uniform thickness bonded securely to substrate.

C. Do not install tile over waterproofing until waterproofing has cured and been tested to determine that it is watertight.

3.07 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION

A. General: Install tile to comply with manufacturer’s requirements, specified TCNA installation methods and ANSI A108 Series of tile installation standards. 1. For installations in wet areas follow procedures in ANSI A108 Series tile installation

standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage.

B. Metal Edge Strips: Install at locations indicated or where exposed edge of tile flooring meets carpet, wood, or other flooring that finishes flush with top of tile.

C. Thresholds: Install marble thresholds at doorway transitions between tile flooring products and adjacent dissimilar flooring materials. Set in same type of setting bed as abutting field tile.


1. Provide marble thresholds at shower stall transitions to dissimilar flooring materials and/or flooring slopes.

3.08 WALL TILE INSTALLATION

A. Install types of tile designated for wall installations to comply with requirements in the Wall Tile Installation Schedule, including those referencing TCNA installation methods and ANSI setting-bed standards.

B. Install types of tile designated for wall installations to comply with manufacturer’s requirements, specified TCNA installation methods and ANSI setting-bed standards.

3.09 CLEANING AND PROTECTING

A. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter. 1. Remove epoxy and Portland-cement grout residue from tile as soon as possible, according to

manufacturer’s recommendations.

2. Clean grout smears and haze from tile according to tile and grout manufacturer's written instructions, but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Use only cleaners recommended by tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners are safe to use by testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean water after cleaning.

3. Remove temporary protective coating by method recommended by coating manufacturer that is acceptable to tile and grout manufacturer. Trap and remove coating to prevent it from clogging drains.

B. When recommended by tile manufacturer, apply coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear.

C. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven days after grouting is completed.

D. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from tile surfaces.


LAWRENCE COUNTY ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 09 5113 - 1 © 2014 Eckles Architecture and Engineering

SECTION 09 5113 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes lay-in panels and suspension systems for ceilings.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. AC: Articulation Class.

B. CAC: Ceiling Attenuation Class.

C. LR: Light Reflectance coefficient.

D. NRC: Noise Reduction Coefficient.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Coordinate Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans drawn to scale and coordinating penetrations and ceiling-mounted items. Show the following: 1. Ceiling suspension members.

2. Method of attaching hangers to building structure. a. Furnish layouts for cast-in-place anchors, clips, and other ceiling attachment devices

whose installation is specified in other Sections.

3. Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers, access panels, projector brackets and special moldings.

4. Minimum Drawing Scale: 1/4 inch = 1 foot .

C. Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below. 1. Acoustical Panel: Set of 4-inch-square Samples of each type, color, pattern, and texture.

2. Exposed Suspension System Members, Moldings, and Trim: Set of 6-inch-long Samples of each type, finish, and color.

D. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for each acoustical panel ceiling.

E. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals.

ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS LAWRENCE COUNTY 09 5113 - 2 PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY


A. Acoustical Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing laboratory, or an NVLAP-accredited laboratory, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. NVLAP-accredited laboratories must document accreditation, based on a "Certificate of Accreditation" and a "Scope of Accreditation" listing the test methods specified.

B. Source Limitations: 1. Acoustical Ceiling Panel: Obtain each type through one source from a single manufacturer. 2. Suspension System: Obtain each type through one source from a single manufacturer.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling panel and supporting suspension system through one source from a single manufacturer.

D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide acoustical panel ceilings that comply with the following requirements: 1. Fire-Resistance Characteristics: Where indicated, provide acoustical panel ceilings identical

to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. a. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance

Directory" or from the listings of another testing and inspecting agency.

b. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

2. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Provide acoustical panels with the following surface-burning characteristics complying with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84: a. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less. b. Flame Spread: 25 or less.


A. Deliver acoustical panels, suspension system components, and accessories to Project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.

B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content.

C. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.

LAWRENCE COUNTY ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 09 5113 - 3

1.07 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.


A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Acoustical Ceiling Panels: Full-size panels equal to 2.0 percent of quantity of each Ceiling

Type installed. 2. Hold-Down Tile Retention Clips: Equal to 2.0 percent of amount installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. In Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified or product meeting the requirements by one of the following: 1. Basis of Design: Armstrong World Industries, Inc 2. USG Interiors, Inc 3. CertainTeed

2.02 ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL

A. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical ratings, and light reflectances, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Mounting Method for Measuring NRC: Type E-400; plenum mounting in which face of test

specimen is 15-3/4 inches away from test surface per ASTM E 795.

B. Acoustical Panel Colors and Patterns: Match appearance characteristics indicated for each product type. 1. Where appearance characteristics of acoustical panels are indicated by referencing pattern

designations in ASTM E 1264 and not manufacturers' proprietary product designations, provide products selected by Architect from each manufacturer's full range that comply with requirements indicated for type, pattern, color, light reflectance, acoustical performance, edge detail, and size.

C. Provide panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for type, form, and pattern indicated.

D. Performance Qualities: 1. Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC): ASTM C 423; Classified with UL label on product

carton. 2. Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC): ASTM C 1414; Classified with UL label on product carton 3. Emissions Testing: Section 01350 Protocol, < 13.5 ppb of formaldehyde when used under

typical conditions required by ASHRAE Standard 62.1-2004, "Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality"

4. Flame Spread: ASTM E 1264; Class A (UL) 5. Light Reflectance (LR): ASTM E 1477.


6. Products not bearing UL classification for acoustical performance are not acceptable.

E. Coating-Based Antimicrobial Treatment: Provide acoustical panels with face and back surfaces coated with antimicrobial treatment consisting of manufacturer's standard formulation with fungicide added to inhibit growth of mold and mildew and showing no mold or mildew growth when tested according to ASTM D 3273.

2.03 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL

A. Manufacturers: 1. Chicago Metallic Corporation. 2. Fry Reglet Corporation. 3. Ceiling Tile Manufacturer

B. Metal Suspension System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct-hung metal suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable requirements in ASTM C 635.

C. Finishes and Colors, General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Provide manufacturer's standard factory-applied finish for type of system indicated.

D. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. 1. Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type and material indicated below, with holes or loops for

attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to five times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 or ASTM E 1512 as applicable, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. a. Type: Post-installed expansion anchors.

b. Corrosion Protection: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5 for Class SC 1 service condition.

2. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency.

E. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements: 1. Zinc-Coated Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper.

2. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design load (ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106-inch-diameter wire.

F. Hanger Rods or Flat Hangers: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust-inhibitive paint.

G. Angle Hangers: Angles with legs not less than 7/8 inch wide; formed with 0.04-inch-thick, galvanized steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653, G90 coating designation; with bolted connections and 5/16-inch-diameter bolts.


H. Hold-Down Tile Retention Clips: Where indicated, provide manufacturer's standard hold-down clips spaced 24 inches o.c. on all cross tees.

I. Aircraft Cable Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Basis-of-Design Manufacturer’s standard.

2.04 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING IN KITCHEN

A. Wide-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet, prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, not less than G30 coating designation, with prefinished 15/16-inch-wide metal caps on flanges. 1. Structural Classification: Intermediate-duty system. 2. End Condition of Cross Runners: Override (stepped) or butt-edge type. 3. Face Design: Flat, flush. 4. Cap Material: Aluminum cap material for Kitchen Area Suspension System. 5. Cap Finish: Painted white.

2.05 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT

A. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.

B. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic-rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior concealed joints to reduce airborne sound transmission.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel ceilings.


3.02 PREPARATION

A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.



A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636 requirements indicated, per manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA "Ceiling Systems Handbook."

B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling

plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system.

2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.

3. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.

4. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards and publications.

5. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten hangers to cast-in-place hanger inserts, postinstalled mechanical or adhesive anchors, or power-actuated fasteners that extend through forms into concrete.

6. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs.

7. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members.

8. Space hangers not more than 48 inches o.c. along each member supported directly from hangers, unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends of each member.

C. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of four tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for hangers, without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs. Fasten bracing wires into concrete with cast-in-place or postinstalled anchors.

D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels. 1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of

moldings before they are installed.

2. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches o.c. and not more than 3 inches from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet. Miter corners accurately and connect securely.

3. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim.

E. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.

F. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit. 1. For square-edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by flanges of

suspension system runners and moldings.


2. For reveal-edged panels on suspension system runners, install panels with bottom of reveal in firm contact with top surface of runner flanges.

3. Paint cut edges of panel remaining exposed after installation; match color of exposed panel surfaces using coating recommended in writing for this purpose by acoustical panel manufacturer.

4. Install hold-down clips in areas indicated, in areas required by authorities having jurisdiction, and for fire-resistance ratings; space as recommended by panel manufacturer's written instructions, unless otherwise indicated.

ATTACHMENT: Appendix - Schedule of Lay-in Ceiling Types (4 pages)

LAY-IN CEILING TYPES

LAWRENCE COUNTY LAY-IN CEILING TYPES PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 09 5113 Appendix - Page 1 of 4

TYPE -1 CLEAN ROOM VL UNPERFORATED

A. Basis of Design Product: 868 Clean Room VL Fire Guard by Armstrong. 1. Composition: Wet-formed mineral fiber 2. Color: White 3. Size: 24in x 24in x 5/8in 4. Edge Profile: Square Lay-In 5. Dimensional Stability: HumiGuard Plus 10-year limited warranty against sag 6. Antimicrobial Protection: BioBlock Plus. 7. Fire Resistive

B. Appearance Characteristics: 1. Type IV Mineral base with membrane-faced overlay; Form 2 Water Felted. 2. Pattern E lightly textured

C. Performance Qualities: 1. LR: Not less than 0.80 2. CAC: Not less than 40

D. Grid: Armstrong Prelude Plus XL Fire Guard 15/16” with aluminum cap, or acceptable product by accepted tile manufacturer. 1. ZXLA Donn Brand Suspension System – USG Interiors. 2. 15/16” Classic Environmental Stab System – CertainTeed.

E. Acceptable products, subject to compliance with requirements and approval by Architect: 1. 1102-CRF-1 Vinyl Shield A by CertainTeed. 2. 3260 Sheetrock Lay-In ClimaPlus by USG Interiors, Inc.

TYPES -2 OPTIMA OPEN PLAN W/ CAC BACKING A. Basis of Design Product: 3352 Optima Open Plan by Armstrong.

1. Composition: Fiberglass with DuraBrite acoustically transparent membrane, factory acrylic latex paint coating, CAC backing

2. Color: White 3. Size: 24in x 24in x 1 in 4. Edge Profile: Square Lay-in 5. Dimensional Stability: HumiGuard Plus 10-year limited warranty against sag.. 6. Antimicrobial Protection: FG substrate is inherently resistant to microbial growth.

B. Appearance Characteristics: 1. Type XII Glass-Fiber base with membrane-faced overlay; Form 2 Cloth 2. Pattern: E lightly textured

C. Performance Qualities: 1. LR: Not less than 0.88 2. NRC: Not less than 0.90 3. AC: Not less than 190 4. CAC: Not less than 25

D. Grid: Armstrong Prelude XL 15/16” or acceptable product by accepted tile manufacturer. 1. Provide beam-end retaining clips and tile retention clips. 2. DX/DXL Donn Brand Suspension System – USG Interiors. 3. 15/16” Classic Stab System – CertainTeed.

E. Acceptable products, subject to compliance with requirements and approval by Architect: 1. 88221 Halcyon ClimaPlus by USG Interiors, Inc. 2. 1342-IOF-1 Symphony F by CertainTeed


LAY-IN CEILING TYPES LAWRENCE COUNTY 09 5113 Appendix - Page 2 of 4 PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY

TYPE -3 SCHOOL ZONE – FINE FISSURED HIGH DURABILITY

A. Basis of Design Product: 465 School Zone Fine Fissured by Armstrong. 1. Composition: Wet-formed mineral fiber 2. Color: White 3. Size: 24in x 24in x 5/8in 4. Edge Profile: Square Lay-In 5. Dimensional Stability: HumiGuard Plus 10-year limited warranty against sag.. 6. Antimicrobial Protection: BioBlock Plus.

B. Appearance Characteristics: 1. Type III, mineral base with painted finish; Form 2 Water Felted 2. Pattern: CE perforated, small holes and lightly textured

C. Performance Qualities: 1. LR: Not less than 0.85 2. NRC: Not less than 0.55 3. CAC: Not less than 35

D. Grid: Armstrong Prelude XL 15/16” or acceptable product by accepted tile manufacturer. 1. DX/DXL Donn Brand Suspension System – USG Interiors. 2. 15/16” Classic Stab System – CertainTeed.

E. Acceptable products, subject to compliance with requirements and approval by Architect: 1. SB-157 School Board by CertainTeed. 2. 2207 Radar ClimaPlus High Durability by USG Interiors, Inc.

TYPE -4 /TYPE -7 SCHOOL ZONE – FINE FISSURED HIGH ACOUSTICS A. Basis of Design Product: 1713 School Zone Fine Fissured High NRC/ High CAC by Armstrong.

1. Composition: Wet formed mineral fiber 2. Color: White 3. Size: 24in x 24in x 3/4 4. Edge Profile: Square Lay-In 5. Dimensional Stability: HumiGuard Plus 10-year limited warranty against sag. 6. Antimicrobial Protection: BioBlock Plus.


C. Performance Qualities: 1. LR: Not less than 0.80 2. NRC: Not less than 0.70. 3. CAC: Not less than 35

D. Grid: Armstrong Prelude XL 15/16” or acceptable product by accepted tile manufacturer. 1. DX/DXL Donn Brand Suspension System – USG Interiors. 2. 15/16” Classic Aluminum Capped Stab System – CertainTeed.

E. Acceptable products, subject to compliance with requirements and approval by Architect: 1. HHF-457-HNRC Fine Fissured High NRC by CertainTeed. 2. 22421 Radar ClimaPlus High-NRC/High-CAC by USG Interiors, Inc.

– LAY-IN CEILING TYPES

LAWRENCE COUNTY LAY-IN CEILING TYPES PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 09 5113 Appendix - Page 3 of 4

TYPE -5 ULTIMA TEGULAR – FINE TEXTURE

A. Basis of Design Product: 1911 Ultima Tegular by Armstrong. 1. Composition: Wet-formed mineral fiber with DuraBrite acoustically transparent membrane 2. Color: White 3. Size: 24in x 24in x 3/4in 4. Edge Profile: Beveled Tegular 5. Dimensional Stability: HumiGuard Plus 10-year limited warranty against sag.. 6. Antimicrobial Protection: BioBlock Plus.

B. Appearance Characteristics: 1. Type IV Mineral base with membrane-faced overlay; Form 2 Water Felted. 2. Pattern E lightly textured

C. Performance Qualities: 1. LR: Not less than 0.89. 2. NRC: Not less than 0.70 3. CAC: Not less than 35


E. Acceptable products, subject to compliance with requirements and approval by Architect: 1. 1222B-IOF-1 Symphony m by CertainTeed. 2. 86785 Mars ClimaPlus by USG Interiors, Inc.

TYPE 6 SCHOOL ZONE – FINE FISSURED HIGH DURABILITY A. Basis of Design Product: 465 School Zone Fine Fissured by Armstrong.

1. Composition: Wet-formed mineral fiber 2. Color: White 3. Size: 24in x 24in x 5/8in 4. Edge Profile: Square Lay-In 5. Dimensional Stability: HumiGuard Plus 10-year limited warranty against sag.. 6. Antimicrobial Protection: BioBlock Plus.



D. Grid: Armstrong Prelude XL 15/16” or acceptable product by accepted tile manufacturer. 1. Provide beam-end retaining clips and tile retention clips. 2. DX/DXL Donn Brand Suspension System – USG Interiors. 3. 15/16” Classic Stab System – CertainTeed.

E. Acceptable products, subject to compliance with requirements and approval by Architect: 1. SB-157 School Board by CertainTeed. 2. 2207 Radar ClimaPlus High Durability by USG Interiors, Inc.


LAY-IN CEILING TYPES LAWRENCE COUNTY 09 5113 Appendix - Page 4 of 4 PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY

TYPE -8 GEORGIAN – MEDIUM TEXTURE A. Basis of Design Product: 1752 Georgian by Armstrong.

1. Composition: Wet-formed mineral fiber 2. Color: White 3. Size: 24in x 24in x 5/8in 4. Edge Profile: Beveled Tegular 5. Dimensional Stability: HumiGuard Plus 10-year limited warranty against sag.. 6. Antimicrobial Protection: BioBlock Plus.

B. Appearance Characteristics: 1. Type III, mineral base with painted finish; Form 2 Water Felted. 2. Pattern: CE perforated, small holes and lightly textured



E. Acceptable products, subject to compliance with requirements and approval by Architect: 1. CM-454 Cashmere by CertainTeed.

2. 4805 Pebbled ClimaPlus by USG Interiors, Inc.

TYPE -9 CERAMAGUARD FINE FISSURED - PERFORATED A. Basis of Design Product: 607 Fine Fissured Ceramaguard Fire Guard by Armstrong.

1. Composition: Ceramic and mineral fiber composite 2. Color: White 3. Size: 24in x 24in x 5/8in 4. Edge Profile: Square Lay-In 5. Dimensional Stability: HumiGuard Plus 10-year limited warranty against sag. 6. Antimicrobial Protection: Inherent 7. Fire Resistive

B. Appearance Characteristics: 1. Type and Form: Type XX, high-density ceramic-like composition with scrubbable finish 2. Pattern: CE (perforated, small holes and lightly textured)


D. Grid: Armstrong AL Prelude Plus XL 15/16” or acceptable product by accepted tile manufacturer. 1. AL Prelude XL Light Duty Suspension System must have Hanger Wires Spaced 3’ O.C.

maximum along main tees – Armstrong. 2. ZXLA Suspension System – USG Interiors. Intermediate Duty with Hanger Wires spaced 4’

O.C. along Main Tees. 3. 15/16” Classic Environmental Stab System – CertainTeed.

E. Acceptable products, subject to compliance with requirements and approval by Architect: 1. 1182 CRF-1SV Performa Aquarock by CertainTeed. 2. 56644 Radar Ceramic ClimaPlus Perforated by USG Interiors, Inc.

END OF APPENDIX

LAWRENCE COUNTY RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 09 6513 - 1 © 2014 Eckles Architecture and Engineering

SECTION 09 6513 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Wall base. 2. Molding accessories.

1.02 SUBMITTALS


B. Samples for Verification: For each type of product indicated, in manufacturer's standard-size but not less than 6 inches long, of each resilient product color, texture, and pattern required.


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide resilient stair accessories with a critical radiant flux classification of Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 648 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain stair riser/tread/nosings and sheet flooring for stair landings from one manufacturer and source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying the Work.


A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F.


A. Maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 65 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive floor tile during the following time periods: 1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation.

B. After post-installation period, maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F.

C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES LAWRENCE COUNTY 09 6513 - 2 PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products by manufacturers listed in other Part 2 articles.

2.02 COLORS AND PATTERNS

A. Colors and Patterns: As indicated in finish schedule & color schedule on Drawings and verified with Architect.

2.03 RESILIENT WALL BASE

A. Wall Base: ASTM F 1861. 1. Basis of Design: Johnsonite 2. Roppe Corporation. 3. Musson, R. C. Rubber Co. 4. Nora Rubber Flooring, Freudenberg Building Systems, Inc.

B. Type (Material Requirement): TP (rubber, thermoplastic).

C. Group (Manufacturing Method): I (solid, homogeneous).

D. Style: a. RB1 - Cove (with top-set toe).

1. Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch. 2. Height: 4 inches in locations as indicated on Drawings and verified with

Architect. 3. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length. 4. Inside and Outside Corners: Job formed. 5. Surface: Smooth.

a. RB2 – Millwork (Attache style). 1. Minimum Thickness: 0.25 inch. 2. Height: 6 inches in locations as indicated on Drawings and verified with

Architect. 3. Lengths: Manufacturer's standard 8’-0” lengths. 4. Inside and Outside Corners: Job formed. 5. Surface: profiled with a smooth texture.

2.04 RESILIENT MOLDING ACCESSORY

A. Description: Carpet edge for glue-down applications, reducer strip for resilient floor covering, joiner for (all types specified for this Project) tile and resilient floorings, joiner for tile and carpet, joiner for resilient floorings and carpet, joiner at access flooring and fixed floors, and joiner for any other transition not mentioned herein. 1. Marley Flexco (USA), Inc. 2. Roppe Corporation. 3. Johnsonite- Roundel 4. Musson, R. C. Rubber Co.. 5. Nora Rubber Flooring, Freudenberg Building Systems, Inc. 6. R.C.A. Rubber Company.

B. Material: Rubber.

C. Profile and Dimensions: As indicated, or if not indicated, as required to create smooth transitions between surfaces and meeting “Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines

LAWRENCE COUNTY RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 09 6513 - 3

(ADAAG)" and applicable provisions of ICC/ANSI A117.1 as referenced by PA Uniform Construction Code.


A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic cement based formulation provided or approved by resilient product manufacturers for applications indicated.

B. Substrate Vapor Emission Barrier: 2-part, one-coat liquid-applied, self-leveling moisture remediating and alkaline-control overlayment, or as otherwise recommended by flooring manufacturer. 1. Koster VAP-I 2000 FS, with manufacturer- recommended accessory products.

C. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit floor tile and substrate conditions indicated. 1. Use adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated

according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): a. Rubber Floor Tile Adhesives: Not more than 60 g/L.

D. Stair-Tread-Nose Filler: Two-part epoxy compound recommended by resilient tread manufacturer to fill nosing substrates that do not conform to tread contours. 1. 930 Epoxy Caulk by Johnsonite.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, moisture content, and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in

other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products.


3.02 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written recommendations to ensure adhesion of resilient products.

B. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.

C. Use trowelable leveling and patching compound to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates.

D. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. 1. Do not install resilient products until they are the same temperature as the space where they

are to be installed.

RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES LAWRENCE COUNTY 09 6513 - 4 PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY

E. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, and dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.03 RESILIENT WALL BASE INSTALLATION

A. Apply wall base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.

B. Install wall base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned. 1. On walls of 3-foot and greater provide single length of 3-foot minimum. 2. On walls of less than 3-foot provide single length for entire wall surface.

C. Tightly adhere wall base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.

D. Do not stretch wall base during installation.

E. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of wall base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.

F. Job-Formed Corners: 1. Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. Form without

producing discoloration (whitening) at bends. Shave back of base at points where bends occur and remove strips perpendicular to length of base that are only deep enough to produce a snug fit without removing more than half the wall base thickness.

2. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. Form by cutting an inverted V-shaped notch in toe of wall base at the point where corner is formed. Shave back of base where necessary to produce a snug fit to substrate.

3.04 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION

A. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of floor coverings that would otherwise be exposed.


A. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation: 1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.

a. Do not wash surfaces until after time period recommended by manufacturer.

B. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. Use protection methods recommended in writing by manufacturer. 1. Cover products with undyed, untreated building paper until Substantial Completion.

LAWRENCE COUNTY RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 09 6513 - 5

2. Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over accessories. Place plywood or hardboard panels over surfaces and under objects while they are being moved. Slide or roll objects over panels without moving panels.


LAWRENCE COUNTY LINOLEUM FLOORING PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 09 6516 - 1 © 2014 Eckles Architecture and Engineering

SECTION 09 6516 - LINOLEUM FLOORING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes linoleum sheet floor coverings.

1.02 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: 1. Show locations of seams, edges, columns, doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in furniture,

cabinets, and cutouts. 2. Show details of special patterns.

C. Samples for Verification: In manufacturer's standard size, but not less than 6-by-6-inch sections of each color and pattern of linoleum floor covering required.

D. Heat-Welded Seam Samples: For each flooring product and welding bead color and pattern combination required; with seam running lengthwise and in center of 12-by-12-inch Sample applied to rigid backing and prepared by Installer for this Project.

E. Seam Samples: For seamless-installation technique indicated and for each flooring product, color, and pattern required; with seam running lengthwise and in center of 6-by-9-inch Sample applied to a rigid backing and prepared by Installer for this Project.

F. Installer Certificates: Signed by manufacturer certifying that installers comply with specified requirements

G. Flame Spread Certification: Submit manufacturer’s certification that resilient flooring furnished for areas indicated to comply with required flame spread rating has been tested and meets or exceeds indicated standard.

H. Closeout Submittals: 1. Maintenance and operations data for inclusion in maintenance manual: Include methods for

maintaining installed products, and precautions against cleaning materials and methods detrimental to finishes and performance.

2. Warranty: Warranty documents specified herein.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs workers for this Project that are competent in techniques required by manufacturer for floor covering installation and seaming method indicated. 1. Engage an installer who employs workers for this Project that are certified by floor covering

manufacturer for installation techniques required, including flash cove type installations. a. Proof of Certification; provide proof of certification before start of work. b. Certified mechanic must be present on job site for pre-installation meeting,

coordination meetings, and daily for duration of project installation..

LINOLEUM FLOORING LAWRENCE COUNTY 09 6516 - 2 PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY

2. Installer shall be an established firm, experienced in the installation of the specified product and shall have access to all manufacturers’ required technical, maintenance, specifications and related documents.

3. Installer shall have completed at least three projects of similar magnitude, material and complexity, and provide project reference details including contact names and telephone numbers.

B. Manufacturer: Whenever possible, provide each type of resilient flooring as provided by a single manufacturer, including recommended primers, adhesives, sealants, and leveling compounds.

C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products identical to those tested for fire-exposure behavior per test method indicated by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct meeting at site prior to commencing work related to linoleum flooring installation. 1. Require attendance of concrete installer and finisher, flooring manufacturer’s representative,

installer’s certified mechanic, and other parties directly affecting flooring installation. 2. Review site conditions, procedures, and coordination required with related work.

E. Field Mock-Up: Provide mock-up of each type of installation using approved materials and specified methods of installation. 1. Obtain Architect’s acceptance of mock-up prior to start of flooring installation. 2. Areas found to be deficient by specification standards or application procedures shall be

replaced or repaired at Contractor’s expense. 3. Approved mock-up may be incorporated into Project.


A. Order flooring and accessories at least 60 days prior to start of scheduled installation, or as required to prevent delay of Work. Costs associated with noncompliance, including air freight or other remedial measures will be the burden of the responsible Contractor

B. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact.

C. Store floor coverings and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 68 deg F or more than 90 deg F for 72 hours prior to, during and after installation.. 1. Sheet Floor Covering: Store rolls upright.

D. Move resilient floor covering and installation accessories into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours before installation, unless longer conditioning periods are required by manufacturer in writing. Maintain temperature of spaces at not less than 68 deg F.


A. Maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive floor tile during the following time periods: 1. 72 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 72 hours after installation.

LAWRENCE COUNTY LINOLEUM FLOORING PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 09 6516 - 3

B. After postinstallation period, maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F.

C. Close spaces to traffic during floor covering installation.

D. Close spaces to traffic for 72 hours after floor covering installation.

E. Install floor coverings after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.

1.06 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Submit manufacturers standard warranty document. 1. Warranty Period: Five year limited warranty commencing on Date of Substantial

Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 LINOLEUM FLOOR COVERING

A. Basis of Design Products: Provide products by the following manufacturer: 1. Armstrong Commercial Flooring, products, as scheduled.

B. Color and Pattern: Colors as scheduled on Drawings; patterns per floor graphics plan in Drawings. 1. Provide waterjet-cut flooring inlay patterns as indicated on Floor Graphics Plans.

C. Sheet Floor Covering: ASTM F 2034. 1. Roll Size: In manufacturer's standard length by not less than 78 inches wide.

D. Seaming Method 1. Typical for Sheet Floor Covering: Heat welded. 2. Seam at custom graphic details: Resin Seam Adhesive

E. Thickness: 0.10 inch.

F. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: 1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm per ASTM E 648.


A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic cement based formulation provided or approved by floor covering manufacturer for applications indicated.

B. Crack Isolation Membrane: Self-adhering, pressure sensitive 40 mil thick load bearing membrane, capable of withstanding 3/8" horizontal structural crack and joint movement, compatible with specified adhesives 1. ECB 75 Anti-Fracture/Crack Suppression Membrane by National Applied Construction

Products, Inc. 2. NAC TAC interior primer.

C. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by floor covering manufacturer for products and substrate conditions indicated.


1. Provide adhesive products compatible with finish products, with moisture inhibitor for applications on substrates with high relative humidity content (in excess of 75 percent RH), or provide moisture control (vapor barrier) topcoat or other acceptable moisture remediation process to slab prior to flooring installation. a. S-780 Linoleum Adhesive by Armstrong Commercial Flooring (typical) b. S-240 High-Performance Epoxy Flooring Adhesive by Armstrong (where

recommended by Manufacturer and at cut logo inlay patterns). c. S-580 Flash Cove Adhesive by Armstrong (at integral base as recommended by

Manufacturer)

D. Heat-Welding Bead: Solid-strand product of floor covering manufacturer. 1. Armstrong Weld Rod 2. Colors: As scheduled.

E. Resin Seam Adhesive: Armstrong S-761 water-based, ammonia-free, low VOC commercial seam adhesive

F. Integral-Flash-Cove-Base Accessories: 1. Cove Strip: 1-inch radius provided or approved by floor covering manufacturer. 2. Cove-Base Cap Strip: Rubber cap provided or approved by floor covering manufacturer. 3. Vinyl Flash Cap: Fillet strip and cove cap in one. In lieu of providing cove strip and base

cap, provide Johnsonite #SCC-63-A Vinyl Flash Cove Cap (or as otherwise indicated).

G. Transition Strip: Rubber meeting requirements of Division 09 Section “Resilient Wall Base and Accessories.”

H. Metal Edge Strips: Of width shown and of required thickness to protect exposed edge of resilient flooring. Provide units of maximum available length, to minimize number of joints.

I. Extra Materials: Provide two cases of linoleum manufacturer’s recommended wax, one case of sealer, and two cases of multi-purpose cleaner, in one gallon containers with 6 per case.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, moisture content, and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in

other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of floor coverings.


3.02 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written recommendations to ensure adhesion of floor coverings.

B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710. 1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.


2. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.

3. Moisture Testing: Owner’s testing agent will perform tests recommended by manufacturer and as follows. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. a. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with

installation only after substrates have a maximum relative humidity level measurement allowed by manufacturer for finish products and adhesives used, but in no case more than 75 percent measured from the center of the slab.

b. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate allowed by manufacturer for finish products and adhesives used, but in no case more than 5 lps of water per 1,000 sq ft within a 24-hour period. 1) Three tests will be performed for the first 1,000 sq ft, and at least one additional

test for each additional 1,000 sq ft of floor coverage area. For slabs-on-grade, at least one test will be performed within 3 feet of each exterior wall.

4. Contingency for High Moisture Readings: If at the time of testing the moisture readings are in excess of 5.0lbs the Owner’s testing agent will initiate testing using petrographic analysis to determine if the Water Cement Ratio and sufficient hydration has taken place. If the specified requirements for concrete were not strictly observed, water/cement ratio was not observed, or the concrete surface has been inadequately hydrated, then the Contractor responsible for the placement of the concrete shall be responsible for the costs associated with the petrographic analysis and subsequent remediation

C. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with floor covering adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.

D. Use trowelable leveling and patching compound to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates.

E. Move floor coverings and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. 1. Do not install floor coverings until they are same temperature as space where they are to be

installed.

F. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by floor coverings immediately before installation. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, and dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


A. Scribe and cut floor coverings to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings.

B. Extend floor coverings into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings.

C. Maintain reference markers, holes, or openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on floor coverings as marked on subfloor. Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking device.

D. Adhere floor coverings to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.


E. Heat-Welded Seams: Comply with ASTM F 1516. Rout joints and use welding bead to permanently fuse sections into a seamless floor covering. Prepare, weld, and finish seams to produce surfaces flush with adjoining floor covering surfaces.

F. Non-Welded Seams: Scribe flooring at seams and apply Resin Seam Adhesive according to manufacturer’s written instructions. Clean exposed surfaces, emboss flooring and remove burrs as directed for a smooth continuous appearance.

3.04 SHEET FLOOR COVERING INSTALLATION

A. Unroll sheet floor coverings and allow them to stabilize before cutting and fitting.

B. Lay out sheet floor coverings as follows: 1. Maintain uniformity of floor covering direction.

2. Minimize number of seams; place seams in inconspicuous and low-traffic areas, at least 6 inches away from parallel joints in floor covering substrates.

3. Match edges of floor coverings for color shading at seams.

4. Avoid cross seams.

5. Eliminate deformations that result from hanging method used during drying process (stove bar marks).

3.05 SHEET INSTALLATION WITH FLASH COVE BASE

A. Provide integral flash cove wall base as one-piece without seams, by extending sheet flooring 4-inches up the wall using adhesive and accessories recommended and approved by the flooring manufacturer.

B. Nail cap strip to wall with flathead nails long enough to penetrate into the studs and drive through the middle of the nail slots. Ensure that top of cap strip is flush with tops of corner pieces. If metal corners are not used, miter the cap strip using a miter box and hacksaw.

C. Cement wood cove sticks to the wall and concrete floor. For other surface sink nailheads flush so they will not show through the finished installation. Cut corners with a miter box and saw.

D. Spread adhesive on floor, over cove stick and up wall before material is placed in room. Use a brush to spread adhesive on walls. After adhesive is spread, place material in room. Provide at least two installers on flash coving installation to get material into place properly. Tape any areas of stress where tears might occur.

E. After flooring is completely seated, start tucking flooring under cap strip. Start in center of wall and work to each end, use heat gun to make material more pliable and to prevent breakage. Push corners into place and roll material on wall with hand roller. Roll entire floor with 100-lb roller.

F. After flooring is rolled begin work on inside and outside corners. Mitered outside corner must be used when installing Linoleum. Strictly follow manufacturer’s written corner installation instructions and diagrams.

G. To create outside corner fill piece, use "L"-shaped template. Cut and size fill piece then spread adhesive on wall and floor. Warm fill piece, put it into place and roll thoroughly. Remove pieces of scrap, and make sure enough adhesive is under the seam to hold it in place.


H. Use fine sandpaper on the outside corners to remove burrs caused by the recess scriber. Finished inside and outside should look like manufacturer’s samples.


A. Manufacture’s Field Services: Upon 72 hours’ notice, provide manufacturer’s field service consisting of product use recommendations and periodic site visits for inspection of product installation in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions 1. Site Visits: Coincident with weekly coordination meetings for duration of product

installation, or as otherwise agreed in writing..


A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing floor coverings: 1. Remove adhesive and other surface blemishes from floor covering surfaces.

2. Sweep and vacuum floor coverings thoroughly.

3. Damp-mop floor coverings to remove marks and soil. a. Do not wash floor coverings until after time period recommended by manufacturer.

B. Close spaces to traffic during resilient flooring installation and for time period after installation recommended in writing by the manufacturer.

C. Protect floor coverings against mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by manufacturer. 1. Do not perform initial maintenance for a minimum of 5 days after installation has been

completed, in order to allow the adhesive the proper time to set.

2. Apply protective floor polish to surfaces after they are free of soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes. a. Seal linoleum as recommended by manufacturer but with not less than two coats of

linoleum manufacturer’s recommended floor sealer then wax floors after sealer has fully cured.

b. Use commercially available product acceptable to manufacturer.

c. Coordinate selection of floor polish with Owner's maintenance service.

3. Cover linoleum floor coverings with undyed, untreated building paper until inspection for Substantial Completion. a. Allow drying room film (yellow film caused by linseed oil oxidation) to disappear

before Substantial Completion.

4. Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over floor covering surfaces. Place plywood or hardboard panels over floor coverings and under objects while they are being moved. Slide or roll objects over panels without moving panels.

D. Review cleaning and waxing procedures with Owner’s maintenance personal according to Division 01 Section “Demonstration and Training.”


LAWRENCE COUNTY CARPETING PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 09 6800 - 1 © 2014 Eckles Architecture and Engineering

SECTION 09 6800 - CARPETING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Tufted Modular Tile (CPT) 2. Tufted Modular Entrance Floor Mat Tile Carpeting (EFM)

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 03 Section “Cast-In-Place Concrete” for concrete substrate and underlayment. 2. Division 09 Section "Resilient Wall Base and Accessories" for resilient wall base and

accessories installed with carpet.

1.02 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Review methods and procedures related to carpet tile installation including, but not limited

to, the following: a. Review delivery, storage, and handling procedures. b. Review ambient conditions and ventilation procedures. c. Review subfloor preparation procedures.

B. Related Preinstallation meetings: Require attendance by carpet installer and representative of carpet manufacturer at pre-installation conferences of the related systems, to review manufacturer’s recommendations for sequencing, environmental tolerances, substrate installation tolerances, testing and general quality of substrate finish. Review manufacturer’s and installer’s recommendations for remedial measures where substrate or environmental conditions are not suitable. 1. Slab on grade where carpeting is scheduled. 2. Elevated slabs on deck and structures where carpeting is scheduled.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Informational Submittals: 1. Qualification Data: For Installer.

2. Product Test Reports: For carpet tile, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

3. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.

B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics, durability, and fade resistance. Include installation recommendations for each type of substrate required.

C. Shop Drawings: Show the following: 1. Columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where

cutouts are required in carpet. 2. Carpet type, color, and dye lot. 3. Seam locations, types, and methods.

CARPETING LAWRENCE COUNTY 09 6800 - 2 PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY

4. Type of subfloor. 5. Type of installation. 6. Pattern type, repeat size, location, direction, and starting point. 7. Pile direction. 8. Type, color, and location of edge, transition, and other accessory strips, inserts or borders. 9. Transition details to other flooring materials.

D. Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 1. Carpet Tile: Full-size Sample. 2. Exposed Edge, Transition Stripping and Accessory: 12-inch-long Samples. 3. Carpet Seam: 6-inch Sample. 4. Mitered Carpet Border Seam: 12-inch-square Sample. Show carpet pattern alignment.

E. Product Schedule: Use same room and product designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules.

F. Closeout Submittals: 1. Maintenance Data: For each type of carpet to include in maintenance manuals specified in

Division 01. Include the following: a. Methods for maintaining carpet and entrance mat, including cleaning and stain-

removal products and procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule.

b. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet.


A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is CFI certified by the International Certified Floorcovering Installers Association 1. Use on-site personnel at the Commercial II or Master II certification level to install products,

and direct supervisory personnel at the Master II certification level.

B. Microbiological Properties 1. ASTM-G-21-90 Inhibiting to fungal growth – Passes

C. Coefficient of Friction: ASTM C 1028 1. Dry, 0.81 2. Wet, 0.57

D. Fire-Test-Response Ratings: Where indicated, products identical to those of assemblies tested for fire response by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction 1. NFPA 253 (ASTM E 648): 0.75 watts/cm2 2. Floor Radiant Panel: ASTM E 648 – NFPA Class I (Direct Glue). 3. ASTM D 2859 – Passes. 4. DOC-FF-1-70: Passes. 5. NBS Smoke Chamber NFPA 258: Less than 450 Flaming Mode.

LAWRENCE COUNTY CARPETING PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 09 6800 - 3


A. General: Comply with CRI 104 "Storage and Handling."


A. General: Comply with CRI 104, "Site Conditions" for temperature, humidity, and ventilation limitations.

B. Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.

C. Do not install carpet over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet manufacturer.

D. Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet, install carpet before installing these items.

1.07 WARRANTY

A. General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.

B. Special Carpet Warranty: Written warranty, signed by carpet manufacturer agreeing to replace carpet that does not comply with requirements or that fails within specified warranty periods. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent edge raveling, loss of face fiber, dimensional stability, excess static discharge, loss of tuft bind strength, , snags, runs, and delamination. 1. Tuft Bind – 20 pound: Useful life of carpet. 2. Edge Ravel: Useful life of carpet. 3. Static Protection: Useful life of carpet. 4. Zippering: Useful life of carpet. 5. Impervious to Liquid: Useful life of carpet. 6. Liquid Management (passes British Spill and 10,000 impact test): Useful life of carpet. 7. Delamination: Useful life of carpet. 8. Run Resistance: Useful life of carpet. 9. Wear Warranty: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion. 10. Stain Removal: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. 11. Colorfastness to Light and Atmospheric Contaminants: 10 years from date of Substantial

Completion.



A. Provide min. two percent overage of calculated yardage for each type, style and color of carpet. 1. Include carpet needed for complete installation plus waste and usable scraps in calculated

yardage. 2. Carpet Tile: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type indicated,

but not less than 10 sq. yd 3. Provide usable overage in full tiles.

B. Recycle waste, unusable scrap and any carpet damaged during installation through manufacturer's environmental program.

C. Deliver specified attic stock to Owner's designated storage space, properly packaged and identified. Redirect small pieces of waste to be appropriately recycled.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 CARPET

A. CPT: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: 1. Manufacturer:

a. CPT1: Mohawk Group - Bigelow; Style, color and pattern as indicated on the Drawings.

b. CPT2: Mohawk Group - Bigelow; Style, color and pattern as indicated on the Drawings.

2. Tile Size: 24 inch x 24 inch.

3. Tuft Bind: 23 lb. Avg. tuft bind wet or dry per ASTM D-1335-67.

4. Static Control: under 3.5 KV when tested under Standard Shuffle test – AATCC-134

5. Indoor Air Quality: Comply with ASTM D 5116 and CRI Certified for low VOC emissions. a. Manufacturer must demonstrate that carpet is certified under the Carpet & Rug

Institute’s Green Label Plus Program.

6. Electrostatic Propensity: AATCC 134 – Less than 3.5 KV.

7. Traffic Class: Heavy.

8. Color Fastness: a. Colorfastness to Crocking: Not less than 4, wet and dry, per AATCC-165. b. Colorfastness to Light: Not less than 4 after 40 AFU (AATCC fading units) per

AATCC-16.

9. Lightfastness - AATCC 16E-1982 - Dark color: Gray scale rating of 4 or better after 160 standard fading hours as compared to AATCC Gray Scale for evaluation change in color.

10. Ozone and Gas - AATCC 129-1981 - Rating 3 or better per color AATCC transference scale.


B. EFM: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: 1. Manufacturer: Shaw Contract Group; style, color and pattern as scheduled and shown on

the Drawings.

2. Tile Size:24 inch x 24inch.

3. Tuft Bind:28 lb. Avg. tuft bind wet or dry per ASTM D-1335-67.

4. Indoor Air Quality: Comply with ASTM D 5116 and CRI Certified for low VOC emissions. a. Manufacturer must demonstrate that carpet is certified under the Carpet & Rug

Institute’s Green Label Plus Program.

5. Electrostatic Propensity: AATCC 134 – Less than 3.5 KV.

6. Coefficient of Friction: 0.8

C. Match Manufacturer’s published data for scheduled products, as applicable, for the following material features and properties. 1. Carpet Face Construction and Surface Texture 2. Face Yarn/ Fiber Content 3. Primary Backing 4. Secondary Backing 5. Density 6. Dye Method 7. Machine Gauge/ Stitches Per Inch 8. Yarn Weight 9. Pile Thickness

D. Pattern and Color: The architect reserves the right to reject any product or manufacturer based solely on pattern and color considerations.

E. Cationic Stain Resistance 1. Stain resistant properties must be permanent and not removable by commercial cleanings or

abrasive wear. Carpet must score no less than 8.0 on a scale of 10 on the AATCC Red 40 Stain Scale. Test sample must first be exposed to 100 revolutions on the Taber Abrader (1,000-gram weight per H-18 wheel) and then abraded area must be stain tested using AATCC test method 175. Topical stain resistant treatments will not be acceptable. Stain resistant properties must be inherent.

2.02 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided by or recommended by the carpet adhesive manufacturer.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet and that is furnished or recommended by carpeting manufacturer

C. Seaming Cement: Hot-melt adhesive tape or similar product recommended by carpet manufacturer for taping seams and butting cut edges at backing to form secure seams and to prevent pile loss at seams.

D. Rubber/Vinyl Edge Strips: As specified in Division 09 Section “Resilient Wall Base and Accessories.”


E. Miscellaneous Materials: As recommended by manufacturer of carpet and accessory products, as required to complete installation.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet performance. Verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for carpet installation and comply with requirements specified.

B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following: 1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other materials

that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by the following: Carpet manufacturer.

2. Subfloor finishes comply with requirements specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for slabs receiving carpet.

3. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits.


3.02 PREPARATION

A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.2, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and carpet manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive carpet installation.

B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates. 1. Fill or level cracks, holes and depressions 1/8 inch wide or wider and protrusions more than

1/32 inch unless more stringent requirements are required by manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by the following: Carpet manufacturer.

D. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Direct-Glue-Down Installation: Comply with CRI 104, "Direct Glue-Down Installation" and “Carpet Modules,” and with carpet manufacturer’s written instructions.


B. Modular Tile: 1. Installation Method: Glue down; install every tile with full-spread, releasable, pressure-

sensitive adhesive.

2. Maintain dye lot integrity. Do not mix dye lots in same area.

3. Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

4. Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings.

5. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device.

6. Install in a monolithic pattern parallel to walls and borders.

C. Comply with carpet manufacturer's written recommendations for seam locations and direction of carpet; maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At doorways, center seams under the door in closed position. 1. Level adjoining border edges.

D. Do not bridge building expansion joints with carpet.

E. Cut and fit carpet to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet manufacturer.

F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device.


A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet: 1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner

recommended by carpet manufacturer.

2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet surface.

3. Vacuum carpet using commercial machine with face-beater element.

B. Protect installed carpet to comply with CRI 104 "Protection of Indoor Installations."

C. Protect carpet against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet manufacturer.


LAWRENCE COUNTY PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY © 2014 Eckles Architecture and Engineering

ACCESS FLOORING – SD CARPET 09 6900 - 1

SECTION 09 6900 - ACCESS FLOORING IN STATIC DISSIPATIVE CARPETED AREAS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Section Includes

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Con-ditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Work of this section includes, but is not limited to: access floor panels, floor coverings, un-derstructure and various electrical, data and communication accessories.

C. Location of (SD CPT) Static Dissipative Carpet:

1. Corridor 130 - in locations as designated on contract drawings.

2. Dispatchers 124, Copy/Printer/Work 126, EOC Command 128

D. Location of Flat Steel top sheet – NO static dissipative carpet:

1. Mechanical 126a

1.2 Related Sections

A. Concrete sealer shall be compatible with pedestal adhesive, see Division 3.

B. Flooring transitions shall be provided with a joiner product as required for the specified floor-ing material. See Division 09 section 6513 “Resilient Base and Accessories.”

C. See Division 26 Section “Electrical Systems” for connection to ground of access flooring un-derstructure. Note: The electrical engineer or contractor shall determine requirements for grounding and the electrical contractor shall provide the necessary labor and materials to electrically connect the access flooring to the building ground if it is required.

1.3 Environmental Conditions for Storage and Installation

A. Area to receive and store access floor materials shall be enclosed and maintained at ambient temperatures between 35° to 95° F and relative humidity levels between 20 to 80%. All floor panels shall be stored at ambient temperatures between 50° to 90°F for at least 24 hours be-fore installation begins. All areas of installation shall be enclosed and maintained at ambient temperature between 50° to 90°F and at relative humidity levels between 20% to 80% and shall remain within these environmental limits throughout occupancy.

1.4 References

A. CISCA (Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association) - “Recommended Test Pro-cedures for Access Floors” shall be used as a guideline when presenting load performance product information.

1.5 Performance Certification

A. Product tests shall be witnessed and certified by independent engineering and testing labora-tory based in the U.S. with a minimum of five years experience testing access floor compo-nents in accordance CISCA “Recommended Test Procedures for Access Floors”.

ACCESS FLOORING – SD CARPET 09 6900 - 2 © 2014 Eckles Architecture and Engineering


1.6 Country-of-Origin and Product Marking

A. Access floor materials shall comply with the provisions outlined in FAR Subpart 25.2 – Buy American Act – Construction Materials.

B. Floor panels shall be permanently marked with manufacturer’s name, product identification, manufacturing date and country-of-origin. Removable Product ID stickers are not accepta-ble.

1.7 Performance Requirements

A. Design Load: Panel supported on actual understructure system shall be capable of support-ing a point load of 1250 lbs applied on a one square inch area at any location on the panel without experiencing permanent set as defined by CISCA. The loading method used to de-termine design (allowable) load shall be in conformance with CISCA Concentrated Load test method but with panel tested on actual understructure instead of steel blocks.

B. Safety Factor: Panel supported on actual understructure system shall withstand a point load of no less than (2) two times the design load rating on a one square inch area anywhere on the panel without failure when tested in accordance with CISCA A/F, Section 2 “Ultimate Load-ing”. Failure is defined as the point at which the system will no longer accept the load.

C. Ultimate Load: Panel supported on actual understructure system shall be capable of support-ing a point load of at least 2500 lbs applied through a load indentor on a one square inch area at any location on the panel without failure (i.e. minimum safety factor of 2) when tested in accordance with CISCA A/F, Section 2, “Ultimate Loading”.

D. Rolling Load: Panel supported on actual understructure system shall be able to withstand the following rolling loads at any location on the panel without developing a local and overall surface deformation greater than 0.040 inches when tested in accordance with CISCA A/F, Section 3, “Rolling Loads”. Note: wheel 1 and wheel 2 tests shall be performed on two sepa-rate panels.

CISCA Wheel 1: Size: 3” dia x 1 13/16” wide Load: 1125 lbs. Passes: 10

CISCA Wheel 2: Size: 6” dia x 2” wide Load: 875 lbs. Passes: 10,000

E. Impact Load: Panel supported on actual understructure (the system) shall be capable of supporting an impact load of 150 lbs. dropped from a height of 36 inches onto a one square inch area (using a round or square indentor) at any location on the panel when tested in ac-cordance with CISCA A/F Section 8, “Drop Impact Load Test”.

F. Panel Drop Test: Panel shall be capable of being dropped face up onto to a concrete slab from a height of 36”, after which it shall continue to meet all load performance requirements as previously defined.

G. Panel Cutout: Panel with an 8” diameter interior cutout supported on actual understructure shall be capable of maintaining its design load strength with a minimum safety factor of 2 an-ywhere on the panel without the use of additional supports.

H. Flammability: System shall meet Class A Flame spread requirements for flame spread and smoke development. Tests shall be performed in accordance with ASTM-E84-1998, Stand-ard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics for Building Materials.



I. Combustibility: All components of the access floor system shall qualify as noncombustible by demonstrating compliance with requirements of ASTM E 136, Standard Test Method for Be-havior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace at 750 deg C.

J. Recycled Content: Panel and understructure system shall be required to have a minimum post-consumer recycled content of 18% and a minimum total recycled content of 49%

K. Axial Load: Pedestal support assembly shall provide a minimum 6000 lb. axial load without permanent deformation when tested in accordance with CISCA A/F, Section 5, “Pedestal Ax-ial Load Test.”.

L. Overturning Moment: Pedestal support assembly shall provide an average overturning moment of 1000 in-lbs. when glued to a clean, sound, uncoated concrete surface when tested in accordance with CISCA A/F, Section 6, “Pedestal Overturning Moment Test”. ICBO number for the specific system or structural calculations shall be required attesting to the lat-eral stability of the system under seismic conditions.

1.8 Design Requirements:

A. Access floor system, where indicated on the design documents, shall consist of modular and removable fully encased cementitious filled welded steel panels fastened onto, and supported by, adjustable height pedestal assemblies. Pedestal head and panel corner design must pro-vide a positive location and lateral engagement of the panel to the understructure support sys-tem without the use of fasteners.

B. Panel shall be easily removed by one person with a suction cup lifting device and shall be in-terchangeable except where cut for special conditions.

C. Quantities, finished floor heights (FFH) and location of accessories shall be as specified on the contract drawings.

1.9 Submittals for Review

A. Detail sheets, for each proposed product type, which provide the necessary information to de-scribe the product and its performance.

B. Test reports, certified by an independent testing laboratory with a minimum of five years ex-perience testing access floor components in accordance CISCA Recommended Test Proce-dures, certifying that component parts perform as specified.

1.10 Submittals for Information

A. Manufacturer’s installation instructions and guidelines.

B. Manufacturer’s Owner Manual outlining recommended care and maintenance procedures.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Manufacturers

A. Access floor system shall be as manufactured by Tate Access Floors, Inc. and shall consist of the ConCore 1000 access floor panel supported by PosiLock understructure system.

B. Alternative products shall meet or exceed all requirements as indicated herein and must re-ceive prior written approval by the architect.

1. Substitution requests shall be submitted to architect for review and approval prior to bid-ding according to Division I requirements.



C. Access floor manufacture shall be ISO9001:2000 certified demonstrating it has a robust and well documented quality management system with continual improvement goals and strate-gies.

D. Access floor manufacturer’s facilities shall be ISO14001:2004 certified demonstrating that they maintain an environmental management system.

E. Access floor manufacturer’s facilities shall be OHSAS 18001:2007 certified demonstrating that they maintain an Occupational Health and Safety Management system.

2.2 Support Components

Pedestals:

A. Pedestal assemblies shall be corrosive resistant, all steel welded construction, and shall pro-vide an adjustment range of +/- 1” for finished floor heights 6” or greater.

B. Pedestal assemblies shall provide a means of leveling and locking the assembly at a selected height, which requires deliberate action to change height setting and prevents vibration dis-placement.

C. Pedestal head shall be designed with locating tabs and integral shape to interface with the panel for positive lateral retention and positioning without fasteners. Note: This allows the floor to be installed during the construction process without screws so that access by other re-lated trades can be accomplished quickly and easily. It also enables the user to have a mixed installation of fastened and unfastened panels within the same installation.

D. Hot dip galvanized steel pedestal head shall be welded to a threaded rod which includes a specially designed adjusting nut. The nut shall provide location lugs to engage the pedestal base assembly, such that deliberate action is required to change the height setting.

E. Threaded rod shall provide a specially designed anti-rotation device, such that when the head assembly is engaged in the base assembly, the head cannot freely rotate (for FFH of 6” or greater). Note: This prevents the assembly from inadvertently losing its leveling adjustment when panels are removed from the installation during use.

F. Hot dip galvanized pedestal base assembly shall consist of a formed steel plate with no less than 16 inches of bearing area, welded to a 7/8” square steel tube and shall be designed to en-gage the head assembly.

2.3 Panel Components

Floor Panels:

A. Panels shall consist of a top steel sheet welded to a formed steel bottom pan filled internally with a lightweight cementitious material. Mechanical or adhesive methods for attachment of the steel top and bottom sheets are unacceptable.

B. Cementitious fill material shall be totally encased within the steel welded shell except where cut for special conditions. Note: This greatly reduces the potential for dust in the environ-ment from exposed cement materials.

C. Panel shall have an electrically conductive epoxy paint finish.

D. Corner of panel shall have a locating tab and integral shape design to interface with the ped-estal head for positive lateral retention and positioning with or without fasteners.



E. Fastening of panels to pedestal heads shall be accomplished by the use of a machine screw which is specially designed to be self-capturing within the body of the panel. Note: This prevents the inadvertent loss of panel fastening screws when accessing the underfloor space and potential damage to objects by screws which extend beyond the depth of the panel.

F. Top surface of the panel shall have an option for four positioning location holes to engage positioning buttons on the PosiTile® carpet tile for precise matching of the carpet tile to the panel.

1. Mechanical 126a shall only have Flat Steel top sheet – NO carpet.

G. Fit between the pedestal head, panel, and screw shall enable an installation with an average panel to panel gap of 0.015”.

2.4 Accessories

A. The electrical contractor shall be providing and installing high capacity floor boxes or cable portals in the raised floor as indicated on the electrical drawings. Exact floor device type will be determined after the owner selects furniture style. The floor sup-plier shall be responsible for cutting floor tiles to accept these boxes. Arrange for a meeting with the electrical contractor and owner to determine exact location of floor devices and type before floor panels are cut.

B. Provide manufacturer’s standard, perimeter support, and grommets where required. C. Provide industry standard flooring transition components at all access flooring transitions to

fixed flooring. D. Provide 1% spare floor panels and 100 square feet of understructure systems for each type

used in the project for maintenance stock. Deliver to project in manufacturer’s standard packaging clearly marked with the contents.

E. Provide 4 panel lifting devices.

2.5 Finishes

A. Finish the surface of floor panels with floor covering material as indicated on the contract drawings. Where floor coverings are by the access floor manufacturer, the type, color and pattern shall be selected from manufacturer’s standard. All areas to be furnished with lami-nated floor panels must be maintained at ambient temperature between 50° to 90° F and at humidity level between 20% to 80% relative and shall remain within these ranges through in-stallation and occupancy.

B. Carpet tile: Access floor system shall be designed to accommodate a modular carpet tile (PosiTile) that precisely matches one carpet tile to one ConCore panel. This is accom-plished utilizing four precisely located positioning buttons on the carpet tile which engage in-to four positioning location holes within the top surface of the access floor panel. The carpet tile’s durable backing maintains dimensional stability, and holds the carpet tile flat without adhesives. Adhesives are not necessary and shall not be permitted on the Positile installation except where the carpet is cut and more than two positioners are removed.

1. Provide static dissipative carpet as scheduled on drawings.

a) Do not provide static dissipative carpet at Mechanical 126a.



2.6 Fabrication Tolerances

A. Floor panel flatness measured on a diagonal: +/- 0.035” B. Floor panel flatness measured along edges: +/- 0.025” C. Floor panel width or length of required size: +/- 0.010” D. Floor panel squareness tolerance: +/- 0.015”

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Preparation

A. Examine structural subfloor for unevenness, irregularities and dampness that would affect the quality and execution of the work. Do not proceed with installation until structural floor sur-faces are level, clean, and dry as completed by others.

B. Concrete sealers, if used, shall be identified and proven to be compatible with pedestal adhe-sive. Verify that adhesive achieves bond to slab before commencing work.

C. Verify dimensions on contract drawings, including level of interfaces including abutting floor, ledges and doorsills.

D. The General Contractor shall provide clear access, dry subfloor area free of construction de-bris and other trades throughout installation of access floor system.

E. Area to receive and store access floor materials shall be enclosed and maintained at ambient temperatures between 35° to 95° F and relative humidity levels between 20 to 80%. At least 24 hrs. before installation begins, all floor panels shall be stored at ambient temperatures be-tween 50° to 90° F and relative humidity levels between 20% to 80% and shall remain within these environmental limits throughout occupancy.

3.2 Installation

A. Pedestal locations shall be established from approved shop drawings so that mechanical and electrical work can be installed without interfering with pedestal installation.

B. Installation of access floor shall be coordinated with other trades to maintain the integrity of the installed system. All traffic on access floor shall be controlled by access floor installer. No traffic but that of access floor installers shall be permitted on any floor area for 24 hours to allow the pedestal adhesive to set. Access floor panels shall not be removed by other trades for 72 hours after their installation.

C. Floor system and accessories shall be installed under the supervision of the manufacturer’s authorized representative and according to manufacturer’s recommendations.

D. No dust or debris producing operations by other trades shall be allowed in areas where access floor is being installed to ensure proper bonding of pedestals to subfloor.

E. Access floor installer shall keep the subfloor broom clean as installation progresses.

F. Partially complete floors shall be braced against shifting to maintain the integrity of the in-stalled system where required.

G. Additional pedestals as needed shall support panels where floor is disrupted by columns, walls, and perimeter cutouts.



H. Understructure shall be aligned such that all uncut panels are interchangeable and fit snugly but do not bind when placed in alternate positions.

I. Finished floor shall be level, not varying more than 0.062” in 10 feet or 0.125” overall.

J. Inspect system prior to application of floor covering and replace any floor panels that are cracked, broken and structurally damaged and do not comply with specified requirements.

K. Installed panels shall be straight and square and spaced so that the distance from one end to the other of any line of 12 panels is not less than 24 feet and does not exceed 24’ 1/8”.

L. Acceptance: General contractor shall accept floor in whole or in part prior to allowing use by other trades.

M. All cable and wire openings shall be sealed with manufacturer’s removable cable cutout seal or grommets.



ACCESS FLOORING - SD LAMINATE 09 6901 - 1

SECTION 09 6901 - ACCESS FLOORING IN STATIC DISSIPATIVE LAMINATE AREAS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Section Includes

A. Work of this section includes, but is not limited to: access floor panels, floor coverings, un-derstructure and various electrical, data and communication accessories.

B. Location of (SDL) Static Dissipative Laminate:

1. Systems Equipment 114

1.2 Related Sections

A. Concrete sealer shall be compatible with pedestal adhesive, see Division 3.

B. Flooring transitions shall be provided with a joiner product as required for the specified floor-ing material. See Division 09 section 6513 “Resilient Base and Accessories.”

C. See Division 26 Section “Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems” for connection to ground of access flooring understructure. Note: The electrical engineer or contractor shall determine requirements for grounding and the electrical contractor shall provide the neces-sary labor and materials to electrically connect the access flooring to the building ground if it is required.

1.3 Environmental Conditions for Storage and Installation

A. Area to receive and store access floor materials shall be enclosed and maintained at ambient temperatures between 35° to 95° F and relative humidity levels between 20% to 80%. All floor panels shall be stored at ambient temperature between 50° to 90° F for at least 24 hours before installation begins. All areas of installation shall be enclosed and maintained at ambi-ent temperature between 50° to 90° F and at relative humidity levels between 20% to 80%, and shall remain within these environmental limits throughout occupancy.

1.4 References

A. CISCA (Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association) - “Recommended Test Pro-cedures for Access Floors” shall be used as a guideline when presenting load performance product information.

1.5 Performance Certification

A. Product tests shall be witnessed and certified by independent engineering and testing labora-tory based in the U.S. with a minimum of five years experience testing access floor compo-nents in accordance CISCA “Recommended Test Procedures for Access Floors”.

1.6 Country-of-Origin and Product Marking

A. Access floor materials shall comply with the provisions outlined in FAR Subpart 25.2 – Buy American Act – Construction Materials.

B. Floor panels shall be permanently marked with manufacturer’s name, product identification, manufacturing date and country-of-origin. Removable Product ID stickers are not accepta-ble.

ACCESS FLOORING – SD LAMINATE 09 6901 - 2 © 2014 Eckles Architecture and Engineering


1.7 Performance Requirements

A. Design Load (Allowable Load): Panel supported on actual understructure system shall be capable of supporting a point load of 1250 lbs applied on a one square inch area at any loca-tion on the panel without experiencing permanent set as defined by CISCA. The loading method used to determine design (allowable) load shall be in conformance with CISCA Con-centrated Load test method but with panel tested on actual understructure instead of steel blocks.

B. Safety Factor: Panel supported on actual understructure system shall withstand a point load of no less than (2) two times its design load rating on a one square inch area anywhere on the panel without failure when tested in accordance with CISCA A/F, Section 2, “Ultimate Load-ing”. Failure is defined as the point at which the system will no longer accept the load.

C. Ultimate Load: Panel supported on actual understructure system shall be capable of support-ing a point load of at least 2500 lbs applied through a load indentor on a one square inch area at any location on the panel without failure (i.e. minimum safety factor of 2) when tested in accordance with CISCA A/F, Section 2, “Ultimate Loading”.

D. Rolling Load: Panel supported on actual understructure system shall be able to withstand the following rolling loads at any location on the panel without developing a local and overall surface deformation greater than 0.040 inches when tested in accordance with CISCA A/F, Section 3, “Rolling Loads”. Note: wheel 1 and wheel 2 tests shall be performed on two sepa-rate panels.

CISCA Wheel 1: Size: 3” dia x 1 13/16” wide Load: 1000 lbs. Passes: 10

CISCA Wheel 2*: Size: (A) 6” dia x 2” wide Load: 800 lbs. Passes: 10,000

(B) 10” dia. X 4” wide *Note: For loads up to 1500 lbs., specify Wheel 2 (A). For loads greater than 1500 lbs.,

Specify Wheel 2 (B). E. Impact Load: Panel and supporting understructure (the system) shall be capable of support-

ing an impact load of 150 lbs. dropped from a height of 36 inches onto a one square inch area (using a round or square indentor) at any location on the panel when tested in accordance with CISCA A/F, Section 8, “Drop Impact Load Test”.

F. Panel Drop Test: Panel shall be capable of being dropped face up onto to a concrete slab from a height of 36”, after which it shall continue to meet all load performance requirements as previously defined.

G. Panel Cutout: Panel with an 8” diameter interior cutout supported on actual understructure shall be capable of maintaining its design load strength with a minimum safety factor of 2 an-ywhere on the panel without the use of additional supports.

H. Flammability: System shall meet Class A Flame spread requirements for flame spread and smoke development. Tests shall be performed in accordance with ASTM-E84-1998, Stand-ard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics for Building Materials.

I. Combustibility: All components of the access floor system shall qualify as non-combustible by demonstrating compliance with requirements of ASTM E 136, Standard Test Method for Be-havior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace at 750 deg C.



J. Recycled Content: Panel and understructure system shall be required to have a minimum post-consumer recycled content of 18% and a minimum total recycled content of 49%.

K. Axial Load: Pedestal support assembly shall provide a 6000 lb. axial load without perma-nent deformation when tested in accordance with CISCA A/F, Section 5, “Pedestal Axial Load Test”.

L. Overturning Moment: Pedestal support assembly shall provide an average overturning moment of 1000 in-lbs. when glued to a clean, sound, uncoated concrete surface when tested in accordance with CISCA A/F, Section 6, “Pedestal Overturning Moment Test”. ICBO number for the specific system or structural calculations shall be required attesting to the lat-eral stability of the system under seismic conditions.

M. Stringer Concentrated Load: Stringer shall be capable of withstanding a concentrated load of 450 lbs. placed in its midspan on a one square inch area using a round or square indentor without exceeding a permanent set of 0.010” after the load is removed when tested in accord-ance with CISCA A/F, Section 4, “Stringer Load Testing”.

1.8 Design Requirements:

A. Access floor system, where indicated on the design documents, shall consist of modular and removable fully encased cementitious filled welded steel panels supported on all four edges by structural steel members which are designed to bolt onto adjustable height pedestal assem-blies forming a modular grid pattern.

B. Panel shall be easily removed by one person with a suction cup lifting device and shall be in-terchangeable except where cut for special conditions.

C. Quantities, finished floor heights (FFH) and location of accessories shall be as specified on the contract drawings.

1.9 Submittals for Review

A. Detail sheets, for each proposed product type, which provide the necessary information to de-scribe the product and its performance.

B. Test reports, certified by an independent testing laboratory with a minimum of five years ex-perience testing access floor components in accordance with CISCA Recommended Test Procedures, certifying that component parts perform as specified.

1.10 Submittals for Information

A. Manufacturer’s installation instructions and guidelines.

B. Manufacturer’s Owner Manual outlining recommended care and maintenance procedures.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Manufacturers

A. Access floor system shall be as manufactured by Tate Access Floors, Inc. and shall consist of ConCore 1250 access floor panel supported by a bolted stringer understructure system.

B. Alternative products shall meet or exceed all requirements as indicated herein and must re-ceive prior written approval by the architect or designer.

1. Substitution requests shall be submitted to architect for review and approval prior to bid-ding according to Division I requirements.



C. Access floor manufacture shall be ISO9001: 2000 certified demonstrating it has a robust and well documented quality management system with continuous improvement goals and strate-gies.

D. Access floor manufacturer’s facilities shall be ISO14001:2004 certified demonstrating that they maintain an environmental management system.

E. Access floor manufacturer’s facilities shall be OHSAS 18001:2007 certified demonstrating that they maintain an Occupational Health and Safety Management system.

2.2 Support Components

Pedestals:

A. Pedestal assemblies shall be corrosive resistant, all steel welded construction, and shall pro-vide an adjustment range of +/- 1” for finished floor heights 6” or greater. Zinc electroplating shall be prohibited on all pedestal components, including head plate, threaded rod, adjustment nut, pedestal tube, base plate, and all fasteners.

B. Pedestal assemblies shall provide a means of leveling and locking the assembly at a selected height, which requires deliberate action to change height setting and prevents vibration dis-placement.

C. Hot dip galvanized steel pedestal head shall be welded to a threaded rod which includes a specially designed adjusting nut. The nut shall provide location lugs to engage the pedestal base assembly, such that deliberate action is required to change the height setting.

D. Hot dip galvanized pedestal base assembly shall consist of a formed steel plate with no less than 16 inches of bearing area, welded to a 7/8” square steel tube and shall be designed to en-gage the head assembly.

Stringers:

A. Stringers shall support each edge of panel.

B. Steel stringer shall have conductive galvannealed coating. Zinc electroplating shall be pro-hibited on stringers and stringer fasteners.

C. Stringers shall be individually and rigidly fastened to the pedestal with one machine screw for each foot of stringer length. Bolts shall provide positive electrical contact between the string-ers and pedestals. Connections depending on gravity or spring action are unacceptable.

D. Stringer grid shall be 4’ stringers in a basketweave configuration ensuring maximum lateral stability in all directions. (Also available in 2’ x 4’ and 2’ x 2’ grid patterns)

2.2 Panel Components

Floor Panels:

A. Panels shall consist of a top steel sheet welded to a formed steel bottom pan filled internally with a lightweight cementitious material. Mechanical or adhesive methods for attachment of the steel top and bottom sheets are unacceptable.

B. Floor panels shall be protected from corrosion by electro-deposited epoxy paint. The use of zinc electroplating shall be prohibited.



C. Cementitious fill material shall be totally encased within the steel welded shell except where cut for special conditions. Note: This greatly reduces the potential for dust in the environ-ment from exposed cement materials.

D. Perforated Directional Airflow Panels: Perforated steel airflow panels designed for static loads of 1250 lbs. shall be interchangeable with standard field panels and shall have 25% open surface area with the following air distribution capability without a damper: 765 cfm at 0.1-inch of H2O (static pressure). The panel shall be equipped with directional vanes for an-gular air flow across the entire face of a typical 78” high IT rack, providing a rack Total Air Capture (TAC) index of 93%. Perforated panels shall have the following load bearing capaci-ties:

1. Basis of Design: DPerf 1250.

a) Provide a quantity of 12 at Systems Equipment 114 to be located by mechani-cal engineer prior to installation.

2. Design Load: Panel supported on actual understructure shall be capable of sup-porting a safe working or design load of 1250 lbs. placed on a one square inch ar-ea, using a round or square indentor, at any location on the panel without yielding.

3. Safety Factor: (2) Times Design Load

4. Impact load: 150 lbs.

2.3 Accessories A. Air sealing grommet shall be installed on the edge of a factory placed cutout located

in the following position in the panel.

1. Perimeter Edge Cutout

a) The flange shall align with the left edge of the panel, 7.75” from the top edge and bottom edge of the panel

b) The cutout in the panel shall measure 7.875”x9.25” and shall be a punched penetration, saw cutting is not acceptable.

B. Provide manufacturer’s standard fascia plate, perimeter support, and grommets as required. C. Provide industry standard flooring transition components at all access flooring transitions to

fixed flooring. D. Provide 1% spare floor panels 60 square feet of understructure systems for each type used in

the project for maintenance stock. Deliver to project in manufacturer’s standard packaging clearly marked with the contents.

E. Provide panel lifting devices as indicated in Division 09 section 6900 “Access Flooring at Carpeted Areas.”

2.4 Finishes

A. Finish the surface of floor panels with static dissipative laminate material as indicated on the contract drawings. All areas to be furnished with laminated floor panels must be maintained at ambient temperature between 50° to 90° F and at humidity level between 20% to 80% rela-tive and shall remain within these ranges through installation and occupancy.



B. High-pressure laminate floor covering shall meet requirements of NEMA LD3, and shall con-form with one of the following grades: Grade HDM (1/16”/ 1.5mm).

C. High-pressure laminate floor coverings shall have an edge condition that is integral to the tile. Separate edge trim pieces are not acceptable.

D. All other tile coverings that require trim edge shall be applied to the panel’s top surface and shall not wrap around the panel’s edge.

E. Surface to Ground Resistance of Standard High Pressure Laminate Anti-Static Covering: Average test values shall be within the range of 1,000,000 ohms (1.0 x 106) to 20,000 megaohms (2.0 x 1010 ohms), as determined by testing in accordance with the test method for conductive flooring specified in Chapter 3 of NFPA 99, but modified to place one electrode on the floor surface and to attach one electrode to the understructure. Resistance shall be tested at 500 volts.

2.5 Fabrication Tolerances

A. Floor panel flatness measured on a diagonal: +/- 0.035”

B. Floor panel flatness measured along edges: +/- 0.025”

C. Floor panel width or length of required size: +/- 0.010”

D. Floor panel squareness tolerance: +/- 0.015”

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 Preparation

A. Examine structural subfloor for unevenness, irregularities and dampness that would affect the quality and execution of the work. Do not proceed with installation until structural floor sur-faces are level, clean, and dry as completed by others.

B. Concrete sealers, if used, shall be identified and proven to be compatible with pedestal adhe-sive. Verify that adhesive achieves bond to slab before commencing work.

C. Verify dimensions on contract drawings, including level of interfaces including abutting floor, ledges and doorsills.

D. The General Contractor shall provide clear access, dry subfloor area free of construction de-bris and other trades throughout installation of access floor system.

E. Area to receive and store access floor materials shall be enclosed and maintained at ambient temperatures between 35° to 95° F and relative humidity levels between 20 to 80%. At least 24 hrs. before installation begins, all floor panels shall be stored at ambient temperatures be-tween 50° to 90° F and relative humidity levels between 20% to 80% and shall remain within these environmental limits throughout occupancy.

3.2 Installation

A. Pedestal locations shall be established from approved shop drawings so that mechanical and electrical work can be installed without interfering with pedestal installation.

B. Installation of access floor shall be coordinated with other trades to maintain the integrity of the installed system. All traffic on access floor shall be controlled by access floor installer. No traffic but that of access floor installers shall be permitted on any floor area for 24 hours to allow the pedestal adhesive to set. Access floor panels shall not be removed by other trades for 72 hours after their installation.



C. Floor system and accessories shall be installed under the supervision of the manufacturer’s authorized representative and according to manufacturer’s recommendations.

D. No dust or debris producing operations by other trades shall be allowed in areas where access floor is being installed to ensure proper bonding of pedestals to subfloor.

E. Access floor installer shall keep the subfloor broom clean as installation progresses.

F. Partially complete floors shall be braced against shifting to maintain the integrity of the in-stalled system where required.

G. Additional pedestals as needed shall support panels where floor is disrupted by columns, walls, and cutouts.

H. Understructure shall be aligned such that all uncut panels are interchangeable and fit snugly but do not bind when placed in alternate positions.

I. Finished floor shall be level, not varying more than 0.062” in 10 feet or 0.125” overall.


LAWRENCE COUNTY WALL COVERINGS PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 09 7215 - 1 © 2014 Eckles Architecture and Engineering

SECTION 09 7215 – WALL COVERINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Custom Digital Vinyl Wall Covering (VWC1 & VWC2).

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include data on physical characteristics, durability, fade resistance, and flame-resistance characteristics.

B. Shop Drawings: Show location and extent of each wall-covering type. Indicate pattern placement, seams and termination points.

C. Samples for Verification: Full width by 36-inch- long section of wall covering from lot to be used for each type of wall covering indicated for each color, texture, and pattern required. 1. Show complete pattern repeat. 2. Mark top and face of material.

D. Schedule: For wall coverings. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.

E. Maintenance Data: For wall coverings to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide wall coverings and adhesives with the following fire-test-response characteristics as determined by testing identical products applied with identical adhesives to substrates per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As follows, per ASTM E 84:

a. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. b. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.

B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate appearance and aesthetic effects and set quality standards for installation. 1. Provide a mockup for each type of wall covering on each substrate required. Comply

with requirements in ASTM F 1141.


WALL COVERINGS LAWRENCE COUNTY 09 7215- 2 PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install wall coverings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.

B. Lighting: Do not install wall covering until a permanent level of lighting is provided on the surfaces to receive wall covering.

C. Ventilation: Provide continuous ventilation during installation and for not less than the time recommended by wall-covering manufacturer for full drying or curing.


A. Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Wall-Covering Material: Full-size, unopened factory-packaged units equal to at least 5

percent of amount of each type installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed in Part 2 "Wall-Covering Products" Article.

2.02 WALL-COVERING PRODUCTS

A. General: Provide rolls of each type of wall covering from the same run number or dye lot.

B. (VWC1 & VWC2) Wall Covering as scheduled or otherwise indicated: 1. Available Products:

a. Digital Vinyl Wall Covering Type II as supplied by Fashion Wallcovering, contact: Eileen Gray 1-800-362-9930.

b. Similar products meeting specified requirements by manufacturer approved subject to Section 01 6000 Product Requirements.

2. Vinyl Wall-Covering Standards: Provide mildew-resistant products complying with FS CCC-W-408D and CFFA-W-101 for Type II, Medium-Duty products.

3. Total Weight Excluding Coatings: min 20 oz/ lin. yd.

4. Width: 54 inches.

5. Min 2oz/ sy nonwoven fiber backing.

6. Stain-Resistant Coating: DuPont; Tedlar/Teflon, or manufacturer's standard, with prior approval.

LAWRENCE COUNTY WALL COVERINGS PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 09 7215 - 3

7. Digital Image: 72-100 DPI at final size, Images by Architect as TIFF or EPS in CMYK color.

C. Adhesive: Mildew-resistant, nonstaining, strippable adhesive, for use with specific wall covering and substrate application, as recommended in writing by wall-covering manufacturer, and with a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

D. Primer/Sealer: Mildew-resistant primer/sealer as indicated and complying with requirements in Section 09912 Painting, and recommended in writing by wall-covering manufacturer for intended substrate.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for levelness, wall plumbness, maximum moisture content, and other conditions affecting performance of work.


3.02 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation.

B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair wall covering's bond, including mold, mildew, oil, grease, incompatible primers, dirt, and dust.

C. Prepare substrates to achieve a smooth, dry, clean, structurally sound surface free of flaking, unsound coatings, cracks, and defects. 1. Gypsum Board: Prime with primer recommended by wall-covering manufacturer.

2. Painted Surfaces: Treat areas susceptible to pigment bleeding.

D. Check painted surfaces for pigment bleeding. Sand gloss, semigloss, and eggshell finish with fine sandpaper.

E. Remove hardware and hardware accessories, electrical plates and covers, light fixture trims, and similar items.

F. Acclimatize wall-covering materials by removing them from packaging in the installation areas not less than 24 hours before installation.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with wall-covering manufacturers' written installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply.

WALL COVERINGS LAWRENCE COUNTY 09 7215- 4 PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY

B. Cut wall-covering strips in roll number sequence. Change roll numbers at partition breaks and corners.

C. Install wall covering with no gaps or overlaps, no lifted or curling edges, and no visible shrinkage.

D. Install seams vertical and plumb. No horizontal seams are permitted.

E. Fully bond wall covering to substrate. Remove air bubbles, wrinkles, blisters, and other defects.

F. Trim edges and seams for color uniformity, pattern match, and tight closure. Butt seams without any overlay or spacing between strips.

3.04 CLEANING

A. Remove excess adhesive at finished seams, perimeter edges, and adjacent surfaces.

B. Use cleaning methods recommended in writing by wall-covering manufacturer.

C. Replace strips that cannot be cleaned.

D. Reinstall hardware and hardware accessories, electrical plates and covers, light fixture trims, and similar items.


LAWRENCE COUNTY STONE STOOL PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 09 7523 - 1 © 2014 Eckles Architecture and Engineering

SECTION 09 7523 – STONE STOOL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following interior applications of dimension stone: 1. Marble window stools.

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 07 Section “Joint Sealants” for sealing joints in stone with elastomeric sealants.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For marble stools, setting, and grouting materials.

B. Shop Drawings: Show details of fabrication and installation of stone stools, including dimensions and profiles of stone units; arrangement and details of jointing, supporting, anchoring, and bond-ing; and details showing relationship with, attachment to, and reception of related work.

C. Stone Samples: Set of manufacturer’s colors, grades, finishes available; not less than 4-inches square.

D. Sealant Compatibility Test Report: From sealant manufacturer, complying with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" and indicating that sealants will not stain or damage stone.

E. Maintenance Data: For interior stone facing to include in maintenance manuals. Include Product Data for stone-care products used or recommended by Installer and names, addresses, and telephone numbers of local sources for products.


A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who employs only workers trained in installing tile products similar to those required for this Project.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain stone through one source from a single quarry/ manufacturer. Obtain each variety/color of stone stools, regardless size and finish, from the same manufacturing run of units to provide materials of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties.

C. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from a single manufacturer and each aggregate from one source or producer.


A. Deliver materials to Project site in factory wrappings, clearly labeled with identification of manu-facturer and lot number. Store materials off the ground in a dry, warm, well-ventilated, weather-tight location.

STONE STOOL LAWRENCE COUNTY 09 7523 - 2 PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for delivery, storage, and handling requirements.


A. Maintain air and material temperatures to comply with requirements of installation material manufacturers, but not less than 50 deg F during installation and for 7 days after completion.

B. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions of construction to receive interior stone facing by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the

Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabrication without field measurements. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.

C. Time delivery and installation of interior stone facing to avoid extended on-site storage and to coordinate with work adjacent to interior stone facing.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Marble: Complying with ASTM C 503. Uniform, fine to medium-grained light stone with gray veining. Finish: Polished.

B. Stone Fabrication: Fabricate in sizes and shapes required to comply with requirements indicated, subject to Architect’s approval, including details on Drawings and Shop Drawings. 1. Nominal Thickness: ¾”. 2. Edge Detail: Straight edge.

a. For straight edges, provide slightly eased corners. 3. Ends: Finish overhanging edge to match exposed edge. 4. Assemble window stools by bonding joints with stone adhesive. Mask areas adjacent to

joints to prevent adhesive smears. Clamp units to temporary bracing to ensure that window stools are properly aligned and joints are minimum width.

C. Select stone for intended use to prevent fabricated units from containing cracks, seams, and starts that could impair structural integrity or function. 1. Repairs that are characteristic of the varieties specified are acceptable provided they do not

impair structural integrity or function and are not aesthetically unpleasing, as judged by Architect.

D. Comply with recommendations of Marble Institute of America's (MIA) "Dimensional Stone--Design Manual IV."

E. Cut stone to produce pieces of thickness, size, and shape indicated and to comply with fabrication and construction tolerances recommended by applicable stone association. 1. Where items are installed with adhesive or where edges of stone is visible in the finished

work, make items uniform in thickness and of identical thickness for each type of item; gage back of stone if necessary.

2. Clean sawed backs of stones to remove rust stains and iron particles.

LAWRENCE COUNTY STONE STOOL PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 09 7523 - 3

3. Dress joints straight and at right angle to face, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Provide openings, reveals, and similar features as needed to accommodate adjacent work.

F. Finish exposed faces and edges of stone to comply with requirements indicated for finish of each type of stone required and to match approved Samples.

G. Carefully inspect finished stone units at fabrication plant for compliance with requirements for appearance, material, and fabrication. Replace defective units. 1. Grade and mark stone for overall uniform appearance when assembled in place. Natural

variations in appearance are acceptable if installed stone units match range of colors and other appearance characteristics represented in approved Samples.

2.02 SETTING MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II. Provide natural color, white.

B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.

C. Aggregate: ASTM C 144 and as indicated below: 1. For joints narrower than 1/4 inch, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing No. 16

sieve. 2. White-Mortar Aggregates: Natural, white sand or ground, white stone.

D. Molding Plaster: ASTM C 59.

E. Water: Potable.

F. Setting Shims: Resilient plastic shims, nonstaining to stone, sized to suit joint thicknesses.

G. Mortar and Grout Mixes: Comply with referenced standards and with manufacturers' written in-structions. Do not use admixtures.

H. Spotting Plaster: Stiff mix of molding plaster and water.

I. Pigmented Pointing Mortar: Select and proportion pigments with other ingredients to produce col-or required. Do not exceed pigment-to-cement ratio of 1:10, by weight.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where stone stools will be installed, with Installer pre-sent, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of installed granite.

B. Carefully inspect finished stone units at fabrication plant for compliance with requirements for ap-pearance, material, and fabrication. Replace defective units.

C. Advise installers of other work about specific requirements for placement of inserts to be used by interior stone facing Installer. Furnish installers of other work with Drawings or templates showing locations of these items.

STONE STOOL LAWRENCE COUNTY 09 7523 - 4 PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean dirty or stained stone surfaces by removing soil, stains, and foreign materials before setting. Clean stone by thoroughly scrubbing with fiber brushes and then drenching with clear water. Use only mild cleaning compounds that contain no caustic or harsh materials or abrasives.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Set stone to comply with requirements indicated on Drawings and Shop Drawings. Install anchors, supports, fasteners, and other attachments indicated or necessary to secure stone in place. Shim and adjust to set stone accurately in locations indicated, with edges and faces aligned according to established relationships and indicated tolerances.

B. Set stone units level, plumb, and true with uniform joint widths. Use temporary shims to maintain joint width.

C. Provide expansion, control, and pressure-relieving joints of widths and at locations required. 1. Keep expansion, control, and pressure-relieving joints free of plaster, mortar, grout, and oth-

er rigid materials.

D. Remove and replace damaged and defective stone in a manner that results in matching approved samples, complying with other requirements, and showing no evidence of replacement.

E. Protect surfaces, edges, and corners from construction damage. Use securely fastened untreated wood, plywood, or heavy cardboard to prevent damage.

3.04 INSTALLATION OF STONE WINDOW STOOLS

A. Set stone window stools on masonry in a full bed of mortar or water-cleanable epoxy adhesive. Hold setting material back from exposed edges of joints to allow for pointing with sealant.

B. Where window stools are too long to be installed in one piece, assemble by bonding joints with stone adhesive as units are set. Mask areas adjacent to joints to prevent adhesive smears. Clamp units in place to ensure that window stools are properly aligned and joints are minimum width.

C. Where joints are indicated in window stools maintain alignment across joints. Use temporary shims as necessary to maintain joint width.

3.05 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES

A. Variation from Plumb: For vertical lines and surfaces, do not exceed 1/8 inch in 96 inches, 1/4 inch maximum.

B. Variation from Level: For lintels, sills, chair rails, horizontal bands, horizontal grooves, and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, 3/8 inch maximum.

C. Variation of Linear Building Line: For position shown in plan and related portion of walls and partitions, do not exceed 1/8 inch in 96 inches, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, 3/8 inch maximum.

LAWRENCE COUNTY STONE STOOL PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 09 7523 - 5

D. Variation in Cross-Sectional Dimensions: For thickness of walls from dimensions indicated, do not exceed plus or minus 1/8 inch.

E. Variation in Joint Width: Do not vary joint thickness more than 1/16 inch or 1/4 of nominal joint width, whichever is less.

F. Variation in Plane between Adjacent Stone Units (Lipping): Do not exceed 1/32-inch difference between planes of adjacent units.

3.06 JOINT-SEALANT INSTALLATION

A. Prepare joints and apply sealants of type and at locations indicated to comply with applicable requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." Remove temporary shims before applying sealants.


A. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean interior stone facing as work progresses. Remove adhesive, grout, mortar, and sealant smears immediately.

B. Remove and replace interior stone facing of the following description: 1. Broken, chipped, stained, or otherwise damaged stone. Stone may be repaired if methods

and results are approved by Architect. 2. Defective stone facing. 3. Defective joints, including misaligned joints. 4. Interior stone facing and joints not matching approved Samples and mockups. 5. Interior stone facing not complying with other requirements indicated.

C. Replace in a manner that results in interior stone facing's matching approved Samples and mockups, complying with other requirements, and showing no evidence of replacement.

D. Clean interior stone facing no fewer than six days after completion of grouting and pointing, using clean water and soft rags or stiff-bristle fiber brushes. Do not use wire brushes, acid-type cleaning agents, cleaning compounds with caustic or harsh fillers, or other materials or methods that could damage stone.

E. Sealer Application: Apply stone sealer to comply with stone producer's and sealer manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations.

3.08 PROTECTION

A. Protect stone surfaces, edges, and corners from construction damage. Use securely fastened untreated wood, plywood, or heavy cardboard to prevent damage.

B. Before inspection for Substantial Completion, remove protective coverings and clean surfaces.


LAWRENCE COUNTY ACOUSTIC ROOM COMPONENTS PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 09 8400 - 1 © 2014 Eckles Architecture and Engineering

SECTION 09 8400 – ACOUSTIC ROOM COMPONENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Fabric-wrapped sound absorptive panels. 2. Fabric-wrapped absorptive/diffusive panels.

B. Related Sections: 1. Division 09 Section “Gypsum Board Assemblies” for acoustical sealant. 2. Division 09 Section “Acoustical Panel Ceilings” for lay-in suspension systems.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. ISO 10534 - Determination of sound absorption coefficient and impedance in impedance tubes - Part 1: Method using standing wave ratio.

B. AES-4id-2001: AES Information Document for Room Acoustics & Sound Reinforcement Systems – Characterization & Measurement of Surface Scattering Uniformity.

C. American Society for Testing & Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM E 1050-98 - Standard Test Method for Impedance and Absorption of Acoustical

Materials Using a Tube, Two Microphones, and a Digital Frequency Analysis System

2. ASTM C 423 - Sound Absorption & Sound Absorption Coefficients by the Reverberation Room Method

3. ASTM E 84: Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials

4. ASTM C423 Standard Test Method for Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients by the Reverberation Room Method.

5. ASTM E84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

6. ASTM E795 Standard Practices for Mounting Test Specimens During Sound Absorption Tests.


A. Surface Burning Characteristics (ASTM E84): 1. Composite Flame Spread Rating: 25 (maximum). 2. Smoke Developed: 450 (maximum).

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit standard manufacturer product cutsheet showing product and selected options. Attach index of distinct panels indicating number of like panels, panel size and thickness, edge condition and fabric selection.

ACOUSTIC ROOM COMPONENTS LAWRENCE COUNTY 09 8400 - 2 PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY

B. Product performance data: For sound and vibration isolation assemblies, as appropriate, submit independent test reports: 1. Airborne Sound Transmission Loss Test Report per ASTM E90-90 2. Impact Sound Transmission Loss Test Report per ASTM E492-90

C. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of acoustical panels certifying that products furnished comply with requirements.

D. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing layout, edge profiles and panel components, including anchorage, accessories, attachment system and finish. 1. Setting drawings and templates for built-in or embedded anchor devices. 2. Locations for blocking.

E. Diffusor Panel Samples: 1. Submit full-size verification samples.

F. Absorptive/Diffusive Panel Samples: 1. Submit 6-inches-square fabric sample for each type of fabric specified. 2. Submit 8-inches-square panel with sound diffusive binary amplitude grating partially

exposed.

G. Maintenance Data: For each panel and facing type to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 01.

H. Test Reports: Certified test reports available showing compliance with specified performance requirements. 1. Standard Systems: Copies of previous test reports substantiating performance of system in

lieu of retesting.


A. Installer: Only qualified installers with minimum 3 years experience installing similar products shall install panels.

B. Flame Spread / Smoke Developed Characteristics: Tested by independent, accredited NVLAP facility according to ASTM E 84 and NFPA 255.

C. Conduct Pre-installation Meetings at project site as specified in Section 01 3100 Project Management and Coordination.


A. Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact 1. Do not deliver products before normal environmental conditions for the space are controlled.

B. Store materials protected from exposure to harmful environmental conditions and at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by the manufacturer

C. Store products in original packaging until ready to install. Store panels in temperature and humidity controlled conditions for 24 hours prior to installation and protect from moisture and infestation. Protect fabric finish from elements that would puncture, tear, snag or otherwise damage the fabric.

LAWRENCE COUNTY ACOUSTIC ROOM COMPONENTS PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 09 8400 - 3

D. Store cartons of wood fiber ceiling panels open at each end to stabilize moisture content and temperature.

E. Fabric wrapped wall panels greater than 16 square feet shall be carried by a minimum of 2 people. Never set panels down on fabric faces, only on backsides, fabric side up.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical products until construction in spaces is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. 1. Store components in the environmentally stable space for at least the duration of time

recommended by the manufacturer prior to installation.

B. Air-Quality Limitations: Protect acoustical wall panels from exposure to airborne odors, such as tobacco smoke, and install panels under conditions free from odor contamination of ambient air.

C. Field Measurements: Verify wall surface dimensions by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the

Work, establish surface dimensions and proceed with fabricating acoustical wall panels without field measurements. Coordinate wall construction to ensure that actual surface dimensions correspond to established dimensions.

1.08 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty, Diffusors and Absorptive/Diffusive panels: Executed by manufacturer and installer, agreeing to repair or replace units and components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. This warranty is in addition to, and not a limitation of other rights Owner may have under Contract Documents. 1. Submit a written and dated warranty issued by the manufacturer warranting against defects

in materials or manufacturing for a period of one year from Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate acoustic panels to sizes, types, and configurations indicated.

B. Shop Assembly of Fabric-Wrapped Acoustic Panels: Panel cores and templates to be preassembled and wrapped with scrim (if necessary) and fabric in the shop prior to arrival at project site. No field assembly should be required.

C. Fabricate through-mounted panels with 1-inch face panel and 1-inch edge framing and integral fiberglass board acoustical insulation or provide 1-inch face panel over field applied furring strips and fiberglass board sound insulation.

D. Dimensional Tolerances of Finished Units: Plus or minus 1/16 inch for the following: 1. Thickness. 2. Edge straightness. 3. Overall length and width. 4. Squareness from corner to corner.


2.02 FABRIC-WRAPPED SOUND ABSORPTIVE PANELS:

A. Products and Manufacturers: 1. Basis-of-Design: Hardside Acoustical Panels by Kinetics Noise Control. 2. Colorsonix MBI Products. 3. Conwed designscapes distributed by A.L. Harding & Co.

B. Hardside Acoustical Panels: 1. Thickness: as indicated on Drawings.

2. Size: As indicated on the drawings up to a maximum 48 inch x 120 inch panel.

3. Core: Hardside Panel: fiberglass in scheduled thickness, 5 - 7 pcf density

4. Edge Detail: Square hardened with non-resin, Class A hardening solution.

5. Facing: 100% polyester fabric, Style 2539 by Guilford of Maine. a. Color: As noted in the Color Schedule. b. Scrim: White, open weave, fire-rated cloth (required for light-colored fabrics.

6. Sound Absorption (ASTM C423): Noise Reduction Coefficient as follows: a. 2 1/8 inch Panel: 1.05, minimum.

7. Mounting Accessories: Z-clips, Z-brackets.

C. Fabrication 1. General: Treat fabric wrapped panels using heat shrink process to develop fully taut facing. 2. Hardside Panels: Wrap panel edges and return facing fabric 1 - 2 inches on back of panel.

Secure fabric with adhesive applied to edges and back of panel only.

2.03 FABRIC-WRAPPED ABSORPTIVE/DIFFUSIVE PANELS:

A. Products and Manufacturers:

1. Basis of Design: Binary Amplitude Diffsorbor (BAD) Panels.

B. BAD Panels: 1. Thickness: as indicated on Drawings.

2. Size: As indicated on the drawings up to a maximum 48 inch x 120 inch panel.

3. Template: 1/8-inches-thick high density fiberboard, density not less than 95 pounds per cubic foot.

4. Core: Semi-rigid fiberglass, density not less than 6 pounds per cubic foot and not more than 8 pounds per cubic foot.

5. Edge Detail: Square hardened with non-resin, Class A hardening solution.

6. Facing: 100% polyester fabric, Style 2539 by Guilford of Maine. a. Color: As noted in the Color Schedule.

b. Scrim: White, open weave, fire-rated cloth (required for light-colored fabrics.

7. Sound Absorption (ASTM C423): Noise Reduction Coefficient as follows: a. 2 1/8 inch Panel: 1.05, minimum.

b. 4 inch Panel: 1.09, minimum.

8. Weight: 0.625 lbs per square foot (1-inch-thickness).


9. Mounting Accessories: Metal impaling clips and self-adhesive hook & loop tape (Velcro or similar).

C. Fabrication 1. General: Treat fabric wrapped panels using heat shrink process to develop fully taut facing. 2. BAD Panels: Wrap panel edges and return facing fabric 1 - 2 inches on back of panel.

Secure fabric with adhesive applied to edges and back of panel only.

D. Fabric: Open weave, class A, polyester, without backing. 1. Facing: 100% polyester fabric, Style 3582 by Guilford of Maine. 2. Color: As noted in the Color Schemes. 3. Scrim: White, open weave, fire-rated cloth (required for light-colored fabrics.)

E. Surface Burning Characteristics (ASTM E84): 1. Composite Flame Spread Rating: 25 (maximum). 2. Smoke Developed: 450 (maximum).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Comply with manufacturer’s product data, including product technical bulletins, product catalog installation instructions and product carton instructions for installation.

3.02 EXAMINATION

A. Site Verification of Conditions: Verify that substrate or supporting structure, which has been previously installed under other sections, is acceptable for product installation in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. 1. Examine substrates and blocking, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements

for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting panel performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

2. Commencement of installation constitutes acceptance of prior work.

3.03 PREPARATION

A. Protection: Protect surrounding work so as to avoid damage during installation of Panels.

B. Inspect substrate and ensure surface is flat, clean and dry without protruding elements that would otherwise interfere with panel installation.

C. Inspect substrate and supporting construction to ensure completeness of prior work and structural integrity.

D. Field Measure: Prior to commencing installation, measure panels and ensure that dimensions correspond to field measured dimensions of installation area.


3.04 INSTALLATION – SOUND ABSORPTIVE PANELS & SOUND ABSORPTIVE/DIFFUSIVE PANELS

A. Install panels using metal impaling clips or self-adhesive hook & loop tape supplied with panels.

B. Install panels so that fabric-covered side with template faces into occupied space. Rectangular panels have no designated top or bottom and may be installed in either direction. Refer to architectural drawings for orientation of non-rectangular panels.

C. Construction Tolerances for Fabric Wrapped Acoustical Panels: As follows: 1. Variation from Plumb and Level: Plus or minus 1/16 inch. 2. Variation of Joints from Hairline: Not more than 1/16 inch.

3.05 ADJUSTING, CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Protect installed work from damage due to subsequent construction activity, including temperature and humidity limitations and dust control, so that the work will be without damage and deterioration at the time of acceptance by the Owner.

B. Following initial installation, adjust mounting hardware or suspension system so that removable panels can be removed easily, yet stay safely secured upon replacement. Adjust panels so that surfaces are aligned, flush and level or plumb and gaps in between units are of a consistent width and straight.

C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, which ensure finished panels and fabrics are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

D. Replace materials that cannot be cleaned and repaired, in a manner approved by Architect, before time of Substantial Completion.

E. Following installation, clean fabrics with high quality fabric cleaner per manufacturer’s instructions. Test for color fastness on scrap or concealed material.

F. Follow manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning panels soiled during installation. Replace panels that cannot be cleaned to as new condition. 1. After installation, Protect finish products against dirt, water and contact that would puncture,

snag, tear or otherwise damage panels and fabrics.

G. Keep site free from accumulation of waste and debris.

H. Adjust height and orientation of components according to Acoustic Consultant’s instructions prior to field finishing.

I. Touch up any minor finish damage.

J. Clip loose threads; remove pills and extraneous materials.

K. Remove and reinstall improperly installed material.

L. Remove damaged or discolored material, or material that cannot be properly cleaned or repaired in a manner approved by Architect, and install new material to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.


M. Follow manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning panels soiled during installation. Replace panels that cannot be cleaned to as new condition. 1. Clean fabric on panels with high quality fabric cleaner per manufacturer’s instructions. Test

for color fastness on scrap or concealed material.

2. After installation, adjusting, and finishing, clean dirt from diffusor surfaces with white, cotton cloth wetted with water and mild or diluted detergent.

N. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, which ensure wall panels are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 1. Protect installed work from damage due to subsequent construction activity, including

temperature and humidity limitations and dust control, so that the work will be without damage and deterioration at the time of acceptance by the Owner.

2. Protect finish products against dirt, water and contact that would puncture, snag, tear or otherwise damage panels and fabrics.

O. Clean adjacent surfaces and remove unused product and debris from site. Keep site free from accumulation of waste and debris. Remove surplus materials, rubbish, and debris resulting from wall panel installation, on completion of the Work, and leave areas of installation in a neat and clean condition.


LAWRENCE COUNTY PAINTING PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 09 9100 - 1 © 2014 Eckles Architecture and Engineering

SECTION 09 9100 - PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of exposed exterior and interior items and surfaces. 1. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to

shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections. 2. Premium Dry-Erase Wall Coating.

B. Paint exposed surfaces, except where these Specifications indicate that the surface or material is not to be painted or is to remain natural. If an item or a surface is not specifically mentioned, paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces. If a color of finish is not indicated, Architect will select from standard colors and finishes available. 1. Painting includes field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts (including color

coding), hangers, exposed steel and iron supports, and surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment that do not have a factory-applied final finish.

C. Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts, and labels. 1. Prefinished items include the following factory-finished components:

a. Architectural woodwork. b. Finished mechanical and electrical equipment. c. Light fixtures.

2. Concealed surfaces include walls or ceilings in the following generally inaccessible spaces: a. Foundation spaces. b. Furred areas. c. Ceiling plenums. d. Pipe spaces. e. Duct shafts.

3. Finished metal surfaces include the following: a. Anodized aluminum. b. Stainless steel. c. Chromium plate.

4. Operating parts include moving parts of operating equipment and the following: a. Valve and damper operators. b. Linkages. c. Sprinkler heads d. Sensing devices. e. Motor and fan shafts.

5. Labels: Do not paint over UL, FMG, or other code-required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

PAINTING LAWRENCE COUNTY 09 9100 - 2 PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY

D. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for shop priming ferrous metal. 2. Division 08 Section "Steel Doors and Frames" for factory priming steel doors and frames. 3. Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for surface preparation of gypsum board. 4. Division 09 Section “Wood Flooring Patching and Finishing” for wood floor finish coatings 5. Division 32 Paving Sections for painted markings on concrete and asphalt paving

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. General: Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D 16 apply to this Section. 1. Eggshell refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 20 and 35 when measured at

a 60-degree meter.

2. Semigloss refers to medium-sheen finish with a gloss range between 35 and 70 when measured at a 60-degree meter.

3. Flat refers to a lusterless or matte finish with a gloss range below 15 when measured at an 85-degree meter.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each paint system indicated. Include block fillers and primers. 1. Material List: An inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each material and

cross-reference specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by manufacturer's catalog number and general classification.

B. Shop Drawings: for painted wall graphics

C. Samples for Verification: For each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate actual conditions, on representative Samples of the actual substrate. 1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square. 2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. 4. Label each Sample for location and application area. 5. Submit 3 Samples on the following substrates for Architect's review of color and texture

only: a. Concrete: 4-inch-square Samples for each color and finish

b. Painted Wood: 8-inch- square Samples for each color and material on hardboard.

c. Stained or Natural Wood: 4-by-8-inchamples of natural- or stained-wood finish on representative oak and maple surfaces.

d. Ferrous Metal: 3-inch-square Samples of flat metal and 6-inch-size long Samples of solid metal for each color and finish.

D. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following: 1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations

indicated on Drawings and in schedules.

LAWRENCE COUNTY PAINTING PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 09 9100 - 3


A. Applicator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in applying paints and coatings similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in applications with a record of successful in-service performance. 1. A qualified graphic artist or sign painter shall be required to paint wall graphics and court

markings as indicated on the drawings with architects approval.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain block fillers and primers for each coating system from the same manufacturer as the finish coats.

C. Benchmark Samples (Mockups): Provide a full-coat benchmark finish sample for each type of coating and substrate required. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P5. Duplicate finish of approved sample Submittals.

1. Architect will select one room or surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each type of coating and substrate. a. Wall Surfaces: Provide samples on at least 100 sq. ft. b. Small Areas and Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.

2. Apply benchmark samples, according to requirements for the completed Work, after permanent lighting and other environmental services have been activated. Provide required sheen, color, and texture on each surface. a. After finishes are accepted, Architect will use the room or surface to evaluate coating

systems of a similar nature.

3. Final approval of colors will be from benchmark samples.

D. Avoid traffic over painted floor finishes for 7 days, or as otherwise recommended by manufacturer, while coating cures sufficiently to resist foot traffic. Protect painted floor finishes from damage due to construction activities for the duration of the Project.


A. Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label and the following information: 1. Product name or title of material. 2. Product description (generic classification or binder type). 3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. 4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents. 5. Thinning instructions. 6. Application instructions. 7. Color name and number. 8. VOC content.

B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F. 1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.



A. Environmental Limitations: Do not apply coatings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. 1. Apply waterborne paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding

air are between 50 and 90 deg F.

2. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air are between 45 and 95 deg F.

3. Apply electrostatic finishes only when surface of painted part and air temperature remain over 60 degrees F prior to application and for at least 3 hours after coating application.


A. Furnish extra paint materials from the same production run as the materials applied and in the quantities described below. Package with protective covering for storage and identify with labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to Owner. 1. Quantity: Furnish Owner with extra paint materials in new unopened containers, in

quantities indicated below: a. Exterior finish coats: 1 gal. of each type and color applied. b. Interior finish coats: 1 gal. of each type and color applied.

B. Furnish clean, unused templates or stencils matching those actually used for application of painted wall graphics. Provide one of each size and type. Provide packaged and labeled for protection in storage.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed in other Part 2 articles. 1. Products by other manufacturers will be acceptable only in compliance with the

requirements for Product Substitutions and Comparable Products in Section 01 6000 “Products”

B. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles: 1. Basis of Design: Sherwin-Williams Co. (S-W) 2. Basis of Design, High Performance Coatings: Tnemec Company (T) 3. PPG Industries, Inc., Pittsburgh Paints (PP)

C. Premium Dry Erase Wall Coating as scheduled or otherwise indicated: 1. Available Products:

a. (P6) Basis of Design: 1) Dry Erase Clear Semi-Gloss Coating as supplied by Sherwin Williams.

Contact: Jim Geist 412-389-5635. b. Approved Equal products

1) Designtex One-Part Dry Erase Paint as supplied by Designtex. Contact: Duane Cardamone 412-477-8993.


2) Idea Paint Dry Erase Paint as supplied by IdeaPaint. Contact: Mark 1-800-393-5250.

2. Installation shall be as required by manufacturers standards installation methods. a. In locations as scheduled product shall be installed at entire exposed wall surface

overtop of finished paint scheduled.

2.02 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, and finish-coat materials that are compatible with one another and with the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

B. VOC Content of Field-Applied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide products that comply with the following limits for VOC content, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24); these requirements do not apply to paints and coatings that are applied in a fabrication or finishing shop: 1. Flat Topcoat Paints: VOC content of not more than 50 g/L. 2. Nonflat Topcoat Paints: VOC content of not more than 150 g/L. 3. Anti-Corrosive and Anti-Rust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: VOC not more than 250

g/L. 4. Floor Coatings: VOC not more than 100 g/L. 5. Shellacs, Clear: VOC not more than 730 g/L. 6. Shellacs, Pigmented: VOC not more than 550 g/L. 7. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: VOC content of not more than 200 g/L.

C. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best-quality paint material of the various coating types specified that are factory formulated and recommended by manufacturer for application indicated. Paint-material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable. 1. Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate colors or

materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers. Furnish manufacturer's material data and certificates of performance for proposed substitutions.

D. Colors: As indicated by manufacturer's designations. If not indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.03 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY BLOCK FILLERS

A. Standard Application: Factory-formulated high-performance latex block filler for epoxy topcoat.

B. Wet or humid areas: Factory-formulated high-performance waterborne cementitious acrylic block filler for waterbased epoxy topcoat.

C. Furnish manufacturer's material data and certificates of performance for proposed substitutions.

2.04 EXTERIOR PRIMERS

A. Exterior Galvanized Metal Primer: Factory-formulated galvanized metal primer for exterior application.


B. Exterior Ferrous Metal Primer: Fast-Curing, Two-Component, Moisture-Cured Aromatic Urethane Zinc-Rich primer for exterior application, compatible with shop primers specified in Division 05 Sections and with specified finish coats.

C. Exterior Industrial-Grade Acrylic Coating System: Factory-formulated adhesion-promoting primer.

D. See Division 05 Sections for factory-applied primer coats.

2.05 INTERIOR PRIMERS

A. Interior Concrete and Masonry Primer: Factory-formulated alkali-resistant acrylic-latex interior primer for interior application.

B. Interior Epoxy Primer: 1. Gypsum: Penetrating low-odor primer for sealing porous substrates, for interior application

2. Standard CMU applications: Factory-formulated acrylic-latex interior primer for interior application under epoxy paint

3. Humid-area CMU: Factory-formulated waterborne cementitious acrylic block filler for interior application.

C. Interior Gypsum Board Primer: Factory-formulated latex-based primer for interior application.

D. Interior Wood Primer for Acrylic-Enamel and Semigloss Alkyd-Enamel Finishes: Factory-formulated alkyd- or acrylic-latex-based interior wood primer.

E. Interior Ferrous-Metal Primer (coordinate with Division 05 Sections for shop finish primer coats): 1. Uncoated metal not exposed to view: Factory-formulated quick-drying rust-inhibitive,

chemically active, modified alkyd-based metal primer, compatible with shop primers specified in Division 05 Sections and with specified finish.

2. Uncoated metal exposed to view or as indicated on Drawings: Fast-curing polyamide epoxy primer, compatible with shop primers specified in Division 05 Sections and with specified finish.

3. Uncoated metal in humid areas: Fast-Curing, Two-Component, Moisture-Cured, Aromatic Urethane Zinc-Rich primer compatible with shop primers specified in Division 05 Sections and with specified finish.

F. Interior Zinc-Coated Metal Primer: Factory-formulated galvanized metal primer.

G. Interior Ferrous Metal Intermediate Coat: Polyamidoamine Epoxy intermediate coat for application over primer for exposed ferrous metal in Natatorium areas.

H. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds and repair painting galvanized steel, with dry film containing not less than 93 percent zinc dust by weight, and complying with DOD-P-21035A or SSPC-Paint 20.

I. See Division 05 Sections for factory-applied primer coats.

2.06 EXTERIOR FINISH COATS

A. Exterior Semigloss Acrylic: Factory-formulated semigloss waterborne High-Performance Acrylic for exterior application.


B. Exterior Gloss Hybrid Aliphatic Polyurethane: Factory-formulated gloss hybrid aliphatic polyurethane for exterior application.

2.07 INTERIOR FINISH COATS

A. Interior Low-Luster Acrylic Enamel: Factory-formulated eggshell acrylic-latex interior enamel.

B. Interior Semigloss Acrylic Enamel: Factory-formulated semigloss acrylic enamel for interior application.

C. Interior Waterborne Acrylic Epoxy: Factory-formulated satin or eggshell waterborne acrylic epoxy.

D. Interior Painted Wall Graphics: Factory-formulated gloss acrylic epoxy, color matching scheduled finishes.

E. Interior Concrete Floor and Stair finish: Light industrial duty 100% acrylic water-based alkali-resistant, slip-resistant floor coating.

2.08 INTERIOR WOOD STAINS AND VARNISHES

A. Open-Grain Wood Filler: Factory-formulated paste wood filler applied at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer.

B. Interior Wood Stain: Factory-formulated alkyd-based penetrating wood stain for interior application applied at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer.

C. Clear Sanding Sealer: Factory-formulated fast-drying alkyd-based clear wood sealer applied at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer.

D. Interior Clear Satin Varnish: Factory-formulated alkyd- or waterborne polyurethane-based clear varnish.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for paint application. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P4. 1. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing

finishes or primers.

2. Proceed with paint application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly dry.

3. Start of painting will be construed as Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions within a particular area.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or


impossible because of size or weight of the item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed using

workers skilled in the trades involved.

B. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning.

C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified. 1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime.

2. Cementitious Materials: Prepare concrete, concrete unit masonry, cement plaster, and mineral-fiber-reinforced cement panel surfaces to be painted. Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of surface preparation. a. Use abrasive blast-cleaning methods if recommended by paint manufacturer.

b. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish paint to blister and burn, correct this condition before application. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.

c. Clean concrete floors to be painted with a 5 percent solution of muriatic acid or other etching cleaner. Flush the floor with clean water to remove acid, neutralize with ammonia, rinse, allow to dry, and vacuum before painting.

3. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off. a. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply thin coat of white shellac or

other recommended knot sealer before applying primer. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or wood filler. Sand smooth when dried.

b. Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately on delivery. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and back sides of wood, including cabinets, counters, cases, and paneling.

c. If transparent finish is required, backprime with spar varnish.

d. Backprime paneling on interior partitions where masonry, plaster, or other wet wall construction occurs on back side.

e. Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of varnish or sealer immediately on delivery.

4. Ferrous Metals: SSPC SP 6 Commercial Blast Cleaning. a. Clean ungalvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not been shop coated; remove

oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with SSPC's recommendations.

b. Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged. Power Tool Clean per SSPC SP 11Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal, and touch up with same primer as the shop coat.

5. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum-based solvents so surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods.


D. Material Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign

materials and residue.

2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface film and strain material before using.

3. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits.

E. Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to simplify identification of each coat when multiple coats of same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat, but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

3.03 APPLICATION

A. General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. 1. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the paint schedules.

2. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to formation of a durable paint film.

3. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used.

4. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, grilles, convector covers, covers for finned-tube radiation, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain system integrity and provide desired protection.

5. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.

6. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces.

7. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as exterior faces.

8. Finish interior of wall and base cabinets and similar field-finished casework to match exterior.

9. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat.

B. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. 1. The number of coats and film thickness required are the same regardless of application

method. Do not apply succeeding coats until previous coat has cured as recommended by manufacturer. If sanding is required to produce a smooth, even surface according to manufacturer's written instructions, sand between applications.

2. Omit primer over metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted.

3. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure that edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces.


4. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat surfaces until paint has dried to where it feels firm, and does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and until application of another coat of paint does not cause undercoat to lift or lose adhesion.

C. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for type of material applied. Use brush of appropriate size

for surface or item being painted.

2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet-back, or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by manufacturer for material and texture required.

3. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by manufacturer for material and texture required.

D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate to achieve dry film thickness indicated. Provide total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by manufacturer.

E. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to items exposed in occupied spaces.

F. Mechanical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Uninsulated metal piping. 2. Uninsulated plastic piping. 3. Pipe hangers and supports. 4. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes. 5. Visible portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and

outlets. 6. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having "all-service jacket" or other paintable jacket

material. 7. Mechanical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field painting.

G. Electrical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Switchgear. 2. Panel boards. 3. Electrical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field painting.

H. Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at a rate to ensure complete coverage with pores filled.

I. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat, as recommended by manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn-through or other defects due to insufficient sealing.

J. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth, opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable.


K. Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce a glass-smooth surface film of even luster. Provide a finish free of laps, runs, cloudiness, color irregularity, brush marks, orange peel, nail holes, or other surface imperfections.

1. Provide satin finish for final coats.

L. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not complying with requirements. 1. Where color is not scheduled or otherwise indicated on Drawings, Architect will select from

manufacturer’s full range.

3.04 CLEANING

A. Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from Project site. 1. After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint

by washing and scraping without scratching or damaging adjacent finished surfaces.

3.05 PROTECTION

A. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage from painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Architect.

B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. After completing painting operations, remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work. 1. After work of other trades is complete, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted

surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P1.

3.06 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE

A. High-Performance Coating: Shop-Primer Coated Metal, Zinc-Rich/ Aliphatic Acrylic Polyurethane/ Advanced Thermoset System (Gloss): Two finish coats over a shop-applied aromatic, zinc-rich primer to a total DFT of no less than 6.5 mils. 1. Primer: Shop-applied as specified in Division 05 Section. Confirm compatibility of actual

products with scheduled finish coats. a. Basis of Design shop primer: Tnemec Series 90-97 Tneme-Zinc applied at a dry film

thickness of 2.0 to 3.0 mils. 1) Fast-cure moisture-cured urethane zinc-rich primer with 83 percent zinc content

by weight in dried film.

2. Field touch-up: Repair abraded and bare metal surfaces by SSPC-SP-11 power tool cleaning to bare metal and spot prime with compatible primer a. T: Series 90-97 applied at a dry film thickness of no less than 3.0 mils. Confirm

compatibility with shop primer.

3. Intermediate Coat: Aliphatic Acrylic Polyurethane a. T: Series 73 Endura-Shield: Applied at a dry film thickness of 2.0 to 3.0 mils.

4. Finish Coat: Advanced Thermoset Coating a. T: Series 1071 Fluoronar: Applied at a dry film thickness of 2.0 to 3.0 mils.

5. System performance requirements: a. ASTM B 117: System shall pass 10,000 hours’ salt fog corrosion resistance. b. ASTM D 3363: Finish coat hardness shall be HB or better.


c. ASTM D 4060: Finish coat shall pass no more than 103 mg loss after 1,000 hours with 1,000 gram load.

d. ASTM G 53: System shall have no blistering, cracking or chalking. Less than 5 percent gloss loss and 0.8 DED FMCII color change after 9,500 hours’ exposure.

3.07 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE

A. CMU, Acrylic-Enamel Finish (Low-Luster): Two finish coats over a block filler: 1. Block Filler: Concrete unit masonry block filler.

a. PP: 6-7 SpeedHide Interior/Exterior Masonry Latex Block Filler: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 6.0 to 12.5 mils.

b. S-W: PrepRite Interior/Exterior Block Filler B25W25: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 8.0 mils.

2. Finish Coats: Interior low-luster acrylic enamel. a. PP: 6-411 Series SpeedHide Eggshell Acrylic Latex Enamel: Applied at a dry film

thickness of not less than 1.25 mils.

b. S-W: ProMar 200 Interior Latex Eg-Shel Enamel B20W2200 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils.

B. CMU, Epoxy Finish (Semigloss): Intermediate and finish coat over block filler: 1. Block Filler: Acrylic or epoxy block filler applied at spreading rate recommended by

manufacturer as sufficient to fill pores. a. PP: 16-90 Pitt-Glaze High Performance Acrylic Latex Block Filler. b. S-W: Heavy Duty Block Filler B42W46.

2. Intermediate Coat: Epoxy applied at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer to achieve specified dry film thickness. a. PP: 95-245 Series Pittguard Rapid Coat DTR. Apply to a dry film thickness of 4.0 to

7.0 mils. b. S-W: Water Based Catalyzed Epoxy, B70 Series/B60V25 Semi-Gloss Hardener (Not

for use in areas subject to immersion) Apply to a dry film thickness of 2.5 to 3.0 mils.

3. Topcoat: Semigloss epoxy applied at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer to achieve specified dry film thickness. a. PP: 95-245 Series Pittguard Rapid Coat DTR. Apply to a dry film thickness of 4.0 to

7.0 mils. b. S-W: Water Based Catalyzed Epoxy, B70 Series/B60V25 Semi-Gloss Hardener (Not

for use in areas subject to immersion) Apply to a dry film thickness of 2.5 to 3.0 mils.

C. CMU, Hi-Performance Epoxy Finish (Satin) at humid areas: Two finish coats over a waterborne cementitious acrylic block filler:

1. Block Filler: Concrete unit masonry block filler. a. T: Tnemec Series 130 Envirofill: Applied at a spreading rate of 85 to 115 sq. ft/gal.

2. Finish Coats: waterbased acrylic epoxy. a. T: Tnemec Series 113 H.B. Tneme-Tufcoat: Applied at a dry film thickness of 4.0 to

6.0 mils DFT per coat. (two coats).


D. Gypsum Board and Plaster, Acrylic-Enamel Finish (Low-Luster): Two finish coats over a primer. 1. Primer:

a. PP: 6-2 SpeedHide Interior Quick-Drying Latex Sealer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.0 mil.

b. S-W: PrepRite 200 Latex Wall Primer B28W200 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.1 mils.

2. Finish Coats: a. PP: 6-411 Series SpeedHide Eggshell Acrylic Latex Enamel: Applied at a dry film

thickness of not less than 1.25 mils.

b. S-W: ProMar 200 Interior Latex Egg-Shell Enamel B20W2200 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils.

E. Gypsum Board, Epoxy Finish (Eggshell): Two finish coats over a primer. 1. Primer:

a. T: Tnemec 151 Elasto-Grip waterborne modified polyamine Epoxy primer: Apply at at dry film thickness of 0.7 – 1.5 mils.

b. S-W: PrepRite 200 Latex Wall Primer B28W200 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.1 mils.

2. Finish Coats: waterbased acrylic epoxy. a. T: Tnemec Series 113 H.B. Tneme-Tufcoat: Applied at a dry film thickness of 4.0 to


b. S-W: Pro Industrial Pre-Catalyzed Water Based Epoxy Eg-Shel, K45 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils.

F. Concrete Floor and Stairs, Light Industrial Traffic Coating: 2 finish coats over primer. 1. Primer:

a. S-W: ArmorSeal Tread-Plex Acrylic Floor Primer B90W110 : Applied at a dry film thickness of than 1.5-2.0 mils.

2. Intermediate and Finish Coat: a. SW: ArmorSeal Tread-Plex Acrylic B90 Series : Apply at a dry film thickness of

1.5 – 2.0 mils per coat. Color as scheduled.

G. Interior Painted Wood, Acrylic-Enamel Finish (Semigloss): Two finish coats over a primer. 1. Primer: Interior wood primer.

a. PP: 17-955 Seal Grip Interior Latex Enamel Undercoater: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mil.

b. S-W: PrepRite Classic Latex Primer B28W101 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils.

2. Finish Coats: Interior semigloss acrylic-enamel. a. PP: 6-500 Series Interior Semi-Gloss Acrylic: Apply to a dry film thickness of not

less than 1.5 mils.

b. S-W: ProClassic Waterborne Interior Acrylic Semi-Gloss Enamel, B31W51 Series: Apply to a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils.


H. Ferrous Metal, Acrylic-Enamel Finish (Semigloss): Two finish coats over a primer. 1. Primer: Interior ferrous-metal primer.

a. PP: 90-709 Pitt-Tech One Pack Interior/Exterior Primer/Finish DTM Industrial Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils.

b. S-W: Pro-Cryl Universal Water Based Primer, B66-310 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils.

2. Finish Coats: Interior semigloss acrylic enamel. a. PP: 90-474 Series I/E Satin DTM: Apply to a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0

mils.

b. S-W: DTM Acrylic Semi-Gloss Coating, B66W200 Series: Apply to a dry film thickness of not less than 2.5 mils.

3. For steel members with field-applied intumescent coating, provide compatible matching finish coat recommended by paint manufacturer.

I. Ferrous Metal, Epoxy Finish (Satin) for steel structure, joist framing, miscellaneous framing and decking in humid areas: Two finish coats over a primer and intermediate coat. 1. Primer: Interior high-performance ferrous-metal primer. (Shop applied as specified in

Division 05 Section). Confirm compatibility of actual products with scheduled finish coats

2. Intermediate Coat: Polyamidoamine Epoxy a. T: Tnemec Series N69F Hi-Build Epoxoline II: Apply to a dry film thickness of 4.0

to 6.0 mils DFT.

b. Intermediate coat not required at acoustic steel roof deck with factory-applied Natacoat finish. Confirm factory-applied prior to applying final coats.

3. Finish Coats: Waterbased acrylic epoxy. a. T: Tnemec Series 113 H.B. Tneme-Tufcoat: Applied at a dry film thickness of 4.0 to


4. For steel members with field-applied intumescent coating, provide compatible matching finish coat recommended by paint manufacturer.

J. Zinc-Coated Metal, Acrylic-Enamel Finish (Semigloss): Two finish coats over a primer. 1. Primer: Interior zinc-coated metal primer.

a. PP: 90-709 Pitt-Tech One Pack Interior/Exterior Primer/Finish DTM Industrial Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils.

b. S-W: Pro-Cryl Universal Water Based Primer, B66-310 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils.

2. Finish Coats: Interior semigloss acrylic enamel. a. PP: 90-474 Series I/E Satin DTM: Apply to a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0

mils.

b. S-W: DTM Acrylic Semi-Gloss Coating, B66W200 Series: Apply to a dry film thickness of not less than 2.5 mils.


3.08 INTERIOR STAIN AND NATURAL-FINISH WOODWORK SCHEDULE

A. Stained Woodwork: Alkyd-Based Stain Satin-Varnish Finish: Two finish coats of alkyd-based clear satin varnish over a sealer coat and interior wood stain. Wipe wood filler before applying stain. 1. Filler Coat: Open-grain wood filler.

a. PP: none required.

b. S-W: none required.

2. Stain Coat: Interior wood stain. a. PP: 77-560 Rez Interior Semi-Transparent Oil Stain.

b. S-W: Wood Classics Interior Oil Stain A-49 Series. (Quarts Only)

3. Sealer Coat: Clear sanding sealer. a. PP: 77-30 SpeedHide Quick-Drying Interior Sanding Wood Sealer and Finish.

b. S-W: Wood Classics Waterborne Polyurethane Varnish, A68F90 (Satin).

4. Finish Coats: Interior alkyd- or polyurethane-based clear satin varnish. a. PP: 77-9 Rez Varnish, Interior Satin Oil Clear.

b. S-W: Wood Classics Waterborne Polyurethane Varnish, A68F90 (Satin).


LAWRENCE COUNTY VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 10 1100 - 1 © 2014 Eckles Architecture and Engineering

SECTION 10 1100 - VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Markerboards. 2. Tackboards. 3. Fabric Wrapped Tackboards. 4. Map rails. 5. Visual Display rails. 6. Support systems for visual display boards.

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 06 Section “Architectural Woodworking” for standing and running trim and custom

architectural millwork and casework. 2. Division 12 Section “Manufactured Casework” for wood casework that is not custom built.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Tackboard: Framed tackable surface.

B. Visual Display Boards: Markerboards and tackboards.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for visual display surfaces. 1. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics and individual panel weights for sliding

visual display units.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Show location of panel joints. 2. Show location of special-purpose graphics for visual display surfaces. 3. Include sections of typical trim members.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of visual display surface indicated and as follows: 1. Visual Display Surface With Seam: Not less than 12 inches square, mounted on substrate

indicated for final Work showing seam down center of sample.. Include one panel for each type, color, and texture required.

2. Trim: 6-inch-long sections of each trim profile.

D. Product Test Results: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for surface-burning characteristics of vinyl fabrics.

VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES LAWRENCE COUNTY 10 1100 - 2 PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY

E. Maintenance Data: For visual display surfaces to include in maintenance manuals.

F. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of visual display surface through one source from a single manufacturer.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide fabrics with the surface-burning characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination" 1. Meet, with Installer present, with Construction Manager, Architect, and other affected

Contractors, subcontractors, to verify location of visual display surfaces in each room prior to fabrication.


A. Deliver factory-built visual display boards, including factory-applied trim where indicated, completely assembled in one piece without joints, where possible. If dimensions exceed maximum manufactured panel size, provide two or more pieces of equal length as acceptable to Architect. When overall dimensions require delivery in separate units, prefit components at the factory, disassemble for delivery, and make final joints at the site.

B. Store visual display units vertically with packing materials between each unit.


A. Deliver factory-built visual display boards, including factory-applied trim where indicated, completely assembled in one piece without joints, where possible. If dimensions exceed maximum manufactured panel size, provide two or more pieces of equal length as acceptable to Architect. When overall dimensions require delivery in separate units, prefit components at the factory, disassemble for delivery, and make final joints at the site.

B. Store visual display units vertically with packing materials between each unit.


A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the

Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating visual display surfaces without field measurements. Coordinate wall construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.

LAWRENCE COUNTY VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 10 1100 - 3

2. Allow for trimming and fitting where taking field measurements before fabrication might delay the Work.

1.08 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty for Porcelain-Enamel Face Sheets: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace porcelain-enamel face sheets that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Surfaces lose original writing and erasing qualities. b. Surfaces become slick or shiny. c. Surfaces exhibit crazing, cracking, or flaking.

2. Warranty Period: 50 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 1. Claridge Products & Equipment, Inc. 2. AARCO Products, Inc. 3. ADP Lemco Inc. 4. American Visual Display Products, LLC 5. Best-Rite Manufacturing 6. Caron Products, Inc. 7. Marsh Industries, Inc. 8. Platinum Visual Systems. 9. School Specialty Education Essentials

B. Provide TB fabric according to schedule on Drawing. No substitutions will be accepted.

2.02 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Porcelain-Enamel Face Sheet: ASTM A 424, enameling-grade steel, uncoated thickness indicated; with exposed face and edges coated with primer, 1.5-mil-thick minimum ground coat, and color cover coat; and concealed face coated with primer and 1.5-mil-minimum thick ground coat. 1. Matte-Finish Cover Coat: Low reflective; chalk wipes clean with dry cloth or standard

eraser. Minimum 2.0-mil-thick cover coat. Cover and ground coats shall be fused to steel at manufacturer's standard firing temperatures.

2. Gloss-Finish Cover Coat: Low gloss dry-erase markers wipe clean with dry cloth or standard eraser. Minimum 3.0-mil-thick cover coat. Cover and ground coats shall be fused to steel at manufacturer's standard firing temperatures.

B. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade 1-M-1.

C. Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD.

D. Cork Sheet: MS MIL-C-15116-C, Type II.


E. Plastic-Impregnated Cork Sheet: MS MIL-C-15116-C, Type I, seamless, homogeneous, self-sealing sheet consisting of granulated cork, linseed oil, resin binders, and dry pigments that are mixed and calendared onto burlap backing; with washable vinyl finish and integral color throughout.

F. Fabric: As indicated on Architectural Drawings; with flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84.

G. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063.

2.03 MARKERBOARD ASSEMBLIES

A. Porcelain-Enamel Markerboard Assembly: Balanced, high-pressure, factory-laminated markerboard assembly of 3-ply construction consisting of backing sheet, core material, and minimum 0.020-inch-thick, porcelain-enamel face sheet with low-gloss finish. 1. Particleboard Core: 3/8 inch thick; with 0.015-inch- thick, aluminum sheet or 0.0129-inch-

thick, galvanized steel sheet backing.

2. Laminating Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard moisture-resistant thermoplastic type.

3. Fabricate with no horizontal seams in MB face sheet.

2.04 TACK ASSEMBLIES

A. Vinyl-Fabric-Faced Tack Assembly: 1/8-inch-thick, vinyl-fabric-faced cork sheet factory laminated to 3/8-inch-thick fiberboard backing. Provide minimum 34-ounce, self-healing vinyl in color as scheduled on Architectural Drawings. 1. Provide Trim at Vinyl Faced Tackboard Assemblies as indicated on Architectural Drawings.

2.05 MARKERBOARD AND TACKBOARD ACCESSORIES

A. Aluminum Frames and Trim: Fabricated from not less than 0.062-inch-thick, extruded aluminum; of size and shape indicated. 1. Field-Applied Trim: Manufacturer's standard snap-on trim with no visible screws or

exposed joints

B. Marker-tray: Manufacturer's standard, continuous. 1. Solid Type: Extruded aluminum with ribbed section and smoothly curved exposed ends.

C. Map Rail: Provide the following accessories: 1. Display Rail: Continuous and integral with map rail; fabricated from cork approximately 2-

inch-wide.

2. End Stops: Located at each end of map rail.

3. Map Hooks and Clips: Four map hooks with flexible metal clips for each room.

4. Flag Holder: One for each room.

D. Visual Display Rail: Manufacturer's standard, tackable visual display surface fabricated into 2-inch-high rail shaped and designed for displaying material.


E. Magnetic Marker Tray: Manufacturer’s standard, as indicated on Architectural Drawings.

2.06 FABRICATION

A. Porcelain-Enamel Visual Display Assemblies: Laminate porcelain-enamel face sheet and backing sheet to core material under heat and pressure with manufacturer's standard flexible, waterproof adhesive.

B. Visual Display Boards: Factory assemble visual display boards, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Factory-Assembled Visual Display Units: Coordinate factory-assembled units with trim and accessories indicated. Join parts with a neat, precision fit. 1. Make joints only where total length exceeds maximum manufactured length. Fabricate

with minimum number of joints, balanced around center of board, as acceptable to Architect. a. If vertical-joint in a markerboard is required, provide concealed spline connectors

between abutting panels.

2. Provide concealed spline vertical-joints between abutting markerboards.

3. Provide manufacturer's standard mullion trim at joints between markerboards and tackboards of combination units.

4. Where size of visual display boards or other conditions require support in addition to normal trim, provide structural supports or modify trim as indicated or as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard structural support accessories to suit conditions indicated.

D. Aluminum Frames and Trim: Fabricate units straight and of single lengths, keeping joints to a minimum. Miter corners to neat, hairline closure. Provide frames and trim for markerboards and tackboards.

2.07 ALUMINUM FINISHES



C. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.

D. Class II, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A31 (Mechanical Finish: nonspecular as fabricated; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class II, clear coating 0.010 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, surface conditions of wall, and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine walls and partitions for proper backing for visual display surfaces.


3.02 PREPARATION

A. Remove dirt, scaling paint, projections, and depressions that will affect smooth, finished surfaces of visual display boards.

B. Prepare surfaces to achieve a smooth, dry, clean surface free of flaking, unsound coatings, cracks, defects, and substances that will impair bond between visual display boards surfaces.


A. General: Install visual display surfaces in locations and at mounting heights indicated on Drawings, or if not indicated, at heights indicated below. Keep perimeter lines straight, level, and plumb. Provide grounds, clips, backing materials, adhesives, brackets, anchors, trim, and accessories necessary for complete installation.

B. Caulk perimeter of each board between walls and boards.

3.04 INSTALLATION OF FACTORY-FABRICATED VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS

A. Visual Display Boards: Attach concealed clips, hangers, grounds, and egg-size adhesive gobs to wall surfaces and to visual display boards with fasteners at not more than 16 inches o.c. Secure both top and bottom of boards to walls. 1. Field-Applied Aluminum Trim: Attach trim over edges of visual display boards and conceal

grounds and clips. Attach trim to boards with fasteners at not more than 24 inches o.c. Attach marker-trays to boards with fasteners at not more than 12 inches o.c.

2. Mounting Height: 34-inches above finished floor to bottom of display unit, except as otherwise indicated.

B. Display Rails: Install rails in locations and at mounting heights indicated on Drawings. Attach to wall surface with fasteners at not more than 16 inches o.c.



A. Clean visual display surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. Attach one cleaning label to visual display surface in each room.

B. Touch up factory-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.

C. Cover and protect visual display surfaces after installation and cleaning.


LAWRENCE COUNTY SIGNAGE PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 10 1400 - 1 © 2014 Eckles Architecture and Engineering

SECTION 10 1400 - SIGNAGE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Panel signs. 2. Cast-metal plaques. 3. Cast-metal dimensional characters for exterior and interior use. 4. Signage accessories.

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary project identification

signs. 2. See Division 26 Sections for electrical service and connections for illuminated characters

and for access to remote transformers.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of sign.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, and large-scale sections of typical members and other components. Show mounting methods, grounds, mounting heights, layout, spacing, reinforcement, accessories, and installation details. 1. Include fabrication and installation details and attachments to other work. 2. Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by others,

and accessories. 3. Provide message list for each sign, details of wording, lettering, and braille layout. 4. Wiring Diagrams: For signs with illuminated characters.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of sign, include the following Samples to verify color selected: 1. Panel Signs: Full-size Samples of each type of sign required. 2. Casting: Show representative texture, character style, spacing, finish, and method of

attachment. 3. Dimensional Characters: Full-size Sample of each type of dimensional character. 4. Exposed Accessories: Full-size Sample of each accessory type. 5. Approved samples will be returned for installation into Project.

D. Sign Schedule: 1. Submit editable electronic Signage Schedule in Excel format organized with the following

columns: a. Architectural Room No. b. Architectural Room Name c. Sign Type (use architect’s designation) d. Owner’s Room No. e. Owner’s Room Name f. Lines 1 through 5

SIGNAGE LAWRENCE COUNTY 10 1400 - 2 PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY

g. Graphic h. Comments

2. Use same designations specified or indicated on Drawings.

E. Maintenance Data: For signage cleaning and maintenance requirements to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Coordination and Meetings." 1. Agenda: Signage copy, mounting methods, sequencing and locations

B. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative of signage manufacturer for installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain each sign type through one source from a single manufacturer.

D. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with prevailing ANSI 117.1 and with PA Uniform Construction Code provisions as adopted by authorities having jurisdiction.


A. Field Measurements: Where sizes of signs are determined by dimensions of surfaces on which they are installed, verify dimensions by field measurement before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

1.05 COORDINATION

A. For signs supported by or anchored to permanent construction, advise installers of anchorage devices about specific requirements for placement of anchorage devices and similar items to be used for attaching signs.

B. Coordinate location of remote transformers with building construction. Ensure that transformers are accessible after completion of Work.

1.06 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of signs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Deterioration of finishes beyond normal weathering. b. Separation or delamination of sheet materials and components.

2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

LAWRENCE COUNTY SIGNAGE PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 10 1400 - 3

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 PANEL SIGNS

A. General: Provide panel signs that comply with requirements indicated for materials, thicknesses, finishes, colors, designs, shapes, sizes, and details of construction. 1. Produce smooth panel sign surfaces constructed to remain flat under installed conditions

within tolerance of plus or minus 1/16 inch measured diagonally.

2. Raised Copy (Inset, Cutout Characters) – Typical: Sign face routed to receive push-through acrylic graphics slightly projecting from the sign panel.

3. Flush Copy (Etched and Filled Graphics): Sign face etched or routed to receive enamel-paint infill.

4. Subsurface Copy (Rear-Etched and Filled Graphics): Reverse-engrave back face of clear acrylic sheet. Fill resulting copy with enamel. Apply opaque background color coating over enamel-filled copy.

5. Changeable Message Inserts: Fabricate signs to allow insertion of changeable messages in the form of transparent covers with paper inserts printed by Owner.

B. Cast-Acrylic Sheet: Manufacturer's standard and as follows: 1. Colors: As noted in drawings, or custom color as selected by Architect if not noted.

C. Unframed Panel Signs: Fabricate signs with edges mechanically and smoothly finished to comply with the following requirements: 1. Edge Condition: Square cut. 2. Corner Condition: Rounded to 1/2-inch-radius.

D. Laminated Panels: Permanently laminate face panels to backing sheets of material; use manufacturer's standard process.

E. Graphic Content and Style: Provide sign copy that complies with requirements indicated on Drawings for size, style, spacing, content, mounting height and location, material, finishes, and colors of signage.

F. Changeable Message Inserts: Fabricate signs to allow insertion of changeable messages in the form of transparent covers with paper inserts printed by Owner.

G. Tactile and Braille Copy: Manufacturer's standard process for producing raised copy complying with ADA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A117.1. Text shall be accompanied by Grade 2 braille. Produce precisely formed characters with square cut edges free from burrs and cut marks. 1. Panel Material: Clear acrylic sheet with opaque color coating, subsurface applied. 2. Raised-Copy Thickness: Not less than 1/32 inch. 3. Finish raised characters to contrast with background color, and finish Braille to match

background color

H. Colored Coatings for Acrylic Sheet: For copy and background colors, provide Pantone Matching System (PMS) colored coatings, including inks and paints that are recommended by acrylic manufacturers for optimum adherence to acrylic surface and are nonfading for application intended.


2.02 PANEL SIGN TYPES

A. Panel Signs, General: 1. Material: Cast-acrylic sheet, except as otherwise indicated. 2. Perimeter: Unframed. 3. Copy: Tactile and braille. Raised copy (text and graphics) except as otherwise indicated 4. Character Style: Helvetica Regular. 5. Message: Fixed, fixed with changeable message inserts, and changeable message inserts. 6. Sizes: As scheduled or as indicated on Drawings.

a. Character: Minimum 3/4-inch-high characters, except as otherwise indicated. 7. Backer-Plate: For signs mounted on glass, provide backer-plate in same size and color as

sign.

B. Room Signs: 1. Text: As indicated in the Sign Schedule or as provided by the Owner. 2. Message: Fixed. 3. Sizes:

a. Sign: 8-inches square. b. Character: Minimum 5/8-inch-high characters.

4. Colors: Custom color matching sample provided by the Architect.

C. Exterior Panel Signs: 1. Text: As indicated in the Sign Schedule or as provided by the Owner. 2. Message: Fixed. 3. Sizes:

a. Sign: 1’-2” high x 8”-inches. b. Character: Minimum 5/8-inch-high characters.


D. Toilet Room Signs: 1. Graphic: Male, female or handicap symbol. 2. Text: According to requirements in ICC/ANSI A117.1 or of authorities having jurisdiction,

whichever are more stringent. 3. Message: Fixed. 4. Sizes:

a. Sign: As indicated on the Drawings. b. Character: Minimum 5/8-inch-high characters.


2.03 CAST-METAL DIMENSIONAL CHARACTERS AND PLAQUES

A. Aluminum Castings: Provide aluminum castings of alloy and temper recommended by sign manufacturer for casting process used and for type of use and finish indicated. Provide heavy paper template to establish character spacing and to locate holes for fasteners. Confirm mounting height and location with architect prior to installation. 1. Manufacturer: Provide products by one of the following, or as otherwise approved.

a. Matthews International Corporation; Bronze Division. b. ACE Sign Systems, Inc. c. Allen Industries, Inc. Architectural Division d. ASI Sign Systems, Inc. e. Diskey Sign Company. f. Metal Arts; Division of L & H Mfg. Co.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456827805&mf=04&src=wd






g. Metallic Arts. h. Nelson-Harkins Industries. i. Southwell Company j. Steel Art Company.

B. Cast Plaques: Provide aluminum castings of alloy and temper recommended by sign manufacturer for casting process used and for use and finish indicated. Provide castings free from pits, scale, sand holes, and other defects. Comply with requirements specified for metal, border style, background texture, and finish and in required thickness, size, shape, and copy. 1. Border Style: Raised flat band. 2. Background Texture: Manufacturer's standard matte finish. 3. Mounting: Rosettes and fasteners matching plaque finish for substrates encountered.

C. Finishes: Manufacturer’s standard clear anodic coating, 0.018 mm or thicker, over a satin (directionally textured) mechanical finish. 1. Raised Areas: Hand-tool and buff borders and raised copy to produce manufacturer's

standard satin finish. 2. Background Finish: Matte. 3. Overall Plaques: Clear anodized.

D. Cast Characters: Form individual letters and numbers by casting. Produce characters with smooth flat faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and profiles, free from pits, scale, sand holes, and other defects. Cast lugs into back of characters and tap to receive threaded mounting studs. Comply with requirements indicated for finish, style, and size. 1. Material: Cast brushed aluminum individual characters

a. Size: as detailed b. Thickness: Manufacturer's standard for size of character

2. Projected Mounting: Mount characters at a 1 inch projection distance from wall surface in locations as shown on drawings a. Unless detailed or indicated otherwise, mounting shall be cast aluminum stand-offs

with non-visible hardware as approved by architect.

3. Finishes: a. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: Manufacturer's standard, in color as scheduled

or, where not scheduled or otherwise indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

4. Mounting: Concealed mounting as indicated.

5. Typeface: As indicated on Drawings.

2.04 ACCESSORIES

A. Mounting Methods: For exposed fasteners provide flat head tamperproof screws in color to match sign and silicone adhesive fabricated from materials that are not corrosive to sign material and mounting surface.

B. Anchors and Inserts: Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts for exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel or lead expansion-bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Furnish inserts, as required, to be set into concrete or masonry work. 1. Use concealed fasteners and anchors unless indicated to be exposed. 2. For exterior exposure, furnish nonferrous-metal devices unless otherwise indicated. 3. Exposed Metal-Fastener Components, General:






a. Fabricated from same basic metal and finish of fastened metal unless otherwise indicated.

b. Fastener Heads: For nonstructural connections, use oval countersunk screws and bolts with tamper-resistant Allen-head or one-way-head slots unless otherwise indicated.

4. Sign Mounting Fasteners, as recommended by manufacturer for specific application: a. Concealed Studs: Concealed (blind), threaded studs welded or brazed to back of sign

material, screwed into back of sign assembly, or screwed into tapped lugs cast integrally into back of cast sign material, unless otherwise indicated.

b. Projecting Studs: Threaded studs with sleeve spacer, welded or brazed to back of sign material, screwed into back of sign assembly, or screwed into tapped lugs cast integrally into back of cast sign material, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Adhesives: As recommended by sign manufacturer and with a VOC content of 70 g/L or less for adhesives used inside the weatherproofing system and applied on-site when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

D. Two-Face Tape: Manufacturer's standard high-bond, foam-core tape, 0.045 inch (1.14 mm) thick, with adhesive on both sides.

E. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.



B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.

B. Verify that items, including anchor inserts, and electrical power provided under other sections of Work are sized and located to accommodate signs.

C. Examine supporting members to ensure that surfaces are at elevations indicated or required to comply with authorities having jurisdiction and are free from dirt and other deleterious matter.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


3.02 INSTALLATION

A. General: Locate signs and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of types described and in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Install signs level, plumb, and at heights indicated, with sign surfaces free from distortion and other defects in appearance.

2. Interior Wall Signs: Install signs on walls adjacent to latch side of door where applicable. Where not indicated or possible, such as double doors, install signs on nearest adjacent walls. Locate to allow approach within 3 inches of sign without encountering protruding objects or standing within swing of door. a. Where no wall is within 5 feet of the door, mount signs on adjacent glass surface.

Provide matching opaque plate on opposite side of glass to conceal mounting materials.

3. Coordinate locations of all signs with architect prior to installation.

B. Wall-Mounted Panel Signs: Attach panel signs to wall surfaces using methods indicated below: 1. Two-Face Tape: Mount signs to smooth, nonporous surfaces. Do not use this method for

vinyl-covered or rough surfaces. 2. Mechanical Fasteners: Use non-removable mechanical fasteners placed through predrilled

holes at four corners of sign. Attach signs with fasteners and anchors suitable for secure attachment to substrate as recommended in writing by sign manufacturer.

3. Caulk full perimeter where sign and wall abut (clear silicone). 4. Where located on glass, provide solid backer panel.

C. Dimensional Characters: Attach dimensional characters individually utilizing 1/2 inch projected spacer mount. 1. Concealed Studs: Using a template, drill holes in substrate aligning with studs on back of

sign. Remove loose debris from hole and substrate surface. a. Masonry Substrates: Fill holes with adhesive. Leave recess space in hole for

displaced adhesive. Place sign in position and push until flush to surface, embedding studs in holes. Temporarily support sign in position until adhesive fully sets.

b. Thin or Hollow Surfaces: Place sign in position and flush to surface, install washers and nuts on studs projecting through opposite side of surface, and tighten.

2. Projecting Studs: Using a template, drill holes in substrate aligning with studs on back of sign. Remove loose debris from hole and substrate surface. a. Masonry Substrates: Fill holes with adhesive. Leave recess space in hole for

displaced adhesive. Place spacers on studs, place sign in position, and push until spacers are pinched between sign and substrate, embedding the stud ends in holes. Temporarily support sign in position until adhesive fully sets.

b. Thin or Hollow Surfaces: Place spacers on studs, place sign in position with spacers pinched between sign and substrate, and install washers and nuts on stud ends projecting through opposite side of surface, and tighten.

D. Cast-Metal Plaques: Mount plaques using standard fastening methods recommended in writing by manufacturer for type of wall surface indicated. 1. Face Mounting: Mount plaques using exposed fasteners with rosettes attached through face

of plaque into wall surface.



A. Remove and replace damaged or deformed characters and signs that do not comply with specified requirements. Replace characters with damaged or deteriorated finishes or components that cannot be successfully repaired by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.

B. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as signs are installed.

C. On completion of installation, clean exposed surfaces of signs according to manufacturer's written instructions, and touch up minor nicks and abrasions in finish. Maintain signs in a clean condition during construction and protect from damage until acceptance by Owner.


LAWRENCE COUNTY TOILET COMPARTMENTS PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 10 2113 - 1 © 2014 Eckles Architecture and Engineering

SECTION 10 2113 – TOILET COMPARTMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes solid color phenolic-core units as follows: 1. Toilet Enclosures: Overhead braced and floor anchored. 2. Urinal Screens: Wall attached and post supported. 3. Hardware and accessories

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 06 Section "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for blocking and overhead support of

anchored post units. 2. Division 10 "Toilet Accessories" for toilet tissue dispensers, grab bars, purse shelves, and

similar accessories.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. ASTM E-84: Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Toilet Partition Materials

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include 1. Construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and

profiles, and finishes. 2. Installation instructions. 3. Replacement parts information. 4. Cleaning and maintenance instructions. 5. ASTM E-84 Testing results

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Show locations of reinforcements for compartment-mounted grab bars. 2. Show anchorage, accessory items and finishes. 3. Show bolt hole locations in supporting members for attachment of compartments.

C. Samples for Verification: 1. Of color and finish required for units, prepared on 6-inch-square Samples of same thickness

and material indicated for Work. 2. Full-size sample of shoe, door hardware, mounting brackets. 3. Cut sections showing stile anchoring and leveling devices, concealed threaded inserts, panel,

stile, and edge construction.

D. Product Certificates: For each type of toilet compartment, from manufacturer.

E. Cleaning and Maintenance Data: For toilet compartments to include in maintenance manuals.

TOILET COMPARTMENTS LAWRENCE COUNTY 10 2113 - 2 PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY


A. Impact Resistance: Maximum Impact Force value shall exceed 30 inch-lbs using .625" hemispherical indenter with 2-lb impact weight per ASTM D2794 Standard Test Method for Resistance of Organic Coating to the Effects of Rapid Deformation (Impact)

B. Surface Burning Characteristics: 1. Smoke Developed Index: Not to exceed 450. 2. Flame Spread Index: Not to exceed 75. 3. Material Fire Ratings:

a. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): Class B. b. International Code Council (ICC): Class B.


A. Comply with requirements in CID-A-A-60003, "Partitions, Toilets, Complete."

B. Source Limitations: Obtain products through one source from a single manufacturer.

C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide panels with the surface-burning characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

D. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in ICC/ANSI A117.1 for toilet compartments designated as accessible.

E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls, columns, ceilings, and other construction contiguous with toilet compartments by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

1.07 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of toilet compartments that fail in materials or workmanship, including finish, within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Structural failures. b. Corrosion and delamination.

2. Damage from deliberate destruction and vandalism is excluded.

3. Warranty Period: Minimum 15 years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Furnish one-year guarantee against defects in material and workmanship for stainless steel door hardware and mounting brackets.

LAWRENCE COUNTY TOILET COMPARTMENTS PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 10 2113 - 3

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis of Design: General Partitions Mfrg Corp 1. Product: Color Through Phenolic Toilet Partitions

2. Subject to compliance with requirements and written approval by Architect, provide products by one of the following, as approved by Architect: a. Accurate Partitions b. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. c. Bradley Corporation; Mills Partitions. d. Knickerbocker Partitions Corp.

2.02 SOLID PHENOLIC UNITS

A. Design: 1. Toilet-Enclosure Style: Overhead braced. 2. Urinal-Screen Style: Post supported.

B. Door, Panel and Pilaster Construction: Solid phenolic-core panel material with melamine facing on both sides fused to substrate during panel manufacture (not separately laminated), and with eased and polished edges. Provide minimum 3/4-inch-thick doors and pilasters and minimum 3/4-inch-thick panels. 1. Color: As scheduled, using Basis of Design Manufacturer’s color designations.

C. Pilaster Shoes and Sleeves (Caps): Stainless steel, ASTM A 666, Type 302 or 304, not less than 0.0312 inch specified thickness and 3 inches high, finished to match hardware.

D. Brackets (Fittings): 1. Full-Height (Continuous) Type: Manufacturer's standard design; stainless steel.

2. Color: as scheduled a. Edges of material shall be the same color as the surface.

3. Toilet partitions constructed of High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) or High Density Polypropylene will not be acceptable.

E. Pilaster Shoes and Sleeves (Caps): Manufacturer's standard design; ASTM A 666 stainless steel 302/304, not less than 0.03 in thickness, 3-in high, finished to match hardware, fastened using #14 stainless steel tamper-resistant screws.

F. Brackets (Fittings): Full-Height (Continuous) Type: Manufacturer's standard design; 1. Material: 304 stainless steel.

G. Support Posts for Urinal Screens: Manufacturer's standard 304 stainless steel post with floor shoe matching that on the pilaster and head anchoring to ceiling construction or to overhead brace.

H. Anchor pilasters to floor with heavy gauge Stainless Steel angles allowing full adjustment of pilaster.

I. Heat-Sink Strip: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded-aluminum strip fastened to exposed bottom edges of solid-polymer components to prevent burning.

TOILET COMPARTMENTS LAWRENCE COUNTY 10 2113 - 4 PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY

2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard design, heavy-duty operating hardware and accessories; manufacturer's standard satin finish 304 stainless steel.

B. Overhead Bracing: Manufacturer's standard continuous, 304 stainless steel head rail with antigrip profile and in manufacturer's satin finish.

C. Hinges: Heavy-duty stainless steel with gravity-acting cams and wraparound flanges. Hinges allow for simple adjusting at the job site to a full close or partially open position, as required.

D. Support Posts for Urinal Screens: Manufacturer's standard 304 stainless steel post with adjustable floor shoe for anchoring to floor and ceiling construction or to overhead brace.

E. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel, finished to match hardware, with theft-resistant-type heads. Provide sex-type bolts for through-bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use hot-dip galvanized or other rust-resistant, protective-coated steel.

2.04 FABRICATION

A. Overhead-Braced Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant supports, leveling mechanism, fasteners, and anchors at pilasters to suit floor conditions. 1. Make provisions for setting and securing continuous head rail at top of each pilaster.

Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal supports and leveling mechanism.

B. Floor-Anchored Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant anchoring assemblies complete with threaded rods, lock washers, and leveling adjustment nuts at pilasters for structural connection to floor. Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal anchorage.

C. Doors: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24-inch-wide in-swinging doors for standard toilet compartments and 36-inch-wide out-swinging doors with a minimum 32-inch-wide clear opening for compartments indicated to be accessible to people with disabilities. 1. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard full-height, 16 gauge, continuous self-closing type that can

be adjusted to hold doors open at any angle up to 90 degrees.

2. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's standard recessed latch unit designed for emergency access and with combination rubber-faced door strike and keeper. Provide units that comply with accessibility requirements of authorities having jurisdiction at compartments indicated to be accessible to people with disabilities.

3. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard combination hook and rubber-tipped bumper, sized to prevent door from hitting compartment-mounted accessories.

4. Door Bumper: Manufacturer's standard rubber-tipped bumper at out-swinging doors.

5. Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit at out-swinging doors that complies with accessibility requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide units on both sides of doors at compartments indicated to be accessible to people with disabilities.

LAWRENCE COUNTY TOILET COMPARTMENTS PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 10 2113 - 5

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Take accurate field measurements of complete toilet compartment locations, and compare with Drawing for any discrepancies.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid, straight, level, and plumb. Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended backing and anchoring devices. 1. Maximum Clearances:

a. Pilasters and Panels: 1/2 inch. b. Panels and Walls: 1 inch.

B. Mount doors and panels 12-inches above finished floor. Maintain clearances at vertical edges of doors uniform top to bottom.

C. Conceal evidence of cutting, drilling, and fitting to room finish.

D. Overhead-Braced Units: Secure pilasters to floor and level, plumb, and tighten. Secure continuous head rail to each pilaster with not less than two fasteners. Hang doors to align tops of doors with tops of panels and adjust so tops of doors are parallel with overhead brace when doors are in closed position.

E. Floor-Anchored Units: Set pilasters with anchors penetrating not less than 2 inches into structural floor, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written instructions. Level, plumb, and tighten pilasters. Hang doors and adjust so tops of doors are level with tops of pilasters when doors are in closed position.

F. Wall-Hung and Pilaster-Supported Urinal Screens: Attach with anchoring devices to suit supporting structure. Set units level and plumb and to resist lateral impact.

G. Attach stirrup-brackets with tamper-resistant through bolts. Attach brackets to adjacent wall construction with four #14 by 2-1/2 inches stainless steel, tamper-resistant screws and plastic anchors.

H. Attach hinges through-bolted to doors and pilasters using stainless steel, tamper-resistant through bolts.

3.03 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING

A. Leave no visible evidence of cutting, drilling and/or patching on the finished work.

B. Wipe toilet partition and hardware clean after installation and leave free of imperfections.

C. Adjust and lubricate hardware according to manufacturer's written instructions for proper operation. 1. Set hinges on in-swinging doors to hold doors open approximately 30 degrees from closed

position when unlatched.

2. Set hinges on out-swinging doors to return doors to fully closed position.


LAWRENCE COUNTY IMPACT-RESISTANT WALL PROTECTION PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 10 2600 - 1 © 2014 Eckles Architecture and Engineering

SECTION 10 2600 - IMPACT-RESISTANT WALL PROTECTION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: Interior partition corner guards.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 09 3000 Tiling for aluminum corner edging at new ceramic wall tile installations

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include physical characteristics, such as durability, resistance to fading, and flame resistance, for each impact-resistant wall protection system component indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Show locations, extent, and installation details of each impact-resistant wall protection system component. Show methods of attachment to adjoining construction.

C. Samples for Verification: For the following products, showing the full range of color and texture variations expected in each impact-resistant wall protection system component. Prepare Samples from the same material to be used for the Work. 1. Corner and Wall Guards: 6-inch-long Samples of each type of impact-resistant wall

protection system component required. Include examples of joinery, corners, and field splices.

D. Material Certificates: For each impact-resistant plastic material, from manufacturer.

E. Maintenance Data: For each impact-resistant wall protection system component to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 01. 1. Include recommended methods and frequency of maintenance for maintaining optimum

condition of plastic covers under anticipated traffic and use conditions. Include precautions against using cleaning materials and methods that may be detrimental to plastic finishes and performance.

F. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain impact-resistant wall-protection units through one source from a single manufacturer.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide impact-resistant wall protection system components with the following surface-burning characteristics, as determined by testing materials identical to those required in this Section per ASTM E 84 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify impact-resistant wall protection system components with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Flame Spread: 25 or less. 2. Smoke Developed: 450 or less.

IMPACT-RESISTANT WALL PROTECTION LAWRENCE COUNTY 10 2600 - 2 PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY

C. Impact Strength: Provide impact-resistant wall protection system components with a minimum impact resistance of 25.4 ft-lbf/in. of width when tested according to ASTM D 256, Test Method A.

D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


A. Store impact-resistant wall-protection units in original undamaged packages and containers inside well-ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, and humidity. 1. Keep plastic sheet material out of direct sunlight. 2. Store plastic wall-protection components for a minimum of 72 hours, or until plastic material

attains a minimum room temperature of 70 deg F. Store wall-guard covers in a horizontal position.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install impact-resistant wall-protection units until building is enclosed and weatherproof, wet work is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature at 70 deg F for not less than 72 hours before beginning installation and for the remainder of the construction period.

B. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls, columns, and other construction contiguous with impact-resistant wall-protection units by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

1.06 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of impact-resistant wall-protection units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to: Structural failures and/or deterioration of plastic and

other materials beyond normal use. 2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering impact-resistant wall protection system products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Basis of Design: Construction Specialties, Inc. 2. Balco, Inc. 3. IPC Door and Wall Protection Systems, Inc. 4. Pawling Corporation. 5. Schluter Systems 6. IPC Interior Protection Products

LAWRENCE COUNTY IMPACT-RESISTANT WALL PROTECTION PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 10 2600 - 3

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Extruded Rigid Plastic: Textured, chemical- and stain-resistant, high-impact-resistant, PVC or acrylic-modified vinyl plastic; thickness as indicated with integral color throughout. 1. Minimum impact resistance of 25.4 ft-lbf/in. of notch when tested according to

ASTM D 256, Test Method A. 2. Chemical and Stain Resistance: Tested according to ASTM D 543. 3. Self-extinguishing when tested according to ASTM D 635. 4. Color and Texture: As indicated by referencing manufacturer's designations, as scheduled

on Drawings.

B. Aluminum Extrusions: Provide alloy and temper recommended by the manufacturer for the type of use and finish indicated, but with not less than the strength and durability properties specified in ASTM B 221 for alloy 6063-T5.

C. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240.

D. Fasteners: Provide aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless-steel, or other noncorrosive metal screws, bolts, and other fasteners compatible with aluminum components, hardware, anchors, and other items being fastened. Use theftproof fasteners where exposed to view.

E. Adhesive: Type recommended by the manufacturer for use with material on the substrate indicated. 1. VOC content of 70 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA

Method 24).

2.03 CORNER GUARDS

A. Surface-mounted, resilient plastic corner-guard assembly consisting of a snap-on-type plastic cover installed over a continuous aluminum retainer, including mounting hardware; fabricated with 90-degree turn to match wall condition; height as indicated. 1. Cover: Extruded, rigid plastic, minimum 0.078 inch thick, in dimensions and profiles

indicated. a. Corner Radius: 1/4 inch.

2. Retainer: Continuous, one-piece, extruded-aluminum retainer; minimum 0.062 inch thick.

3. Accessories: Provide prefabricated, injection-molded top cap and aluminum base with concealed splices, cushions, mounting hardware, and other accessories as required. a. Top and bottom caps shall match color of plastic covers and shall be field adjustable

for close alignment with snap-on plastic covers.

4. Basis of Design Product: Acrovyn SM-20 by Construction Specialties, Inc.

2.04 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate impact-resistant corner protection systems to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, details, finish, and member sizes, including thicknesses of components.

B. Preassemble components in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field assembly. Disassemble only as necessary for shipping and handling.

C. Fabricate components with tight seams and joints with exposed edges rolled. Provide surfaces free of wrinkles, chips, dents, uneven coloration, and other imperfections. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, and rigid hairline joints.

IMPACT-RESISTANT WALL PROTECTION LAWRENCE COUNTY 10 2600 - 4 PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY

D. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall retainers, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors for interconnecting members to other construction.

E. Provide inserts and other anchoring devices for connecting components to partition. Fabricate anchoring devices to withstand imposed loads. Coordinate anchoring devices with the supporting structure.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions in which impact-resistant wall protection system components and impact-resistant wall covering materials will be installed. 1. Complete finishing operations, including painting, before installing impact-resistant wall

protection system components.


3.02 PREPARATION

A. Complete finishing operations, including painting, before installing impact-resistant wall-protection system components.

B. General: Before installation, clean substrate to remove dust, debris, and loose particles.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install units level, plumb, and true to line without distortions. Do not use materials with chips, cracks, voids, stains, or other defects that might be visible in the finished Work. 1. Install in locations and at mounting heights indicated on Drawings or, if not indicated verify

with Architect.

2. Provide splices, mounting hardware, anchors, and other accessories required for a complete installation. a. Provide anchoring devices to withstand imposed loads. b. Adjust end caps as required to ensure tight seams.

B. Install aluminum retainers, mounting brackets, and other accessories according to the manufacturer's written instructions.

3.04 CLEANING

A. General: Immediately on completion of installation, clean plastic covers and accessories using a standard ammonia-based household cleaning agent. Clean metal components according to the manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Remove excess adhesive using methods and materials recommended by the manufacturer.

C. Remove surplus materials, rubbish, and debris, resulting from installation, on completion of work and leave installation areas in neat, clean condition.


LAWRENCE COUNTY TOILET ACCESSORIES PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 10 2813 - 1 © 2014 Eckles Architecture and Engineering

SECTION 10 2813 - TOILET ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: Public-use washroom accessories.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions and thicknesses, dimensions, profiles, fastening and mounting methods, specified options, and finishes for each type of accessory specified. Include the following: 1. Construction details and dimensions. 2. Anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in other work and

substrate preparation. 3. Material and finish descriptions. 4. Features that will be included for Project. 5. Manufacturer's warranty.

B. Samples: Full size, for each accessory item to verify design, operation, and finish requirements. 1. Approved full-size Samples will be returned and may be used in the Work.

C. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each accessory required. 1. Identify locations using room designations indicated on Drawings. 2. Identify products using designations indicated on Drawings.

D. Maintenance Data: For toilet and bath accessories to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Source Limitations: Provide products of same manufacturer for each type of accessory unit and for units exposed to view in same areas, unless otherwise approved by Architect.

B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Coordination and Meetings."

1.04 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required for access by disabled persons, proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories.

B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent delaying the Work.

TOILET ACCESSORIES LAWRENCE COUNTY 10 2813 - 2 PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY

1.05 WARRANTY

A. General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.

B. Manufacturer's Mirror Warranty: Written warranty, executed by mirror manufacturer agreeing to replace mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage defects within minimum warranty period indicated. 1. Minimum Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis of Design: Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. unless noted otherwise on the Accessory Schedule 1. Provide products scheduled on Drawings.

a. There are items scheduled to be provided by the Owner and installed by the GC. These products are indicated on the schedule for information purposes.

B. Electric Hand Dryer: Basis of Design: Dyson Airblade. www.dysonairblade.com 1. Mounting of dryer unit shall be per ADA mounting height requirements. 2. Color:Gray

C. Subject to compliance with requirements, accessories may be provided by one of the following manufacturers upon approval by Architect. 1. A & J Washroom Accessories, Inc. 2. American Specialties, Inc. 3. Bradley Corporation. 4. General Accessory Manufacturing Co. (GAMCO). 5. McKinney/Parker Washroom Accessories Corp. 6. Dyson Inc.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, with No. 4 finish (satin), in 0.0312-inch minimum nominal thickness, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, G60.

C. Mirror Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Quality q2, nominal 6.0 mm thick, with silvering, electroplated copper coating, and protective organic coating complying with FS DD-M-411.

D. Mirror Steel: Type 430 stainless steel with bright polished finish; 1/4-inch return concealing 1/4-inch tempered masonite backing.

E. Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.

LAWRENCE COUNTY TOILET ACCESSORIES PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 10 2813 - 3

F. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit, tamper and theft resistant when exposed, and of galvanized steel when concealed.

2.03 FABRICATION

A. General: One, maximum 1-1/2-inch-diameter, unobtrusive stamped manufacturer logo, as approved by Architect, is permitted on exposed face of accessories. On interior surface not exposed to view or back surface of each accessory, provide printed, waterproof label or stamped nameplate indicating manufacturer's name and product model number.

B. Surface-Mounted Toilet Accessories: Provide concealed anchorage where possible.

C. Recessed Toilet Accessories: Provide anchorage that is fully concealed when unit is closed.

D. Framed Glass-Mirror Units: Fabricate frames for glass-mirror units to accommodate glass edge protection material. Provide mirror backing and support system that permits rigid, tamper-resistant glass installation and prevents moisture accumulation. 1. Provide galvanized steel backing sheet, not less than 0.034 inch and full mirror size, with

non-absorptive filler material. Corrugated cardboard is not an acceptable filler material.

E. Mirror-Unit Hangers: Provide mirror-unit mounting system that permits rigid, tamper- and theft-resistant installation, as follows: 1. One-piece, galvanized steel, wall-hanger device with spring-action locking mechanism to

hold mirror unit in position with no exposed screws or bolts.

2. Heavy-duty wall brackets of galvanized steel, equipped with concealed locking devices requiring a special tool to remove.

F. Keys: If not supplied by Owner, provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying. Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.

B. Secure mirrors to walls in concealed, tamper-resistant manner with special hangers, toggle bolts, or screws. Set units level, plumb, and square at locations indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions for substrate indicated.

C. Install grab bars to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf, when tested according to method in ASTM F 446.

D. Provide Manufacturer’s service and parts manual upon completion of project.

TOILET ACCESSORIES LAWRENCE COUNTY 10 2813 - 4 PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY


A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation and verify that mechanisms function properly. Replace damaged or defective items.

B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings.

C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendations.


LAWRENCE COUNTY FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 10 4400 - 1 © 2014 Eckles Architecture and Engineering

SECTION 10 4400 - FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Portable fire extinguishers 2. Fire-protection cabinets for portable fire extinguishers. 3. Automated external defibrillator wall cabinet 4. Exterior key and documents boxes.

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 07 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for firestopping sealants at

fire-rated cabinets. 2. Division 26 Sections for low-voltage wiring for cabinet alarms.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. NFPA 10 - Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers; National Fire Protection Association; current edition.

B. UL (FPED) - Fire Protection Equipment Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition.


A. Conform to NFPA 10.

B. Provide extinguishers classified and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. for the purpose specified and indicated.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire-protection specialties. 1. Fire Extinguishers: Include rating and classification.

2. Cabinets: Include roughing-in dimensions, details showing mounting methods, relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction, door hardware, cabinet type, trim style, and panel style.

B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special criteria and wall opening coordination requirements.

C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.

D. Maintenance Data: Include test, refill or recharge schedules and re-certification requirements.

FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES LAWRENCE COUNTY 10 4400 - 2 PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY


A. Source Limitations: Obtain fire extinguishers and cabinets through one source from a single manufacturer.

B. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers."

C. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled by FM for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Fire-Rated Fire-Protection Cabinets: Listed and labeled to comply with requirements of ASTM E 814 for fire-resistance rating of walls where they are installed.

1.06 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size of fire-protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers indicated are accommodated.

1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Do not install extinguishers when ambient temperature may cause freezing of extinguisher ingredients.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Basis of Design: Larsen's Manufacturing Company. 2. Fire-End & Croker Corporation. 3. J.L. Industries, Inc. 4. Medtronic, Inc. 5. Potter-Roemer; Div. of Smith Industries, Inc. 6. Watrous; Div. of American Specialties, Inc. 7. Modern Metal Products; Div. of Technico.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.

B. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated, and as follows: 1. Extruded Shapes: ASTM B 221.

C. Acrylic Bubble: One piece.

LAWRENCE COUNTY FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 10 4400 - 3

2.03 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

A. General: Provide fire extinguishers of type, size, and capacity for each fire-protection cabinet and mounting bracket and only mounting bracket at other locations as indicated. 1. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10,

Appendix B.

B. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type in Steel Container (General Use): UL-rated 4-A:60-B:C, 10-lb nominal capacity, with monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in enameled-steel container. 1. Locate in FEC

C. Wet-Chemical Type (Kitchen): UL-rated 2-A:1-B:C:K, 1.6-gal. nominal capacity, with aqueous solutions of potassium acetate, potassium citrate, potassium carbonate or combinations of these agents in stainless-steel container; with pressure-indicating gage. 1. Direct mount to wall.

2.04 FIRE-PROTECTION CABINETS

A. Cabinet Construction: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub), with trim, frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. Weld joints and grind smooth. Miter and weld perimeter door frames. 1. Fire-Rated Cabinets: Listed and labeled to meet requirements of ASTM E 814 for fire-

resistance rating of wall where it is installed. a. Construct fire-rated cabinets with double walls fabricated from 0.0478-inch-thick,

cold-rolled steel sheet lined with minimum 5/8-inch-thick, fire-barrier material. b. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes.

2. Cabinet Metal: Enameled-steel sheet.

B. Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher.

C. Cabinet Mounting: Suitable for recessed and semi recessed mounting conditions with cabinet box fully recessed in walls of sufficient depth to suit style of trim indicated.

D. Cabinet Trim Style: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and ground smooth. 1. Exposed Trim: One-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping

surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend). a. Flat Trim: 1/4 to 5/16-inch backbend depth. b. Semi-Recessed Trim: 1-1/4 inches backbend depth.

E. Cabinet Trim Material: Manufacturer's standard steel sheet.

F. Door Material: Manufacturer's standard steel sheet.

G. Door Style; Fire Extinguisher: Manufacturer's standard, design, full bubble with frame. 1. Door Glazing: Manufacturer's standard, one-piece molded acrylic bubble in color - clear.

H. Door Construction: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, of materials indicated, and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected. 1. Provide minimum 1/2-inch-thick door frames, fabricated with tubular stiles and rails, and

hollow-metal design.


I. Door Hardware: Provide manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated. Provide either lever handle with cam-action latch, keyed lock or exposed or concealed door pull and friction latch. Provide concealed or continuous-type hinge permitting door to open 180 degrees.

2.05 AUTOMATED EXTERNAL DEFIBRILLATOR (AED) CABINETS

A. Cabinet Construction: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub), with trim, frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. Weld joints and grind smooth. Miter and weld perimeter door frames. 1. Fire-Rated Cabinets: Listed and labeled to meet requirements of ASTM E 814 for fire-

resistance rating of wall where it is installed. a. Construct fire-rated cabinets with double walls fabricated from 0.0478-inch-thick,

cold-rolled steel sheet lined with minimum 5/8-inch-thick, fire-barrier material.

b. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes.

B. Cabinet Type: Suitable for portable defibrillator.

C. Cabinet Mounting: Suitable for semi-recessed mounting conditions with cabinet box fully recessed in walls of sufficient depth to suit style of trim indicated. 1. Basis for Design: Model AMP180-1SR3-FSB by AEDSuperstore, www.aedsuperstore.com.

D. Cabinet Trim Style: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and ground smooth. 1. Exposed Trim: One-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping

surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge. a. Trim: 1-1/4 inch-depth, with radius formed edges.

E. Cabinet Trim Material: Manufacturer's standard steel sheet.

F. Door Material: Manufacturer's standard steel sheet.

G. Door Glazing for AED: Manufacturer’s standard clear acrylic glazing with painted lettering.

H. Door Style for AED: Manufacturer’s standard full glazed opening with frame.

I. Door Construction: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, of materials indicated, and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected. 1. Provide minimum 1/4-inch-thick door frames, fabricated with tubular stiles and rails, and

hollow-metal design.

J. Door Hardware: Provide manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated. Provide either lever handle with cam-action latch, keyed lock or exposed or concealed door pull and friction latch. Provide concealed or continuous-type hinge permitting door to open 180 degrees. 1. Alarm: Include standard key activated alarm, when door is opened to remove defibrillator

alarm sounds at 120 db.

LAWRENCE COUNTY FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 10 4400 - 5

2.06 EXTERIOR KEY AND DOCUMENT BOX

A. Basis of Design: Knox Box 3200 Series , Hinged Door Model as manufactured by Knox Company 1601 W. Deer Valley Road, Phoenix, AZ 85027.

B. Provide accessories as required for recessed masonry installation. Knox Recessed mounting kit (RMK)

C. Color: Black

D. Location: As indicated on Architectural Drawings. If not indicated, locate at wall adjacent to main entrance door. Location shall be approved by the Owner.

2.07 ACCESSORIES

A. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure extinguisher to wall or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of extinguishers indicated, with plated or baked-enamel finish.

B. Extinguisher Theft Alarm: Manufacturer's standard battery operated alarm, 10 second delay for disarming, activated by opening cabinet door.

C. Extinguisher Brackets: Formed steel, chrome-plated.




C. Cabinet and Door Finishes: Provide manufacturer's standard baked-enamel paint for exterior and interior of cabinets and doors. 1. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, grease, mill scale, rust, and other

contaminants that could impair paint bond using manufacturer's standard methods.

2. Baked-Enamel Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-enamel finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. Comply with paint manufacturer's written instructions for applying and baking to achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils. a. Fire Extinguisher Colors: Door - red; cabinet color - white. b. AED Colors: Door and cabinet – white with red lettering.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where recessed cabinets are to be installed.

B. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged units.


3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing fire-protection specialties.

B. Install cabinets, mounting brackets and extinguishers in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not indicated, at heights acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Prepare recesses for cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and trim style.

2. Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb.

3. Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at locations indicated. a. Mounting Brackets: 54 inches above finished floor to top of fire extinguisher.

C. Secure rigidly in place.

D. Place extinguishers and accessories in cabinets.

E. Identification: Apply decals and markings at locations indicated.

3.03 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION

A. Adjust cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices operate properly.

B. Replace fire protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.

C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that cabinets and doors are without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.


LAWRENCE COUNTY METAL LOCKERS PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 10 5113 - 1 © 2014 Eckles Architecture and Engineering

SECTION 10 5113 –LOCKERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Wood/Metal Hybrid lockers - Corridor 130 (Type A & B). 2. AquaMax Solid High Density Polyethylene Panels (HDPE) Plastic lockers – Locker Room

Areas (Type C).

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 06 Section "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for furring, blocking, and shims

required for installing lockers and concealed within other construction before metal locker installation.

2. Division 12 Section "Manufactured Wood Casework" for plastic laminate locker tops.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of metal locker and bench.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Show base, sloping tops, filler panels and other accessories. 2. Include locker identification system.

C. Samples for Verification: For lockers in manufacturer's standard sizes.

D. Maintenance Data: For adjusting, repairing, and replacing locker doors and latching mechanisms to include in maintenance manuals.

E. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.


A. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative of metal locker manufacturer for installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain lockers and accessories through one source from a single manufacturer, except as otherwise indicated.

C. Regulatory Requirements: Where lockers are indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with ICC/ANSI A117.1.

1. Provide minimum 1 Type A, B, & C locker, (final actual locations to be approved by Architect), where indicated on the drawings with the following handicap features. a. Provide not less than 1 shelf located no higher than 48 inches above the floor for

forward reach. b. Provide hardware that does not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the

wrist, and that operates with a force of not more than 5 lbs.

D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

METAL LOCKERS LAWRENCE COUNTY 10 5113 - 2 PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY


A. Do not deliver lockers until spaces to receive them are clean, dry, and ready for locker installation.


A. Field Measurements: Verify the following by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings:

1. Concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support lockers before they are enclosed.

2. Recessed openings. 3. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the

Work, establish recessed opening dimensions and proceed with fabricating lockers without field measurements. Coordinate wall and floor construction to ensure that actual recessed opening dimensions correspond to established dimensions.

1.06 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of work specified in other Sections to ensure that lockers can be supported and installed as indicated.

1.07 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of lockers that fail in materials or workmanship, excluding finish, within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures. b. Faulty operation of latches and other door hardware.

2. Warranty Period for Knocked-Down Lockers: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.


A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Full-size units of the following locker hardware items for each type and finish installed, but no fewer than the number indicated below: a. Hooks (minimum 4) b. Rubber door silencers (minimum 20)

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with requirements and approval by the Architect, available products from the following manufacturers may be incorporated into the Work:

LAWRENCE COUNTY METAL LOCKERS PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 10 5113 - 3

1. Basis of Design: List Industries Inc. 2. Art Metal Products. 3. DeBourgh Manufacturing 4. Lyon Workspace Products. 5. Newline Products Inc 6. Penco Products, Inc., Subsidiary of Vesper Corporation. 7. Republic Storage Systems Company

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008, Commercial Steel (CS) Type B, suitable for exposed applications.

B. Fasteners: Zinc- or nickel-plated steel, slotless-type exposed bolt heads, and self-locking nuts or lock washers for nuts on moving parts.

C. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for secure anchorage to each substrate. 1. Provide hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls and elsewhere

as required for corrosion resistance. 2. Provide toothed-steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors.

2.03 CORRIDOR 130, (M) LOCKERS 110, and (W) LOCKERS 109

A. Provide Lockers: 1. BASIS OF DESIGN: List Industries - Wood/Metal Hybrid lockers and Solid HDPE Plastic

lockers. 2. As determined by Owner, provide basis-of-design product or similar products by one of the

accepted manufacturers, subject to compliance with requirements and Architect's approval.

B. Locker Arrangement: TYPE A (Corridor Double-Tier Lockers) 1. Size 12-in W x 18-in D x 72-in H 2. Wood/Metal Hybrid Lockers

a. Metal Color: 708 – Midnight Ebony. b. Wood Finish: Red Oak or Maple door with custom stain to match architects sample

with a clear finish. 3. Configuration: DOUBLE TIER on concrete base. 4. Tops: gypsum board bulkhead by general contractor. Wood Trim by Locker manufacturer at

tops and sides of run of locker opening – see drawings for detail. 5. Hooks: Provide standard double-prong ceiling hook under shelf, two single prong hooks at

standard mounting height, and one additional single prong hook at 40 inches above floor. 6. Provide one hat shelf and one coat rod. 7. Isolated latching mechanism. 8. Provide with Key Cam Lock

a. Provide 2 Keys per lock and 2 master keys – all keys shall be provided to owner upon completion of the project.

b. Lockers shall be keyed separately.

C. Locker Arrangement: TYPE B (Corridor Single-Tier Lockers) 1. Size 12-in W x 18-in D x 72-in H 2. Wood/Metal Hybrid Lockers

a. Metal Color: 708 – Midnight Ebony. b. Wood Finish: Red Oak or Maple door with custom stain to match architects sample

with a clear finish.


3. Configuration: SINGLE TIER on concrete base. 4. Tops: gypsum board bulkhead by general contractor. Wood Trim by Locker manufacturer at

tops and sides of run of locker opening – see drawings for detail. 5. Hooks: Provide standard double-prong ceiling hook under shelf, two single prong hooks at

standard mounting height, and one additional single prong hook at 40 inches above floor. 6. Provide one hat shelf and one coat rod. 7. Isolated latching mechanism. 8. Provide with Key Cam Lock

a. Provide 2 Keys per lock and 2 master keys – all keys shall be provided to owner upon completion of the project.

b. Lockers shall be keyed separately.

D. Locker Arrangement: TYPE C (LockerRoom Area) 1. Size 12-in W x 18-in D x 72-in H 2. Solid HDPE Plastic Lockers

a. Color: Forest. 3. Configuration: SINGLE TIER on concrete base. 4. Tops: continuous sloped plastic laminate top with PVC edge banding. 5. Hooks: Provide standard double-prong ceiling hook under shelf, two single prong hooks at

standard mounting height, and one additional single prong hook at 40 inches above floor. 6. Provide one hat shelf and one coat rod. 7. Isolated latching mechanism. 8. Padlock Ready

a. Pad Locks shall be provided by owner.

E. Material: Solid HDPE Plastic and Wood/Metal Hybrid as scheduled.

F. Construction: 1. Type A & B Lockers – Wood/Metal Hybrid Lockers:

a. Entire Locker Body/Dividers/Shelves: Fabricate in the field. 1) Fabricate back and sides of 24 gauge sheet steel, with double flanged

connections extending full height. 2) Form top, bottom, and intermediate tier dividers of 24 gauge sheet steel with

single return bends at all sides. 3) Shelves shall be 24 gauge sheet steel with single bends at sides and back and a

double bend at front. 4) Fabricate lockers square, rigid and without warp with metal faces flat and free

from dents or distortion. 5) Weld frame members together to form rigid, one piece structure. 6) Weld, bolt, or rivet other joints and connections as standard with manufacturer. 7) Grind exposed welds flush. 8) All steel locker parts to be cleaned and coated after fabrication with a seven

stage zinc/iron phosphate solution to inhibit corrosion, followed by a coat of high grade custom blend powder electrostatically sprayed and baked at 350 degrees Fahrenheit for a minimum of 20 minutes to provide a tough durable finish.

b. Frame: 1) 16 gauge channels with integral continuous door stop/strike formed on both

latch and hinge side vertical members. c. Door Style:

1) Red Oak or Maple Wood door with custom stain to match architects sample. Provide with a clear finish overtop of the stain.

2) Rubber bumpers shall be provided to cushion door closing typical at all doors.


3) Do not expose bolts or rivets on fronts of doors or frames except for fastening of number plate.

d. Hinges: 16 gauge continuous piano hinge fastened to the door with screws and riveted to the frame. 1) All doors shall be right hand, side hinged.

e. Locks: 1) Shall be cylinder cam locks – master keyed to one system for the entire project.

2. Type C Lockers Solid (HDPE) Plastic Lockers: composed of manufacturers standard thickness of material typical. a. Entire Locker Body/Dividers/Shelves: Assembled by manufacturer:

1) Mortise and Tenon Construction 2) Full Overlay Design 3) No Face Frame

b. Frame: 1) Solid HDPE Plastic.

c. Door Style: 1) Solid HDPE Plastic doors with NO louvers or perforations. 2) Full-Width of the locker opening, frameless at the Solid HDPE Plastic lockers. 3) Door Sits away from the box – to create perimeter ventilation 4) Framed doors are unacceptable at the Solid HDPE Plastic lockers.

d. Hinges: continuous entire length of door panel. 1) Hinge made of 1/16” aluminum powdercoated with a 1/8” diameter steel pin. 2) Door Handle and Latch: A multi-point latching system is engaged into the

locker side panel. A hasp bar shall be attached to the side of the locker, not the back of the door. Doors are prepared for use with a key cam lock. Doors will close without the need of having to lift the handle on the front of the door.

e. Locks: 1) Shall be padlock ready. 2) Pad Locks shall be provided by owner.

2.04 LOCKER EQUIPMENT, ACCESSORIES, FINISH

A. Equip each locker with engraved aluminum identification plate fastened to the door with theft proof fasteners, one shelf, one double-prong ceiling hook, and two single-prong wall hooks.

B. Top Trim: as indicated on drawings.

C. End Panels: Contractor shall provide finished end panels where locker ends are exposed.

D. Filler Panels: 1. Contractor shall provide fillers to match locker finish where required typ uno. 2. Contractor shall provide wood trim at top and side filler panels at Type A & B Lockers as

indicated on drawings.

E. Finish: as indicated.

2.05 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate lockers square, rigid, and without warp


1. Provide fasteners, filler plates, supports, clips, and closures as required for a complete installation.

B. Unit Principle: Fabricate each locker with an individual door and frame; individual top, bottom, and back; and common intermediate uprights separating compartments.

C. Knocked-Down Construction: Fabricate lockers for nominal assembly at Project site using nuts, bolts, screws, or rivets.

D. Accessible Lockers: Fabricate as follows: 1. Locate bottom shelf no lower than 15 inches above the floor. 2. Where hooks, coat rods, or additional shelves are provided, locate no higher than 48 inches

above the floor.

E. Hooks: Manufacturer's standard ball-pointed type, aluminum or steel; zinc plated. 1. Provide additional hook at Type A lockers.

F. Identification Plates: Manufacturer's standard etched, embossed, or stamped aluminum plates; with numbers and letters at least 5/8 inch high.

G. Continuous Sloping Tops: as indicated on drawings.

H. Filler Panels: Provide finished to match lockers.

I. End Panels 1. Finished End Panels: Designed for concealing unused penetrations and fasteners, except for

perimeter fasteners, at exposed ends of non-recessed lockers; finished to match lockers. 2. Extend panel tight to wall, or provide closure trim to wall.

2.06 STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES

A. Surface Preparation: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish.

B. Polished Finishes: Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish, free of cross scratches. 1. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign

matter and leave surfaces chemically clean.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine walls, floors, and support bases, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.

B. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work.



3.02 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install level, plumb, and true; shim as required, using concealed shims. 1. Anchor locker runs at ends and at intervals recommended by manufacturer, but not more

than 36 inches o.c. Install anchors through backup reinforcing plates, channels, or blocking as required to prevent metal distortion, using concealed fasteners.

2. Anchor single rows of lockers to walls near top and bottom of lockers and to floor. 3. Anchor back-to-back lockers to floor.

B. Wood/Metal Hybrid Lockers: Assemble lockers and connect groups together with manufacturer’s standard fasteners, with no exposed fasteners on door faces or face frames.

C. Equipment and Accessories: Fit exposed connections of trim, fillers, and closures accurately together to form tight, hairline joints, with concealed fasteners and splice plates.

1. Attach hooks with at least two fasteners. 2. Attach door locks on doors using security-type fasteners. 3. Identification Plates: Identify metal lockers with identification indicated on Drawings.

a. Attach plates to each locker door, near top, centered, with at least two flush fasteners. 4. Attach recess trim to recessed lockers with concealed fasteners. 5. Attach filler panels with concealed fasteners. Locate fillers panels where indicated on

Drawings. 6. Attach sloping top units to lockers, with closures at exposed ends. 7. Attach finished end panels with fasteners only at perimeter to conceal exposed ends of non-

recessed lockers.

3.03 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION

A. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. Adjust doors and latches to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices operate properly.

B. Protect lockers from damage, abuse, dust, dirt, stain, or paint. Do not permit locker use during construction.

C. Touch up marred finishes, or replace lockers that cannot be restored to factory-finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by locker manufacturer.


LAWRENCE COUNTY FLAGPOLES PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 10 7500 - 1 © 2014 Eckles Architecture and Engineering

SECTION 10 7500 - FLAGPOLES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Aluminum flagpole.

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete footings for flagpoles, if any, and

if not specified in this Section.


A. Structural Performance: Provide flagpoles capable of withstanding the effects of wind loads as determined according to the building code in effect for this Project or NAAMM FP 1001, "Guide Specifications for Design Loads of Metal Flagpoles," whichever is more stringent. 1. Base flagpole design on maximum standard-size flag suitable for use with pole or flag size

indicated, whichever is more stringent. 2. Basic Wind Speed: As required by code for Project location, but not less than the following:

a. With flag: 100 mph b. Without flag: 145 mph

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of flagpole required. Include installation instructions.

B. Shop Drawings: Show general layout, jointing, grounding method, and anchoring and supporting systems. 1. Include details of foundation system for ground-set poles.

C. Finish Samples for Verification: If requested by Architect, for each finished metal used for flagpoles and accessories.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain each flagpole as a complete unit from a single manufacturer, including fittings, accessories, bases, and anchorage devices.


A. General: Spiral wrap flagpoles with heavy paper and enclose in a hard fiber tube or other protective container.

FLAGPOLES LAWRENCE COUNTY 10 7500 - 2 PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: 1. Basis-of-Design: Kearney-National Inc. (DKM Corp); Hapco/American Flagpole Div. 2. Baartol Co., Inc. 3. Concord Industries/ Flagpole Components, Inc. 4. Eder Flag Manufacturing Company, Inc. 5. Acme Lingo Flagpoles, LLC 6. Pole-Tech Co., Inc.

2.02 FLAGPOLE

A. Flagpole Construction, General: Construct flagpoles in one piece, except as specifically allowed in writing. If more than one piece is necessary, comply with the following: 1. Fabricate shop and field joints without using fasteners, screw collars, or lead calking. 2. For tapered flagpoles, provide flush hairline weather-resistant field joints using self-aligning,

snug-fitting, internal sleeves.

B. Exposed Height: 1. US Flag pole: 40 feet high (1 total) 2. US Flag pole: 30 feet high (2 total)

C. Aluminum Flagpoles: Provide cone-tapered flagpoles fabricated from seamless extruded tubing complying with ASTM B 241/, Alloy 6063, with a minimum wall thickness of 3/16 inch. Heat treat after fabrication to comply with ASTM B 597, Temper T6.

D. Foundation Tube: Galvanized corrugated-steel foundation tube, 0.064-inch minimum wall thickness, sized to suit flagpole and installation. Provide with 3/16-inch steel bottom plate and support plate; 3/4-inch-diameter, steel ground spike; and steel centering wedges all welded together. Galvanize steel parts, including foundation tube, after assembly. Provide loose hardwood wedges at top of foundation tube for plumbing pole. 1. Provide flashing collar of same material and finish as flagpole.

2.03 FITTINGS

A. Finial Ball: Manufacturer's standard flush-seam ball, sized as indicated or, if not indicated, to match pole-butt diameter. 1. 0.063-inch spun aluminum with gold anodized finish.

B. Internal Halyard: Ball-bearing, nonfouling, stationary truck assembly of cast metal with continuous 5/16-inch-diameter, attached to pole with stainless steel set screws. 1. Braided polypropylene halyards, plastic coated counterweight and sling assembly. 2. Provide manually operated cam cleat with stainless steel fasteners mounted to aluminum

plate, and concealed inside the flagpole behind a flush access door with a cylinder lock and continuous piano hinge.

3. Halyard Flag Snaps: Provide 2 swivel snap hooks per halyard a. Stainless steel or chrome plated bronze, with neoprene or vinyl covers.

4. Provide manufacturer’s standard spun aluminum flash collar, finish to match flagpole.

LAWRENCE COUNTY FLAGPOLES PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 10 7500 - 3

C. External Halyard: Ball-bearing, nonfouling, revolving truck assemblies of cast metal with continuous 5/16-inch-diameter, braided polypropylene halyards and 9-inch cast-metal cleats with fasteners. Finish exposed metal surfaces to match flagpole. 1. Provide 2 halyards and 2 cleats at each flagpole.

2. Provide cast-metal cleat covers, finished to match flagpole, secured with cylinder locks.

3. Provide halyard protectors consisting of a 2-inch channel, 60 inches long, finished to match flagpole.

D. Halyard Flag Snaps: Provide 2 swivel snap hooks per halyard, as follows: 1. Stainless steel. 2. Provide with neoprene or vinyl covers.


A. Concrete: Provide concrete composed of portland cement, coarse and fine aggregate, and water mixed in proportions to attain a 28-day compressive strength of not less than 3000 psi, complying with Division 3 Section “Cast-in-Place Concrete.”

B. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107.

C. Sand: ASTM C 33, fine aggregate.

D. Elastomeric Joint Sealant: Single-component neutral-curing silicone joint sealant complying with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for Use NT (nontraffic) and for Use M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O joint substrates.

2.05 FINISHES

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations relative to applying and designating finishes.

B. Aluminum: Finish designations prefixed by AA conform to the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. 1. Class I, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A41 (Mechanical Finish: nonspecular as

fabricated; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, clear coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Prepare in-ground flagpoles by painting below-grade portions with a heavy coat of bituminous paint. 1. Field verify exact installation locations with Architect.

B. Excavation: For foundation, excavate to neat clean lines in undisturbed soil. Remove loose soil and foreign matter from excavation and moisten earth before placing concrete.

FLAGPOLES LAWRENCE COUNTY 10 7500 - 4 PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY

C. Provide forms where required due to unstable soil conditions and for perimeter of flagpole base at grade. Secure forms, foundation tube, fiberglass sleeve, or anchor bolts in position, braced to prevent displacement during concreting.

D. Place concrete immediately after mixing. Compact concrete in place by using vibrators. Moist-cure exposed concrete for not less than 7 days or use a nonstaining curing compound.

E. Trowel exposed concrete surfaces to a smooth, dense finish, free of trowel marks, and uniform in texture and appearance. Provide positive slope for water runoff to base perimeter.

3.02 FLAGPOLE INSTALLATION

A. General: Install flagpoles where shown and according to Shop Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Foundation-Tube Installation: Install flagpole in foundation tube, seated on bottom plate between steel centering wedges. Plumb flagpole and install hardwood wedges to secure flagpole in place. Place and compact sand in foundation tube and remove hardwood wedges. Seal top of foundation tube with a 2-inch layer of elastomeric sealant and cover with flashing collar.


LAWRENCE COUNTY APPLIANCES PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 11 3112 - 1 © 2014 Eckles Architecture and Engineering

SECTION 11 3112 - APPLIANCES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes free-standing and mounted appliances and appurtenances, as indicated in Appliance Equipment Schedule on Drawings.

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 12 Section "Manufactured Wood Casework" for cabinets and countertops that

receive residential appliances. 2. Division 20 through 26 Sections for services and connections to appliances.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include operating characteristics, dimensions of individual appliances, and finishes for each appliance.

B. Appliance Schedule: For appliances; use same designations indicated on Drawings.

C. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that products comply with requirements.

D. Maintenance Data: For each product to include in maintenance manuals.

E. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer. Maintain, within 10 miles of Project site, a service center capable of providing training, parts, and emergency maintenance repairs.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain residential appliances through one source from a single distributor. 1. Provide products from same manufacturer for each type of appliance required.

C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with provisions of the following product certifications: 1. NFPA: Provide electrical appliances listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100,

by testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. 2. UL and NEMA: Provide electrical components required as part of residential appliances that

are listed and labeled by UL and that comply with applicable NEMA standards. 3. ANSI: Provide gas-burning appliances that comply with ANSI Z21 Series standards. 4. NAECA: Provide residential appliances that comply with NAECA standards.

D. Regulatory Requirements, Accessibility: Where residential appliances are indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with the "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG).".

APPLIANCES LAWRENCE COUNTY 11 3112 - 2 PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY

E. Energy Ratings: Provide residential appliances that carry labels indicating energy-cost analysis (estimated annual operating costs) and efficiency information as required by the FTC Appliance Labeling Rule. 1. Provide appliances qualifying for the EPA/DOE ENERGY STAR product labeling program.

1.04 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranties: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer of each appliance specified agrees to repair or replace residential appliances or components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Appliances: 1-year full warranty for parts and labor.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Provide the scheduled product. Substitute products by other manufacturers subject to the requirements of Division 01 Section “Product Requirements.”




C. Color-Coated Finish: Provide appliances with manufacturer's standard finish complying with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation including pretreatment, application, baking, color, gloss, and minimum dry film thickness for painted finishes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.


NEW ELEMENTARY/ MIDDLE SCHOOL APPLIANCES FRAZIER SCHOOL DISTRICT 11 3112 - 3


A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Built-in Equipment: Securely anchor units to supporting cabinets or countertops with concealed fasteners. Verify that clearances are adequate for proper functioning and rough openings are completely concealed.

C. Utilities: Coordinate with Divisions 20 through 26 for rough-in and final connection requirements.


A. Test each item of residential appliances to verify proper operation. Make necessary adjustments.

B. Verify that accessories required have been furnished and installed.

C. Remove packing material from all appliances and leave units in clean condition, ready for operation.


LAWRENCE COUNTY HORIZONTAL MANUAL & MOTORIZED ROLLER SHADES PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 12 2413 - 1 © 2014 Eckles Architecture and Engineering

SECTION 12 2413 - HORIZONTAL MANUAL & MOTORIZED ROLLER SHADES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes sputtered aluminum polyester solar roller shades, capable of smoothly raising and lowering the shade to any desired height and maintaining that height without slippage: 1. Manual chain shades at all manual shades. 2. Motorized – Low Voltage shades

a. Dispatchers 124 b. EOC Command 128 c. Media/Training/Conference 144 d. Entry/Waiting/Reception 101 e. Corridor 135a f. Open Work Area 141

3. Fascia panel, 4. Light filtering solar shades. 5. Local group and master control system.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking and grounds for mounting roller shades and accessories.

B. Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Coordination with gypsum board assemblies for installation of shade pockets, closures and related accessories.

C. Section 09510 - Acoustical Ceilings: Coordination with acoustical ceiling systems for installation of shade pockets, closures and related accessories.

D. Division 16 - Electrical: Electric service for motor controls.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

B. NFPA 701-99 - Fire Tests for Flame-Resistant Textiles and Films.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include styles, material descriptions, construction details, dimensions of individual components and profiles, features, finishes, and operating instructions.

B. Shop Drawings: Show location and extent of horizontal roller shades and fascia. Include elevations, sections, details, and dimensions not shown in Product Data. Show installation details,

HORIZONTAL MANUAL & MOTORIZED ROLLER SHADES LAWRENCE COUNTY 12 2413 - 2 PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY

mountings, attachments to other Work, operational clearances, wiring diagrams, and relationship to adjoining work.

C. Samples for Verification: For the following products, prepared on Samples from the same material to be used for the Work. 1. Fabric: Not less than 6-inches square for type of shade material; in sets for each color,

texture, and pattern. 2. Fascia Panel: Not less than 6-inches long.

D. Maintenance Data: For horizontal roller shades to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following: 1. Methods for maintaining roller shade fabric and finishes on accessory materials. 2. Precautions about cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to finishes and

performance. 3. Operating hardware.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain horizontal roller shades through one source from a single manufacturer.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Passes NFPA 701small and large-scale vertical burn. Materials tested shall be identical to products proposed for use.

C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Obtain roller shades through one source from a single manufacturer with a minimum of twenty years experience in manufacturing products comparable to those specified in this section.

D. Installer Qualifications: Installer trained and certified by the manufacturer with a minimum of ten years experience in installing products comparable to those specified in this section.

E. Electrical Components: NFPA Article 100 listed and labeled by either UL or ETL or other testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, marked for intended use, and tested as a system. Individual testing of components will not be acceptable in lieu of system testing.

F. Anti-Microbial Characteristics: 'No Growth' per ASTM G 21 results for fungi ATCC9642, ATCC 9644, ATCC9645.

G. Third Party Evaluation: Provide documentation stating the shade cloth has undergone third party evaluation for all chemical inputs, down to a scale of 100 parts per million, that have been evaluated for human and environmental safety. Identify any and all inputs, which are known to be carcinogenic, mutagenic, teratogenic, reproductively toxic, or endocrine disrupting. Also identify items that are toxic to aquatic systems, contain heavy metals, or organohalogens. The material shall contain no inputs that are known problems to human or environmental health per the above major criteria, except for an input that is required to meet local fire codes.

H. Mock-Up: Provide a mock-up (manual shades only) of one solar roller shade assembly for evaluation of mounting, appearance and accessories. 1. Locate mock-up in window designated by Architect. 2. Do not proceed with remaining work until, mock-up is accepted by Architect.

LAWRENCE COUNTY HORIZONTAL MANUAL & MOTORIZED ROLLER SHADES PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 12 2413 - 3


A. Deliver roller shades in factory packages, marked with manufacturer and product name, fire-test-response characteristics, lead-free designation, and location of installation using same room designations indicated on Drawings and in a window treatment schedule.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install horizontal roller shades until construction and wet and dirty finish work in spaces, including painting, is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.

B. Field Measurements: Where horizontal roller shades are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Allow clearances for operable glazed units' operation hardware throughout the entire operating range. Notify Architect of discrepancies. 1. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.


A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Horizontal Roller Shades: Before installation begins, for all roller shades provide rough

material for 2 shades @ 6’-0”W x 6’-0”H. 2. Provide additional 25 lineal feet of chain. 3. Provide additional 2 clutches.

1.09 WARRANTY

A. Roller Shade Hardware, Chain and Shadecloth: Manufacturer's standard non-depreciating twenty-five year limited warranty.

B. Roller Shade Motors and Motor Control Systems: Manufacturer's standard non-depreciating five-year warranty.

C. Roller Shade Installation: One year from date of Substantial Completion, not including scaffolding, lifts or other means to reach inaccessible areas.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Horizontal Manual & Motorized Roller Shades by the following: 1. Basis of Design: by Halcyon Shades, Habitata Building Products LLC 1600 S. 39th Street,

St. Louis, MO 63110. a. Local Contact Edward Eisaman 1-800-569-9444. b. Main Manufacturer Contact: Chris Luettecke 1-800-234-2280(p),

1-800-291-3331(f), [email protected]


B. Manual Approved Alternate Basis of Design Mesh Roller Shade Product: 1. Lutron Electronics Co., Inc. Mesh roller shade with Basketweave E Screen (ES) with

KoolBlack Technology – 3% openness factor, color SheerShade – Mermet, Charcoal/Charcoal.

2. Approved Equal Manufacturers: a. Hunter Douglass b. Springs Window Fashions/Bali c. Premier Shades by Caldwells Windoware, Inc. d. Mecho-Shade Systems.

C. Motorized Approved Line Voltage Alternate Basis of Design Mesh Roller Shade Product: 1. Lutron Electronics Co., Inc. Mesh roller shade with Basketweave E Screen (ES) with

KoolBlack Technology – 3% openness factor, color SheerShade – Mermet, Charcoal/Charcoal.

2. Approved Equal Manufacturers: a. Hunter Douglass b. Springs Window Fashions/Bali c. Premier Shades by Caldwells Windoware, Inc. d. Mecho-Shade Systems.

D. Products by other manufacturers will be acceptable only in compliance with the requirements for Product Substitutions and Comparable Products in Division 01 “Product Requirements”. 1. The shading system manufacturer shall provide all interfaces, control switches, contact

closures, etc for a complete and fully functioning system as detailed in the contract drawings. Refer to the electrical drawings for the scope of work from the Division 26 contractor with regard to control and integration of the shades with the lighting control systems in each respective space. Inform the Division 26 contractor of any deviations from the lead specified system, prior to installation, so any modifications to the lighting control system can be accounted for.

2.02 SOLAR SHADE FILMS

A. Visually Transparent Solar Shade Film: Halcyon Shade, Embossed 1. Grey/Silver/Grey EM: Total Solar Reflectance - 17%, Visible Light Transmittance – 9%,

Glare Reduction – 89%

2.03 HORIZONTAL MANUAL & MOTORIZED ROLLER SHADES

A. Shade Webs: Construction of shade web includes the shade film, the weight bar, shade roller tube, and the attachment of the shade web to the roller tube. Sewn hems and open hem pockets shall not be acceptable. 1. Weight Bars: a recyclable aluminum extruded weight bar attached by means of an adhesive

to the bottom of the film web. The weight bar shall be designed to accommodate the use of “hold-down” pins or brackets and shall be the precise width of the film web. Weight bar construction and weight bar shall be similar for all shades within one room, unless otherwise specified by the architect.

2. Shade Web and Shade Roller Attachment: a. Use extruded aluminum shade roller tube of a diameter and wall thickness required to

support shade fabric without excessive deflection. Roller tubes less than 1.125 inch (28.58mm) in diameter for manual shades, and less than 1.25 inches (31.7 mm) for motorized shades shall not be acceptable.


b. Provide for positive mechanical engagement with drive / brake mechanism. c. Attachments with adhesives are acceptable.

2.04 SHADE MATERIAL

A. Light Filtering Material: Technologically advanced transparent Polyester with a micro thin layer of metal bonded with a strong laminating adhesive: Basis of Design, Halcyon Shades. PROVIDE AT LOCATIONS AS SCHEDULED ON WINDOW TREATMENTS LEGEND ON DRAWING A003. 1. Color: Grey/Silver/Grey EM 2. Solar Reflectance: 17%. 3. Solar Absorption: 59%. 4. Visible Light Transmittance: 9%. 5. Glare Reduction: 89%. 6. Ultraviolet Rejected: 99.8%. 7. Gauge: 4.5. 8. Solar Heat Control, UV Protection, Glare Control, Preserve View, Washable and Flame-

Retardant

2.05 SHADE BAND A. Fabricate units to completely fill existing openings from head to sill and jamb-to-jamb, unless

specifically indicated otherwise. B. Fabricate film web to hang flat without buckling or distortion. Fabricate unguided film web to

roll true and straight without shifting sideways more than 1/8 inch (3.18mm) in either direction per 8 feet (2438m) of shade height due to warp distortion or embossed design.

2.06 SHADE MOTOR DRIVE SYSTEM

A. Shade Motors: 1. Tubular, asynchronous (non-synchronous) motors, with built-in reversible capacitor

operating at 110v AC (60hz), single phase, temperature Class A, thermally protected, totally enclosed, maintenance free with line voltage power supply equipped with locking disconnect plug assembly furnished with each motor.

2. Conceal motors inside shade roller tube. a. Provide (1) motor per shade at all motorized shade locations as designated on the

drawings. 3. Maximum current draw for each shade motor of 2.3 amps. 4. Use motors rated at the same nominal speed for all shades in the same room.

B. Total hanging weight of shade band shall not exceed 80 percent of the rated lifting capacity of the shade motor and tube assembly.

2.07 MOTOR CONTROL SYSTEMS

A. Motorization (RF) with Wall Switch: 1. DecoFlex WireFree™ RTS 5 RF Wall Switch: Multi Channel RF wireless wall switch that

operates five window coverings or five groups of window coverings. Up, down and stop functions and favorite position on each channel.


2. Provide quantity of 1 wall switch in the following rooms: a. Dispatchers 124 b. EOC Command 128 c. Media/Training/Conference 144 d. Entry/Waiting/Reception 101 e. Corridor 135a f. Open Work Area 141

3. Exact location shall be determined by architect in the field. Electrical contractor shall coordinate location with owner in the field prior to installation.

4. Mount on finished wall surface to meet handicap accessible mounting height typical.

B. Motorization (DC) with Remote: Easy to use radio frequency motorized remote control options; motors are small and wireless and are completely concealed. 1. Telis 4 RTS

a. Multi-Channel Radio Frequency Remote with mounting hardware - operates multiple shades and groups of shades at the same time. S300017

2. Radio Frequency Adaptor connected directly to battery-powered motor. S300010 3. Provide quantities according to the following:

a. Dispatchers 124 1) Provide quantity of (7) to be mounted at workstations.

b. EOC Command 128 1) Provide quantity of (1) to be mounted in location to be determined by owner

prior to installation. c. Media/Training/Conference 144

1) Provide quantity of (1) to be mounted in location to be determined by owner prior to installation.

d. Entry/Waiting/Reception 101 1) Provide quantity of (1) to be mounted in location to be determined by owner

prior to installation. e. Corridor 135a

1) Provide quantity of (1) to be mounted in location to be determined by owner prior to installation.

f. Open Work Area 141 1) Provide quantity of (4) to be mounted at workstations.

2.08 CONFIGURATIONS

A. Mounting options 1. Inside – measured from jamb to jamb 2. Outside – add ½” to measurement for each end of the normal measurement

B. Roll Configuration 1. Regular Roll – allows the material to roll down from the rear of the shade. Regular roll is

standard unless noted otherwise

C. Tapered shape – allows for windows with a different top angle to bottom angle. The bottom portion of the shade must always be smaller than the top.

D. Two-On-One-Cassette – two shades that open and close independently. Sharing the same cassette. An option for side-by-side windows or wide windows where individual operation are preferred.


2.09 FABRICATION

A. Components: Noncorrosive, self-lubricating materials.

B. Fabricate units to completely fill existing openings from head to sill and jamb-to-jamb, unless specifically indicated otherwise. 1. Shade Units: Fill opening with widest cloth coverage as possible within the bracket limits. 2. Fabricate end-to-end installations with terminations at mullions or other defined vertical

separations.

C. Fabricate shadecloth to hang flat without buckling or distortion. Fabricate with trimmed edges to hang straight without curling or raveling. Fabricate unguided shadecloth to roll true and straight without shifting sideways more than 1/8 inch in either direction per 8 feet of shade height due to warp distortion or weave design.

D. Provide battens in standard shades as required to assure proper tracking and uniform rolling of the shadebands. Contractor shall be responsible for assuring the width-to-height (W:H) ratios shall not exceed manufacturer's standards or, in absence of such standards, shall be responsible for establishing appropriate standards to assure proper tracking and rolling of the shadecloth within specified standards. Battens shall be roll-formed stainless steel, tempered steel, or fiber glass, as required.

E. Provide battens for railroaded shades when width-to-height (W:H) ratios meet or exceed manufacturer's standards. In absence of manufacturer's standards, be responsible for proper use and placement of battens to assure proper tracking and roll of shadebands.

2.10 COMPONENTS

A. Access and Material Requirements: 1. Provide shade hardware allowing for the removal of shade roller tube from brackets without

removing hardware from opening and without requiring end or center supports to be removed.

2. Provide shade hardware that allows for removal and re-mounting of the shade bands without having to remove the shade tube, drive or operating support brackets.

3. Use only engineered plastics by DuPont for all plastic components of shade hardware. Styrene based plastics, and /or polyester, or reinforced polyester will not be acceptable.

2.11 ACCESSORIES

A. Exposed Roller/Clutch – Roll-Ease Clutch systems are used on all shades for smooth, precise raising and lowering, designed to hold shade at the desired height. Clutch rollers come with universal mounting brackets that may be used for all types of mounting. Shades can be mounted for either right of left-handed operation. 1. Color: White.

B. Exclusive designed aluminum Exposed weight bar 1. Color: Black.

C. Control Chain – beaded control chain in heavy-duty stainless steel with a chain stop to hold at desired chain position. Child Safety-Tension device included with each shade.


1. Color: Stainless Steel.

D. Fascia Style 1. Fascia - Rounded style with matching end caps 2. Sizes: As Required to match window sizes 3. Colors: Custom color, Shall be powdercoated to match window frame color.

E. Hold-Down Clips – for glass @ doors where designated that require shade to remain stationary, prevents swinging or banging. 1. Colors: Clear

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, operational clearances, and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 PREPARATION

C. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.

D. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.

3.03 ROLLER SHADE INSTALLATION

A. Install roller shade level and plumb and aligned with adjacent units according to manufacturer's written instructions, and located so unit edges are not closer than 2 inches to interior face of glass. 1. Coordinate requirements for distance between shades and glass with glass type to avoid heat

build-up and possible damage to glass. 2. Allow proper clearances for window operation hardware.

B. Install mounting brackets with not less than 2 fasteners per bracket.

C. Jamb or Window-Frame Mounted: Install headrail flush with face of opening jamb and head, or with face of window frame (depending on existing window, verify with Architect).

D. Turn-Key Single-Source Responsibility for Motorized Interior Roller Shades: To control the responsibility for performance of motorized roller shade systems, assign the design, engineering, and installation of motorized roller shade systems, motors, controls, and low voltage electrical control wiring specified in this Section to a single manufacturer and their authorized installer/dealer. The Architect will not produce a set of electrical drawings for the installation of control wiring for the motors, or motor controllers of the motorized roller shades. Power wiring (line voltage), shall be provided by the roller shade installer/dealer, in accordance with the requirements provided by the manufacturer. Coordinate the following with the roller shade installer/dealer:


1. Main Contractor shall provide power panels and circuits of sufficient size to accommodate roller shade manufacturer’s requirements, as indicated on the mechanical and electrical drawings.

2. Main Contractor shall coordinate with requirements of roller shade installer/dealer, before inaccessible areas are constructed.

3. Roller shade installer/dealer shall run line voltage as dedicated home runs (of sufficient quantity, in sufficient capacity as required) terminating in junction boxes in locations designated by roller shade dealer.

4. Roller shade installer/dealer shall provide and run all line voltage (from the terminating points) to the motor controllers, wire all roller shade motors to the motor controllers, and provide and run low voltage control wiring from motor controllers to switch/ control locations designated by the Architect. All above-ceiling and concealed wiring shall be plenum-rated, or installed in conduit, as required by the electrical code having jurisdiction.

5. Main Contractor shall provide conduit with pull wire in all areas, which might not be accessible to roller shade contractor due to building design, equipment location or schedule.

3.04 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust horizontal roller shades to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free from binding or malfunction throughout entire operational range.


A. Clean roller shade surfaces after installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. 1. Replace damaged shades that cannot be repaired, in a manner approved by Architect, before

time of Substantial Completion.

C. Protect installed products until completion of project.

3.06 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage Installer or a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain roller shade systems. 1. Contractor shall provide Owner with 2 hours of training.


LAWRENCE COUNTY MANUFACTURED WOOD CASEWORK PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 12 3200 - 1 © 2014 Eckles Architecture and Engineering

SECTION 12 3200 - MANUFACTURED WOOD CASEWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following factory fabricated items: 1. Plastic-laminate-faced wood casework of stock and custom design. 2. Plastic-laminate countertops. 3. Solid Surface countertops.

B. Application: 1. Plastic-laminate faced cabinets and countertops: Typical except as otherwise noted

2. Miscellaneous furnishings and accessories

C. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 06 Section "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" and Division 09 Section "Gypsum

Board Assemblies" for wood blocking and reinforcing for anchoring manufactured casework.

2. Division 06 Section "Architectural Millwork and Finish Carpentry” for the following: a. Decorative resin panel and metal stand-off mounting stud requirements,

3. Division 09 Section "Resilient Wall Base and Accessories" for rubber base applied to manufactured casework.

4. Division 11 Section “Appliances” for freestanding and under-counter appliances installed as part of casework.

5. Divisions 20 through 26 Sections for the following: a. Field quality-control testing of mechanical and electrical systems and devices. b. Duct connections.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. MDF: Medium-density fiberboard.

B. Exposed Portions of Cabinets: Surfaces visible when doors and drawers are closed, including bottoms of cabinets more than 48 inches above floor, and surfaces visible in open cabinets. 1. Ends of cabinets indicated to be installed directly against and completely concealed by walls

or other cabinets are defined as "concealed."

C. Semiexposed Portions of Cabinets: Surfaces behind opaque doors, such as interiors of cabinets, shelves, dividers, interiors and sides of drawers, and interior faces of doors. Tops of cases 78 inches or more above floor are defined as semiexposed.

D. Concealed Portions of Cabinets: Surfaces not usually visible after installation, including sleepers, web frames, dust panels, and ends and backs that are placed directly against walls or other cabinets.

E. Hardwood Plywood: A panel product composed of layers or plies of veneer, or of veneers in combination with lumber core, hardboard core, MDF core, or particleboard core, joined with adhesive, and faced both front and back with hardwood veneers.

MANUFACTURED WOOD CASEWORK LAWRENCE COUNTY 12 3200 - 2 PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Test Reports for Countertop Surface Material: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, indicating compliance of laboratory countertop surface materials with requirements specified for chemical and physical resistance.

C. Provide engineering calculations indicating compliance with shelf loading requirements in excess of AWI quality standard

D. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for institutional casework. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work. 1. Indicate locations of hardware and keying of locks.

2. Indicate locations of blocking and reinforcements required for installing casework.

3. Indicate locations and types of service fittings together with associated service supply connection required.

4. Indicate critical dimensions required for compliance with referenced accessibility standards.

5. Indicate duct connections, electrical connections, and locations of access panels.

6. Include roughing-in information for mechanical, plumbing, and electrical connections.

7. Show adjacent walls, doors, windows, other building components. Indicate clearances.

8. Include layout of units in relation to lighting fixtures and air-conditioning registers and grilles.

E. Provide full-size template for countertop penetrations for sink bowls and service fittings.

F. Samples for Initial Selection: Not required. Provide scheduled finish products, subject to verification by Architect.

G. Samples for Verification: 1. 6-inch-square Samples for each type of finish, including top material and edge banding.

2. Section of countertop showing top, front edge, and backsplash/ side splash construction.

3. One of each type of sink and accessory item specified.

4. One of each type of hardware item specified.

5. One of each finish type of full-size finished base cabinet, wall cabinet, and tall cabinet, complete with hardware, doors, and drawers, but without countertop.

6. Maintain full-size samples at Project site during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. Unless otherwise indicated, approved sample units may become part of the completed Work if in undisturbed condition at time of Substantial Completion. Notify Architect of their exact locations.

H. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

I. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.

LAWRENCE COUNTY MANUFACTURED WOOD CASEWORK PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 12 3200 - 3

1.04 ACCESSIBILITY REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with Federal Register Volume 56, No. 144, Rules and Regulations and regulatory requirements referenced in Part 1; and with the following special requirements where indicated on architectural plans as "ADA", or as otherwise indicated or required by authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Countertop Height: With or without cabinet below, not to exceed a height of 34 inches

Above Finished Floor (AFF), at a surface depth of 24 inches.

2. Countertop Maximum Side Reach Depth: Maximum 24 inches from wall surface to finished front edge of counter. a. Casework Cabinet Mark as scheduled references manufacturer’s standard nominal

unit dimensions. Provide base cabinets in custom depth as necessary to meet accessible reach ranges, except as otherwise indicated.

3. Kneespace Clearance: Minimum 29 inches AFF, and 30 inches clear span width.

4. 12 inch deep shelving, adjustable or fixed: Not to exceed a range from 9 inches AFF to 54 inches AFF.

5. Wardrobe Cabinets: Furnish with rod/shelf adjustable to 48 inches AFF at a maximum 21 inch shelf depth.

6. Sink Cabinet Clearances: In addition to other requirements, upper kneespace frontal depth shall be no less than 8 inches, and lower toe frontal depth shall be no less than 11 inches, at a point 9 inches AFF, and as further described in Volume 56, Section 4.19. a. Where scribing or shimming cabinet base for uneven floor, lay out and sequence work

to maintain required sink cabinet clearances.


A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with current ICC/ANSI A117.1 as referenced by PA Uniform Construction Code and as adopted by authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative of institutional casework manufacturer for installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.

C. Source Limitations: To the greatest extent possible obtain manufactured casework through one source from a single manufacturer or manufacturer-approved distributer. 1. Obtain countertops, hardware, accessories, and service fittings not provided under a separate

Prime Contract, from casework manufacturer.

D. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards," Section 1600. 1. Provide AWI Quality Certification Program certificate indicating that manufactured

casework complies with requirements.

E. Safety Glass: Products complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 for Category II materials.

F. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended location and application.

G. Product Designations: Drawings indicate sizes, configurations, and finish material of casework by referencing basis-of-design manufacturer's catalog numbers. Other manufacturers' casework of


similar sizes and door and drawer configurations, of same finish material, and complying with the Specifications may be submitted in compliance with Division 01 Section "Product Requirements."

H. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to manufactured casework, custom millwork and adjacent construction.

I. Keying Conference: Conduct conference at Project site or other mutually acceptable location. Incorporate keying conference decisions into final keying requirements.


A. Deliver casework only after painting, utility roughing-in, and similar operations that could damage, soil, or deteriorate casework have been completed in installation areas. If casework must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions meet requirements specified in "Project Conditions" Article.

B. Keep finished surfaces covered with polyethylene film or other protective covering during handling and installation.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install casework until spaces are enclosed and weather tight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

B. Field Measurements: Where casework is indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the

Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating institutional casework without field measurements. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.

1.08 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of metal framing and reinforcements in gypsum board assemblies for support of casework.

B. Coordinate installation of casework with utility connections and with installation of fume hoods, appliances, service utilities and other adjacent or integral equipment and accessories.


A. Furnish complete touchup kit for each type and color of casework provided. Include scratch fillers, stains, finishes, and other materials necessary to perform permanent repairs to damaged laboratory casework finish.

B. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Cabinet Mounting Clips and Related Hardware: Quantity equal to 0.5 percent of amount

installed, but no fewer than 12 of each type.


2. Shelf Mounting Clips: Quantity equal to .05 percent of amount installed, but no fewer than 20 of each type.

3. Cabinet pulls, hinges, catches: Quantity equal to 0.5 percent of amount installed, but no fewer than 5 of each type.

4. Cabinet cam lock sets: One per room.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of casework that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Delamination of components or other failures of glue bond. 2. Warping of components. 3. Failure of operating hardware. 4. Deterioration of finishes.

B. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Product and Manufacturer limitations: 1. It is the intent of this specification to establish performance and quality criteria consistent

with established standards of design and function herein described. Work not meeting these minimum standards will not be accepted.

2. Where a product is scheduled or specified, provide the products indicated.

3. Where a manufacturer is specified, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified.

4. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by a manufacturer allowed under the Product Substitutions provisions of Section 01 6000 Product Requirements. a. Specific materials, finish options, construction details, modularity, hardware and test

data will be held in strict compliance.

B. Basis-of-Design Manufacturers: 1. Plastic-Laminate-Faced Manufactured Casework: Case Systems, Inc. 2. Plastic-Laminate Material: Formica (substitutions not accepted). 3. PVC Edgebanding: Doellken-Woodtape. 4. Solid-Surfacing Material: LG Hausys. 5. Miscellaneous Equipment, Components and Accessories: As scheduled or otherwise

indicated.

C. Additional Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements and approval by Architect, provide the Basis-of-Design or scheduled products, or comparable products by one of the following: 1. Manufactured Casework:

a. Cabinets By Design b. Stevens Industries. c. CampbellRhea d. Collegedale Casework, LLC


e. LSI Corporation of America, Inc. f. TMI Systems Design Corporation g. Mott Manufacturing

2. Plastic-Laminate Material: Substitutions not accepted.

3. PVC Edgebanding: As indicated on drawings.

4. Solid-Surfacing Material: Substitutions not accepted

2.02 MATERIALS

A. General:

1. Maximum Moisture Content for Lumber: 7 percent for hardwood and 12 percent for softwood.

2. Hardwood Plywood: HPVA HP-1, either veneer core or particle core, unless otherwise indicated.

3. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1.

4. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2-Exterior Glue, made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde or straw-based particleboard complying with ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2 except for density.

5. Medium-Density Fiberboard (MDF): ANSI A208.2, Grade 130 Exterior Glue.

6. Hardboard: AHA A135.4, Class 1 Tempered.

7. Plastic Laminate: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with NEMA LD 3 and “Balanced Construction” and PVA glue applied under rigid, cold press.

8. Edgebanding for Plastic Laminate: Rigid PVC extrusions, through color with satin finish, 3 mm thick at counters, doors and drawer fronts, 1 mm thick elsewhere applied with hot melt adhesive and radiused by automatic trimmers.

B. Exposed Cabinet Materials: 1. Plastic Laminate: Type VGS GP-28.

2. Unless otherwise indicated, provide specified edgebanding on all exposed edges.

C. Semiexposed Cabinet Materials: 1. Plastic Laminate: Type VGS GP-28. Provide plastic laminate for interior faces of doors

and drawer fronts.

2. Unless otherwise indicated, provide specified edgebanding on all semiexposed edges.

D. Concealed Cabinet Materials: 1. Plastic Laminate: Type BKL.

2. Solid Wood: Any hardwood or softwood species, with no defects affecting strength or utility.

3. Plywood: Hardwood plywood. Concealed backs of plywood with exposed or semiexposed faces shall be same species as faces.

4. Particleboard.

5. MDF.


E. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304 with No. 4 satin finish; stretcher-leveled standard of flatness.

F. Solid-Surfacing Material: Homogeneous solid sheets of filled plastic resin complying with ISSFA-2.

2.03 DESIGN, COLOR, AND FINISH

A. Provide institutional casework of the following design: 1. Plastic Laminate Casework: Flush overlay with square edges; Plastic laminate tops.

a. Application: Typical, except as otherwise indicated.

B. Plastic-Laminate Colors and Finishes: As scheduled or otherwise approved by Architect.

C. PVC Edgebanding Color: As scheduled or otherwise approved by Architect

D. Solid-Surfacing Material Colors and Patterns: As scheduled or otherwise approved by Architect


A. General: Fabricate smooth finished condition, free from splits, bruises or other surface irregularities. Millwork construction will not be acceptable.

B. 32mm System: Side panels constructed with two vertical rows of 8mm holes, precisely 32mm from the center of the next hole. System permits interchangeable components.

C. Electrical Service Fittings: Provide units complete with metal housings, receptacles, terminals, device plates, accessories, and gaskets required for mounting on casework. 1. Receptacles: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, FS W-C-596, and UL 498. Duplex

type, Configuration 5 20R. a. Receptacle Grade: General grade, unless otherwise indicated.

b. GFCI Receptacles: Comply with UL 943, General grade.

2. Recessed-Type Fittings: Provide with galvanized steel boxes.

3. Cover Plates: Provide satin finish, chrome-plated cover plates with formed, beveled edges.

D. Filler and Closure Strips and Panels: Provide as needed to close spaces between cabinets and walls, ceilings, and indicated equipment. Fabricate from same material and with same finish as cabinets exposed panels. 1. Provide utility-space closure panels at spaces between base cabinets where utility space

would otherwise be exposed, including spaces below countertops.

2. Provide closure panels at ends of utility spaces where utility space would otherwise be exposed.

3. Provide knee-space panels (modesty panels) at spaces between base cabinets, where cabinets are not installed against a wall or where space is not otherwise closed. Fabricate from same material and with same finish as exposed cabinet backs.


2.05 PLASTIC-LAMINATED CABINET FABRICATION

A. Cabinet Construction, comply with referenced AWI quality standard and as follows: 1. Bottoms and Ends of Cabinets, Shelves, and Tops of Wall Cabinets and Tall Cabinets: 3/4-

inch panel, plastic-laminate faced on exposed surfaces, plastic laminate or melamine faced on semiexposed surfaces as indicated.

2. Backs of Cabinets: 1/2-inch panel, plastic-laminate faced on exposed surfaces, melamine faced on semiexposed surfaces. a. Fabricator's option: Provide 1/4-inch hardboard backs, ANSI A 135.4 Tempered,

melamine faced on both surfaces. Join to cabinet body with concealed dado, using glue and pressure to assemble. Provide 3/4-in thick lumber anchor strips at top and bottom of wall cabinets, and top of base cabinets.

3. Drawer Fronts: 3/4-inch panel, plastic-laminate faced on both sides with 3-mm PVC edges.

4. Drawer Sides and Backs: 3/4-inch thermoset decorative panel, with glued dovetail or multiple-dowel joints.

5. Drawer Bottoms: 1/4-inch thermoset decorative panel glued and dadoed into front, back, and sides of drawers.

6. Doors: 3/4-inch panel, plastic-laminate faced on both sides, 3-mm PVC edges. a. Panel: Particleboard or MDF with wood stiles and rails.

B. Base Cabinets, Tall Cabinets: For installation on concrete floor deck, fabricate floor-mounted casework for installation over separate continuous wood ladder-type structural cabinet support, with no cabinet body sides extending to floor. 1. Structural Cabinet Support: Cabinet sub-base, separate from cabinet body, and continuous;

water resistant exterior grade plywood with concealed fastening to cabinet bottom. Ladder-type construction, of front, back, and intermediates, to form a secure and level platform to which cabinets attach.

2. Sub-base cabinet support at exposed cabinet end panels shall be recessed 1/4 inch from face of finished end, for flush installation of finished base material.

3. Provide 3-mm PVC edge along bottom edge of exposed cabinet end panels.

C. Rubber Base Molding: As specified in Division 09 Section "Resilient Wall Base and Accessories."

2.06 COUNTER AND TABLE TOPS

A. Countertops, General: Provide smooth, clean exposed tops and edges in uniform plane free of defects. Provide front and end overhang of 1 inch over base cabinets. 1. Provide plastic laminate countertops on plastic laminate cabinets 2. Provide solid-surfacing countertops, sills and transaction surfaces where indicated.

B. Plastic-Laminate Tops: Plastic-laminate sheet, shop bonded with waterproof glue to both sides of 1-1/8-inch particleboard. At fabricators option, underside of countertops may have thermally fused melamine in lieu of plastic-laminate. Sand surfaces to which plastic laminate is to be bonded. 1. Plastic-Laminate Type for Flat Tops: HGS GP-48.

2. Plastic-Laminate Type for Backing: BKL.

3. All exposed outside corners shall be fabricated with a 1-inch radius with continuous edgebanding


4. Except as otherwise noted, fabricate top and backsplash as separate plastic laminate pieces with 3mm PVC edgebanding at exposed edge. Where indicated, provide separate end splashes fitted to top. a. Provide 3-mm PVC edging on front edge of top, on top edges of backsplashes and end

splashes, and on ends of tops and splashes.

5. Where countertops are scheduled for freestanding bases, provide 3-mm PVC edging on edges of tops of plastic laminate cabinets; provide specified wood edging on tops of wood cabinets.

6. Use phenolic-resin-bonded particleboard for countertops containing sinks.

7. Color: As scheduled.

8. Countertop Fabrication: Fabricate with factory cutouts for sinks and with butt joints assembled with epoxy adhesive and prefitted, concealed metal splines. a. Countertop Configuration: Flat, 1 inch thick, with beveled edge and corners, and with

drip groove and separate applied backsplash.

C. Adjustable Shelf Supports: Zinc-plated and Powder-coated steel standards and shelf brackets, complying with BHMA A156.9, Types B04102 and B04112, surface mounted.

2.07 CASEWORK HARDWARE and ACCESSORIES

A. Hardware, General: Provide manufacturer's standard satin-finish, and powder-coated, commercial-quality, heavy-duty hardware complying with requirements indicated. 1. Use threaded metal or plastic inserts with machine screws for fastening to panel core

material, except where hardware is through-bolted from back side.

B. Pulls: Solid satin-finish plated brass wire pulls, fastened from back with two screws. Provide 2 pulls for drawers more than 24 inches wide.

C. Drawer Slides: Full-extension ball-bearing, metal-channel, self-closing drawer slides, designed to be mounted on bottom edge of drawer side and to prevent rebound when drawers are closed, complying with BHMA A156.9, Type B05091, and rated for the following loads: 1. Box Drawer Slides: 120 lbf. 2. File Drawer Slides: 200 lbf.

a. Provide steel ball bearing glides with steel file hangers. 3. Pencil Drawer Slides: 45 lbf. 4. Keyboard Slide: 75 lbf.

D. Butt Hinges: Matte Nickel, semiconcealed, 5-knuckle hinges complying with BHMA A156.9, Grade 1, with antifriction bearings and rounded tips. Provide 2 hinges for doors less than 48 inches high and 3 hinges for doors more than 48 inches high.

E. Door Catches: Heavy-Duty, large-diameter (17.5 mm) Zinc-plated, nylon-roller spring catch. Provide 2 catches on doors more than 48 inches high.

F. Drawer and Cabinet Locks: Deadbolt type, 6-pin tumbler, brass with matte nickel finish, complying with BHMA A156.11, Grade 1. 1. Key each room separately. Coordinate keying of each room with Owner and Architect prior

to fabrication. 2. Provide a minimum of two keys per lock and six master keys. 3. Provide locks at all cabinets, doors and drawers, unless otherwise indicated.


G. Adjustable Shelf Supports: 2-pin locking plastic shelf rests complying with BHMA A156.9, Type B04013.

H. Solid-Surfacing-Material Tops: As detailed, or 3/4-inch- thick, homogeneous solid sheets of filled plastic resin complying with ISSFA-2, standard type, with front edge built up with same material.

I. Countertop Support: Steel bracket with mounting holes for countertop support at typical casework kneespace. 1. Basis of Design: Stevens 10840

J. Grommets for Cable Passage through Countertops: 2-inch OD, molded-plastic grommets and matching plastic caps with slot for wire passage, color as selected from manufacturer’s standard.

2.08 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT AND ACCESSORIES

A. Paper Towel Dispenser: As specified in Section 06 4000 or as follows: 1. Satin finish stainless steel; capacity 300 c-fold or multifold towels; Bobrick Model B-526

B. Wire Management by Doug Mockett & Company, Inc; 800 523 1269; www.mockett.com : As specified in Section 06 4000 or as follows:

a. One-pc J-shape Wire Manager: WM2-90; Color Black (as detailed)

2.09 WALL SHELVING

A. Plastic-Laminate Shelving: Plastic-laminate sheet, Type HGL or HGP, shop bonded with waterproof glue to both sides of 3/4-inch particleboard or medium-density fiberboard, plywood or engineered board. Sand surfaces to which plastic laminate is to be bonded. 1. Shelf Thickness: 3/4 inch unless otherwise indicated. 2. Edge Treatment: Finish both edges with rigid PVC extrusions, through color with satin

finish, 3 mm thick.

B. Adjustable Shelf Supports: Zinc-plated or Powder-coated steel standards and shelf brackets, complying with BHMA A156.9, Types B04102 and B04112, surface mounted.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify dimensions of cabinet locations in building prior to fabrication.

B. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, location of reinforcements, and other conditions affecting performance of Work. 1. Verify location and sizes of utility rough-in associated with work of this section.

2. Examine the job site and the specific areas where casework will be installed. Notify the Owner in writing of unsatisfactory conditions.


http://www.mockett.com/



A. Coordinate Work of this Section with related work of other Sections and by other Prime Contractors as necessary to obtain proper installation of all items.

B. Provide filler pieces as needed to close spaces between cabinets and walls, ceilings, and equipment. Fabricate from same material and with same finish as cabinets and install as an integral part of assembly.

C. Provide all necessary components, attachments, accessories and appurtenances for a complete, continuous and finished installation.

D. Provide such custom fabrications and assemblies, and provide custom field scribing, coping, jointing, fitting, or other field modification as specified in Division 06 “Architectural Woodwork,” as shown on Drawings, or as otherwise required for a complete, continuous and finished installation

3.03 CASEWORK INSTALLATION

A. Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with AWI Section 1700 for Premium Grade for Modular Cabinets.

B. Install plumb, level, and true; shim as required, using concealed shims. Where casework abuts other finished work, apply filler strips and scribe for accurate fit, with fasteners concealed where practical.

C. General: 1. Use factory trained Installer. Erect casework, rigid, plumb, level, in proper relation to

adjacent construction. Install scribes, fillers and trim as required. Cut out for all sink and electrical outlets as required.

2. Adjust moving parts so that they operate freely without binding.

3. Use fixture attachments in concealed locations for wall mounted components.

4. Use concealed joint fasteners to align and secure adjoining cabinet units.

5. Carefully scribe casework abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not use additional overlay trim for this purpose.

6. Countersink anchorage devices at exposed locations. Conceal with solid plugs to match surrounding finish, flush with surrounding surfaces.

D. Base Cabinets: Set cabinets straight, level, and plumb. Adjust subtops within 1/16 inch of a single plane. Fasten cabinets to partition framing, wood blocking, or reinforcements in partitions with fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c. Bolt adjacent cabinets together with joints flush, tight, and uniform. Align similar adjoining doors and drawers to a tolerance of 1/16 inch. 1. Where base cabinets are not installed adjacent to walls, fasten to floor or structural sub-base

platform at toe space with fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c. Secure sides of cabinets to floor or Sub Base, where they do not adjoin other cabinets, with not less than two fasteners.

2. Structural Sub-Base Platform: Secure to floor and to partition framing or blocking, using appropriate fasteners at spacing and locations in accordance with approved submittals.


E. Wall Cabinets: Hang cabinets straight, level, and plumb. Adjust fronts and bottoms within 1/16 inch of a single plane. Fasten to hanging strips, masonry, partition framing, blocking, or reinforcements in partitions. Align similar adjoining doors to a tolerance of 1/16 inch. 1. Fasten through back, near top and bottom, at ends, and not more than 16 inches o.c. with

No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for 1-inch penetration into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips, or No. 10 wafer-head sheet metal screws through metal backing or metal framing behind wall finish. Use toggle bolts and expansion anchors, as appropriate, at masonry or plaster on metal lath.

F. Install hardware uniformly and precisely. Set hinges snug and flat in mortises, unless otherwise indicated. Adjust and align hardware so moving parts operate freely and contact points meet accurately. Allow for final adjustment after installation.

G. Adjust casework and hardware so doors and drawers operate smoothly without warp or bind. Lubricate operating hardware as recommended by manufacturer.

3.04 INSTALLATION OF TOPS

A. Field Jointing: Where possible make in the same manner as shop jointing, using dowels, splines, adhesives, and fasteners recommended by manufacturer. Prepare edges to be joined in shop so Project-site processing of top and edge surfaces is not required. Locate field joints where shown on Shop Drawings. 1. Secure field joints in plastic-laminate countertops with concealed clamping devices located

within 6 inches of front and back edges and at intervals not exceeding 24 inches. Tighten according to manufacturer's written instructions to exert a constant, heavy-clamping pressure at joints.

B. Secure tops to cabinets with Z-type fasteners or equivalent, using two or more fasteners at each front, end, and back.

C. Abut top and edge surfaces in one true plane, with internal supports placed to prevent deflection.

D. Secure backsplashes and side splashes to tops with concealed metal brackets at 16 inches o.c. and walls with adhesive.

E. Seal junctures of top, splash, and walls with mildew-resistant silicone sealant or another permanently elastic sealing compound recommended by countertop material manufacturer.

3.05 INSTALLATION OF SHELVING

A. Securely fasten adjustable shelving supports to partition framing, wood blocking, or reinforcements in partitions.

B. Install shelf standards plumb and at heights to align shelf brackets for level shelves. Install shelving level and straight, closely fitted to other work where indicated.

3.06 INSTALLATION OF SERVICE FITTINGS

A. Comply with requirements in Divisions 20, 22, 26 and 27 Sections for installing service fittings, piping, electrical devices, and wiring.


3.07 ADJUSTING

A. Test installed work for rigidity and ability to support loads.

B. Adjust moving or operating parts to function smoothly and correctly.

C. Provide a one-time training session outlining casework features, adjustments and maintenance.

3.08 CLEANING AND PROTECTING

A. Repair or remove and replace defective work as directed on completion of installation.

B. Clean finished surfaces, touch up as required, and remove or refinish damaged or soiled areas to match original factory finish, as approved by Architect.

C. Clean plastic surfaces, repair minor damage as directed by plastic laminate manufacturer. Replace other damaged parts or components.

D. Instruct Owner's designated personnel in proper handling, assembly, adjusting, transporting, storage, and maintenance of units.

E. Protection: Provide 6-mil plastic or other suitable water-resistant covering over countertop surfaces. Tape to underside of countertop at a minimum of 48 inches o.c. Remove protection at Substantial Completion. 1. Observe procedures and precautions for protection of casework and countertops from

damage during construction, until acceptance of work by Owner.


LAWRENCE COUNTY METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY 13 1250 - 1

SECTION 13 1250 - METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Main Frame: Rigid Wide span as shown on Drawings.

B. Endwall: Manufacturer's standard, non-expandable.

C. Secondary Framing: Manufacturer's standard purlins and joists and exterior-framed (bypass) girts, unless shown otherwise.

D. Provide a complete, integrated MBS capable of withstanding imposed loads, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure or infiltration of water. Include primary and secondary framing, metal roof panels, metal wall panels, and accessories complying with requirements indicated. 1. Engineer according to procedures in MBMA's "Metal Building Systems Manual."

2. Design to critical effects of load factors and load combinations for live and dead loads, roof snow loads and wind loads, seismic and other loading as required by PA UCC (2009 IBC). Include additional collateral dynamic and dead loads other than the weight of metal building system for permanent items such as sprinklers, mechanical systems, electrical systems, gym equipment and ceilings.

3. Design to deflection limits as indicated, recommended by MBMA, and as required by PA UBC.

E. Thermal Movements: Allow for movements resulting from the 120 deg F change in ambient and 180 deg F change in surface temperatures, to prevent buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Allow for both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.

F. Thermal Performance: Comply with 2009 IECC Climate Zone 5.

G. Wind-Uplift Resistance: UL 580 for Class 90.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of metal building system component indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data

signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

2. Anchor-Bolt Plans: Submit anchor-bolt plans before foundation work begins. Include location, diameter, and projection of anchor bolts required to attach metal building to foundation. Indicate column reactions at each location.

3. Structural-Framing Drawings: Show complete fabrication of primary and secondary framing; include provisions for openings. Indicate welds and bolted connections, distinguishing between shop and field applications. Include transverse cross-sections.

METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS LAWRENCE COUNTY 13 1250 - 2 PUBLIC SAFETY FACILITY

4. Metal Roof and Wall Panel Layout Drawings: Show layouts of metal panels including methods of support. Include details of edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, trim, flashings, closures, and special details. Distinguish between factory- and field-assembled work; show locations of exposed fasteners.

5. Accessories: Include details of flashing and trim, gutters and downspouts, curbs and boots, other accessory items, at a scale of not less than 1-1/2 inches per 12 inches:

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of building component with factory-applied color finish.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on actual Samples of panel, trim and accessory items..

E. Letter of Design Certification: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Include the following: 1. Name and location of Project. 2. Order number. 3. Name of manufacturer. 4. Name of Contractor. 5. Building dimensions including width, length, height, and roof slope. 6. Indicate compliance with AISC standards for hot-rolled steel and AISI standards for cold-

rolled steel, including edition dates of each standard. 7. Governing building code and year of edition. 8. Design loads and load combinations. 9. Building-use category. 10. AISC Certification for Category MB: Include statement that metal building system and

components were designed and produced in an AISC-Certified Facility by an AISC-Certified Manufacturer.

F. Welding certificates.

G. Erector Certificate: Signed by manufacturer certifying that erector complies with requirements.

H. Manufacturer certificate.

I. Maintenance Data: For metal panel finishes to include in maintenance manuals.

J. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.

K. Surveys: Show final elevations and locations of major members. Have surveyor who performed surveys certify their accuracy.


A. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A PA professional engineer experienced in providing engineering services performed for installations of metal building systems similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.

B. Erector Qualifications: An experienced erector who has specialized in erecting and installing work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and who is acceptable to manufacturer.


C. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer and member of MBMA. 1. AISC Certification for Category MB: An AISC-Certified Manufacturer that designs and

produces metal building systems and components in an AISC-Certified Facility. 2. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings and comprehensive engineering

analysis by a qualified professional engineer.

D. Surveyor Qualifications: A PA land surveyor experienced in providing surveying services of the kind indicated.

E. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM E 329 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.

F. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel," and AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."

G. Structural Steel: Comply with AISC's "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings--Allowable Stress Design, Plastic Design," or AISC's "Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Structural Steel Buildings," for design requirements and allowable stresses.

H. Cold-Formed Steel: Comply with AISI's "Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members," or AISI's "Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Steel Structural Members," for design requirements and allowable stresses.

I. Pre-Erection Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Inspect and discuss condition of foundations and other preparatory work performed by all

trades. 2. Review structural load limitations. 3. Review required testing, inspecting, and certifying procedures.

J. Preinstallation Roof and Wall Assembly Conference: 1. Examine purlin and girt support conditions for compliance with requirements, including

flatness and attachment to structural members. 2. Review structural limitations of purlins, girts, columns and rafters during and after panel

installation. 3. Review flashings, special details, roof drainage, penetrations, and condition of other

construction that will affect metal panels. 4. Review temporary protection requirements for metal panel assembly during and after

installation. 5. Review roof and wall observation and repair procedures after metal panel installation.

1.04 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete foundations and casting of anchor-bolt inserts into foundation walls and footings.

B. Coordinate metal panel assemblies with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, and construction of supports and other adjoining work.

C. Coordinate mounting of miscellaneous elements to building frame and include these weights in the design calculations including but not limited to, HVAC equipment, lighting fixtures, plumbing systems, , motors, etc.


1.05 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty on Metal Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace metal panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. 1. Fluoropolymer Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:


2. Finish Warranty Period: a. Fluoropolymer Finish: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Weathertightness Warranty for Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace standing-seam, metal roof panel assemblies that fail to remain weathertight, including leaks, within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS 1. Basis-for-Design Manufacturer: Nucor Building Systems.

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by named Basis-for-Design manufacturer, or one of the following: 1. American Buildings Company. 2. A&S Building Systems, a subsidiary of NCI Building Systems, LP. 3. American Steel Building Company, Inc.; Division of NCI Building Systems, LLP. 4. Butler Building Systems, Inc. 5. Ceco Building Systems; Division of Robertson-Ceco Corporation. 6. Star Building Systems; Division of Robertson-Ceco Corporation. 7. Steelox Systems Inc. 8. VP Buildings, Inc.; a United Dominion Company. 9. Other manufacturer as approved per substitution requirements.

2.02 STRUCTURAL-FRAMING MATERIALS

A. W-Shapes: ASTM A 992; ASTM A 572, Grade 50 or 55; or ASTM A 529, Grade 50 or 55.

B. Channels, Angles, M-Shapes, and S-Shapes: ASTM A 36; ASTM A 572, Grade 50 or 55; or ASTM A 529, Grade 50 or 55.

C. Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36; ASTM A 572, Grade 50 or 55; or ASTM A 529, Grade 50 or 55.

D. Structural-Steel Sheet: Hot-rolled, ASTM A 1011, Structural Steel (SS), Grades 30 through 55, or High-Strength Low Alloy Steel (HSLAS), Grades 45 through 70; or cold-rolled, ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Structural Steel (SS), Grades 25 through 80, or High-Strength Low Alloy Steel (HSLAS), Grades 45 through 70.


E. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, Structural Steel (SS), Grades 33 through 80 or High-Strength Low Alloy Steel (HSLAS), Grades 50 through 80; with G60 coating designation; mill phosphatized.

F. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet Prepainted with Coil Coating: Steel sheet metallic coated by the hot-dip process and prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755. 1. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 50

or 80; with Class AZ50 coating.

G. Non-High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 307, Grade A, carbon-steel, hex-head bolts; ASTM A 563 carbon-steel hex nuts; and ASTM F 844 plain (flat) steel washers. 1. Finish: Plain or Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153 , Class C.

H. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563 heavy hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 hardened carbon-steel washers. 1. Finish: Plain or Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153, Class C.

I. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 490, Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts or tension-control, bolt-nut-washer assemblies with splined ends; ASTM A 563 heavy hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 hardened carbon-steel washers, plain.

J. Anchor Rod Assemblies: Manufacturer’s standard.

K. Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, Type I, red oxide.

2.03 MATERIALS FOR FIELD-ASSEMBLED METAL PANELS

A. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet Prepainted with Coil Coating: Steel sheet metallic coated by the hot-dip process and prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755. 1. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 50 or

80; with Class AZ50 coating designation. 2. Surface: Smooth, flat finish. 3. High-Performance Organic Finish (2-Coat Fluoropolymer): AA-C12C40R1x (Chemical

Finish: cleaned with inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: conversion coating; Organic Coating: manufacturer's standard 2-coat, thermocured system consisting of specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight). Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. a. Concealed Finish: manufacturer's standard white or light-colored backer finish,

consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a total minimum dry film thickness of 0.5 mil.

2.04 THERMAL INSULATION FOR FIELD-ASSEMBLED METAL PANELS

A. Metal Building Insulation: ASTM C 991, Type II, glass-fiber-blanket insulation; 0.5-lb/cu. ft. density; continuous, vapor-tight edge tabs; and with a flame-spread index of 25 or less.

B. Vapor-Retarder Facing: ASTM C 1136, with permeance not greater than 0.02 perm when tested according to ASTM E 96, Desiccant Method.

1. Composition: Metallized-polypropylene film facing.


C. Retainer Strips: 0.019-inch- thick, formed, galvanized steel or PVC retainer clips colored to match insulation facing.

D. Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder.


A. Fasteners: Self-tapping screws, bolts, nuts, self-locking rivets and bolts, end-welded studs, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. Provide fasteners with heads matching color of materials being fastened by means of plastic caps or factory-applied coating. 1. Fasteners for Metal Panels: Self-drilling Type 410 stainless-steel or self-tapping Type 304

stainless-steel or zinc-alloy-steel hex washer head, with EPDM or PVC washer under heads of fasteners bearing on weather side of metal panels.

B. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.

C. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive, nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time.

D. Metal Panel Sealants: 1. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound

sealant tape with release-paper backing. 2. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920; one-part elastomeric polyurethane, polysulfide, or silicone-

rubber sealant.


A. Tolerances: Comply with MBMA's "Metal Building Systems Manual": Chapter IV, Section 9, "Fabrication and Erection Tolerances."

B. Metal Panels: Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full length of metal panel.

2.07 STRUCTURAL FRAMING

A. Primary Framing: Shop fabricate with baseplates, bearing plates, stiffeners, and other items required for erection welded into place. Cut, form, punch, drill, and weld framing for bolted field assembly. 1. Make shop connections by welding or by using high-strength bolts. 2. Join flanges to webs of built-up members by a continuous submerged arc-welding process. 3. Brace compression flange of primary framing with steel angles or cold-formed structural

tubing between frame web and purlin or girt web, so flange compressive strength is within allowable limits for any combination of loadings.

4. Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces for shop priming according to SSPC-SP 2. Shop prime primary structural members with specified primer after fabrication.


B. Secondary Framing: Shop fabricate by roll-forming or brake-forming, with plates and stiffeners, required for erection welded into place. Cut, form, punch, drill, and weld secondary framing for bolted field connections to primary framing. 1. Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated surfaces for shop priming according to SSPC-SP 2. Shop

prime uncoated secondary structural members with specified primer after fabrication.

C. Rigid Clear-Span Frames: I-shaped frame sections fabricated from shop-welded, built-up steel plates or structural-steel shapes. Interior columns are not permitted.

D. Purlins: C- or Z-shaped sections; fabricated from minimum 0.0598-inch- thick steel sheet, built-up steel plates, or structural-steel shapes; minimum 2-1/2-inch- wide flanges.

E. Girts: C- or Z-shaped sections; fabricated from minimum 0.0598-inch- thick steel sheet, built-up steel plates, or structural-steel shapes. Form ends of Z-sections with stiffening lips angled 40 to 50 degrees to flange and with minimum 2-1/2-inch- wide flanges.

F. Eave Struts: Unequal-flange, C-shaped sections; fabricated from 0.0598-inch- thick steel sheet, built-up steel plates, or structural-steel shapes; to provide adequate backup for metal panels.

G. Flange Bracing: Minimum 2-by-2-by-1/8-inch structural-steel angles or 1-inch diameter, cold-formed structural tubing to stiffen primary frame flanges.

H. Sag Bracing: Minimum 1-by-1-by-1/8-inch structural-steel angles.

I. Base or Sill Angles: Minimum 3-by-2-by-0.0598-inch zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet.

J. Purlin and Girt Clips: Minimum 0.0598-inch- thick, steel sheet. Provide galvanized clips where clips are connected to galvanized framing members.

K. Framing for Openings: Channel shapes; fabricated from minimum 0.0598-inch- thick, cold-formed, structural-steel sheet or structural-steel shapes. Frame head and jamb of door openings, and head, jamb, and sill of other openings.

L. Miscellaneous Structural Members: Manufacturer's standard sections fabricated from cold-formed, structural-steel sheet; built-up steel plates; or zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet; designed to withstand required loads.

M. Provide adjustable wind bracing as shown: 1. Rods: ASTM A 36; ASTM A 572, Grade 50; or ASTM A 529, Grade 50; minimum 1/2-

inch- diameter steel; threaded full length or threaded a minimum of 6 inches at each end. 2. Cable: ASTM A 475, 1/4-inch- diameter, extra-high-strength grade, Class B zinc-coated, 7-

strand steel; with threaded end anchors. 3. Angles: Fabricated from structural-steel shapes to match primary framing, of size required

to withstand design loads. 4. Rigid Portal Frames: Fabricate from shop-welded, built-up steel plates or structural-steel

shapes to match primary framing; of size required to withstand design loads. 5. Bracing: Provide wind bracing using any method specified above, at manufacturer's option,

coordinated with requirements of project, and with approval of Architect.

N. Bolts: Provide plain finish bolts for structural-framing components that are primed or finish painted. Provide hot-dipped galvanized bolts for structural-framing components that are galvanized.


O. Factory-Primed Finish: Apply manufacturer’s standard primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating.

2.08 METAL ROOF PANELS

A. Vertical Rib, 24 ga. Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels: Formed with vertical ribs at panel edges stiffening ribs; designed for sequential installation by mechanically attaching panels to supports using concealed clips located under one side of panels and engaging opposite edge of adjacent panels. 1. Basis of Design: Vertical Rib Standing Seam VR16 II by Nucor Building Systems 2. R-19 typical at Roofs 3. Exterior Finish: 2-Coat Fluoropolymer 4. 24-gauge galvanized steel, G90 coating, ASTM A 653, G90. 5. Paint with exterior colors of manufacturer’s standard PVDF finish system, full-strength, 70

percent “Kynar 500” or “Hylar 5000” fluoropolymer (PVDF) coating. 6. PVDF Coating Warranty: Metal building system manufacturer shall warrant coating for 25

years for the following. a. Not to peel, crack, or chip. b. Chalking: Not to exceed ASTM D 4214, #8 rating. c. Fading: Not more than 5 color-difference units, ASTM D 2244.

7. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range. 8. Clips: Manufacturer's standard, floating type to accommodate thermal movement; fabricated

from aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel zinc-coated or stainless-steel sheet. All panel to structural member connections, except at eave, shall be made with clips with movable stainless steel tabs that are seamed into the standing seam side lap.

B. Ridge Assembly: 1. Design ridge assembly to allow roof panels to move lengthwise with expansion and

contraction as roof panel temperature changes. 2. Factory punch parts for correct field assembly. 3. Install panel closures and interior reinforcing straps to seal panel ends at ridge. 4. Do not expose attachment fasteners on weather side. 5. Use lock seam plug to seal lock seam portion of panel. 6. High-Tensile Steel Ridge Cover: Span from panel closure to panel closure and flex as roof

system expands and contracts.

C. Provision for Expansion and Contraction: Clips with movable tab. 1. Maximum Force of 8 Pounds: Required to initiate tab movement. 2. Each Clip: Accommodates a minimum of 1.25-inch movement in either direction.

D. Energy Conservation: 1. Insulate purlins to eliminate "thermal short circuits" between purlins and roof panels with

manufacturer’s standard thermal blocks. 2. Minimize heat loss (thermal short circuit) caused by compression of blanket insulation

between structural members and roof panels by use of thermal block at each purlin location.

E. Accessories: 1. Accessories (i.e., ventilators, skylights, gutters, fascia): Standard with metal building system

manufacturer, unless otherwise noted and furnished as specified. 2. Exterior Metal Coating on Gutters, Downspouts, Gable Trim, and Eave Trim:, full-strength,

70 percent “Kynar 500” or “Hylar 5000” fluoropolymer (PVDF) coating.


3. Location of Standard Accessories: Indicated on erection drawings furnished by metal building system manufacturer.

4. Material used in flashing and transition parts and furnished as standard by metal building system manufacturer may or may not match roof panel material. a. Parts: Compatible and not cause corrosive condition. b. Copper and Lead Materials: Do not use with Galvalume panels.

2.09 FIELD-ASSEMBLED METAL WALL PANELS

A. Material: Aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet, 0.0209 inch thick; ASTM A 792.

B. Basis of Design: “Classic Wall” Panel CW6 by Nucor Building Systems.

C. 26 gague. 36” coverage.

D. R-13 typical at walls.

E. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range.

F. Fasteners: 1. Wall Panel-to-Structural Connections: Torx-head “ScruboltTM” or Torx-head self-drilling

screws. 2. Wall Panel-to-Panel Connections: Torx-head self-drilling screws. 3. Fastener Locations: Indicated on erection drawings furnished by metal building system

manufacturer. 4. Exposed Fasteners: Factory painted to match wall color.

G. Accessories: 1. Accessories (i.e., doors, windows, louvers): Standard with metal building system

manufacturer, unless otherwise noted and furnished as specified. 2. Location of Standard Accessories: Indicated on erection drawings furnished by metal

building system manufacturer.

H. Thermal Performance 1. Thermal performance of wall assembly shall comply with the 2009 IECC. 2. The metal building manufacturer shall certify compliance with 2009 IECC and Climate zone

5

2.10 INTERIOR LINER PANELS

A. Material: Aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet, 0.0209 inch thick; ASTM A 792.

B. Basis of Design: Nucor Liner Panel by Nucor Building Systems.

C. 28 gague. 36” coverage.

D. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range.


2.11 ACCESSORIES

A. Provide accessories as standard with metal building system manufacturer and as specified. Fabricate and finish accessories at the factory to greatest extent possible, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements. 1. Closures: Provide closures at eaves and ridges, fabricated of same material as metal roof

panels. 2. Clips: Manufacturer's standard, designed to withstand negative-load requirements. 3. Cleats: Manufacturer's standard, mechanically seamed cleats. 4. Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricated from material

recommended by manufacturer. 5. Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin-foam or

closed-cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch- thick, flexible closure strips; cut or premolded to match metal roof panel profile. Provide closure strips where indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction.

B. Flashing and Trim: Formed from minimum 0.0159-inch- thick, metallic-coated steel sheet or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet prepainted with coil coating; finished to match adjacent metal panels. 1. Opening Trim: Minimum 0.0269-inch- thick, metallic-coated steel sheet or aluminum-zinc

alloy-coated steel sheet prepainted with coil coating. Trim head and jamb of door openings, and head, jamb, and sill of other openings.

C. Gutters: Formed from minimum 0.0159-inch- thick, metallic-coated steel sheet or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet prepainted with coil coating; finished to match roof fascia and rake trim. Match profile of gable trim, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes, and other special pieces as required. Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- long sections, sized according to SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." 1. Gutter Supports: Fabricated from same material and finish as gutters; spaced 36 inches o.c.

D. Downspouts: Formed from 0.0159-inch- thick, zinc-coated (G90 galvanized) steel sheet or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet prepainted with coil coating; finished to match metal wall panels. Fabricate in minimum 10-foot- long sections, complete with formed elbows and offsets. 1. Mounting Straps: Fabricated from same material and finish as gutters; spaced 10 feet o.c.

E. Pipe Flashing: Premolded, EPDM pipe collar with flexible aluminum ring bonded to base.

2.12 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform the following tests and inspections and to submit reports.

B. Special Inspector: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform the required tests and inspections and to submit reports. Special Inspector will verify that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures and will review the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work. 1. Special inspections will not be required if fabrication is performed by a manufacturer

registered and approved by authorities having jurisdiction to perform such Work without special inspection.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 ERECTION

A. Before erection proceeds, survey elevations and locations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments to receive structural framing, with Erector present, for compliance with requirements and metal building system manufacturer's tolerances.

B. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural framing secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural framing, connections, and bracing are in place, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Erect metal building system according to manufacturer's written erection instructions and erection drawings.

D. Do not field cut, drill, or alter structural members without written approval from metal building system manufacturer's professional engineer.

E. Set structural framing accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC specifications referenced in this Section. Maintain structural stability of frame during erection.

F. Base and Bearing Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom surface of plates. 1. Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required. 2. Tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not

remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of plate before packing with grout.

3. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts.

G. Align and adjust structural framing before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent contact with framing. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment. Level and plumb individual members of structure.

H. Primary Framing and End Walls: Erect framing true to line, level, plumb, rigid, and secure. Level baseplates to a true even plane with full bearing to supporting structures, set with double-nutted anchor bolts. Use grout to obtain uniform bearing and to maintain a level base-line elevation. Moist cure grout for not less than seven days after placement. 1. Make field connections using high-strength bolts installed according to RCSC's

"Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and snug-tightened or pretensioned joints.

I. Secondary Framing: Erect framing true to line, level, plumb, rigid, and secure. Fasten secondary framing to primary framing using clips with field connections using non-high-strength bolts. 1. Provide rake or gable purlins with tight-fitting closure channels and fasciae. 2. Locate and space wall girts to suit openings such as doors and windows. 3. Provide supplemental framing at entire perimeter of openings, including doors, windows,

louvers, ventilators, and other penetrations of roof and walls.


J. Bracing: Install bracing in roof and sidewalls where indicated on erection drawings.

K. Framing for Openings: Provide shapes of proper design and size to reinforce openings and to carry loads and vibrations imposed, including equipment furnished under mechanical and electrical work. Securely attach to structural framing.

L. Erection Tolerances: Maintain erection tolerances of structural framing within AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."

M. Coordinate mounting of miscellaneous elements to building frame and include these weights in the design calculations including but not limited to, HVAC equipment, lighting fixtures, plumbing systems, etc.

3.02 METAL PANEL INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Anchor metal panels and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. 1. Field cut metal panels as required for doors, windows, and other openings. Cut openings as

small as possible, neatly to size required, and without damage to adjacent metal panel finishes. Field cutting of metal panels by torch is not permitted unless approved in writing by manufacturer.

2. Install metal panels perpendicular to structural supports, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Flash and seal metal panels with weather closures at perimeter of openings and similar

elements. Fasten with self-tapping screws. 4. Locate metal panel splices over, but not attached to, structural supports with end laps in

alignment. Stagger panel splices and end laps to avoid a four-panel lap splice condition. 5. Lap metal flashing over metal panels to allow moisture to run over and off the material.

B. Lap-Seam Metal Panels: Install screw fasteners with power tools having controlled torque adjusted to compress neoprene washer tightly without damage to washer, screw threads, or metal panels. Install screws in predrilled holes. Arrange and nest side-lap joints so prevailing winds blow over, not into, lapped joints. Lap ribbed or fluted sheets one full rib corrugation.

C. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating, by applying rubberized-asphalt underlayment to each contact surface, or by other permanent separation as recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer.

D. Joint Sealers: Install gaskets, joint fillers, and sealants where indicated and where required for weatherproof performance of metal panel assemblies. Provide types of gaskets, fillers, and sealants indicated or, if not indicated, types recommended by metal panel manufacturer.

3.03 METAL ROOF PANEL INSTALLATION

A. General: Provide metal roof panels of full length from eave to ridge, unless otherwise indicated or restricted by shipping limitations. Install ridge caps as metal roof panel work proceeds.

B. Field-Assembled, Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels: Fasten metal roof panels to supports with concealed clips at each standing-seam joint at location, spacing, and with fasteners recommended by manufacturer.


1. Install clips to supports with self-tapping fasteners. 2. Snap Joint: Nest standing seams and fasten together by interlocking and completely

engaging factory-applied sealant. 3. Seamed Joint: Crimp standing seams with manufacturer-approved motorized seamer tool so

clip, metal roof panel, and factory-applied sealant are completely engaged. 4. Rigidly fasten eave end of metal roof panels and allow ridge end free movement due to

thermal expansion and contraction. Predrill panels for fasteners. 5. Provide metal closures at peaks rake edges rake walls and each side of ridge caps.

C. Field-Assembled, Lap-Seam Metal Roof Panels: Fasten metal roof panels to supports with exposed fasteners at each lapped joint at location and spacing recommended by manufacturer. 1. Provide sealant tape at lapped joints of metal roof panels and between panels and protruding

equipment, vents, and accessories. 2. Apply a continuous ribbon of sealant tape to weather-side surface of fastenings on end laps

and on side laps of nesting-type metal panels; on side laps of ribbed or fluted metal panels; and elsewhere as needed to make metal panels weatherproof to driving rains.

3. At metal panel splices, nest panels with minimum 6-inch end lap, sealed with butyl-rubber sealant and fastened together by interlocking clamping plates.

D. Metal Fascia Panels: Align bottom of metal panels and fasten with blind rivets, bolts, or self-tapping screws. Flash and seal metal panels with weather closures where fasciae meet soffits, along lower panel edges, and at perimeter of all openings.

3.04 METAL WALL PANEL INSTALLATION

A. General: Install metal wall panels in orientation, sizes, and locations indicated on Drawings. Install panels perpendicular to girts, extending full height of building, unless otherwise indicated. Anchor metal wall panels and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. 1. When two rows of metal panels are required, lap panels 4 inches minimum. 2. When building height requires two rows of metal panels at gable ends, align lap of gable

panels over metal wall panels at eave height. 3. Rigidly fasten base end of metal wall panels and allow eave end free movement due to

thermal expansion and contraction. Predrill panels. 4. Flash and seal metal wall panels with weather closures at eaves, rakes, and at perimeter of all

openings. Fasten with self-tapping screws. 5. Install screw fasteners in predrilled holes. 6. Apply elastomeric sealant continuously between metal base channel (sill angle) and

concrete, and elsewhere as indicated, or if not indicated, as necessary for waterproofing. 7. Align bottom of metal wall panels and fasten with blind rivets, bolts, or self-tapping screws. 8. Provide weatherproof escutcheons for pipe and conduit penetrating exterior walls.

B. Field-Assembled, Metal Wall Panels: Install metal wall panels on exterior side of girts. Attach metal wall panels to supports with fasteners as recommended by manufacturer.

3.05 THERMAL INSULATION INSTALLATION FOR FIELD-ASSEMBLED METAL PANELS

A. General: Install insulation concurrently with metal wall panel installation, in thickness indicated to cover entire wall, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Set vapor-retarder-faced units with vapor retarder to warm side of construction, unless otherwise indicated. Do not obstruct ventilation spaces, except for firestopping.


2. Tape joints and ruptures in vapor retarder, and seal each continuous area of insulation to surrounding construction to ensure airtight installation.

3. Install factory-laminated, vapor-retarder-faced blankets straight and true in one-piece lengths with both sets of facing tabs sealed to provide a complete vapor retarder.

B. Blanket Roof Insulation: Comply with the following installation method: 1. Over-Purlin-with-Spacer-Block Installation: Extend insulation and vapor retarder over and

perpendicular to top flange of secondary framing members. Install layer of filler insulation over first layer to fill space formed by metal roof panel standoffs. Hold in place by panels fastened to standoffs.

2. Retainer Strips: Install retainer strips at each longitudinal insulation joint, straight and taut, nesting with secondary framing to hold insulation in place.

C. Blanket Wall Insulation: Extend insulation and vapor retarder over and perpendicular to top flange of secondary framing members. Hold in place by metal wall panels fastened to secondary framing.

1. Retainer Strips: Install retainer strips at each longitudinal insulation joint, straight and taut, nesting with secondary framing to hold insulation in place.


A. General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting, and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components. 1. Install components required for a complete metal roof panel assembly including trim,


2. Install components for a complete metal wall panel assembly including trim, copings, corners, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items.

B. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant. 1. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space

movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or intersection.

C. Gutters: Join sections with riveted and soldered or lapped and sealed joints. Attach gutters to eave with gutter hangers spaced not more than 4 feet o.c. using manufacturer's standard fasteners. Provide end closures and seal watertight with sealant. Provide for thermal expansion.

D. Downspouts: Join sections with 1-1/2-inch telescoping joints. Provide fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely 1 inch away from walls; locate fasteners at top and bottom and at approximately 60 inches o.c. in between. 1. Tie downspouts to underground drainage system indicated.

E. Roof Curbs: Install curbs at locations indicated on Drawings. Install flashing around bases where they meet metal roof panels.

F. Pipe Flashing: Form flashing around pipe penetration and metal roof panels. Fasten and seal to panel as recommended by manufacturer.



A. Special Inspector: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform required tests and inspections and to submit reports. 1. High-Strength, Field-Bolted Connections: Connections shall be tested and inspected during

installation according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."

2. Welded Connections: In addition to visual inspection, field-welded connections shall be tested and inspected according to AWS D1.1.


A. Repair damaged galvanized coatings on galvanized items with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during construction period.

C. Touchup Painting: After erection, promptly clean, prepare, and prime or reprime field connections, rust spots, and abraded surfaces of prime-painted structural framing, bearing plates, and accessories. 1. Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning," or SSPC-SP 3, "Power

Tool Cleaning." 2. Apply a compatible primer of same type as shop primer used on adjacent surfaces.

END OF SECTION 13125